Heinen & Hopman AC - MV - C& F Part 1 - 2 Instruction Manual

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Produktieweg 12 -
3751 LN Bunschoten
P.O. Box 9 -
3750 GA Bunschoten
The Netherlands
Phone +31 (0)33 299 25 00

Fax +31 (0)33 299 25 99
www.heinenhopman.com
Client: Damen Shipyards info@heinenhopman.com
PO box 1
4200 AA Gorinchem
Project: YN552016/17 PSV4500
Installations: AC/MV/C&F
Heinen & Hopman ref.: 120.10.045-046zg
Revision Name Date Checked Date

rev.D L. Terluin 10-05-2010
rev.C L. Terluin 16-09-2010
rev.B L. Terluin 22-07-2010
rev.A L. Terluin 24-06-2010 Bank Rabo Spaken-
rev.- P. Bos 02-02-2010 burg
IBAN no. NL84 RABO
0311.4.039.48
SWIFT code RABONL2U
Postbank no.12.95.948
V.A.T. no. NL 0036 68 480
B01
C.o.C. no. 310 20 981
Gooi & Eemland
All our quotations, all or-

ders placed with us and all
contracts concluded with
us are subject to the
METAALUNIECONDITIONS,
filed with the registrar of
the District Court of Rotter-
E-07-01
dam, as stipulated in the

Page 1 of 44 latest text lodged with the
said court.
The conditions of delivery
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Our reference 120.10.045-046zg ts rev.D
Your reference YN552016/17
CONTENT:
010 - AIRCONDITIONING ...............................................................3
020 - COOLEQUIPMENT ................................................................9
030 - MECHANICAL VENTILATION.............................................11
050 - VENTILATION OPENINGS ..................................................36
070 - COOL & FREEZE.................................................................37
071 - FREEZER AND COLD STORES. ........................................39
160 - EP NOTATION REQUIRED EQUIPMENT. ..........................40
DESIGN CONDITIONS..................................................................42
EXCLUSIONS................................................................................44
E-07-01
Page 2 of 44
010 - Airconditioning
System AC-1 serving accommodation area’s.
010-1 1 Airhandlingunit, consisting of a filtersection, coolingsection with watereliminator and drip-

tray, and a fansection with v-belt driven fan, built on a frame.
• Make SALOR
• Aircapacity 9.500 m3/h
• External static pressure 1200 Pa
• Coolingcapacity 123,5 KW
• Motor 7,5 KW
• Motorprotection IP55/ISO F
• Voltage 3x440V-60Hz
• Refrigerant R-407C DX T0 mean = 5,0 0C
Switchboard and cabling delivery yard.

The v-belt driven fan is placed on anti-vibration dampers (inside the airhandling unit)
Do not forget to connect the drainpipes of the airhandlingunit! Drainpiping is delivery yard.
010-2 8 Cabinunits consisting of a galvanised steel pressure-box, which is placed above the ceiling
and a steel diffuser with control-knob which, is placed below the ceiling. In order to bal-
ance the ductsystem properly the cabinunits can be adjusted to the required aircapacity.
The cabinunits are internally lined with soundabsorbing insulation.
Turning the control-knob in order to supply more or less conditioned air to the room con-
trols the roomtemperature.
• Make SALOR
• Type HCM 250 (single duct)
• Nominal aircapacity 250 m3/h
• Standard colour RAL 9010 (other colours are
optional)
010-3 23 Cabinunits consisting of a galvanised steel pressure-box, which is placed above the ceiling
• Make SALOR
optional)
010-4 ±1 Cabinunits consisting of a galvanised steel pressure-box, which is placed above the ceiling
• Make SALOR
optional)
010-5 ±250 Meter pre-insulated galvanised spiro-duct. The ducts consist of a galvanised inner- and
E-07-01
Page 3 of 44
outertube with thermal insulation in-between. The ductsystem includes all elbows, bran-
ches, nipples, hangers, mounting materials etc. necessary for a good working installation.
Specified the maintypes with their corresponding diameters:
• PR-10 innertube 100 mm, outertube 132 mm

010-6 2 Firedamper with automatic as well as manual operation. The firedamper is executed with
a fusible link, which melts when a certain temperature is reached. When required it is
possible to operate the firedamper from both sides of the bulkhead/deck by installing a
release-cable. Firedampers must be easy accessible to check their position and for servic-
ing.
• Make SALOR
• Material shoppainted steel
o
• Shut-down temperature 72 C
The firedampers can be welded directly into steel decks and bulkheads. For rectangular
firedampers who have flanges it is also possible to bolt them on. The round firedampers
have standard sizes related to spiropipe diameters, the rectangular firedampers are non
stock items.
If the firedamper is installed in a deck or bulkhead with fire-insulation, the firedamper
must also be insulated over its full length with the same insulation.
010-7 14 Smokedamper with manual operation. Smokedampers must be easy accessible to check
their position and for servicing.
• Make SALOR
• Material Galvanised steel
The smokedampers are mounted directly into the spiral wound ducting and are usually in-
stalled in the fanroom.
010-8 ±10 m2 Rectangular un-insulated galvanised steel fresh-airduct. The ductsystem includes all
necessary mounting materials needed for a good working system.
Including volume controldamper.
010-9 ±30 m2 Rectangular pre-insulated galvanised steel recirculation-airduct. The ducts are inter-
nally lined with insulation having thermal and acoustic qualities. The ductsystem includes
all necessary mounting materials needed for a good working system.
Including volume controldampers.
010-10 3 Recirculationgrid to be mounted in the accommodation’s wall and/or ceiling.

010-11
010-12 • Make SALOR
• Type ARR-13
• Dimensions 600x600 mm
010-13 ±10 m2 Rectangular un-insulated galvanised steel overpressure-airduct. The ductsystem in-
cludes all necessary mounting materials needed for a good working system.
010-14 3 Overpressuregrid to be mounted in the accommodation’s wall and/or ceiling.

010-15
• Make SALOR
• Type ARR-13
• Dimensions 2 pcs. 200x200 mm
• Dimensions 1 pcs. 150x150 mm
E-07-01
Page 4 of 44
System AC-2.1 serving Engine Control Room SB.
010-16 2 Split-up marine airconditioning-unit consisting of a compressor, fresh watercooled con-

densor, evaporator, filter and speed-controlled fan.
Each unit specified as follows:
• Make ANA/Salor
• Type KW20
• Nominal aircapacity 3.600 m3/h
• Nominal cooling capacity 20 kW
• Power consumption cooling 9,2 kW
• Condenser water 4,31 m3/h
o
• Condenser watertemperature 38 C in
• Refrigerant R407c
• Nett weight 475 kg
• Dimensions AHU 1750x1000x750 mm (hxwxd)
Units to be combined into one unit. One unit acting as stand-by.
010-17 ±15 Meter interconnection refrigerantpiping including the necessary clamps, fittings etc. The
suction line will be insulated with Armaflex or equal vapourproof insulation. The men-
tioned length is the distance between compressor-unit and evaporator.
010-18 ±10 m2 Rectangular pre-insulated galvanised steel supply-airduct. The ducts are internally li-
ned with insulation having thermal and acoustic qualities. The ductsystem includes all ne-
cessary mounting materials needed for a good working system.
010-19 1 Airsupply grid mounted into the duct.
• Make SALOR
• Type ADT-L
E-07-01
Page 5 of 44
System AC-2.2 serving Engine Control Room PS.
010-20 2 Split-up marine airconditioning-unit consisting of a compressor, fresh watercooled con-

densor, evaporator, filter and speed-controlled fan.
Each unit specified as follows:
• Make ANA/Salor
• Type KW20
• Nominal aircapacity 3.600 m3/h
• Nominal cooling capacity 20 kW
• Power consumption cooling 9,2 kW
• Condenser water 4,31 m3/h
o
• Condenser watertemperature 38 C in
• Refrigerant R407c
• Nett weight 475 kg
• Dimensions AHU 1750x1000x750 mm (hxwxd)
Units to be combined into one unit. One unit acting as stand-by.
010-22 ±10 m2 Rectangular pre-insulated galvanised steel supply-airduct. The ducts are internally li-
ned with insulation having thermal and acoustic qualities. The ductsystem includes all ne-
cessary mounting materials needed for a good working system.
010-23 1 Airsupply grid mounted into the duct.
• Make SALOR
• Type ADT-L
E-07-01
Page 6 of 44
System AC-3 serving Wheelhouse.

(to be placed in technical space below wheelhouse)
010-24 1 Airhandlingunit, consisting of a filtersection, coolingsection (double inter-weaven circuit)

with watereliminator and driptray, and a fansection with v-belt driven fan, built on a fra-
me.
• Make SALOR
• External static pressure 1200 Pa
• Coolingcapacity 63 KW
• Motor 5,5 KW
• Motorprotection IP55/ISO F
• Refrigerant R-407C DX T0 mean = 5,0 0C
Switchboard and cabling delivery yard.

The v-belt driven fan is placed on anti-vibration dampers (inside the airhandling unit)
Do not forget to connect the drainpipes of the airhandlingunit! Drainpiping is delivery yard.
010-25 ±32 Adjustable airsupply louvre. Depending on the position the airsupply pattern is a diffuse
airstream or the pattern is a jet airstream.
Adjusting the louvre in order to supply more or less conditioned air to the room controls
the roomtemperature.
• Make SALOR
• Type D
The louvres are placed in the wheelhouse.
010-26 ±8 Cabinunits consisting of a galvanised steel pressure-box, which is placed above the ceiling
• Make SALOR
optional)
010-27 ±100 Meter pre-insulated galvanised spiro-duct. The ducts consist of a galvanised inner- and
outertube with thermal insulation in-between. The ductsystem includes all elbows, bran-
ches, nipples, hangers, mounting materials etc. necessary for a good working installation.

010-28 1 Filterbox including dust filter. To avoid dust coming into technical space.
• Dimensions 300x200 mm (WxH)

E-07-01
Page 7 of 44
010-29 1 Volume control damper to adjust the amount of fresh-air of AC-3
• Type KRV-100
010-30 ±4 Recirculationgrid to be mounted in the accommodation’s wall and/or ceiling.
• Make SALOR
• Type ARR-13
E-07-01
Page 8 of 44
020 - Coolequipment
020-1 2 Condensing unit (serving AC-1) mainly consisting of a semi-hermetic type compressor
and a water-cooled condenser built on a common frame. The unit will be placed in the
HVAC-room.
Each unit is capable of 100% of the total required capacity, thus one unit acting as stand-
by, each unit specified as follows:
• Compressor-make Bitzer or equal

• Type 6G-40.2Y-40P semi-hermetic
• Coolingcapacity 142 kW
• Capacity control 100-66-33 %
• Powerconsumption ± 45 kW
• Max. input power 62.5 kW
• Refrigerant R-407c
o
• Evaporationtemperature ±5 Cmean
o
• Condensingtemperature ±47 Cmean
• Starting method Parts Winding
• Coolingmedium Intercool fresh water
o
• Watertemperature in 38 C
• Waterconsumption ± 35 m3/h
• Pressuredrop ± 10 kPa
The condensing unit is further equipped and/or delivered complete with the following ma-
terials:
1. Necessary refrigerant piping on the unit.

2. Necessary insulation on the unit, Armaflex or equal.
3. Filterdryer (if possible with exchangeable core)
4. Necessary pressure-gauges for high-, low-, and oilpressure.
5. Necessary safety/control cut-outs for high-,low-, and oilpressure.
6. Liquid separator.
7. Vibrationdampers in piping and under compressor.
8. First filling with refrigerant and oil.
9. Necessary service valves.
10.Safety reliefvalve on condenser.
11.Sightglass on condenser.
12.Crankcaseheater, voltage 1x230V-60Hz.
13.Expansionvalve to be placed near evaporator.
14.Solenoidvalve to be placed near evaporator, voltage 1x230V-60Hz
15.Sightglass with moisture indicator to be placed near evaporator.
16.Thermostat with capillary tube to be placed in recirculationduct.
17.Incl. unloaded start solenoidvalve, voltage 1x230V-60Hz.
The unit is excluded of any wiring, cabling and starters.
E-07-01
Page 9 of 44
020-3 2 Condensing unit (serving AC-3) mainly consisting of a semi-hermetic type compressor
and a water-cooled condenser built on a common frame. The unit will be placed in the
HVAC-room.
Each unit is capable of 100% of the total required capacity, thus one unit acting as stand-
by, each unit specified as follows:
• Compressor-make Bitzer or equal

• Type 4H-25.2Y-40P semi-hermetic
• Coolingcapacity 63 kW
• Capacity control 100-50-0 %
• Powerconsumption ± 22 kW
• Max. input power 29 kW
• Refrigerant R-407c
o
• Evaporationtemperature ±6 Cmean
o
• Condensingtemperature ±47 Cmean
• Starting method Direct on line
• Coolingmedium Intercool fresh water
o
• Watertemperature in 38 C
• Waterconsumption ± 19 m3/h
• Pressuredrop ±9 kPa
terials:
18.Necessary refrigerant piping on the unit.

19.Necessary insulation on the unit, Armaflex or equal.
20.Filterdryer (if possible with exchangeable core)
21.Necessary pressure-gauges for high-, low-, and oilpressure.
22.Necessary safety/control cut-outs for high-,low-, and oilpressure.
23.Liquid separator.
24.Vibrationdampers in piping and under compressor.
25.First filling with refrigerant and oil.
26.Necessary service valves.
27.Safety reliefvalve on condenser.
28.Sightglass on condenser.
29.Crankcaseheater, voltage 1x230V-60Hz.
30.Expansionvalve to be placed near evaporator.
31.Solenoidvalve to be placed near evaporator, voltage 1x230V-60Hz
32.Sightglass with moisture indicator to be placed near evaporator.
33.Thermostat with capillary tube to be placed in recirculationduct.
34.Incl. unloaded start solenoidvalve, voltage 1x230V-60Hz.
The unit is excluded of any wiring, cabling and starters.
E-07-01
Page 10 of 44
030 - Mechanical ventilation
System S-1/S-2 serving Engine Room
030-1 2 Axial flow fan, marine design.

The impeller is driven directly by an electromotor and has carefully profiled blades taking
advantage of the latest aerodynamic data. The impeller is made of corrosion resistant cast
aluminium, and can be adjusted in angle while stationary.
The casing has rolled on flanges and is delivered in hot dipped galvanised steel.
• Make SALOR
• Type VM-100
• Aircapacity 54.000/27.931 m3/h
• Static pressure 400/107 Pa
• Absorbed power 13/1,92 kW
• Motor installed 15,6/2,8 kW
• Speed 1760/880 rpm
• Execution IP55,ISO F, Dahlander
One fan suitable for reverse operation, controls del. yard (electrical contractor).
030-2 2 Sound attenuating dampers suitable for placing directly on SALOR VM-type axial fans.
• Make SALOR
• For fan type VM-100
• Type CB-100-1000-500 (with core)
• Length 500 mm
• Material Galvanised steel.
030-3 2 Inlet cone for placing directly on SALOR VM-type axial fans and sound dampers.
• Make SALOR
• Type Z-54
• Material Galvanised steel.
030-4 ±25 Metre un-insulated galvanised spiro-duct. The ductsystem includes all elbows, branches,
nipples, hangers, mounting materials etc. necessary for a good working installation.
• R-40 innertube 400 mm
Note that this spiroducting is connected to the mainduct, which is integrated in the ships
construction and is meant for local airdistribution.
E-07-01
Page 11 of 44
System S-3 serving Bowthruster Room.

• Make SALOR
• Type HU-40
• Static pressure 550 Pa
• Absorbed power 1,64 kW
• Motor installed 1,75 kW
• Speed 3420 rpm
• Execution IP55,ISO F
030-6 ±5 m2 uninsulated rectangular galvanised steel airsupply duct, including the necessary
mounting materials, gauze-grids, control dampers etc.
E-07-01
Page 12 of 44
System S-4 serving Generator Room.

• Make SALOR
• Type HU-30
• Speed 3375 rpm
030-8 1 Gauze-grid to be placed directly on SALOR HU-type axial fans.
• Make SALOR
• For fan type HU-30
E-07-01
Page 13 of 44
System S-5 serving corridor Propulsion Room.
030-9 1 Centrifugal ductfan. The external rotormotor and impeller combination is mounted within
a pre-galvanised sheet metal housing.
• Make SALOR
• Type CK 100-C
• Aircapacity 150 m3/h
• Static Pressure 200 Pa
• Current 0,42 A
• Power 0,091 kW
• Speed 2700 rpm
• Enclosure class, motor IP44
• Insulation class, motor B
o
• Maximum temperature 70 C
• Weight 2,9 kg
The fan will be delivered complete with clamping rings, lined with vibration absorbing ma-
terial.
030-10 3 Meter un-insulated galvanized spiro-duct. The ductsystem includes all elbows, branches,

E-07-01
Page 14 of 44
System S-6 serving Propulsion Room.

• Make SALOR
• Type HU-40
• Speed 3420 rpm
• Make SALOR
E-07-01
Page 15 of 44
System S-7 serving Engine Room Office.
• Make SALOR
• Type CK 100-C
• Current 0,42 A
• Power 0,091 kW
• Speed 2700 rpm
o
• Weight 2,9 kg
terial.
010-14 2 Sound attenuating damper to be placed in the overpressure-duct and supply-duct.
a fuseble link which melts when a certain temperature is reached. When required it is
release-cable. Firedampers must be easy accessable to check their position and for servic-
ing.
• Make SALOR
o
The firedampers can be welded directly into steel decks and bulkheads. For rectangular
firedampers which have flanges it is also possible to bolt them on. The round firedampers
have standard sizes related to spiropipe diameters, the rectangular firedampers are non
stock items.
If the firedamper is installed in a deck or bulkhead with fire-insulation, the firedamper
must also be insulated over its full lenght with the same insulation.
010-16 2 Grid to be mounted in the wall or ceiling.
• Make SALOR
030-17 ±1 m2 uninsulated rectangular galvanised steel duct, including the necessary mounting mate-
rials, gauze-grids, control dampers etc.
030-18 ±5 Meter un-insulated galvanized spiro-duct. The ductsystem includes all elbows, branches,

E-07-01
Page 16 of 44
System S-8 serving Overpressure Staircase.
030-19 1 Centrifugal ductfan. The external rotormotor and impeller combination is mounted wit-
hin a pre-galvanised sheet metal housing.
• Make SALOR
• Type CK 160-C
• Current 0,60 A
• Power 0,131 kW
• Speed 2555 rpm
o
• Weight 4,3 kg
The fan will be delivered complete with clamping rings, lined with vibration absorbing
material.

E-07-01
Page 17 of 44
System E-1 serving sanitary spaces on forecastle deck.
• Make SALOR
• Type CK 200-B
• Current 0,97 A
• Power 0,211 kW
• Speed 2730 rpm
o
• Weight 5,1 kg
terial.
030-22 ±7 Exhaust nozzle complete with mounting flange. The nozzle is adjustable in order to bal-
ance the system.
• Make SALOR
• Type SR-141

E-07-01
Page 18 of 44
System E-2 serving sanitary spaces and laundry on accommodation deck.
• Make SALOR
• Type CK 250-C
• Current 1,00 A
• Power 0,217 kW
• Speed 2645 rpm
o
• Weight 5,3 kg
terial.
ance the system.
• Make SALOR
• Type SR-141
030-26 ±40 Meter un-insulated galvanised spiro-duct. The ductsystem includes all elbows, branches,

E-07-01
Page 19 of 44
System E-3 serving changing room and sanitary space on maindeck.
• Make SALOR
• Type CK 160-C
• Current 0,60 A
• Power 0,131 kW
• Speed 2555 rpm
o
• Weight 4,3 kg
terial.
ance the system.
• Make SALOR
• Type SR-141

030-31 1 Exhaust grid to be mounted in the accommodation’s wall and/or ceiling.
• Make SALOR
• Type ARR-13
E-07-01
Page 20 of 44
System E-4 serving dry store on maindeck.
• Make SALOR
• Type CK 125-C
• Current 0,44 A
• Power 0,095 kW
• Speed 2510 rpm
o
• Weight 2,9 kg
terial.
ance the system.
• Make SALOR
• Type SR-141

030-35 1 Underpressuregrid to be mounted in the wall and/or ceiling.
• Make SALOR
• Type ARR-13
E-07-01
Page 21 of 44
System E-5 serving galley exhaust canopy.
030-36 1 Stainless steel exhaustcanopy to be placed above the cooking range. The canopy has gre-
asefilters that can be cleaned up and is executed with a direct driven centrifugal fan built
in.
• Make SALOR
• Type TZA
• Fan motor 0,9 kW
A separate delivered speedcontroller (frequency drive in box incl. controls) is included.

Electric cabling, external fuses etc. are not included.
030-37 ±10 m2 rectangular un-insulated galvanised steel discharge-airduct. The ductsystem includes
all necessary mounting materials needed for a good working system.
a fusible link, which melts when a certain temperature is reached. When required it is
release-cable. Firedampers must be easy accessible to check their position and for servic-
ing.
• Make SALOR
o
The firedamper must be installed at the lower end of the duct as close as possible to the
exhaustcanopy.
030-39 ±1 m2 rectangular un-insulated galvanised steel over-/underpressure-airduct. The ductsys-

tem includes all necessary mounting materials needed for a good working system.
030-40 1 Over-/underpressuregrid to be mounted in the galley’s wall and/or ceiling.
• Make SALOR
• Type ARR-13
E-07-01
Page 22 of 44
System E-6 serving CO2 locker.
• Make SALOR
• Type CK 100-C
• Current 0,42 A
• Power 0,091 kW
• Speed 2700 rpm
o
• Weight 2,9 kg
terial.

E-07-01
Page 23 of 44
System E-7 serving paint locker.
an anti-static plastic housing.
• Make SALOR
• Type ERM 18 EX
• Power 0,059 KW

E-07-01
Page 24 of 44
System E-8 serving treatment room and sanitary space treatment room.
• Make SALOR
• Type CK 160-C
• Current 0,60 A
• Power 0,131 kW
• Speed 2555 rpm
o
• Weight 4,3 kg
terial.
ance the system.
• Make SALOR
• Type SR-141

E-07-01
Page 25 of 44
System E-9.1 & E-9.2 serving Cargo Hold.

• Make SALOR
• Type HU-40
• Speed 3420 rpm
• Make SALOR
E-07-01
Page 26 of 44
System E-10 serving Bowthruster Room.

• Make SALOR
• Type VM-40
• Speed 3420 rpm
030-51 1 Gauze-grid to be placed directly on SALOR VM-type axial fans.
• Make SALOR
E-07-01
Page 27 of 44
System E-11/E-11.1 serving recreation room.
• Make SALOR
• Type CK 250-C
• Current 1,00 A
• Power 0,217 kW
• Speed 2645 rpm
o
• Weight 5,3 kg
terial.

030-55 2 Exhaust grid to be mounted in the accommodation’s wall and/or ceiling.
• Make SALOR
• Type ARR-13
E-07-01
Page 28 of 44
System E-12 serving PS deck store on maindeck.
• Make SALOR
• Type CK 100-C
• Current 0,42 A
• Power 0,091 kW
• Speed 2700 rpm
o
• Weight 2,9 kg
terial.

E-07-01
Page 29 of 44
System E-13 serving PS decklocker on forecastle deck.
• Make SALOR
• Type CK 100-C
• Current 0,42 A
• Power 0,091 kW
• Speed 2700 rpm
o
• Weight 2,9 kg
terial.

E-07-01
Page 30 of 44
System E-14 serving Toilet bridge deck.
030-60 1 Centrifugal ductfan. The external rotormotor and impeller combination is mounted wit-
hin a pre-galvanised sheet metal housing.
• Make SALOR
• Type CK 100-C
• Current 0,42 A
• Power 0,091 kW
• Speed 2700 rpm
o
• Weight 2,9 kg
The fan will be delivered complete with clamping rings, lined with vibration absorbing
material.
030-61 1 Exhaust nozzle complete with mounting flange. The nozzle is adjustable in order to bal-
ance the system.
• Make SALOR
• Type SR-141

E-07-01
Page 31 of 44
System E-15/16 serving Technical space below wheelhouse.
• Make SALOR
• Type CK 200-B
• Current 0,97 A
• Power 0,211 kW
• Speed 2730 rpm
o
• Weight 5,1 kg
terial.

E-07-01
Page 32 of 44
System E-17 serving Propulsion Room.

• Make SALOR
• Type HU-40
• Maximum absorbed power 1,29 kW
• Speed 3540 rpm
• Make SALOR
E-07-01
Page 33 of 44
System E-18 serving battery locker.
an anti-static plastic housing.
• Make SALOR
• Type ERM 22 EX
• Power 0,200 KW

E-07-01
Page 34 of 44
System E-19.1 & E-19.2 serving Pump room.

• Make SALOR
• Type HU-40 Ex
• Speed 3420 rpm
• Make SALOR
E-07-01
Page 35 of 44
050 - Ventilation openings
- Misteliminator made of seawaterresistant aluminium. The misteliminator takes care that

airborne water-droplets are being separated from the air, collected and drained.
• Make SALOR
To be divided as follows:
Serving system Dimensions (hxw;mm)

050-1 1 AC-1 400 x 750
050-2 1 AC-3 200 x 250
050-3 2 S-1/S-2 2000 x 1100
050-4 2 S-1/S-2 900 x 1100
050-5 1 S-3 600 x 500
050-6 1 S-4 250 x 250
050-7 2 Underpressure Cargo space 450 x 400
050-8 1 S-6 700 x 400
050-9 2 Underpressure Pump room 750 x 400
050-10 1 EGR extra airintake 1950 x 1050/1250
050-11 1 Balance Dry store 200 x 200
- Galvanised steel fire damper. The damper is executed an electric actuator. The damper
must be easy accessible to check its position and for servicing.
• Make SALOR/Actionair or equal

• Material Galvanised steel
• Voltage 1x 24VDC
Note: the damper is executed with positiondetectionswitches which have to be hooked up

to the ship’s safety system and/or fire fighting system.
Serving system Dimensions (hxw;mm)

050-12 8 Overpressure engineroom PS 550 x 590 (multiple combined)
050-13 8 Overpressure engineroom SB 550 x 590 (multiple combined)
050-14 2 Bowthruster room in and out Dia.400mm
For all items: final dimensions in consultation.

E-07-01
Page 36 of 44
070 - Cool & freeze
070-1 2 Condensing unit mainly consisting of a semi-hermetic compressor and air-cooled con-
denser built on a common frame.
Each unit suitable for 100% of the total required capacity, one unit acting as stand-by.
We specify as follows, each unit:
• Make Bitzer
• Type LH64/2EC-2.2Y-40S
• Coolingcapacity 3,3 kW
• Refrigerant R-404a
o
• Evaporationtemperature -25 Cmean
• Power compressor 4 kW
• Current compressor 3,74 A
• Max. operating current comp. 5,7 A
• Starting current compressor 28,5 A
o
• Ambient temperature air 35 C
• Condenser fan 4.401 m3/h
• Condenser fan voltage 1x230V-60Hz
• Condenser fan current 1,41 A
• Condenser fan power 301 W
terials:
1. Necessary refrigerant piping on the unit.

2. Necessary insulation on the unit, Armaflex or equal.
3. Filterdryer
4. Necessary pressure-gauges for high and low-pressure.
5. Necessary safety/control cut-outs for high and low-pressure.
6. Liquid separator.
7. Vibrationdampers in piping and under unit or compressor.
8. First filling with refrigerant and oil.
9. Necessary service valves.
10. Safety reliefvalve on condenser.
11. Expansionvalve(s) to be placed near evaporator(s).
12. Solenoidvalve(s) to be placed near evaporator(s), voltage 1x230V-60Hz
13. Sightglass with moisture indicator to be placed near evaporator(s).
The unit is excluded of any wiring and cabling.
070-2 1 Unit cooler consisting of an evaporatorcoil made of copper tubes and aluminium fins,
fan(s) blowing through the coil and a casing complete with driptray.
• Serving Cool Store +2oC

• Type CTE 29M6-ED
• Fanpower 1x72 W
• Voltage (fan) 1x230V-60Hz
Do not forget to connect the drainpipes of the unit-cooler! Drainpiping is delivery yard.
E-07-01
Page 37 of 44
070-3 1 Unit cooler consisting of an evaporatorcoil made of copper tubes and aluminium fins,
fan(s) blowing through the coil and a casing complete with driptray.
• Serving Freeze Store -18oC

• Type CTE 34L8-ED
• Fanpower 2x72 W
• Voltage (fan) 1x230V-60Hz
• Defrost heater 1,275 kW
• Voltage (heater) 3x440V-60Hz
Do not forget to connect the drainpipes of the unit-cooler! Drainpiping is delivery yard.
070-4 1 Electrical control panel, complete with mainswitch, starterrelays, controlrelays, digital
temperature monitors with defrost timer, temperature sensors, indicationlights, con-
trolknobs, hour counters, V/A indicator, general alarm contact etc.
• Main voltage 3x440V-60Hz

• Pilot voltage 1x230V-60Hz
tioned length is the distance between compressor-unit and evaporator(s).
070-6 1 Heating cable to be mounted into the drainpipe of the unitcooler (1 x freeze store). By in-
stalling this cable the drain is protected against freezing
• Type TAS
• Power 52 W
• Voltage 1x230-60Hz
070-7 2 Temperature indicator dial type for mounting near to the room.
E-07-01
Page 38 of 44
071 - Freezer and Cold stores.
071-1 2 Stores built up of flat panels using common walls.
In total is included:
One cold store with inside dimensions of 4000 x 1400 x 2030 mm (lxwxh) with flat walls,
floors and top.
One freeze store with inside dimensions of 3200 x 1400 x 2030 mm (lxwxh) with flat
walls, floors and top.
We specify as follows:
• The panels are foreseen of polyurethane foam. The panels have thickness of 105 mm.
• Cladding walls and ceiling galvanised steel plate white coated at the inside, grey
coated at the outside.
• Doors foreseen with hinges and slots incl. frame heating.
• Freeze store foreseen with heated ventilation opening (230V-60Hz)
• The floorpanels (thickness 85 mm) to be executed with wooden panels (10 mm) fin-
ished with anti-slip INOX cladding.
• In the rooms aluminium racks to be placed c/w plastic shelves (specified below).
071-2 1 Rack in freeze room, depth 470mm, height 1960mm, 4 polyethylene shelves.
Build in U-shape but approx. One metre free entrance at access door.
One side 2062mm, backwall 1373mm, one side 3064mm.
071-3 1 Rack in cold room, depth 470mm, height 1960mm, 4 polyethylene shelves.
Build in U-shape but approx. One metre free entrance at access door.
One side 2882mm, backwall 1373mm, one side 2882mm
E-07-01
Page 39 of 44
160 - EP notation required equipment.
For Lloyd’s EP notation the following parts to be delivered.
A refrigerant leak detection system for continuously monitoring of spaces in which refrig-
erant could leak.
Consisting of:
160-1 1 Central monitoring unit.
• Make Murco
• Type IAM Control Panel
• Power supply 230 or 120 VAC
• Frequency 50/60 Hz
• Max. number of sensors 16
• Output 2 relays (10A 230VAC)
• Dimensions 262 x 255 x 82 mm
Electric cabling, fuses etc. are not included.
160-2 8 Sensors for R407c.
• Make Murco
• Type IAM - R407c
• Output 2 relays (1A 24V)
• Dimensions 87 x 147 x 61 mm (surface mounted)
• Dimensions 87 x 147 x 29 (recessed version)
Any additional cabling, external fuses etc. are not included.

Sensors to be placed as follows:
• Fanroom AC-1 1Pc.

• Near condensing unit AC-1 1Pc.
• Near units AC-2 2Pc.
• Near condensing units AC-2 2Pc.
• Technical space below wheelhouse (near AC3) 1Pc.
• Near condensing unit AC-3 1Pc.
160-3 3 Sensors for R404a.
• Make Murco
• Type IAM - R404a
• Output 2 relays (1A 24V)
• Dimensions 87 x 147 x 61 mm (surface mounted)
• Dimensions 87 x 147 x 29 (recessed version)
Any additional cabling, external fuses etc. are not included.

Sensors to be placed as follows:
• Cold room 1Pc.

• Freeze room 1Pc.
• Near PCP condensing unit 2Pc.
E-07-01
Page 40 of 44
For the purpose of refrigerant recovery, the compressors are to be capable of evacuating
the system charge into a liquid receiver. Additionally, recovery units are to be provided
to evacuate a system into the existing liquid receiver or into cylinders dedicated for this
purpose.
Consisting of:
160-4 1 Refrigerant recovery unit for evacuation of a refrigerant system.
• Make Promax
• Type RG-5410AE
• Voltage 230V-50/60Hz
• Refrigerants R134a/R404a/R410a/R407c
160-5 1 Set of fillinghoses.
160-6 1 Empty refrigerant cylinder for evacuation of a refrigerant system.
• Content ±12 kg
• Conditon swap
160-7 1 Empty refrigerant cylinder for evacuation of a refrigerant system.
• Content ±61 kg
• Condition swap
E-07-01
Page 41 of 44
Design conditions
Summer inside condition Approx. 21oC - 55% RH accommodation only
Summer outside condition 35oC - 70% RH
Summer seawatertemperature 32oC
Recirculation air ±65% (accommodation mainsystem)

Fresh air Minimum 30 m3/h per person.
Exhaust airchanges:
Sanitary spaces 15 x/h
Change room 10 x/h
Stores in accommodation 5 x/h
Galley 40 x/h
Laundry 20 x/h
Paint locker 20 x/h
CO2 Locker, deck store PS/MD 10 x/h
Deck locker 5 x/h
Pumproom 20 x/h
Supply airchanges:
Cargo Hold 6 x/h (net space, tanks deducted)
Propulsion Room 20 x/h (thrusters, and frequency drives wa-
tercooled).
Engineroom- and bowthrusterroom ventila- Based on a maximum temperature-rise of

tion approx. 12,5oC at full load.
Acc. to ISO 8861
Emergency Generator Room 40 x/h. It is assumed an aircooled genera-

torset with selfsupporting aircooled radiator
is installed.
Max. internal heatload ECR ±30 kW.
Heat transmission calculations are based on ISO 7547.
Because of the internal load of the galley and the direct sunradiation through the windows
of the wheelhouse, the inside condition can not be guaranteed under all circumstances.
Note: This statement is based on the physical phenomena that heatradiation cannot be
cooled down (compare it with sunbathes during wintersports while ambient airtempera-
ture is below zero).
It is not stated to defend too less capacity, we always calculate with heat rejected from
installed equipment. But to avoid heatradiation it is necessary that stoves are switched off
and sunblinds are installed or other protective measures are undertaken.
The number of airchanges for the AC depends on the amount of heat to be extracted from
the room served. For mechanical ventilation the above mentioned minimum ventilation
airchanges per hour will be calculated.
Sanitary spaces will be conditioned by air entering from adjacent space.
Deckstores etc. (if not specified) will be naturally ventilated (yard’s responsibility)
E-07-01
Page 42 of 44
Design data for cool & freeze installations:

o
• Ambient temperature. 35 C
o
• Inside temperature freeze store. -18 C
o
• Inside temperature cool store. +2 C
• Content of freeze store. ± 10,8 m3
• Content of cool store. ± 12,6 m3
• Compressor running time. 18 hour/day
Aircooled condensing units must be well ventilated with outside air.

E-07-01
Page 43 of 44
Exclusions
Not included in the delivery and/or installation of Heinen & Hopman Engineering b.v. are the following
items.
1. Any equipment and materials not specially mentioned.

2. Explosionproof equipment.
3. Labour.
4. All work in connection with natural ventilation.
5. Doorgrills or grills in walls ment for recirculation purposes.
6. Airintakegrills, airdischargegrills and overpressuregrills in ship’s structure if not specified.
7. Goosenecks, mushrooms, hatches.
8. Vertical mainducts serving engineroom, cargoholds, pumprooms, bowtrusterrooms, etc.
9. Any lining off, cutting, burning, drilling or welding in ship’s structure.
10. Any foundations and coamings.
11. Tankpenetrations.
12. Rectangular penetrations and any penetration trough frames.
13. Aluminium penetrations of any kind.
14. Any insulation, except where specified.
15. Electric wiring, cabling, interlocks and starters except where specified.
16. The installation of control equipment in panels.
17. Fire & gas detection and related components.
18. Controls to stop ventilating machinery in accordance with class.
19. Drainpiping and connections for fancoilunits, cooling coils and steamhumidifyers.
20. Seawaterpiping, valves, filters, pumps and other related components.
21. Piping from pressure relief valve on condensing-unit(s) to outside atmosphere.
22. Thick-walled (> 2mm) ducts and fireinsulation required by class.
23. Fire-extinguishing installation for galley exhaustcanopy if required by class.
24. Any valves in watertight bulkheads and watertight trunking.
25. Painting, coatings and finish other than standard.
26. Carpentry, wooden ducts and grids as well as special decorative grills.
27. Ducts for fancoilunits and ducts on secondary side of cabinunits.
28. Discharge and supply ducts for tumble dryers.
29. Soundampers and soundinsulation.
30. Any services necessary to commission the installations i.e. water, electric power, etc.
31. Spare parts except where specified.
32. Transport on the yard, hoisting and placing in position of parts more than 30 Kg.
33. Transport outside The Netherlands.
34. Packing in crates, containers, etc. other than standard.
35. Comprehensive noise calculations.
36. Normal yardfacilities such as oxygen, water, gas, electricity, toilets, telephone/fax, craneassistence,
scaffolding, storage/warehouse, sanitary washrooms, canteen, removal of waste from board, etc.
37. Digital documents will be supplied in AutoCAD 2004/2007 en MS-Office 97/2003 format.
In addition to the standard exclusions of H&H, the following parts specially needed for cool & freeze
stores are not incuded.
1. Drains.
2. Contraframes / foundations.
3. Electric cabling / connections.
4. Alarm system, lock in alarms, etc.
E-07-01
Page 44 of 44
Heinen & Hopman Engineering bv
P.O. Box 9 - 3750 GA Bunschoten - Holland General Users Manual - HVAC
Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2 Components of the air handling unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3 Working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3.1 Before the first start up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.1.2 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.1.2.1 Valve register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.1.3 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.1.3.1 Gasket filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1.3.2 Bag filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1.3.3 Special filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1.4 Heater battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1.4.1 Hotwater battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1.4.2 Steam battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1.4.3 Electric heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1.5 Cooling coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1.5.1 Chilled water cooling coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1.5.2 Direct expansion cooling coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1.6 Humidifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1.6.1 Spray humidifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1.6.2 Package humidifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.1 Casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.2 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.3 V-Belt transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.3.1 Removing of the V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.3.2 Mounting of the V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.3.3 Tightening of the V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3.4 V-belt pulley's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3.4.1 Removing of the pulley's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3.4.2 Mounting of the pulley's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.4 Valve register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.5 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.5.1 Cleaning of the filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.5.2 Replacement of the gasket filtermat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.6 Heater battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.6.1 Hotwater battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.6.2 Steam battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.6.3 Electric heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.7 Cooling coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.7.1 Chilled water coling coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.7.2 Direct expansion coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.8 Heat regenerative system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.8.1 Cross current regenerative system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.8.2 Heat regenerative battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.9 Sound-absorber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.10 Humidifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.10.1 Spray humidifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.10.2 Package humidifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.11 Siphon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5 Summery Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Part three Chapter 2: The air handling unit - 1

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
1 Introduction
We have spent sometime now on the facts why ventilation and preferable air-conditioning should be made available and how
much. The air-conditioning system with all its components is placed in a casing. This complete system is called an air handling
unit (figure 2-1). In this chapter the air handling unit and it's different components will be explained.
2 Components of the air handling unit
The main sections of an air handling unit are:

• The cooling section - In this section heat is withdrawn from the air.
• The heating section - In this section air can be heated if there is the need for a higher temperature in the different
rooms.
• The fan section - Air is sucked through the air handling unit by a fan along the filter-, cooling-, heating- and
humidifier section and is distributed to different spaces/rooms.
• The filter section - In this section dust and other contaminants are filtered from the air.
• The humidifier section - In this section moister can be supplied to the air to increase the humidity of the air.
• Silencers - To keep the noiselevel between maximum levels.
figure 2-1
There are many requirements on the construction of an air handling unit:

• soundless working
• sufficient thermal and acoustical insulation
• stainless steel construction
• water and airtight construction
• easy accessible parts
• relative small weight
• easy to disassemble
• low price
3 Working
The working of the air handling unit is based on the following principle. The air is sucked in by a ventilator placed in the casing.
Next, the air travels through a filter that cleans the air from dirt and dust. After the filter the air flows through a cooling coil where
it is cooled en dismoisterized (Dismoisterization takes place because water vapour condensates when the temperature is
lowered).
The cooling coil (evaporator) is a component of the cooling section. When the air is cooled, it is blown into a system of pipes
that transports it to the different spaces in the ship. For ships that sail in colder regions and need beside cooling also heating, a
heating section in the air handling unit is used to heat the air. The air that must be heated flows through a heater that raises the
temperature of the air. Heated air is then transported to the different spaces of the ship where heating is needed.
In the following chapter some basic principles of air handling will be illustrated. After this different parts of an air-conditioning
system are explained.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
3.1 Before the first start up
Start the airhandling unit only if all shields, doors etc. are mounted. Always 1 put the main- and/or
workswitch of during activities at the airhandling unit. Only qualified personal is authorized to
execute the following activities at the airhandling unit.
1 = Excluding the commissioning of the cooling machine.
3.1.1 General
Check :
! Wheter all transport safeties are removed.

! Wheter the airhandling unit is not damaged.
! Whether all parts are mounted correctly.
! Whether, during the start up, nobody is inside the air-handling unit and if all the hatches are closed.
! Whether all connections are air tigth.
! Whether all airducts are air thight and flexible connected to the unit.
! Whether the control devices are connected correctly and all the safeties are properly set.
3.1.2 Fan
! Check whether the fan is mounted correctly.

! Check by hand whether the impeller does not touch the casing in any place.
! Inspect the fan casing on pollutions.
! Check in case of a V-belt driven fan :
a- Alignment of the V-belt (see maintenance).
b- The V-belt tension (see maintenance).
! Check whether the motor is connected correctly to the supply.
! Set the thermal protection 5% above the current indicated on the nameplate of the motor.
! Shortly start the fan and control the direction of rotation.
! Measure the current consumption in every phase, measuring takes place in the control unit.
Measuring only takes place when the inspectiondoors are closed.
CLOSE
! Set the thermal protection 5% above the highest measured current. 90 °
! Check whether the fan and motor are turning easy and in balance.
OPEN
When the ventilator is working without or not sufficient pressure this
can cause an overloaded motor. To prevent this the duct
connections and position of the strainers must be checked. SERVO MOTOR
In case of adjustable engines (see projectinformation) the highest current does

not occur at the nominal speed of revolutions. Therefore the current must be
measured over the entire adjusting range.
VALVE POSITION
INDICATION SPLIT
3.1.2.1 Valve register
Figure 3.1
! Check the connection and operation of the servo motor by means of the
manufacturer documents.
! Check the correct action of the valves in accordance with the position of the servo motor.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
3.1.3 Filters
The airhandlingunit is delivered completely with filters. The filters can be of different types, e.g : Gasket filter, Bag filter or a
special filter like an active carbon or an absolutefilter etc.
3.1.3.1 Gasket filter
The gasket filter is mounted in a slide construction. The construction consits of two fitting parts, the filter is placed in zigzag
shape between them. The two parts are connected by screws or clips.
3.1.3.2 Bag filter
This filter is fitted by spring clips in a framework. For the sealing between the filter and the framework a neopreen rubber seal is
used. When mounting the filter in the framework, it is important that the spring clips push the filter tight to the sealing.
3.1.3.3 Special filters
Absolute and active carbon filters are delivered seperate in the original package. For the mounting of these filters is refered to
the manufacturers documents, enclosed in the package.
3.1.4 Heater battery

HOLD BOTH ENDS
STEADY !
After disconnecting the heater will stay hot for some time.
BURNINGDANGER!
3.1.4.1. Hotwater battery
! Check whether the de-aeration and drain are present and the waterconnections (in
counter flow unless mentioned otherwise).
! If not, hold the connections thight when connecting them (fig. 3.2).
! Fill the pipes and battery up, then de-aerate with an idle pump.
! Check all connections for leaks.
! Check the mounting and connections of the frost-protection thermostat ( fig. 3.3).
Simulate the action by raising the setpoint. \TEKENING\STORK_4.ROB
! Set the thermostat at 5 EC.

! Check the mounting of the maximum thermostat. Figure 3.2
3.1.4.2. Steam battery

LAMEL
PIPE
! Check the mounting of the steampipes and whether they do not leak at
the prescribed pressure.
! Check mounting and connections of the frost-protection thermostat. CAPPILAIR
Simulate the action (see hotwater battery). SPRING

! The thermostat must be placed at a distance from the steambattery.
! Set the frost-protection thermostat to 5 EC.
\TEKENING\STORK_5.ROB
Figure 3.3

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
3.1.4.3. Electric heater
! Check the electric connection.

! Check the mounting of the maximum thermostat.
! Check the action of the maximum thermostat. It must be set at 20 EC above the airtemperature.
3.1.5 Cooling coil
3.1.5.1. Chilled water cooling coil
! Check the waterconnections (in counter flow) and whether the de-aeration and drain are present (fig. 3.4).
! If not, hold the connections tight when connecting them (fig. 3.2).
! Fill the pipes and battery up, then de-aerate with an idle pump.
! Check the connections for leaks.
3.1.5.2. Direct expansion coil
Contains a harmful refrigerant (R-22) under overpressure. LEAKDANGER! Keep room well vented. In
the presence of an open flame freon is liable to decompose in toxic gasses.
! Check all connections.

! Check whether the possible freeze-in protection is mounted correctly. Simulate DE-AIRATION
the action by raising the setpoint.
! Set the freeze-in protection to 5 EC below the airtemperature.
AIR POT
3.1.6 Humidifier
It is not allowed to drill in the dampers under any condition.
\TEKENING\STORK_7.ROB DRAINAGE
3.1.6.1. Spray humidifier
Figure 3.4
! Check the electric- and waterconnections and whether all joints are secured and closed.
! Fill the waterreservoir. Set the float ventile about 20 mm under the overflow connection.
! Close the drain tap and inspectiondoor or -panel.
! De-aerate the pump and start the ventilator.
! Open the watersupply to the float valve.
! Check the direction of rotation of the pump via an impulse start.
! Measure the current consumtion in every phase.
Measuring only takes place when the inspectiondoors are closed.
! Set the thermal protection to 5% above the highest measured current.
Never put the humidifier into action without the fan working, because damage may develop caused by punch of
moisture through the air rectifiers.
3.1.6.2 Package humidifier
! Follow the above mentioned points of the spray damper.

! The watersupply must be set so that that neither waterbells are formed nor water can come loose of the package.
After the machine has been in operation for ten hours the pulleys must be retightent to ensure that they
are still fixed.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
4 Maintenance
Always 1 put the main- and/or work switch off during activities at the airhandling unit. Only qualified
personal is authorized to execute the maintanance of the airhandling unit.
1 = Excluding the commissioning of the cooling machine.
4.1 Casing
Yearly :
! Clean the in- and outside of the casing, this can be done by vacuumcleaning with a soft broom.
! Clean the uncoated sendzimir parts of the box at the in- and outside with a light oiled cloth.
! Check the ductconnections (flexible hoses). Damaged hoses must be repared or replaced.
! Check the working of the doorlocks.
! Possible corrosion phenomena must be treated directly and the cause must be rectified.
! Damages at the coating must be retouched. Especially the internal coating at the inlet- and strainersection.
4.2 Fan
Start the fan only if all shields, doors etc. are mounted. After disconnecting the fan will runout for some
time. After disconnecting the ventilator some parts will be hot for some time. BURNINGDANGER!
Yearly :
! Clean fan and motor.
! Check whether the connections are still secured and the vibration dampers are not harmed.
! Check the coating and casing of the fan.
! Check whether fan and motor are turning easy and in balance.
! On some fan types bearings with greasenipples are mounted. Then relubrication must be performed according the
instructions of the manufacturer.
! In all other cases the bearings are maintenance free.
Monthly :
! Check wheter the bearings make an excessive amount of sound. If this occurs the bearings must be replaced.
4.3 V-Belt Transmissions
4.3.1 Removing of the V-belt RULER
! Remove the front part of the shield over the transmission.

! The electric motor is placed on a cradle, that is secured with nuts.
! Loosen the nuts and move the cradle to loosen the V-belt. ALIGNMENT
! Remove the V-belt. V-BELT PULLEY'S
4.3.2 Mounting of the V-belt
Never force the V-belts on the sheaves, as this may damage the belt core, so that the belt will
break after a short time of operation. Figure 4.1
! Shorten the distance between the cen-tres, by moving the electric motor, until the belts can be fitted easily without the use of
tools.
! Then increase the distance until the V-belt is tensed.
! Align the V-belt with, for example a ruler (fig. 4.1).
! Give the V-belt the prediscribed tension and secure the cradle.
! Replace the front part of the shield.
! After about 15 minutes of loaded operation the V-belt should be tightend (see tightening of the V-belt).
! During the continued operation the tension should be checked after about 50 working hours, and there upon it should be
checked occasionally.
4.3.3 Tightening of the V-belt

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
! Measure the centre distance.

! Deflect the V-belt in the middle. PUSH DOWN
! Measure the deflection and check according the table.
Profile Diameter of smallest pulley (mm) Deflection (mm)
SPZ-ALPHA 67 - 95 1.0 - 1.5 CENTRE DISTANCE (cm)

100 - 200 1.5 - 2.0 DEFLECTION (mm)
SPB-BETA 160 - 224 3.6 - 5.1

250 - 400 5.1 - 6.6
Table 4.1 V-belt deflection

Figure 4.2
Always ascertain that the V-belt is aligned correctly and at the right tension.
Replace a V-belt that shows signs of wear immediately.
4.3.4 V-belt pulley's
The V-belt pulley's are provided with a taper-lock bush and can be removed easily without the use of blow- or pulltools.
4.3.4.1 Removing of the pulley’s
! Loosen the screws and place one screw in the pressure hole of the pulley.
! Turn the screw in until the pulley is released.
! Remove the pulley from the shaft.
4.3.4.2 Mounting of the pulley’s
! Place the taper-lock bush and pulley together, so that the holes in the pulley and taper-lock bush are corresponding.
! Turn the screws in the holes and fasten them slightly.
! Align the pulley's.
! Tigthen the screws equally until they are fixed.
4.4 Valve register
Monthly:
! Check the position of the set bolt from the servo motor.
Yearly :
! Check the action and adjustment of the servo motor.
! Clean the valves and driving.
! Disconnect the servomotor to control whether the valve blades are turning easy.
For further information is refered to the manufacturer documents.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
4.5 Filter
The frequency of controlling and cleaning/replacing the filters is strongly related to the pollution of the filtered air, working time and
the type of filters placed. As a directive for the filtercapacity it can be stated, that a dirty filter must not exceed 2½ times the
pressuredrop off a clean filter.
Moisture in the filters (e.g. during foggy wheather) can result in a aggressive reaction with the catched dust.
4.5.1 Cleaning of the filters
Some filters are washable, then the following can be executed :

The filter must be cleaned, at least once a month. In some cases more often, according the conditions. It is done according the
following steps :
! Take the filter out of the unit.

! Clean it with fresh water of max. 60 EC.
! Soak it in water to which a synthetic detergent is added or rince them through with a weak water jet against the air direction.
! Shake the filters carefully (do not wring the mat) and replace them, take care that the smooth side of the mat is facing the clean
air side, so that the air passes through the coarse filter of the mat first.
Special filters as the carbon filter must be maintained as prescribed in the manufacturer documents.
4.5.2 Replacement of the gasketfiltermat.
The new filtermat is placed over one of the parts. Take care that the smooth side of the mat is facing the clean air side. Then put
the two parts together and mount them with screws. The superfluous filtermat must be removed before the filter is replaced.
A new filters works better than a cleaned one. A close control of the condition of the filter is achieved by mounting a
pressure difference gauge. This indicates the condition of the filter. Always keep a spare set of filters available. The
active carbon and absolute filters must be stored in the sealed foil. It is recommended to replace the filters yearly
(except the active carbon filter). Take the installation (preferably) in to action with 'construction filters' mounted.
4.6 Heater battery
After disconnecting the heater is hot and may contain a medium under overpressure. BURNINGDANGER!
4.6.1 Hotwater battery
Yearly :
! Check for corrosion and leakage, especially before the heating season.
! Clean the battery surface with a vacuumcleaner provided with a soft broom. Degrease hereafter. In case of coated lamellae there
may be used no solvents.
! In case of systems filled with glycol, check the glycol percentage.
! Check the action of the frost protection, especially before the heating season.
! When blowing clean in the opposite direction of the airstream care must be taken not to damage the (thin) lamellea.
! Because it is possible that there is water remaining in the battery, this must be blown through after draining.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
4.6.2 Steam battery
Yearly :
! Check for corrosion and leakage, before the heating season.
! Clean the battery surface with a vacuumcleaner provided with a soft broom. Degrease hereafter.
! Check the action of the frost protection, before the heating season.
! Because it is possible that there is water remaining in the battery, it must be blown through after draining.
4.6.3 Electric heater
Check the action of the overheat thermostat regularily. If necessary clean it.
4.7 Cooling coil
4.7.1 Chilled water cooling coil
Yearly :
! Check for corrosion and leakage, especially before the cooling season.
! Because it is possible that there is water remaining in the battery, this must be blown through after draining.
! Check the dip tray on pollution.
! The dropseperation lamellea must be cleaned, if they are strongly polluted with lime, clean them with diluted formic acid or a good
decalcifier. Hereafter the lamellea must be flushed thoroughly with clean water.
! In case of algea an algearemoving substance must be used.
! In case of systems filled with glycol, check the glycol percentage.
4.7.2 Direct expansion coil
Contains a harmful refrigerant (R-22) under overpressure. LEAKDANGER! Keep room well vented. In the
presence of an open flame freon is liable to decompose in toxic gasses.
! Check for corrosion and leakage, especially before the cooling season.
! Check the dip tray on pollution.
! The dropseperation lamellea must be cleaned, if they are strongly polluted with lime, clean them with diluted formic acid or a good
decalcifier. Hereafter the lamellea must be flushed thoroughly with clean water.
! In case of algea an algearemoving substance must be used.
4.8 Heat regenerative system
4.8.1 Cross current regenerative system
The cross current exchanger is mounted in a box as a complete package inclusive drip tray. The condenswater drain must be
supplied with a waterlock (siphon). For information about exchangers that are provided with valves is refered to the valve register
of the ventilator.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
4.8.2 Heat regenerative battery
For the maintenance of the heater and cooler part is refered to the hotwater and coldwater battery.
Yearly :
! Check the exchanger for pollution.
! Clean the surface with a vacuumcleaner provided with a soft broom.
! When blowing clean with air, care should be taken not to damage the plates. Hereafter (if necessary) de-grease. Make no use
of solvents in case of a coated exchanger.
4.9 Sound-absorber
The sound-absorber coulisses are normally maintenancefree (under normal operating conditions). However it is recommended to
check the coulisses for damages and loose fibres yearly. It is allowed to clean the coulisses with a vacuumcleaner.
4.10 Humidifier
It is not allowed to drill in the dampers under any condition.
4.10.1 Spray humidifier
The salt and mineral content in the supplied water is not constant. Normally an evaporating factor of two can be sustained. This
means that the drain water quantity must be equal to the maximal water quantity that is to be evaporated per unit of time. Thus the
supplied water vapour quantity must be twice the evaporating water quantity. When water treatment is executed, this may not have
a foaming action, because it will cause the drop seperator to be useless. The water may not be softened below 6 E German
thougness, because else it will become to aggressive.
Yearly :
! Check the action of the damper.
! Clean the damper. This is done by fully opening the drain and spraying the inner RECTIFIER DROPSEPERATOR
parts with water. The suction-basket must be cleaned seperately. SPRAYERS

! Clean the sprayers and dissolve possible lime deposit with diluted formic acid or AIR DIRECTION
a good decalcifier hereafter flush thoroughly with clean water. When the sprayer SUPPLY WATER
locking is worn out, replace the total sprayerpart. Never scrape the sprayers out OVERFLOW
with though tools. WATERLEVEL
! When the dropseperators are strongly poluted with lime they must be cleaned RESERVOIR ADJUST VALVE
FILTER
with diluted formic acid or a good decalcifier, hereafter they must be flushed with PUMP PRESSURE GAUGE
P
water. In case of algea an algearemoving substance must be used. SIPHON
! Check the sealing and level of the float ventile. \TEKENING\STORK_8.ROB
CONTINUOUS SPRAY
! Check the correct action of the continuousspray-arrangement. In case of leakage SEWER
of the packing this must be replaced.
! When a circulating pump is installed, clean the inside according the manufacturer Figure 4.3
documents.
Monthly :
! Check wheter the float valve is adjusted so that the suction side of the pump is below the water level.
4.10.2 Package humidifier
The salt and mineral content in the supplied water are not constant. Normally an evaporating factor of two can be sustained. This
means that the drain water quantity must be equal to the maximal water quantity that is to be evaporated per unit of time. Thus the
supplied water vapour quantity must be twice the evaporating water quantity. When water treatment is executed, this may not have
a foaming action, because it will cause the drop seperator to be useless. The water may not be softened below 6 E German
thougness, because else it will become to aggressive.
Yearly :
! Check the action of the damper.
! The damper must, depending on pollution, be cleaned. This is done by fully opening the drain and spraying the inner parts with
water. Remove the pump and clean it thoroughly.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
! In case of algea an algearemoving substance must be used. Check the sealing and level of the float ventile.
! Check the correct action of the continuousspray-arrangement. In case of leakage of the packing this must be replaced.
Monthly :
! Check wheter the float valve is adjusted so that the suction side of the pump is below the water level.
! Check the package damper for lime pollution. In case of much lime pollution replace the total package.
4.11 Siphon
COVER
During the winter freezing danger occurs
Condensdrains of airhandling-units must be provided with a waterlock (siphon). Hereby the

Figure 4.4
following rules must be taken into account :
A B
UNDER ! Only one siphon per drain.
PRESSURE
! The condens must be discharged by means of a funnel. This enables a
2H H H control of the action of the siphon and possible back pressure in the
dischargehoses is avoided.
C D
! The condensdrain must be connected after the mist eliminator. Locked in the
OVER
PRESSURE airflow direction.
! The siphon must be provided with a fillopening that is lockable and a drain
2H H
1,5H
device.
! After a long standstill period the siphon must be filled with water before the
Figure 4.5
installation is started.
At figure 4.5 A and C the airhandling unit is out of operation. In 4.5 B and D the unit is in operation. Figure 4.5 B shows the unit during
underpressure and 4.5 D shows the situation during overpressure. The dimensions of the siphon are excluding the returnvalve.
4 Summery Chapter 2
The air-conditioning system with all its components is placed in a casing. This complete system is called an air handling unit.
The main sections of an air handling unit are:

• The cooling section - In this section heat is withdrawn from the air.
• The heating section - In this section air can be heated if there is the need for a higher temperature in the different rooms.
• The fan section - Air is sucked through the air handling unit by a fan along the filter-, cooling-, heating- and humidifier
section and is distributed to different spaces/rooms.
• The filter section - In this section dust and other contaminants are filtered from the air.
• The humidifier section - In this section moister can be supplied to the air to increase the humidity of the air.
• Silencers - To keep the noiselevel between maximum levels.
There are many requirements on the construction of an air handling unit:

• soundless working
• sufficient thermal and acoustical insulation
• stainless steel construction
• water and airtight construction
• easy accessible parts
• relative small weight
• easy to disassemble
• low price

DUAL PURPOSE AIR DIFFUSER
The SALOR Dual Purpose Air Diffusor provides higher standards 5. Minimum trunking required
of efficiency in air-moving techniques. This improved version of It reduces the amount of distributing trunking to a minimum.
the well tried “SALOR” not only delivers air at or below room Obviates the need for unsightly trunking passing across
temperature without draught but also gives complete local control ventilated space. Avoids interference with decorative
of both direction and volume. arrangements.
Moreover, owing to the specially designed slide-valve 6. Large capacity - draughtless change
incorporated, 100 percent volume control is obtainable in any The SALOR Dual Purpose
3 Air Diffusor is available3 in range of
direction, and, by complete rotation of the unit, either a jet or a capacities from 1 m /min. (3C.F.M.) To 3.7 m /min. (130
diffused air flow is possible. Originally designed for marine use, C.F.M.) at 12.7 mm water pressure (0.5” S.W.G.) Whilst
the new SALOR is made of a non-hydroscopic moulded plastic in intermediate volumes can immediately be obtained by the
cream or ivory finish. It has an exceptionally clean surface finish, finger-tip control.
and is not affected by damp.
7. Adaptable to existing ductwork
These special characteristics have resulted in many applications, It is readily fitted to existing ductwork and provides a constant
extending from its use in shipping installations to almost every flow of air just where it is wanted. The chaste design of the unit
sphere of industry.. The following points are describing the lends itself to any scheme of decoration.
advantages of the SALOR Dual Purpose Air Diffusor:
8. Full control in either direction
1. Light and robust The only diffuser that provides for 100 percent air volume
Owing to the use of a special new non-hygroscopic plastic control in any direction, and by a simple rotation supplies air in
material it is extremely light, yet exceedingly robust in either jet or diffused form.
construction. This alone brings the following two important
advantages. Some typical applications of the SALOR Dual Air Diffusor to air
conditioning, plenum heating and mechanical ventilation:
2. Simple to install
It can be installed direct on to the side of trunking by fixing Passenger liners : Public rooms, Cabin Accommondation
screws, giving a flush finish and airtight joint because of the and Crew’s Quarters;
specially designed spigot and packaging ring. It can be fitted in a Other Vessels : All sections where ventilation must
vertical or horizontal position with equal facility. conform to M.O.T. Requirements;
Warships : All ventilated spaces;
3. Finger-tip controll Railway Carriages : Dining Cars, Sleeping Beth Cars;
It permits finger-tip controll - the slightest movement of its Pullman Carriages : Where Air Conditioning is required;
hemispherical component providing the desired directional Aircraft : Cabin ventilation;
flow without impairing its diffusing action. A similar Industrial plant : All ventilated spaces and process work;
movement switches the unit on or off - thus obviating the need Public Buildings : All ventilated spaces and process work;
for external control gear. Offices : For all ventilated spaces.
4. Quiet in action
Due in part to the correct acoustic principles upon which this
unit is built and to the actual material employed, the SALOR
Dual Purpose Air Diffusor is essential quiet in use.
Jet or diffused at will.
S A IL
’ T
DON UT US
O
WITH Wide angle flow control.
SELECTION + TECHNICAL DATA
Graph showing Air Throw of Graph showing Air Volume at

SALOR Dual Purpose Diffuser. varying pressures.
1.0 25.40 200 5.67
in mm
Type ‘B’
Volume in m3/min
Static water gauge
0.9 22.86
150 4.25
0.8 20.32 Type ‘C’
Static water gauge in inches
0.7 17.78 Type ‘D’

100 2.83
0.6 15.54 Size E
80 2.27
0.5 12.70 Type ‘E’
1.98
Size D
Volume in C.F.M.
0.4 10.16 60 1.70
0.3 7.62 1.42

Size C
0.2 5.08 40 1.13
0.1 2.54
6.1 7.6 9.1 10.7 12.2 13.7 15.2 16.7 0.85
Throw of air jet in Metres
25 0.71
20 25
20 30
20 35 40 45 50 55 Size B
Throw of air jet in Feet 0.57
15 0.42
10 0.28
2.54 3.81 5.06 7.62 12.70 17.78 25.40
Duct static pressure in mm of water
.1 .15 .2 .25 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8.9 1.0
Based on Ambient Still Air

(End of jet assume 30F.P.M.)
The capacities given below are based on the two pressures we recommend, 12.5 mm
S.W.G. for normal systems, or 7.6 mm S.W.G. For systems where extra quiet B
3
operation is demanded. Capacities are given in C.F.M. and m /min.
Note: The dimension “A” is the diameter of the spigot in the duct. When the hole is cut
C
A
1
a small clearance should be allowed, i.e. /8” (3 mm) on dimensions. This will allow rat-
proofing to be fitted if required.
The new SALOR Dual Purpose Diffusor has been designed to meet the admiralty shock
proof Test A and B.
Type Nominal cap Nominal cap Nominal Minimal Number of P.C.D. of

0.5” (12.7mm) 0.3” (7.6mm) Outlet dept of duct) holes and Sizes Screws
S.W.G. S.W.G. diameter Dimensions
A B C
3
B 35 30 2” 3” 3
4 /8”
3
2 /4“
7
5 /8” 3 x /1 6” 5”
(1) (0.8) (51 mm) (76 mm) (111 mm) (70 mm) (149 mm) (3 x 5 mm) (127 mm)
5
C 65 50
1
2 /2”
1
3 /2” 5” 1
3 /4”
1
6 /2”
3
3 x /1 6” 5 /8”
(1.8) (1.4) (64 mm) (90 mm) (127 mm) (83 mm) (165 mm) (3 x 5 mm) (143 mm)
1
D 95 75 3” 4” 5
5 /8” 5
3 /8”
1
7 /8”
3
4 x /1 6” 6 /4”
E 130 100 1
3 /2”
1
4 /2” 1
6 /8” 4”
5
7 /8”
3
4 x /1 6”
3
6 /4”
HEINEN & HOPMAN ENGINEERING B.V.

Produktieweg 12 - 3751 LN BUNSCHOTEN - THE NETHERLANDS
P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA BUNSCHOTEN - THE NETHERLANDS
TEL. : +31- (0)33-299 25 00 - FAX: +31-(0)33-299 25 99
e-mail: info@heinenhopman.com - www.heinenhopman.com
Drehstrom-K8fig 18ufermotor
Betriebsanleitung DE 7
Moteur a cage
Notice technique FR 12
Motores de jaula de ardilla
Instrucciones ES 17
Istruzioni IT 22
M otori nstru ktioner SE 26
Fl 30
ExampJe of the Declaration of Conformity
gtven by ABB Motors.
EC Dec1aration of Conformity
The Manufacturer :- (Name and address of the manufacturer)
hereby declares that
The Products :- (Product identification)
are in conformity with provisions of the following Council Directives
LowVoltage Directive 73/23/EEC (amended by 93/68/EEC),
and, as components, with the essentiaf requirements ofthe folfowing
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC), regarding the intrinsic
characteristics tc emissicn and immunity levels,
and are In conformity with
EN 60034-1
Additionallnformation :-
By design, the machines, consideredas components,comply with the essential requirements of
Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC (amended by91/368/EEC,93/44/EEC and 93/68/EEC), provided

that the jnstallation be correctly realised by the manufacturer ofthe machfnery (for example : in
compliance withour Installation Instructions and EN 60204 .'ElectricaIEqulpment of Industrial
Machines").
Certificate of1ncorporation ( Directive 89/392/EEC, Art 4,2 andAnnexJl,Sub B)
The machines above must notbe put into service until the machinery jnto whjch theyhave
been incorporated have been declared in conformity with the MachineryDirective.
Year ofCEmarking:CE96
Signed by
Title
Date
Translations into other tanguages are available trom

ABB Motors.
2
BA/ABBMotors!Machine 1nstructions 98-04
Machine Instruc1ions Oirect-on-line or star/delta starting
The terminal box on standard single speed machines
Declaration of Conformity normatly contains 6 winding terminals and at least one
earth terminal.
Declarations of Conformity with respect to the Low
Earthing $halJ be carried out according to loca(
voltage Directive 73/23/EEC amended by Directive 93/68
regulations before the machine is connected tc the
EEC are fssued separately with individual machines.
supply voltage.
The Declaration of Conformity also satisfies the
The voltage and connection are stamped on the rating
requirements of a Declaration of Incorporation with
respect to the Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC, plate.
amended by 91/368/EEC, 93/EEC and 93/68/EEC.
Direct-on-line starting (DOL):
Y ar ~ winding cannectians may be used.
Validity eg 660 VY, 380TorV380
~ indicates Y-cannectian tor 660 V and
~-cannection V. -
The instructions are valfd tor the tollowing ABB Motors
ejectrical machine types, in both motor and generator Star/Delta starting (y/~) :
operation. The supply voltage must be equaJ to the rated voltage of
the machine in L\-connection.
series MU, MT*, MBT*, MXMA,
Remove al! connection links from the termtnal bJock.
series M2A*, M2B*, M2C*, M2F*, M2L *, M2M*, M2R*,
series *OU, OUT,
Fortwo-speed, single phase and special machines,
supply connection must follow the instructions inside the
rn frame sizes 63 -400
terminal box.
(Additional intormation may be required tor some
machine types due to special application and/or design Terminals and direction of rotstion
considerations.) Direction of rotation is clockwise when viewing the shaft
face at the machine drive end, when the line phase
sequence L 1 ,L2,L3 is connected to the terminals as
Putting into service (starting)
shown in the tigure 1 on page 34.
Reception check To alter the direction of rotation, interchange the

Immediately upon receipt check the machine tor external connection of any two line cables.
damage and it tound, intorm the torwarding agent without
delay. If the machine has a uni-directional fan check that the
direction of rotation is according to the arrow marked on
Check al! rating plate data, especially voltage and the machine.
wlnding connection (star or delta).
Use
Turn shaft by hand to check tree rotation, remove
transport locking it employed.
Operaring condirions
Insulation resistance check The machines are intended tor use in industrial drive
Measure insulatian resistance befare cammissianing and appJications.
Normal ambient temperature limits -25° to +40°C.
when winding dampness is suspected.
Maximum altitude 1000 rn above sea level.
Aesistance, measured at 25°C, shall exceed the
reference value, ie Safety considerations
The machine is intended ta be instalIed and used by
Ai ?: 20 x U M ohm (measured with 500 V dc
qualified persannel wha are familiar with relevant safety
1000 + 2P Megger) requirements.
where U = voltage, Volts; p = output power, kW. Safety equipment necessary for the prevention of
accidents at the mounting and operating site shall be
WARNING provided in accordance with the regulations prevailing in
Windings should be discharged immediately after the local country.
measurement to avoid risk tor electric shock.
WARNING
Insulation resistance reference value is halved tor each Smal! motors with supply current directfy
20°C rise in ambient temperature. switched by thermally sensitive switches can
start automatically.
It the reterence resistance value is not attained, the
winding is too damp and must be oven dried. Points to observe
Oven temperature should be 90°C tor 12-16 hours the machine shall not be used to step on
to11owedby 105°C tor 6-8 hours. the temperature of the outer casing of the
machine may be hot to the touch during normal
Drain hole plugs, if fitled, must be removed during operation.
heating. some special machine applications require
special instructions (eg using frequency
Windings drenched rn sea water ncrmally need tc be converter supplies)
rewcund. lifting lugs shall be used tor lifting the motor
alone.
BA/ABB Motors/Machine Instructions 98-04 3

Foundation studs
Handling
Bolt the foundation studs to the feet of the motor and
place a 1-to-2 mm shim between the stud and the feet,
Starage
AII machine starage shauld be dane indaars, in dry, Align the motor direct Iy using appropriate means.
vibratian tree and dust tree canditians.
Grout the studs with concrete, check alignment, and drill
Unprotected machined suriaces (shaft-ends and flanges) holes tor locating pins.
should be given anti-corrosion coatings.
It is recommended that shafts are rotated periodically by Drain holes

hand to prevent grease migration. Check that open drain holes face downwards when the
mounting designation differs from standard.
Anti condensation heaters, if fitled, should preferably be Machines with closable plastic drain plugs are delivered
with these in the open position.
energized. In extremely dusty environments all drain holes should
The characteristics of electrolytic capacitors, if fitled to be closed.
single-phase motors, will require "reforming" following
periods of storage exceeding 1-2 years. Alignment
Contact ABB Motors for details. Correct alignment is essential to avoid bearing failures
vibrations and possible fractured shaft extensions.
Transportation
Machines fitled with cylindrical-roller and/or angular Slide rails and belt drives
contact bearings shall be fitled with locking devices Fasten the machine ta the slide rails as shawn in tigure
during transport. 2 on page 34.
Machine weights Place the slide rails horizontallyon the same level.
Totalweights tor machines vary within the same frame
size (centre height) depending on different outputs, Check that the machine shaft is parallel with driven, ar
different mounting arrangements and different added-on driving, shaft.
special details.
Belt ta be tensianed accarding ta suppliers instructians
The following table shows estimated maximum weights
tor machines in their basic versions as a function of WARNING
frame material. Excessive belt tension will damage bearings and
can cause shaft breakage.
More accurate weight tor a specitic motor can be tound
on the rating plate. Do not exceed the maximum belt torces (ie radial
bearing loadings) stated in the relevant product
Aluminium Cast iron Steel catalogues.
Frame Weight Add. Weight Weight
size kg tor brake kg kg Connection
63 6
71
The normal machine design is with terminal box on top
8 5 13
80
and with cable entry possibilities trom both sides.
12 8 20
90 17 10 30
Same machinesare available, as special salutians, with
100 25 16 40
tap maunted terminal baxes ratatable 4 x 90°, and same
112 36 20 50
with side maunted terminal baxes.
132 63 30 90
160 110 55 170
180
Availability of these solutions is described in the product
160 65 250
200 220 300 catalogues.
225 295 400
250 Unused cable entries must be closed
370 550
280 800 600
315 Besides the main winding and earthing terminals the
1300 1000
355 terminal box can also contain connections tor
2300 1600
400 3500
thermistors, standstill heating elements, bimetallic
switches, or PT 100 resistance elements.
WARNING
Installation Voltage may be connected at standstillinside the
terminal box tor heating elements ordirect
Foundation winding heating.
The purchaserbears full responsibilityforpreparation of
the foundation. Connection
inside diagramsboxtorcover.
the terminal auxiliaryetementsarefound ,
Metal foundations should be paintedto avoid Gorrosion

WARNING
Foundations shall be even, and sufficientlyrigidto The capacitor in sjngle-phasemotorscan retain
withstand possible short circuit forces. Theyshal1 be a charge whichappearsacrossthemotor
dimensioned as to avoid the occurrence of vibration due terminals, evenwhen 1hemotorhasreached
to resonance. standstill.
4
BA/ABBMotors/MaChme1nstructions 98-04
In frequency converter applications motor frame external
Lubrication
earthing must be used tor equalizing the potent!al
between the motor frame and the driven machine, if the ~acb.ines wjth ~rmanentlv greased bearings
two machines are not mounted on the same metallic Machines up ta frame size 180 are normally fitted with
base. Use a flat conductor rather than round wire. permanent Iy greased bearings of either Z ar 2Z types.
Bearing types are specified in the respective product
Assembly and dismantling cataJogues.
Machines fitled with Z-bearings can be regreased by

General dismantling the machine, cJeaning the bearings and
Dismantling and assembly of machines must be carried bearing housings, and filling these with new grease ta
out by qualified personnel using only suitable tools and 50-70%.
working methods.
Guideljnes for regreasing intervals are
Bearings 20 000 -40000 duty hours for ~4 pole machines
Special care shall be taken with the bearings. 10 000 -20 000 duty hours for 2 and 2/4 pole machines.
Bearings shall be removed using puliers and fitled by The shorter times are valid for larger frame sizes.
heating or the use of specialized tools tor the purpose.
Change of bearings is described in detail in a separate Machines fitted with areaseniggles
instruction leaflet available trom ABB Motors. Lubricate the machine while running.
Fitting coupling halves and pulleys If grease outlet plug fitted, remove temporarily when
Coupling halves and pulleys shall be fitled using suitable lubricating, or permanently with automatic lubrication.
equipment and tools that do not damage the bearings.
If the machine is fitted with a lubrication information
Never fit a coupling half or pulley by hammering into plate, follow the values given, otherwise use values as
place or remove it using a lever pressed against the follows.
body of the machine.
Frame Amount 3600 3000 1800 1500 1 000 500-900
Mounting accuracy of coupling half : size of grease r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min
check that the clearance b is less than 0,05 mm and 9
that the difference a1 to a2 is less than 0,05 mm also.
See tigure 3 on page 35. BalI bearings
Lubrication intervals in duty hours
Balancing
The rotor of the machine is dynamically balanced
As standard, balancing has been carried out using half

key, and the shaft is marked with a RED tape, with the
text "Balanced with half key".
To avoid vibration the coupling-half or pulley must be Roller bearings

balanced with half key after the keyway has been Lubrication intervals in duty hours
machined.
In the event of balancing with full key the shaft is 200,225 25 900 1500 4300 5000 6500 7000
250,280 35 400 1000 3300 4500 6300 6800
marked with a YELLOW tape, with the tex1 "Balanced
315 50 400 1000 2700 3800 6000 6500
with full key".
355,400 60 2200 3200 5500 6000
In the event of balancing without key the shaft is marked
with a BLUE tape, with the text "Balanced without key".
The table is prepared tor horizontally mounted machines
Maintenance and lubrication Lubrication intervals for vertical machines are half of the
above values.
General inspection
Inspect the machine at regular intervals- The grease amount in the table is used if small
Keep the machine clean and ensure free quantities of fresh grease are replaced at regular
ventilation air-flow. intervals as above.
Check the condition of shaft seals (eg V-ring) and
replace if necessary. As an alternative, when the machine is fitled with grease
Check the condition of connections and mounting escape valves, fresh grease may be pressed into the
and assembly bolts. bearings until the old grease is totally replaced.
Check the bearing condition by listening for
unusual noise, vibration measurement, bearing The table values are baséd on 80°C bearing temperature.
temperature, inspection of spent grease or SPM The values should be halved tor every 15 K increase in
bearing* When
monitoring.
changes of condition occur, bearing temperature.
dismantie the machine, check the parts If the maximum bearing temperature is 70°C, the table
and replace if necessary. values may be doubled.
WARNING
The maximum operating temperature of the
grease and hearings must not be exceeded
BNABB Motors/Machine Instructions 98-04 !i

Environmental requirements
Higher speed operation, eg frequency converter
applications, or slower speed with heavy loading will Noise levels
require shortened lubrication intervals. Consult ABB
Smaller machines have a sound pressure level which
Motors in such cases.
does nat exceed 70 dB(A) .
The following table indicates those frame sizes where

Typical!ya doubling of speed wil! require a reduction of
sound pressure levels at 1 m from the machine surface
lubrication intervals to approx. 40 % of values tabulated
can exceed 70 dB(A).
above.
Suitability of bearings for high speed operation must also Frame Guideline sound pressure level, dB(A)
be checked. size 2 pole 4 pole 6 pole 8 pole
Lubricants 132 72
When regreasing, use only special balI bearing grease 160 72
with the following properties: 180 72
-good quality lithium base or lithium complex grease 200 72
-base oil viscosity 100-140 cST at 40°C 225 74
-consistency NLGI grade 2 or 3 250 75
-temperature range -30°C -+ 120°C, continuously. 280 77
315 80 71
Greases with the correct properties are available trom al! 355 83 80 75 75
the major lubricant manutacturers. 400 83 80 75 75
If the make of grease is changed and compatibility is

uncertain, lubricate several times at short intervals
inorder to displace the old grease. Values tor specitic machines can be tound in the
relevant product catalogues.
Highly loaded and/or slow Iy rotating bearings require EP-
grease. The table values reter to 50 Hz sinusoidal supply
conditions.
If lubrication intervals are short due to bearing
temperatures of 80°C or above, use high temperature Far 60 Hz sinusaidal supply, add 4 dB(A) ta the abave
greases which normally permit approximately 15 K values.
higher bearing temperatures.
For sound pressure levels with non-sinusoidal supplies,
If the ambient temperature is below -25°C consult ABB contact ABB Motors.
Motors regarding the possible use of low temperature
grease. Sound pressure levels for all machines in the above
frame sizes having separate cooling systems and for
NOTE series M2F*, M2L *, and M2R*, are indicated in separate
For high speed machines (eg larger 2-pole specific Machine Instructions.
machines), check that the fn factor of the
grease is sufficiently high. Rewounding
fn = Dm X n
Rewounding should always be carried out by qualified
Dm = average bearing diameter (mm)
repair shops.
n = rotational speed (r/min) Smoke venting and other special motors should not be
rewound without first contacting ABB Motors.
WARNING
Many greases can cause skin irritation and eye
intlammation.
Follow all safety precautions specified by the
manufactu rer .
Spare parts
When ordering spare parts, the fulr typedesignation and
product code as stated on the rating plate must be
specified.
ff the machine is stamped with a serial manufacturing
number, this should also be given.
6
BAl ABB Motors/Machine Instructions 98-04
L1
PE L1 L2 L3
I I ..
U10
: ~ ~tV26-1 ~-! I
I~ I I 1>-11 .
I [) u () 1 I 9 9 9 I :
l!~tV2
LUl. -vL,W1~ IU':..- \L1:-W:-J I
, , , ,
~ L1 L2 L3 PE
L3' 'L2
Figure 1 Connection diagram

Bild 1. AnschluBdiagram
Figure 1 Connection
Figura 1 Conexión
Figura 1 Collegamento
Figur 1. Anslutningdiagramm
Kuva 1 . Kytkent8.kaavio
Figure 2. Belt drive

Bild 2. Riementrieb
Figure 2. Glissieres et entralnements a courroie
Figure 2. Carriles tensores y correas
Figura 2. Slitte tendicinghia e pulegge
Figur2. Remdrift
Kuva 2. Hihnakáytto
34 BA/ABB Motors/Machine Instructions 98-04

Figure 3. Mounting of half-coupling or pulley
Bild3. Anbau von Kupplungshalften und
Riemenscheiben
Figure 3, Montage des demi-accouplements et des
poulies
Figura 3. Montaje de mitades de acoplamiento y
poleas
Figura 3. Montaggio di semigiunti e pulegge
Figur 3. Montering av koppJinshalvor och drivskivor
Kuva 3. KytkinpuoJikkaan ja hihnapyoran asennus
BA/ABB Motors/Machine Instructions 98-04 35

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2 General principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1 Heat and specific heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Change of state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3 The boiling process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.4 Heat of evaporation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.5 Superheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.6 Temperature-enthalpy diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.7 Pressure-enthalpy diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.8 The condensing process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3 Refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.2 Refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.3 Environmental problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.4 Refrigerant alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.4.1 Refrigerant alternative R123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.4.2 Refrigerant alternatives R134a and R404a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.5 Refrigerants - general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4 The Cooling cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.2 Main components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.2.1 Evaporator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.2.2 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.2.3 Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.3 General cycle description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5 Refrigerant circuit components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

5.1 Evaporator and condenser heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5.1.1 Finned heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5.1.2 Tube heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5.1.3 Plate heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.2 Thermostatic expansion valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.2.1 Working of a thermostatic expansion valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.2.2 Superheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
6 How to use refrigerant charts, tables & diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

6.1 Refrigerant tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
7 Guidelines for service and maintenance - the cooling machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

7.1 Standard service techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
7.1.1 Contaminants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
7.1.1.1 Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
7.1.1.2 Purging non-condensables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
7.1.1.3 To de-air systems with purge valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
7.1.1.4 To ventilate systems without purge valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
7.1.2 Driers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
7.1.2.1 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
7.1.2.2 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
7.1.2.3 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
7.1.2.4 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
7.1.3 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
7.1.4 Gauge manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
7.1.4.1 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
7.1.4.2 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
7.1.4.3 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
7.1.5 Leak testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7.1.5.1 Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Part three Chapter 3 : The coolingsection - 1

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
7.1.5.2 Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7.1.5.3 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7.1.6 Evacuation and dehydration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.1.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.1.6.2 Deep vacuum method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.1.7 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
7.1.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
7.1.7.2 Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
7.1.7 Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
7.1.8 Removing refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
7.1.8.1 Excess charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
7.1.8.2 Complete uncharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
7.1.9 Compressor oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7.1.9.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7.1.9.2 Determining oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7.1.9.3 Oil sight glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7.1.9.4 To determine the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7.1.9.5 Oil level plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
7.1.9.6 Adding oil to a compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
7.1.9.7 Removing oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
7.2 Before the first start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
7.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
7.2.2 Compressorset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
7.2.2.1 Electric motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
7.2.2.2 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
7.2.2.3 Transmission of the compressorset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
7.2.2.4 Drier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
7.2.2.5 Thermostatic expansion valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
7.2.2.6 Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
7.3 Starting and stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7.3.1 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7.3.2 Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7.4.1.1 Daily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7.4.1.2 Monthly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
7.4.2 Compressorset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
7.4.2.1 Weekly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
7.4.2.2 Electric motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
7.4.2.3 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
7.4.3 Transmission of the compressorset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
7.4.3.1 V-belt driven type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
7.4.3.2 Direct driven type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
7.4.4 Drier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
7.4.4.1 Normally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
7.4.4.2 Yearly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
7.4.5 Thermostatic expansion valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
7.4.6 Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
7.4.6.1 Weekly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
7.4.6.2 Yearly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
8 Guidelines for troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

8.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
8.1.1 Frosted or sweating suction line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
8.1.2 Warm liquid line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
8.1.3 Frosted liquid line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
8.1.4 Back pressure lower than normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
8.1.5 No frost of the thermostatic expansion valve or cooling unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
8.1.6 System operates too much or all time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
8.1.7 Storage compartment too cold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
8.1.8 Low operating head pressure on condensing unit
............................................................................................... 34
8.1.9 Head pressure too high . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
8.1.10 Frost on the thermostatic expansion valve only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
8.1.11 Storage compartment warm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

8.1.12 Troubles with electric installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
8.2 Complaints with a enumeration of possible causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
8.2.1 Compressor does not run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
8.2.2 Compressor shortcycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
8.2.2 Condensing pressure too high . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
8.2.4 Refrigerated product not cold enough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
8.2.5 Condensing unit runs too much . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
8.2.6 Hot liquid line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
8.2.7 Frosted or sweating suction line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
8.2.8 Liquid line very cold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
8.2.9 Condensing unit noisy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
8.2.10 Condensing pressure too low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
8.2.11 Not cool enough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
8.1.12 Noisy operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
9 Summery Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
1 Introduction
In this chapter the cooling machine and its components of an air-conditioning installation will be explained. There will also be
looked at the maintance and troubleshooting of a cooling installation.
The dictionary defines refrigeration as a process of making something cold, and "cold" can be defined
as an absence of heat. So refrigeration, despite the means by which it is secured, is defined as the
process of eliminating heat. If heat is eliminated from the air contained in a given space, that space
becomes cooler, and its temperature lower.
Heat is a form of energy and can be transferred from one body to

another by virtue of a difference in temperature. A fundamental law
states that heat may only be transferred from the substance of the
higher temperature to that of the lower temperature. Therefore, figure 3-1
refrigeration becomes a process of providing a substance at a lower
temperature to which heat can flow from a substance at a higher temperature.A cooling machine
has the task to cool parts or substances to a temperature that is lower than the surrounding area
and keep it at this temperature.
The oldest most known refrigerants are ice, water and air. Initial the only purpose was the
figure 3-2 conservation of food for a longer time. The Chinese were the first who discovered that ice could
preserve and gave a better taste to drinks. The Eskimo's have for centuries preserved their food by
freezing it.
In the beginning of the last century bacteries, yeast, mould, enzymes, etc. were known. People discovered that the growth of
these micro organisms was dependable on the temperature. At lower temperatures the growth decreases and under 10EC
there is almost no growth anymore. This knowledge led to the application of cooling for preserving food. At first ice was used for
this purpose.
The first installation for production of artificial ice appeared around 1860. In America in the year 1880 they used the first
ammonia compressors and isolated cells. In the beginning of this century electricity became more important in our society,
because this was the power source for the many mechanical refrigerant installations that were used in breweries, abattoirs, the
fishing industry and the production of ice. After the second world war the development of small hermetic cooling compressors
was going very fast. Refrigerators and freezers started to take their place in for us now indispensable function in the household.
As said, they are considered nowadays as standard equipment in the household.
The applications of cooling installation are multiple. Examples are:

• conserving of provisions
• cooling of drinking water
• cool containers
• heat pumps
• freeze drying
• air drying (dismoisterizing of air)
• air handling
We can hardly imagine how our life would be without cooling and freezing. The influence on our existence is much greater than
people can realize. In this chapter first the basic principles of the cooling technique will be explained. After this the cooling
machine as application of air-conditioning installation is explained. There will also be looked at the components of the cooling
machine.
2 General principles
2.1 Heat and specific heat
Heat is an invisible form of energy that arise from the conversion of other forms of energy in energy of heat. For example; the
mechanical energy needed to rotate a wheel, causes friction that arise heat. Heat is often called a moving form of energy. This
is because heat is always moving from a warm object to a cold object. A tea-spoon placed in a glass of ice water loses its heat
to the water en becomes colder. However in a glass of hot water the tea-spoon absorbs the heat and becomes warmer. The
terms cold and warm are only usable in relation with each other. Only the effect of heat is perceptible and the measuring of it is
the way to define heat. The indication for heat is Q.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
The heat is the product of m x ? T x cp, in which m is the mass in kg, ? T is the change in temperature in EC and cp is the
specific heat. In the metric system the unit for heat is the calorie (cal), this means the quantity of heat needed to raise the
temperature of 1 g of water from 4EC to 5EC. In the cooling techniqic the kilocalorie (kcal) is generally used which is the same
as a 1000 calories. At the SI-system the unit for all the forms of energy (heat included) is joule (J). Conversion from metric to SI:
• 1 cal = 4,187 J
• 1 kcal= 4,187 kJ
There are big differences in the quantity of heat needed to raise the temperature of different
materials 1EC. For example; when we want to raise the temperature 1EC of 1 kg iron, there is
0,478 kJ of heat needed. 1 kg of air needs 1,00 kJ of heat. The specific heat (cp) is the amount of
heat needed to raise the temperature 1EC of 1 kg of a substance. The specific heat of a large
amount of substances is displayed in different charts as kJ/kgK (kcal/kgEC).
2.2 Change of state
Every substance can appear in three conditions (states): solid, liquid and gaseous. Water is the
most known example, in solid state as ice, in liquid state as water and in gaseous state as steam
figure 3-3 or vapour. For all the three states the water molecules does not change, the chemical formula is
always H2O. The temperature and pressure the substance is exposed to, define the state of the substance. When ice changes
into water the temperature during melting does not change. All the supplied energy is needed to change the substance from
solid form into liquid form. Only when the substance is entirely melted, the supply of heat will raise the temperature again.
The 'ice boxes' of the past were periodically charged with a cake of ice. The ice melted and the
pan of water below the box had to be 'emptied' on schedule to avoid overflow. In melting from a
solid to a liquid, the ice absorbed its latent heat of fusion. This is 334 kJ/kg ice, and the heat to
accomplish this was removed from the foodstuffs within the box. The water was discarded,
although it was cold because it had very limited refrigeration capacity. This is true because 4.18 kJ
raises the temperature of 1 kg of water one degree. Therefore, if 1 kg of water at 0 EC absorbs
41.8 kJ its temperature rises ten degrees to 10 EC. This defeats the cooling effect of ice.
The change-of-state process is important to the mechanical refrigeration cycle for two reasons.
First, the change absorbs a relatively large amount of heat per kg of substance; and second, this
change-of-state takes place at constant temperature.
figure 3-4
2.3 The boiling process
Since the properties of water are easily observed and since its behavior is similar too commonly used refrigerants, water is
used here to demonstrate the boiling process and to establish terminology.
If 1 kg of water is heated, its temperature increases 1 EC for each 4.18 kJ added. This process
continues until the water reaches its boiling point. The boiling point is determined by the pressure
over the water. In an open container the pressure over the water is atmospheric. In a closed
container the vapour pressure determines the boiling pressure. At a standard sea level pressure of
1.01 bar water boils at 100 EC.
SEA LEVEL
1,01 bar
If the pressure is higher than 1.01 bar, the temperature at which

100 EC
water boils also increases. For example, the boiling point for water in
figure 3-5
a pressure cooker operating at 0.34 bar above atmospheric pressure
figure 3-6 is 108 EC. At a pressure of 3.45 bar the temperature increases to 148 EC. Conversely, if the
pressure is less than 1.01 bar, as in vacuum, the temperature at which water boils is lower. For
instance, at a pressure corresponding to 0.67 bar the boiling temperature of water is 89 EC and at 0.33 bar, it is 72 EC. If the
pressure is lowered still further, water can be made to boil at temperatures sufficiently low to be used for air-conditioning
purposes.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
At any given pressure there is a corresponding boiling or saturation temperature:

1,35 bar 4,4 bar
Boiling temperature (E C) Pressure (bar)
148 4.54
108 1.35 108 EC 148 EC
89 0.67
72 0.33
10 0.01
At the boiling point either the pressure or the temperature establishes other \TEKENING\FIG2_7.ROB
properties of the liquid, such as heat content (enthalpy), density and volume. Water
figure 3-7
at the boiling temperature for a given pressure is called saturated liquid.
2.4 Heat of evaporation

SATURATED
After a fluid has been heated to the boiling point, further addition of heat results in VAPOR
evaporation of the fluid. The heat required to change the liquid to a vapour at the boiling 100 EC
point is called the heat of evaporation. At a standard barometric pressure of 1.01 bar
it takes 2260 kJ to complete the evaporation of 1 kg of water at 100 EC to steam at 100 LATENT HEAT
EC. OF
VAPORIZATION
At this point 1 kg of dry saturated vapour has been produced. The amount of fluid 100 EC 1 kg WATER
that evaporates depends on the amount of heat added and the heat of evaporation
of the particular fluid. If 226 kJ is added to water at its saturation temperature of 100 2260 kJ
EC, 1/10 kg of water will evaporate.
If 22,600 kJ is added, 10 kg of water will evaporate. If only part of the fluid

evaporates, the result is a mixture of saturated liquid and saturated vapour.
2.5 Superheat figure 3-8
SATURATED VAPOR
100 EC PRESSURE IS CONSTANT The point of saturated vapour is reached if there is added enough heat to a fluid.
If the fluid is completely evaporated and there is more heat added, we call this
additional heat "superheat." The change-of-state has been completed, so the
additional heat results in a rise in temperature of the vapour. In the superheat
region, the vapour expands slightly in volume as its temperature is raised.
WATER Moreover, the specific heat of the vapour is different from that of the liquid. For
100 EC
example: water, it takes only 2.0 kJ to raise 1 kg of vapour 1 EC in temperature. If
HEAT ADDED
SUPER HEATED VAPOR 1 kg of steam is superheated 30 EC, then 30 * 2 = 60 kJ is required.
figure 3-9
2.6 Temperature-enthalpy D
diagram
B C
The characteristics of a substance can be illustrated in a temperature-

enthalpy (t-H) diagram. On the horizontal axis the enthalpy is displayed and on
the vertical axis the temperature is displayed. Enthalpy is often indicated as
the heat content and is the sum of energy supplied to a medium. To further
simplify the demonstration, assume 1 kg of water at a standard atmospheric
pressure of 1,01 bar. Starting at point 'A', of figure 1.9, shows that 1 kg of
water at 0 EC has a heat content or enthalpy of 0 kJ/kg (figure 3-10).
A
figure 3-10

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
Line A-B represents the sensible heat needed to raise the water to its boiling point temperature or saturated liquid temperature at
100 EC. As stated previously, for every degree rise 4.18 kJ must be absorbed by the liquid. Therefore, the heat content at 100 EC
is 100 × 4.18 = 418 kJ.
Line B-C represents the latent heat of evaporation needed to completely change 1 kg of saturated liquid at point 'B' to dry saturated
vapour at point 'C'. The heat of evaporation for water at standard atmospheric pressure is 2260 kJ/kg. Therefore, the enthalpy of the
dry saturated vapour at point 'C' is 418 + 2260 = 2678 kJ. As shown in the diagram the change-of-state from point 'B' to 'C'
represents no change in temperature. Therefore, we call this latent.
Line C-D illustrates the effect of adding sensible heat to saturated vapour. This process is called superheating. For every degree
of superheat 2 kJ must be added. For example, if 30 degrees of superheat is required, the temperature at point 'D' is 100 + 30 = 130
EC and to accomplish this 30 * 2.0 = 60 kJ must be added.
The enthalpy of the superheated vapour at point 'D' becomes 2678 + 60 = 2738 kJ.
2.7 Pressure-enthalpy diagram
Since the t-H diagram is restricted to a particular pressure, the pressure- p-H DIAGRAM FOR H2O
enthalpy (p-H) diagram is more commonly used because of its greater flexibility. CRITICAL POINT
The temperature can readily be related to the pressure as was indicated earlier 221.5
(see figure SUBCOOLED SUPERHEAT

3-11). REGION REGION
MIXTURE OF
WATER & VAPOR
Similar diagrams are available for the commonly used refrigerants. By drawing
a horizontal line at a given pressure, it is possible to determine the heat content SATURATED
LIQUID LINE
SATURATED
VAPOR LINE
of the saturated liquid. This is done by reading the enthalpy scale corresponding
to point 'A' on the saturated liquid line. A HEAT OF B
VAPORIZATION
The heat content at point 'B' for saturated vapour can be determined in a similar
manner. The difference in enthalpy between points 'A' and 'B' is the heat of
evaporation.
2117 2791
ENTHALPY (kJ/kg)
2.8 The condensing process figure 3-11
The change-of-state from liquid to vapour is reversible; that is, the fluid can be changed from a vapour back to liquid. This
process is called 'condensing'. Just as heat must be added to affect evaporation, heat must be taken away to change a vapour
back into a liquid, and in the same amount. Just as pressure establishes the temperature at which a fluid boils, pressure also
fixes the temperature at which condensation takes place.
3 Refrigerants
3.1 Introduction
We already saw that if we want to make sure that the crew members feel comfortable during the working and resting period, we
have to regulate the temperature of the different spaces in the ship. Therefore the temperature of the air must be lowered or
raised to an optimum level. In case of raising the temperature we use a heater in the air-conditioning installation. When we want
to lower the temperature of the air, we use a cooler.
In every refrigeration installation there is a quantity of refrigerant. The refrigerant is a liquid or a gas with fixed properties.
Because the boilingpoint of refrigerants lays far below 0EC, the refrigerants only exist in gaseous state at surrounding pressure
(1 bar). When we raise the pressure with a compressor but we keep the same temperature, the gaseous refrigerant will at
some point change-of-state and becomes liquid.
The refrigeration effect of a cooling installation is based on the evaporation of liquid refrigerant at low temperature. The
refrigerant absorbs surrounding heat during evaporation. Because of this process, the surrounding temperature is lowered. In
case of an air-conditioning installation the air is cooled, transported and blown into different spaces in the ship.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
The first practical use of piston-compressors was during the years 1870 - 1880. At this time there was the disposal of the
refrigerant ammonia. For a good practical use of a substance as a refrigerant the following properties are needed:
• A large evaporation and condensation heat

The larger the heattransfer for a determined refrigerant (from liquid to vapour and reversed), the less refrigerant has to flow
through a cooling machine. Therefore, the compressor can be chosen much smaller in capacity.
• Low evaporating pressure (0 - 5 bar) and condensation pressure (1 - 15 bar).

The higher the pressure, the thicker the compressor- and evaporator material. Also a good quality of lubrication oil is needed
to make sure that cilinderwalls will be well lubricated at this continuing cooling process.
Although ammonia as a refrigerant satisfies this need and is much applied for industrial cooling machines, it is not much applied
for the air handling units because it is too dangerous. This is because ammonia is poisonous, very inflammable at temperatures
above 650EC and very explosive at a concentration of 1,5% ammonia in the air. Until 1940 CO2 (carbonic dioxide) was used as
a refrigerant but there was a high condensation pressure needed. Also SO2 or sulphur dioxide was used but this is also very
poisonous.
Water as a refrigerant possesses, just like ammonia, very good qualities: it is cheap and has a large evaporation heat.
Unfortunately the evaporating pressure needed for the cooling of the air is very low (vacuum) and is very difficult to reach with a
mechanical cooling compressor (tightening).
3.2 Refrigerants
In the beginning of this century, people discovered the dangers of the then known refrigerants used for air handling (poisonous,
explosion- and burning danger). The American company Dupont has done a lot of research between 1928 and 1935 and has
produced some new types of refrigerants that were named "Freon." The first refrigerant was R12 (Freon 12) and satisfied the
then needed requirements, including safety. In the fifties some practical refrigerants were developed for the different application
in the cooling technic. These refrigerants could apparently be used without any danger.
3.3 Environmental problems
During the years 1989 and 1990 international environmental experts attended humanity on a new environmental danger, the
depletion of the ozone layer which was caused by CFK's used in cooling installations. Because of this, a high ultraviolet
radiation-level can reach the earth which can cause skin-cancer. Also showed accurate measurements that different waste
gases such as CO2 form an isolation layer around the earth (green-house-effect). Because of this the solar radiation that
provides life on earth can be much harder radiated back into the universe. Therefore the atmosphere around the earth is heated
stronger then normal with the danger of extra meltingwater of the North- and Southpole and therefore the raise of the sealevel.
During the environmental conference in Copenhagen in 1995 there was decided that delivery, application and the use of CFK-
refrigerants become forbidden to ensure a fast CFK-reduction.
3.4 Refrigerant alternatives
The manufacturers of refrigerants developed in the years 1988 and 1990 two replacing refrigerants. These are R123 and
R134a.
3.4.1 Refrigerant alternative R123
The refrigerant R123 is a replacement for the low pressure refrigerant R11. R123 has a less damaging effect on the ozone layer
then R11. It also has almost the same thermodynamic characteristics as R11 and can even be mixed without problems with
R11. Existing installations can be refilled in a short time with R123. The short term testing results have shown that R123 is a
safe but in some degree poisonous refrigerant. The long term testing results will become available within the following years.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
3.4.2 Refrigerant alternatives R134a and R404a
The refrigerants R134a and R404a are replacements for the high pressure refrigerants R12 and R500 and possible even R22.
Not so long ago there were still problems with R134a. This refrigerant cannot be combined with the till now used synthetic oil
and refrigerants.
3.5 Refrigerants - general
Heinen & Hopman normally uses R-22 or R-134A for their installations. Both are clear to water, practically odorless, non-
irritating, non-toxic (except in open flame), non-explosive and non-combustible. They are supplying chemically pure and dry in
sealed containers ranging from small cans to cylinders or drums over a 1000 kg.
There is no universal refrigerant for every application. Each has unique characteristics considered by the equipment
manufacturer. Additional factors to consider include the relationship with oil, controllability, stability, availability and cost.
Because of the different characteristics, refrigerants should never be mixed or substituted in a system. Check the refrigerant
specification on the compressor nameplate or refer to the manufacturer documents.
The refrigerants used by Heinen & Hopman are very suitable for use in refrigeration machines because :
• The working pressures are not high so that the machinery does not have to be unduly heavy in construction, and leakage
through glands etc., is minimized.
• It has no chemical action on most metals.
• It will condensate at relatively high temperatures, which makes it suitable for most conditions.
• They are non-inflammable and non-explosive, but when any quantity of refrigerant gas is being blown into the atmosphere,
naked lights should be extinguished. This is because it has been found that refrigerant gas is liable to decompose in the
presence of a naked flame and the products of decomposition are unpleasant to inhale.
Since the used refrigerants are odorless, small leaks may remain undetected until they adversely affect the functioning of the
plant. The presence of oil at a joint or gland is a good early indication of leakage. It is therefore advisable to keep the plant, and
all joints particularly, externally clean and free from oil. Other methods of leak detection are explained in the chapter "Guidelines
for service and maintenance."
4 The Cooling cycle
4.1 Introduction
In this chapter the principle of the cooling machine will be explained. First the different fases of the working of the cooling
machine will be explained. After this the general cycle description will be explained.
The principle of the cooling machine is based on the following four functions:
• Expansion
• Evaporation
• Compression THERMOSTATIC
EXPANSION VALVE
• Condensation B
HOT GAS LINE
These four functions are obtained by the following three main components of A C
D
the cooling machine: EVAPORATOR
SUCTION LINE
CONDENSOR
• Evaporator
• Compressor LIQUID LINE COMPRESSOR
• Condenser RECEIVER
figure 3-12
4.2 Main components
4.2.1 Evaporator
A refrigerant in liquid form will take on heat during evaporation. This change of state leads to the cooling in the cooling process. If
a refrigerant of surrounding temperature is expanded to surrounding pressure through a tube, heat is withdrawn from the
surrounding area. In this case evaporation will take place that corresponds with the surrounding pressure.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
The part of the cooling process in which this process takes place is called the evaporator. The task of the evaporator is to
withdraw heat from the surrounding area, in other words the cooling.
4.2.2 Compressor
Because of the environment it is not allowed to expand the refrigerant into the free
atmosphere. Because of this, the cooling process must take place in a closed circuit.
If the refrigerant which leaves the evaporator is lead to a receiver, the pressure in the
receiver will be the same as the pressure in the evaporator. The result will be that the
circulation of refrigerant will stop and the temperature in the evaporator will become the
same as the surrounding temperature. To maintain a lower pressure and therefore a
lower temperature, it is necessary to remove vapour/gas. This is done by a
compressor that sucks in the refrigerant gas from the evaporator. (figure 3-13) A
compressor can be compared with a pump that moves the refrigerant gas through the
cooling circuit. In a closed system there will be always a balance. For example: if the
compressor sucks in the refrigerant gas much faster then it can be formed in the
evaporator, the pressure and therefore the temperature will lower. Or reversed, if the
load of the evaporator is increased and the refrigerant will evaporate faster, the
pressure and temperature in the evaporator will increase. figure 3-13
4.2.3 Condenser
The refrigerant transfers its heat to the condenser and this heat is transferred to a medium with a lower temperature. The heat
transferring (heat receiving) medium can be air or water. The only condition of this medium is that the temperature is lower than the
temperature in the condenser, which corresponds to the condensation pressure. The process in the condenser is comparable to
the process in the evaporator, only in opposite direction. In this case a change in phase is from vapour to liquid.
4.3 General cycle description
A continues cooling process can be obtained by several ways. The most applied is the compression system. The compression
system is characterized by two pressures:
• The low pressure or evaporating side
• The high pressure or compression side
As said before the refrigerant transports the heat that is collected in the evaporator to the condenser where it is transferred to air
or water. A change of state for the refrigerant from liquid to vapour and back again to liquid makes it possible to take on or give off
large quantities of heat in an efficient way.
THERMOSTATIC
EXPANSION VALVE
Next the principle of the coolingprocess is described (figure 3-14). B
HOT GAS LINE
Liquid refrigerant entering the evaporator is controlled by an automatic throttling A C

D
device called the thermostatic expansion valve. This valve allows the high EVAPORATOR
SUCTION LINE
CONDENSOR
pressure liquid refrigerant to expand; thus, reducing it from condenser to
evaporator pressure. The expansion valve is one of the division points between LIQUID LINE COMPRESSOR
the 'high pressure' and the 'low pressure' side of the system. RECEIVER
Because of the reduction of pressure (to atmospheric pressure) the refrigerant figure 3-14
begins to boil and evaporates at a low temperature (with R22 this is -41EC). It immediately begins to absorb heat from the air that
is flowing across the evaporator surface. The refrigerant continues to absorb heat in the evaporating coil until it is completely
evaporated.
Due to the 'sucking' action of the compressor, the gas thus produced is drawn through the
suction line into the compressor cylinder. The down stroke of the piston admits a cylinder full
of gas through the suction valve. On the upstroke of the cylinder the gas is compressed,
thereby raising temperature and pressure of the gas (figure 3-15). The compressed gas is kept
from re-entering the cylinder on its next down stroke by the compressor discharge valve. The
pressure thus produced causes the hot gas to flow to the condenser. EFFECT OF COMPRESSION ON
BOTH TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RISE
figure 3-15

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
The compressor discharge valve, like the thermostatic expansion valve, marks a division between the 'high pressure' and 'low
pressure' side. After the compressed gas has passed the discharge valve and enters the condenser, heat flows from the hot gas
into the condensing medium. This action cools the compressed gas and changes it back into a liquid.
This liquid under pressure is collected in the receiver and then forced through the liquid line to the thermostatic expansion valve, and
the cycle repeats itself.
5 Refrigerant circuit components
In this part the different circuit components of a cooling installation will be explained.
5.1 Evaporator and condenser heat exchanger
In a heat exchanger (evaporator (figure 3-16) or condenser (figure 3-17)) heat is transferred through a wall between media with
different temperatures. In the evaporator and condensing heat exchanger the heat transfer on one side of the wall is characterized
by the change of state. In the evaporator this is a change of state from liquid to vapour, in the condenser from vapour to liquid. As
said before in this process a large quantity of heat is transferred. The cooling media can be air or water.
figure 3-16 figure 3-17
The heat exchange of the condenser and evaporator depends on different factors which are:
• the cooling surface
• the temperature between the cooling medium and the refrigerant
• the speed of the refrigerant flow along the pipes
• condenser material
• the cleanness of the heat exchanging surface
Dirt and lime tarnish on the waterside will influence the heat exchange in a bad way.
If we use an air cooled evaporator or condenser we can use the following types:
• Finned pipe heat exchanger
• Tube heat exchanger
• Plate heat exchanger
5.1.1 Finned heat exchanger
These are heat exchangers where the evaporating or condensing refrigerant flows through U-formed copper tubes. On the outside
of the tubes aluminium finns are mounted which transfers the heat. The air flows along the finned tubes on the outside. Sometimes
the copper tubes are foreseen from spiral formed inside grooves to improve the heattransfering process (almost 30%) without extra
refrigerant resistant.
5.1.2 Tube heat exchanger
These heat exchangers are used for cooling of liquids or condensing of the refrigerant by means of water. In case of a cooled water
evaporator the evaporating refrigerant flows through tubes (except for centrifugal cooling machines) and the cooling water through
a pressure vessel (shell). In a watercooled condenser the cooling water flows through tubes and the refrigerant condenses on the
outside of the tubes in the pressurevessel. The outside of the tubes is often covered with finns to increase the condensing surface.
The tubes are constructed from copper and are used in installations on land with non corrosive water. For use on ships and
corrosive water the tubes are constructed from cupro/nickel.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
5.1.3 Plate heat exchanger
This type of heat exchanger is constructed from plates varying in shape from flat and crosswise waved stainless steel. In this way
the heat exchange through the plates from evaporating or condensation heat takes place between the liquid and the evaporating
or condensing refrigerant. The direction of the cooling liquid and refrigerant flow is generally opposite. This type of heat exchanger
is sensitive for obstruction and therefore there is often a waterfilter used in the water supply tube.
5.2 Thermostatic expansion valve
The most important task of an expansion device is to ensure sufficient pressure difference between the high- pressure and low-
pressure side of the system. The most simple way is to place a conduct-tube, with a small diameter, between the condenser and
evaporator. This is called a capillary tube. The expansion capillar is only used in small, simple cooling machines such as
refrigerators. This is because of the fact that this device cannot control the quantity of refrigerant which is injected in the evaporator.
For this process be a metering device must be used. The most common device is a thermostatic expansion valve.
A thermostatic expansion valve is a precision device designed to meter the flow of refrigerant into the evaporator. The flow of
refrigerant is in exact proportion to the rate of evaporation of the refrigerant in the evaporator. It is by that preventing the return of liquid
refrigerant to the compressor. Figure 3-18 shows a picture of a thermostatic expansion valve. By being responsive to the
temperature of the refrigerant gas leaving the evaporator and the pressure in the evaporator, the thermostatic expansion valve can
control the refrigerant gas leaving the evaporator at a predetermined superheat. The valve is built up around a thermostatic element
(1) separated from the valve body by a diaphragm. A capillary tube connects the element to a bulb (2) and a valve body with valve
seat (3) and a spring (4).In a part of the bulb there is a small amount of fluid. In the rest of the bulb, capillary tube and the space
above the diaphragm there is saturated vapour with a pressure that correspond with the temperature of the bulb.
5.2.1 Working of a thermostatic expansion valve
The function of a thermostatic expansion valve is determined by three fundamental pressures:

P1: Bulb pressure that acts on the upper surface of the diaphragm, in the valve opening direction.
P2: Evaporating pressure that acts on the underside of the diaphragm, in the valve closing
direction.
P3: Spring pressure that also acts on the underside of the diaphragm, in the valve closing
direction. (figure 3-18)
The bulb of the thermostatic expansion valve placed immediately after the evaporator, opens on
rising superheat. Pressure on the diaphragm increases when bulb temperature increases. The
pressure under the diaphragm increases when the evaporating temperature increases. The
pressure differential, which correspond to the refrigerant superheat, manifests itself as a force that
tries to open the valve against the opposite force of the spring. If the differential in superheat,
exceeds the spring force the valve will open. When the expansion valve regulates, balance is
created between bulb pressure on one side of the diaphragm and evaporating pressure plus spring
force on the other side.
As the refrigerant is injected into the evaporator and moves along, the liquid boils off into a vapour.
Because of this, the amount of fluid decreases until all of the liquid has evaporated due to the
absorption of a quantity of heat from the surrounding atmosphere. By the time refrigerant gas
reaches the end of the evaporator the refrigerant gas is now superheated. The degree to which the
refrigerant gas is superheated depends on the amount of refrigerant being fed to the evaporator and
the load to which the evaporator is exposed. figure 3-18
The factory superheat setting of the thermostatic expansion valves is made with the valve pin just starting to move away from the
seat. Thermostatic expansion valves are so designed that an increase in superheat of the refrigerant gas leaving the evaporator,
is necessary for the valve pin to open to its rated position.
5.2.2 Superheat
Superheat is measured at the point where the bulb is located on the suction line. This is the difference between the temperature at
the bulb and the evaporating pressure/ evaporating temperature at the same point. Superheat is measured in Kelvin (K) or EC and
is used as a signal to regulate liquid injection through the expansion valve.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
6 How to use refrigerant charts, tables & diagrams
6.1 Refrigerant tables
To design equipment for use with a particular refrigerant, the designer must have access to its thermodynamic properties. These
are published by the refrigerant manufacturer, for example for the refrigerant R22:
t P V1 Vv hl hv t P Vl Vv hl hv
-90 0.05 0.65 3580.66 105.49 364.40 -10 3.54 0.76 65.34 188.43 401.56
-80 0.11 0.66 1763.19 115.06 369.31 -5 4.21 0.77 55.34 194.18 403.50
-70 0.21 0.67 940.94 124.81 374.23 0 4.98 0.78 47.14 200.00 205.36
-60 0.38 0.68 537.15 134.76 379.11 5 5.84 0.79 40.36 205.90 407.14
-55 0.50 0.69 414.83 139.83 381.53 10 6.81 0.80 34.71 211.88 408.84
-50 0.64 0.70 324.56 144.96 383.92 15 7.89 0.81 29.99 217.94 410.43
-45 0.83 0.70 256.99 150.15 386.28 20 9.10 0.82 26.00 224.08 411.92
-40 1.05 0.71 205.75 155.41 388.61 25 10.44 0.84 22.62 230.32 413.29
-35 1.32 0.72 166.40 160.74 390.90 30 11.92 0.85 19.74 236.66 414.53
-30 1.64 0.73 135.84 166.14 393.14 35 13.55 0.87 17.27 243.11 415.63
-25 2.01 0.73 111.86 171.61 395.33 40 15.34 0.88 15.14 249.69 416.56
-20 2.45 0.74 92.84 177.14 397.47 45 17.29 0.90 13.28 250.40 417.31
Table 3-19. : Table for R22
t = Temperature of the saturated refrigerant in (EC)

P = Vapour pressure of the saturated refrigerant in (bar).
Vl = Specific volume of the liquid in (dm 3/kg).
Vv = Specific volume of the saturated vapour in (*103 dm 3/kg).
hl = Enthalpy of the liquid in (kJ/kg).
hv = Enthalpy of the saturated vapour in (kJ/kg).
Pressure = Bar exerted at a given temperature. Determines equipment strength and, therefore, affects equipment cost, high
pressure usually results in high equipment cost.
Specific volume = Cubic meters of space required when one kg of refrigerant liquid evaporates. Influences the equipment size.
Enthalpy = Heat content of refrigerant. This is a measure for liquid heat and vapour heat. The latent heat is a measure of
the refrigeration or cooling effect. The difference in enthalpy between the liquid and the saturated vapour is the
latent heat of evaporation at the given temperature.
Table 3-19 shows that one kg of R-22 in liquid state, at 5 EC has an enthalpy of 205.9 kJ/kg. It also shows that at saturated
conditions, the pressure increases with the temperature. In the superheat region, however, pressure and temperature no longer
corresponds, and this introduces another variable in defining the condition of the refrigerant. Therefore, superheat tables are much
more extensive. For every refrigerant, superheat tables are available.
7 Guidelines for service and maintenance - the cooling machine
In the former chapters we looked at the different parts of the cooling section. Because a cooling machine is just like other mechanical
equipment not free of maintenance, it is important to know what to do when maintenance is needed. Because of that we look in this
chapter at several service and maintenance techniques.
7.1 Standard service techniques
A cooling machine contains a harmful refrigerant under pressure. LEAK DANGER! Keep room well ventilated. In the
presence of an open flame, freon is liable to decompose in toxic gases. Always put the main- and/or workswitch off during
activities at the machine. Only qualified personal is authorized to execute the following activities at the cooling machine

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
7.1.1 Contaminants
7.1.1.1 Effect
The serviceman shall always keep the refrigerant system as clean and dry as possible. Otherwise, contaminants may enter or
develop and cause poor operation or failure. Some contaminants are : air, moisture, antifreeze agents, soldering flux, solvent, metal
chips and dirt. Some of their harmful effects are: sludging, corrosion, copperplating, freezing-up and restrictions.
The chemical breakdown of oil under high temperature in the presence of air or a non-condensable may cause sludging. Corrosion
is caused by air or an oxidizer in a high temperature. Also, soldering flux or acid may cause rust or corrosion. Copperplating can
be traced to contaminated oil that dissolves copper in the system. It then will transfer to a high temperature area such as bearings,
seals or valve plates. Here it is precipitated out by another contaminant such as water, alcohol or air. Freezing-up occurs when a
wet system is placed into operation or a leak develops in a refrigerant to water system operating below 0 EC. A freeze-up can be
significant to the serviceman because it alerts him or her to the presence of a contaminant in the system.
7.1.1.2 Purging non-condensables
A leak in the suction side of a system operating in a vacuum or an improper installation will
PURGE VALVE
allow air and other non-condensables to enter the system. Their presence is indicated by
excessive head pressure and/or reduced system capacity. The non-condensables tend to
accumulate in the high pressure side of the system. They also tend to accumulate at the
top of the condenser or receiver because they are lighter than refrigerant vapour. Many
systems have purge valves to allow non-condensable venting (figure 3-20).
figure 3-20
7.1.1.3 To de-air systems with purge valves.
• Shut down the system by turning the main- and/or work-switch off and allow it to reach ambient temperature.
• Compare the system pressure to the corresponding refrigerant pressure for ambient temperature.
• A higher system pressure indicates the presence of non-condensables. Give non-condensables time to rise to the system
high point.
• Slowly open the purge valve until gas can be heard venting from the port. Limit the opening because liquid refrigerant will boil
and remix non-condensables into refrigerant.
• Ventilate for about ten seconds and close the valve.
Some V-shaped condensers have two purge valves. Open them alternately.
• Restart the system if reduction in discharge pressure occurs. Run the system normally for several hours.
• If the discharge pressure is still high repeat steps 1 to 4.
7.1.1.4 To ventilate systems without purge valves
• Remove and salvage the refrigerant. Ventilate off any remaining.

• Allow the refrigerant container to set undisturbed for several hours.
• Crack the container valve and ventilate off non-condensables.
• Leak test and evacuate the system.
• Charge the system.
7.1.2 Driers
After disconnecting the cooling machine some parts may be cold (pipes).
FREEZING DANGER!
7.1.2.1 Use
Regardless of the degree of caution, workmanship and ability an installer or serviceman exercises, a small amount of residual
moisture and solid particles is nearly always left in the field built-up system. Therefore, every field-piped system must contain
some type of refrigerant drier.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
7.1.2.2 Construction
A drier is a container with inlet and outlet connections (figure 3-21). Inside is a chemical
compound called a desiccant.
The desiccant either physically holds (adsorbs) or chemically reacts with the residual
moisture and prevent it from circulating throughout the system. Most desiccants have
some degree of acid removal ability. They have some form of filtering screen or pad to
prevent the desiccant from entering into the system and also to remove solid particles
already in circulation. Some desiccants are cast or molded into the form of a cylinder to figure 3-21
improve their filtering ability. These are called filterdriers. Some desiccants are field
removable and replaceable.
7.1.2.3 Selection
A good general rule is always to use the drier type and size recommended by the unit manufacturer. Where no recommendation
is available, the drier should be selected according to the following factors :
• Water capacity - How much will it pick up and hold?

• Refrigerant flow rate - What flow rate of refrigerant can it sustain without excessive pressure drop?
• Safety - Will it be able to mechanically withstand the pressures encountered within the system?
• Acid removal ability - Will it pick up and hold acids?
• Filtration ability - How small a solid particle will it retain and how much before it plugs up?
• Size - Will it fit in the unit?
The unit manufacturer can more closely control the entrance of moisture and contaminants than the average installer or
serviceman. When replacing a factory-installed drier, always use the next larger size.
7.1.2.4 Precautions
• Never accept or install a drier or replacement desiccant that is not factory sealed.
• Never abuse or mishandle the drier.
• Once the seals have been removed from the drier or desiccant, install it immediately.
figure 3-22
7.1.3 Handling
To avoid the entrance of contaminants into a system via the refrigerant container only factory filled
and sealed containers should be used. Facts to remember :
• Fusible metal plugs (figure 3-23) are designed to protect the cylinder in case of fire. They may
not protect the cylinder from gradual and uniform overheating.
• The interstate commerce commission prescribes that a liquefied compressed gas container
shall not be liquid full below 55 EC. Above 55 EC, liquid refrigerant will completely fill a container figure 3-23
and the hydrostatic pressure will build up rapidly with each degree of temperature
• Fusible metal plugs begin to soften at 71 EC and melt completely at 74 EC. The hydrostatic pressure developed at 74 EC is far
more than the cylinder test pressure.
• Never apply a direct flame to a refrigerant cylinder.
• To provide some margin of safety, never heat a cylinder above 52 EC.
• Never place an electric resistance heater in direct contact with a refrigerant cylinder.
• Never transfer refrigerant from one cylinder to another without a refrigerant transfer pump.
• Do not drop, dent or otherwise abuse refrigerant cylinders.
• Always replace valve and hood cap when a cylinder is not in use or empty.
• Use the proper valve wrench for opening or closing the valve. Loosen the valve packing nut before turning the valve on;
retighten after closing.
• Secure all cylinders in an upright position with a chain or strap when they are not mounted in a suitable stand.
• Never exceed the weight marked on the container (figure 3-24).

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
7.1.4 Gauge manifold
7.1.4.1 Use
LOW HIGH
One of the most useful tools for the serviceman is a gauge manifold. It is an instrument and
should be treated as such. Figure 3-25 shows a typical gauge manifold. It contains two shut-off
valves and three external connections. When both valves are closed (front seated) the center or
utility port is isolated. The ports above and below each valve are interconnected so the gauges
will register always when connected to a system.
VALVE VALVE
The left-hand gauge is a compound or suction pressure gauge. The right-hand gauge is the
figure 3-25
high or discharge pressure gauge. Flexible charging lines or hoses connect the manifold to the
system. To determine system operation, add charge, purge, equalize or evacuate (figure 3-27).
Services gauges should have the best degree of accuracy that is commercially available.
7.1.4.2 Care
• Never drop or abuse the gauge manifold.

• Have the gauges checked and adjusted regularly.
• Keep the ports or charging lines capped when not in use.
• Be sure the hoses meet the high-pressure requirements.
• Never use with any fluid other than clean oil and refrigerant.
• Prevent the hoses from being chafed, crushed or stretched.
• Never subject gauges to pressures higher than the scale face maximum or a high-pressure gauge to vacuum.
7.1.4.3 Connection
low high low high
Most systems have a high- and low-pressure service tap point for checking
pressures and charging. They may be located on the compressor shut-off close open open close
valves, liquid valves or as independent points (ex. Schrader valve). Note that
Schrader service valve ports require an adapter fitting or a core remover CHARGING OR
between the service valve and the hose. See figure 3-28. These ports should PURGING
ADDING OIL
always be leaktight and capped or plugged when not in use. low high
low high
The procedure is the same for all type of service ports if the system is
pressurized : open open close close
GAUGE
• Locate the usable high- and low-pressure service ports. BY-PASSING READING
• Backseat shut-off valves to isolate the ports from the system.
• Slowly remove plug or cap. Vent residual pressure to the atmosphere. figure 3-27
Install an adapter in the plug hole for a male flare fitting.
• Be sure both manifold valves are closed (front seated).
a - Connect the low-pressure manifold hose to the low-pressure service port.
b - Connect the high-pressure manifold hose to the high-pressure service port.
c - If the utility hose is used for charging or evacuating, connect it to the refrigerant cylinder or vacuum line. Otherwise, leave
it plugged.
• a - Crack open the low-pressure service port for five seconds then close. Repeat on the
high-pressure service port.
b - Watch both gauges for thirty seconds. If either gauge pressure falls, a leak exists. Find it
and seal it.
c - Loosen the utility port cap and crack open the low-pressure manifold valve. Purge air
entrained in the hose. Close the valve. Repeat on high-pressure side of the manifold.
• The gauge manifold is ready for use. Crack open both the high- and low-pressure ports. The
system pressure will register on gauges.
figure 3-28
If the utility port is used, a third valve should be installed in the utility hose. All venting or
purging is done with the third valve.
7.1.5 Leak testing

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
7.1.5.1 Methods
Leak testing by pressure or by vacuum are two common field methods. Either one performed properly
and in sequence will ensure a leaktight system. The pressure method consists of admitting a
refrigerant into the system, or part of the system, and checking for leakage to the outside. The vacuum
method consists of pumping a vacuum in the closed system and watching for a rise in pressure on an
indicator. Here a leak is indicated but is difficult to locate. Therefore, only the pressure method is
treated further.
figure 3-29
7.1.5.2 Detection
The following are three popular detectors listed in order of their sensitivity :
• Electronic halogen detector:

a guntype detector or probe connected to a control unit. An airpump draws a sample of air
through the detector tip and over a halogen sensitive element. When the probe passes near a
leak, escaping halogen gas actuates the halogen sensitive element and creates an electric
signal. The signal is amplified and alerts the serviceman either audibly or visibly.
• Halide torch:
consists of a propane or LP gas tank, hose and a special burner that contains a copper
element (figure 3-29). A 'sniffer' hose is used as the probe. As gas is burned, a slight vacuum is
pulled on the probe. When the probe is passed near a halogen leak, the halogen is drawn into
the hose and injected into the burner below the copper element. A small amount of halogen
burning in the presence of copper has a brightgreen to bluegreen flame. A larger amount of
halogen will
burn with a violet colored flame.
• Soap bubbles:
this is a common type of leak detection. Swab a suspected leak area with liquid soap or figure 3-30
detergent and watch for bubbles to appear (figure 3-30).
7.1.5.3 Procedure
(Assume that no part of the system contains a refrigerant vapor under pressure and that the entire system is to be leak tested.)
• All flare, flange, solder, braze, weld or thread fittings must be mechanically tight. Also, seals, packing glands and service valve
packing nuts.
a - Where two wrench flats are available (unions, quick-connects), use two properly sized wrenches to avoid twisting or
distorting tubes or fittings. Do not overtighten.
b - All service, safety and charging valves must be closed to the atmosphere.
c - Wirebrush and wipe flux and oxides from all heated joints.
• Open all interconnecting manual system valves, solenoid and expansion valves to ensure complete system volume.
• Connect a cylinder of refrigerant (used in operating system) to a convenient point such as the liquid, suction, discharge or
charging port service valve.
• Pressurize the entire system with refrigerant vapour.
Do not exceed the safe test pressure limits established by the unit manufacturer. Remember that some
systems are running under vacuum; so be sure that the seal or pressure relief device blow-off pressures will
not exceeded.
• When the selected leak test pressure is attained.

a - Leak test the entire system, including factory-made joints, seals, and insulated lines with one of the halogen leak detecti-
on devices mentioned previously.
S Follow the detector manufacturer instructions. Usually a two-cm-per-second movement of any halide detector probe is
sufficient to pick up leaks.
S If liquid soap is used, allow at least one minute before looking for bubbles.
S Check pressure relief devices for leaks.
S On water-cooled or chilled water equipment check the tower slumps, drains or storage tank for traces of refrigerant.
b - Mark or identify any located leaks and proceed on, unless the leak is severe.
S If a threaded gasket or flange joint leaks, try tightening it before proceeding.
• When the leak testing is completed and all leaks are identified, the system must be vented. The venting must be done to the
outside to prevent contaminating the equipment area with refrigerant vapour.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
• Repair all detected leaks.

a - When open flame heating of a joint is required, do not breath the products of combustion if refrigerant vapour is present.
Ventilate the area.
S On a leaking flare fitting, disassemble the fitting and check for dents, distortion or cracks.
S On leaking pipe fittings, disassemble and inspect. Reassemble using a refrigerant grade sealant.
S Gaskets or O-rings can sometimes be made to seal by loosening the flange or holding bolts slightly and giving the casting
or flange plate a sharp rap with a soft mallet.
S Do not 'overfill' a heated joint with solder or brazing alloy. Clean the leak area and attemp to draw the alloy into the leak
area. If necessary, completely unsweat the fitting and start over.
• Retest all detected and repaired leaks by repeating the procedure.
7.1.6 Evacuation and dehydration
7.1.6.1 General
Evacuate and dehydrate only after pressure leak testing. Proper evacuation and dehydration prove system tightness, expel non-
condensables, and assure a dry system before charging.
Essential tools to properly evacuate and dehydrate any system are a good vacuum pump and a good evacuation indicator.
Never use the system compressor to evacuate the system. A good evacuation indicator can be a mercury manometer, wet-
bulb indicator or thermocouple vacuum indicator. A compound gauge should not be used because of its internal friction and
inherent inaccuracy. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the pump suction line sizing, oil, indicator location and
calibration.
7.1.6.2 Deep vacuum method
When a low absolute pressure or high vacuum is established in a closed system, the remaining noncondensables become
negligible. As the pressure is reduced, the boiling point of water is also reduced. This is the principle of the deep vacuum
method of dehydration. As long as the ambient temperature surrounding the system is higher than the boiling point of the internal
moisture, it will boil of and can be expelled. To properly employ this method, a good vacuum indicator must be used. In the
following procedure a wet-bulb vacuum indicator is used.
A good vacuum reading without a wet-bulb reading may indicate a tight system but not always a dry one.
If free water enters the compressor crankcase (ruptured chiller or condenser), the oil must be drained from the crankcase,
because the oil will float on the water and will not allow the water to evaporate. Dehydrate without oil in the compressor. After the
system has dried, add the proper oil charge and dehydrate again.
Table 3-31: Water boiling point

Boiling point Absolute pressure Boiling Absolute pressure
point
EC psia bara EC psia bara
100 14.7 1.013 12.7 0.21 0.014

93 11.5 0.792 10 0.17 0.012
82 7.4 0.510 7.2 0.14 0.010
46 1.4 0.097 4.4 0.12 0.008
26 0.49 0.034 1.6 0.10 0.007
21.1 0.36 0.025 0 0.08 0.005
15.5 0.25 0.017
F
• Ventilate all system pressures.

• Connect a center tapped 'jumper line' between point A and B, the high and low
sides of the system (figure 3-32). Use at least a 1/2“ OD line. Both points must E G
be closed when the system is evacuated. VACUUM
PUMP A
• Systems having Schrader type service points may require the use of a core B
depressor or remover (figure 3-28). VACUUM

C
• Connect the pump suction line, indicator and manifold suction hose to the INDICATOR
D
'jumper line' as shown. Valves C and D must be closed leaktight.
• Connect a container of dry system refrigerant to the manifold utility hose. Do
not allow the indicator line till below the pump suction line as oil may enter it Figure 3-32

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
and cause a false reading. Use only distilled water in the wet-bulb indicator.
• Open valves A,B,C and E. Start the pump. Evacuation has started.
• Occasionally open valve D to check system evacuation. Allow valve D to remain open at least three minutes.
• Use table 3-31 to convert the wet-bulb reading to absolute pressure or vacuum based on water boiling point.
• When the system is evacuated to 0.1 bara close valves C and E. Stop the pump.
• Open valve D. Watch the indicator for a loss of system evacuation over a fifteen-minute period. A steady loss indicates a
system leak. Double check all field connections from A and B. If the leak cannot be stopped, stop the evacuation and
pressure leak test the system. Before admitting refrigerant vapour be sure valve D has closed.
• If no leaks are present close valve D, open valves C and E and restart the pump.
• Continue evacuating until the indicator shows a reading of 2 EC that corresponds to an absolute pressure of 0.01 bar.
• Close valves C and D. Open valve F allowing dry refrigerant to raise the system pressure to 0.7 bara.
• Allow the system to remain pressurized for about thirty minutes.
• Vent all system pressure by opening valve G.
• Close valve G, open valves C and D and restart the pump.
• Re-evacuate the system to 0.01 bara or lower, if possible.
• Close valves C and D, open valve F, pressurize and isolate the system by closing valves A and B.
• The system is ready for charging. Any remaining moisture will be picked up by refrigerant drier.
7.1.7 Charging
7.1.7.1 General
Despite the system size, the operating charge of refrigerant determines how efficient
and economic the system will run. An overcharged system can lead to high
temperatures, pressures and operating costs with the possibility of component failure.
An undercharged system leads to insufficient cooling, high operating costs and, on
hermetic systems, the possibility of compressormotor tipoff or failure. Therefore, proper VAPOR
refrigerant charging is one of the most important responsibilities in installing or servicing LIQUID
any system.
VAPOR AND LIQUID

7.1.7.2 Methods
CHARGING
Refrigerant may be added to a system in either a vapour or liquid state. This is figure 3-34
depending on the availability of charging points in the high and low pressure sides of the
system.
Vapour charging
Vapour charging (see figure 3-34) is done by transferring refrigerant vapour from the top of the liquid level
in the refrigerant container to either the high or the low (usually low) pressure side of the system. A
complete charge addition on systems containing 7 kg or less of the refrigerant is usually done by vapour
method. Although vapour charging is slow it allows a very close control. As vapour is expelled from the
refrigerant container, the system and container pressures tend to equalize and
the flow of vapour slows or even stops. When this occurs, the serviceman must either warm the container
by placing it in warm water (see precautions on handling refrigerants) or use the system compressor to
draw vapour from the container (figure 3-35). When using the system compressor, be aware first to check
the compressor oil level before starting.
Liquid charging
figure 3-35 Liquid charging is accomplished by adding or 'pouring' liquid directly from the refrigerant container into the
high-pressure side of the system. When liquid charging, remember :
• Never add liquid into the low-pressure side of the system.
• Never add liquid into the compressor discharge service valve port. Both can cause compressor damage.
• When liquid charging, always install a filter in the refrigerant feed line to prevent any solid particles in the container from
entering the system.
7.1.7 Procedures

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
The following are three common charging procedures with a brief description how each should be done.
Follow the unit installation instructions for the method and charge procedure selection.
Charging by weight
This method (see (figure 3-36) is used if a complete charge is to be added and the amount of charge is
known. On systems short of charge of 4.5 kg or less it is sometimes faster and more economical to
remove all of the remaining system charge and add a complete new charge.
• Check the unit nameplate or the manufacturer documents for both charge weight and refrigerant type. figure 3-36
• Obtain the correct amount and type of refrigerant, charging manifold, hoses, and an accurate weight
scale in the correct range of refrigerant, container weight and charge reduction.
• Connect the manifold and container to the system with hoses, purge the hoses.
• Weigh the refrigerant container, be sure that the connecting hoses do not cause a false weight indication. Write down the
container weight, then subtract the system charge weight and mark the scale face for the correct charge reduction.
• Add refrigerant to the system by vapour or liquid method until the correct charge has been added to the system. Stop adding
charge by closing the refrigerant container valve.
Charging by sight glass
The sight glass (see figure 3-37) should be located in the system liquid line. This must be as
near as possible to the refrigerant feed device inlet. When the system is properly charged, only
a clear flow of liquid refrigerant passes through the sight glass. Some have refraction indicators
to help in determining the flow. Bubbles or flashing usually indicates a shortage in refrigerant.
Also a clear sightglass of liquid may be present but the system may not be charged at a higher
load condition. Always check and charge at the maximum load and the temperature conditions
expected.
When looking into a sight glass, always be sure that the clear sight glass is liquid and not
vapour.
figure 3-37
• Check the unit nameplate or manufacturer documents for the proper refrigerant type.
• Obtain the correct type and estimated amount of refrigerant and a charging manifold with
hoses.
• Connect the manifold and container to the system with hoses, purge the hoses.
• If a complete charge is to be added, add some refrigerant to the system by vapour or liquid method.
• Start the compressor and allow the system to run about ten minutes.
• Add refrigerant by vapour or liquid method.
• Allow the system to run on full load for ten minutes or until no fluctuations appear on the manifold gauges.
• Raise the compressor discharge or liquid pressure and hold it to a level equivalent to 43 EC (this may vary depending on
manufacturer recommendations) by throttling the condenser intake water or air.
• Observe the sight glass, add more refrigerant vapour if necessary.
• Allow the system to return to the initial running condition, the system should now be charged properly.
Charging by pressure-temperature relation
This method (see figure 3-38) of charging or checking charge is based on certain
assumptions listed at the end of the procedure. T
• Check the unit nameplate or manufacturer documents for the proper refrigerant
type.
• Obtain the correct type and estimated amount of refrigerant, a charging manifold
with hoses and an accurate temperature measuring instrument (thermocouple or
thermometer). Connect the manifold and container to the system with hoses,
purge the hoses. Attach the temperature indicator probe to the exterior of the
system liquid line as close as possible to the refrigerant feed device inlet. Insulate
it to prevent stray air currents or radiation from causing inaccurate readings.
• Add enough refrigerant to the system (vapour or liquid method) to enable the figure 3-38
compressor to run without a safety trip. Allow the system to run until the manifold gauges do not fluctuate.
• a - Measure the liquid line temperature.
b - Measure the discharge pressure and convert it to temperature. This becomes the system liquid condensing temperature.
c - Compare temperature (a) with (b). If the liquid line temperature is above the condensing temperature, add charge
because hot gas is mixed with the liquid.
d - Continue adding vapour to the system until the liquid line temperature (a) is equal to the system condensing temperature

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
(b). The system is now charged for the condensing pressure present. Full load and raise the system discharge pressure
to the maximum expected conditions. Repeat these steps. The system is now properly charged.
The following assumptions have been made :
• The discharge pressure gauge is accurate within ± 0.15 bar.

• The temperature indicator is accurate within 1/2 EC and the probe contact is a true indication of the liquid line temperature.
• No pressure drop will take place between the point of pressure reading and the point where the temperature readings are
taken. On normal systems a 0.07 bar drop for discharge lines, 0.2 to 0.35 bar drop for liquid lines and 0.15 to 0.3 bar drop for
condensers is allowed.
7.1.8 Removing refrigerants
7.1.8.1 Excess charge
If a system has been overcharged, it is necessary to remove the excess. The excess will be removed PROTECT HANDS AND EYES !
by venting to the atmosphere (outdoors if possible) as a vapour. Proceed as follows:
• Connect a gauge manifold to the system and start it.

• Check the system charge using a procedure in 3-27.
• If there is an overcharge, crack open the manifold high-pressure valve. Allow vapour to vent from
the utility hose.
figure 3-39
On water-cooled condensers or chillers (unless water is circulating or is completely drained) do not release
the refrigerant pressure rapidly. A freeze-up may result.
• Secure the utility hose to prevent whipping. If the high-pressure hose is connected to the liquid line or receiver, vent all vapour
from the low-pressure side of the system.
• Vent vapour for ten seconds, reclose the valve. Allow the system pressures to settle out then re-check the charge.
• Alternately vent and check until the system is properly charged.
On systems having a liquid petcock excess charge can be removed by cracking open the petcock port.
7.1.8.2 Complete uncharge
On systems having a chiller and/or a water-cooled condenser, either drain

completely or circulate the water at all times to prevent a freeze-up.
Occasionally the serviceman must remove the system charge to make repairs or
modifications. Some methods of charge removal are: ICE
S Use the system compressor (see figure 3-40)

S Use a scavenging pump system (see figure 3-42)
S By the charge migration
Pump-out method - Using system compressor
Use containers marked for the system refrigerant. figure 3-40
• Isolate the compressor service ports and connect the gauge manifold. Connect the manifold utility hose to
the refrigerant container. Purge all hoses with system vapour.
• Place the refrigerant container in ice water and allow it to chill.
• Obtain weight scales and a sufficient number of empty, clean, dry refrigerant containers.
• Start the system - Open the service valves allowing the system pressure to register on the manifold
gauges.
• Fully open the refrigerant container valve.
• Open the manifold high-pressure valve. Hot discharge gas or liquid should now enter the cold container
and condense.
• Attempt to hold the compressor discharge pressure equivalent to a 90 % condensing pressure.
• Continue bypassing discharge gas or liquid into the refrigerant container until it is filled to its weight Figure 3-41

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
capacity. Check with the scales (figure 3-41). Do not overfill. Change to another container if necessary.
• Reduce the system charge until the suction pressure falls to 1.3 bar. Stop the compressor.
• Close the refrigerant container valve and manifold high-pressure valve. Remove the utility hose from the container.
• Allow the system to set idle. Ventilate any overpressure pressure above 1.3 bar by cracking open the manifold valve.
• Before making repairs vent all system pressures.
• Tag all the containers having system liquid refrigerant in them as used.
• Evacuate the system before recharging.
Pump out - using scavenging pump system
A small air-cooled condenser with safety controls may be used.
• Obtain weight scales, a scavenging pump system and a sufficient number of empty, SCAVENGING
PUMP
clean, dry refrigerant containers capable of holding the system charge. SYSTEM
• Isolate the compressor service ports and connect the gauge manifold. figure 3-42
• Connect the manifold utility hose to the suction side of the scavenging system.
• Loosely connect another hose from the scavenging system liquid outlet valve to the
refrigerant container. Open the scavenge outlet.
• Midseat both the compressor service valves.
• Crack open the manifold low pressure-valve and allow the system pressure to flow into the scavenging system. Start the
scavenging pump.
• Allow vapour to be taken from the system until all lines have been purged with air.
• Tighten the hose at the refrigerant container. Open the refrigerant container valve.
• Allow the scavenging system to run with a 90 % condensing pressure and a 40 % suction pressure by modulating the hand
valves on the manifold and scavenge outlet valve. Do not overfill or overheat the refrigerant container. Check the cylinder
weight with scales. Remove and replace it when necessary.
• When the system pressure to the scavenging pump can no longer be held at a 40 % suction pressure, open the manifold
high-pressure valve.
• Continue removing refrigerant from the system until all internal pressure decreases to 1.3 bar. Turn off the scavenging pump.
• Close the refrigerant container valve and manifold valves. Vent the scavenging system pressure by loosening both the suction
and discharge hoses. Remove the refrigerant container. Tag all containers containing refrigerant as used.
• Before making any repairs or modifications to the system, vent all remaining pressure.
• Re-evacuate the system before recharging.
Charge migration method.
• Obtain weight scales and a sufficient number of empty, clean and dry refrigerant containers. Only use containers marked for
the system refrigerant. Evacuate the containers if possible.
• Connect a gauge manifold to the system. If the system has a liquid charging valve, connect the high-pressure manifold hose
to that valve. Connect the manifold utility hose to the refrigerant container. Purge all hoses. Close both manifold valves.
• Chill the refrigerant container to the lowest possible temperature. Isolate in ice if possible. Add as required during the transfer.
• a - If the high-pressure manifold hose is connected to the liquid valve, open the high-pressure manifold valve and refrigerant
container.
b - If no liquid service valve is available, open the manifold suction valve.
If the container was evacuated some refrigerant transferring to the container will flash and further chill the container. This
will fasten the refrigeration transfer.
• Allow the system refrigerant to migrate to the chilled containers until the system pressure is equivalent to the container
temperature. For example : If the container is at 3.3 EC and the system contains R-22. No further transfer will take place
when the system pressure reaches 5.5 bar.
• Once the condition in previous step occurs, either reduce the container temperature or increase the system temperature. If
neither can be done, discontinue removing the charge.
• Vent all remaining system pressure to the atmosphere before making repairs or modifications.
• Tag all containers having refrigerant as used.
• Re-evacuate the system before recharging.
7.1.9 Compressor oil
Start the compressorset only if all shields are mounted. After disconnecting the compressorset will run out for
some time and some parts will be hot. BURNING DANGER!

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
7.1.9.1 General
Lubricating oils prevent friction and minimize wear. Refrigeration grade oils also have special characteristics which enable them
to work efficiently under various load and temperature conditions. Specifications and oil type are usually established by the
compressor or unit manufacturer based on extensive laboratory and performance tests.
The oil refiners meet or exceed the manufacturer's specifications and supply their oil in clean, dry, sealed containers ranging in
size from 1 liter cans to 200 liter drums. All are clearly identified. The serviceman has to recognize two things when choosing a
refrigeration oil :
• Specify only oil types recommended by the unit or compressor manufacturer.

• Purchase only the quantity of oil necessary for current needs to prevent leftover oil from becoming contaminated by air and
moisture.
7.1.9.2 Determining oil level
All Heinen & Hopman compressors are factory shipped with a normal charge of the correct type
of refrigeration grade oil and should rarely require additional oil. The serviceman must be sure that
the proper oil level is maintained in the compressor when it is installed and running.
7.1.9.3 Oil sight glass

figure 3-43
Most open, semi-hermetic and large full hermetic compressors have an oil sight glass or bulls-eye
located in their crankcase or shell (figure 3-43). This enables the serviceman to observe the oil
level.
When two compressors are connected in parallel the oil sight glass is usually located in the oil
equalizer line ( figure 3-44). Normally the compressor oil level is one-half way up the sight glass.
However it may vary slightly. When running, the oil level may surge-up and down due to the
sloshing of the oil by moving parts. When idle, the oil level may be higher due to absorption of
refrigerant by oil. A crankcase heater (figure 3-45) helps to prevent this condition and should always figure 3-44
be used when available.
When restarting an idle compressor the oil level may initially decrease below normal in the sight glass but should return to near
normal in less than one minute. Excessive foaming or a cloudy appearance may indicate a floodback condition and could be harmful
to the compressor. An oil level should always be observed in an oil sight glass, whether running or idle.
7.1.9.4 To determine the oil level
• Check to see that an oil level exists.

• Start the system on full load to ensure against the possibility of oil being trapped in the system.
figure 3-45
Allow the system to run full loaded for about twenty minutes.
• Stop the compressor and allow it to set idle for about five minutes
• Observe the level in the oil sight glass.
a - If the level is low, either a permanent trap or leak exists. Determine which, correct, and add oil to the compressor.
b - Too high level may cause high power consumption and/or possible compressor damage. Remove the excess charge to
obtain one-half sight glass level but first be sure the extra oil not absorbed refrigerant.
Beware of false oil levels caused by the capillary attraction of oil to glass.
7.1.9.5 Oil level plugs
Some compressors contain an oil level plug or valve which helps to determine the compressor oil level
(figure 3-46). It consists of a small hole at the exact normal oil level. A small threaded plug or valve
seals the drilled hole.
To determine the oil level :
• Run the compressor on full load for about twenty minutes. figure 3-46
• Stop the compressor and allow it to set idle for about five minutes.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
• Isolate the compressor from the system by closing the shut-off valves.
• Ventilate the internal compressor pressure by opening the suction shut-off valve service port.
• Slowly remove the oil level plug (if a valve is used, open the valve).
• Check the oil level by observation and/or a probe wire. A correct level should be at opening level.
Some small full hermetic compressors have no method of determining the oil level. Since these compressors are always
installed in factory designed, assembled and pipe systems there is rarely any problem with the oil level, except in the case of a
leak. If the amount of lost oil can be calculated, this amount should be added to the compressor. If the amount of lost oil cannot
be calculated, the serviceman must remove the compressor and drain all remaining oil from the suction line stub. Add a
measured normal oil charge by either the suction stub or by cutting the oil process tube and re-sealing it.
7.1.9.6 Adding oil to a compressor
There are many methods of adding oil to a compressor. Two of the most practical are :
Open system method OIL IN
• Run the compressor on full load, close the suction shut-off valve and reduce the crankcase pressure to 0.14
bar. figure 3-47
• Stop and isolate the compressor from the system by closing the discharge shut-off valve.
On non-operable compressors close suction and discharge shut-off valves. Reduce crankcase-pressure by
bleeding excess pressure through valve service ports.
• Slowly remove the oil fill plug.

• Add the required amount of oil. Be sure no dirt enters the oil fill hole (figure 3-47). Do not leave the compressor open any
longer than necessary.
• Replace the oil fill plug.
• Open the shut-off valves and restart the compressor, then run twenty minutes fully loaded and re-check the oil level.
In this procedure it is assumed that when venting or pumping the compressor crankcase to 0.14 bar, a small quantity of
refrigerant remains in the oil. As oil is added, refrigerant vapour is escaping to the atmosphere and no air enters the
compressor. If no refrigerant vapour is present in the oil, it will be necessary to either evacuate the compressor via the service
ports or sweep the air from the compressor. Crack open the discharge shut-off valve, pressurize the crankcase and vent the air
and some refrigerant vapour to the atmos-phere via the suction shut-off valve service port.
Closed system method

B A
Build an oil charging arrangement like shown in figure 3-48. Put the amount of oil
PLUG
necessary in the compressor into the oil charging reservoir via the oil fill plug.
Replace and seal plug. RESERVOIR
• Connect the oil feed line flare A to the compressor suction shutoff valve
SYSTEM FEED LINE
service port. REFRIGERANT VALVE
• Open the feed line valve.
• Loosely connect the pressure line flare B to the refrigerant cylinder. figure 3-48
• Crack open the serviceport on the suction shut-off valve. Allow refrigerant
vapour under system pressure to bubble through the reservoir oil and vent to the atmosphere via flare B.
• Tighten flair B and close the feed line control valve.
• Close the compressor suction shut-off valve, start the compressor and allow the crankcase pressure to reduce to 0.7 bar (10
psia).
• Stop the compressor and isolate by closing the discharge shut-off valve.
• Open the refrigerant cylinder valve.
• Slowly open the oil feed line valve and add the required amount of oil.
• Allow sufficient time for the oil to drain into the crankcase. Don not overfeed additional oil.
• Close the oil feed and refrigerant cylinder valves.
• Open the compressor shut-off valves and restart the compressor, then allow it to run for twenty minutes,
recheck the oil level.
This method of oil addition can be used on any system where a pressure tap is available in the suction
side of the compressor and the refrigerant cylinder pressure can be maintained higher than the
compressor suction pressure. An alternative to this method is to partially evacuate the isolated
compressor and draw oil into the compressor crankcase from an open container, see figure 3-49.
figure 3-49

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
7.1.9.7 Removing oil
If oil must be removed from a compressor, use one of the following methods.
By drain or level plug
• Run the compressor on full load, close the suction shut-off valve and reduce the crankcase pressure to 0.14 bar
• Stop the compressor and isolate it by closing the discharge shut-off valve .
On non-coperable compressors close shut-off valves and reduce crankcase pressure by bleeding from the shut-off valve
service ports.
• a- If a compressor has an oil drain plug, carefully open it until oil seeps around the plug threads.
Do not remove the oil plug, than the full oil charge will be lost.
b- If an oil level plug is available, carefully loosen and remove it.

• Drain oil to the described level. Discard used oil.
• Re-tighten the plug, open the shut-off valves, start and re-check the oil level.
figure 3-50
By fill plug
• Follow the first two steps above. Then carefully remove the oil fill plug.
• Insert a syphon line into the compressor oil via the fill hole.
• Seal the line in place by using a neoprene stopper or modified oil plug (figure 3-50).
• Crack open the suction shut-off valve and pressurize the crankcase to 0.36 bar and reclose.
• Slowly open the syphon line valve and drain the required amount of oil from the compressor. Remove the used oil.
• Purge the excess crankcase pressure via the service port and remove the syphon line. Re-install the fill plug, open the shut-
off valves, start the compressor and recheck the oil level.
7.2 Before the first start-up
A cooling machine contains a harmful refrigerant under pressure. LEAK DANGER! Keep room well
ventilated. In the precense of an open flame, freon is liable to decompose in toxic gasses. Before checking
the following points put the main- and/or workswitch off. Only qualified personal is authorized to execute
the following activities at the cooling machine.
7.2.1 General
Check :
• Whether all parts and securities are mounted correctly (drawing).

• Whether all valves are in the right position.
7.2.2 Compressorset
7.2.2.1 Electric motor
The motor can be used for either direction of rotation. The sense of rotation can be changed by interchanging any two feeders of
the electrical wire.
Check :
• Whether the motor is connected correctly.

• Whether the air inlet is free.
• Set the thermostatic protection 5% above the current indicated on the nameplate.
• Whether the motor is turning easy and in balance.
7.2.2.2 Compressor

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
• For information about the compressor is referred to the manufacturer documents.
7.2.2.3 Transmission of the compressorset
Check :
• Whether the transmission is mounted correctly.

• When the transmission is accomplished by a V-belt; pay attention to the following points :
a- Alignment of the V-belt (look at maintenance).
b- Tension of the V-belt (look at maintenance).
• Check, in case of a direct driven compressorset, the alignment of the transmission (look at maintenance).
• Whether the shields are mounted correctly.
7.2.2.4 Drier
Check :
• Whether the drier core is placed.

• Through the sight glass whether the filling is still active, green is active and yellow indicates saturation.
7.2.2.5 Thermostatic expansion valve
• Check whether the bulb is connected just after the evaporator.

• For further information is referred to the manufacturer documents.
7.2.2.6 Condenser
Water-cooled condenser
• Start the cooling water pump.

• Check whether the cooling water flow is sufficient.
Air cooled condenser
• Start the fan(s).

• Check whether the air in- and outlet are free.
7.3 Starting and stopping
7.3.1 Starting
If the compressorset is provided with carterheating, the carterheating must be active 24 hours before the first
start up. Start the compressorset only if all shields, doors etc. are mounted.
• Open the solenoid valve manually by means of the spindle, so that there can be sufficient pressure build-up.
• Start the system by turning the main switch on.
• Turn on: - Evaporator fan switch
- Compressor switch
- Coolwaterpump switch (watercooled condensor) or the condensor fan switch (aircooled condensor)
• Measure (during the first start) the current consumption in every phase.
• Set the thermostatic protection to 5% above the highest measured current.
• Watch the pressure gauges closely, until the machine has reached its normal operation condition.
• The evaporator temperature is about 10 EC lower than the room temperature.
• The temperature of the freon in the condensing unit is about 5 - 9 EC above the cooling water temperature.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
7.3.2 Stopping
After disconnecting, the compressorset will run-out for some time and some parts will be hot (e.g.
compressor) and others will be cold (e.g. tubes). BURNING AND FREEZING DANGER!
• Close the solenoid valve of the condenser.

• All of the freon is pumped into the condenser (this is called the evacuating of the system).
• The low pressure control will switch the compressor off when the setting is attained.
• Close all the valves of the installation.
• Stop the evaporator fan(s).
• Stop the cooling water pump or close the inlet valve, in case of a watercooled condenser.
• Stop the condenser fan(s) in case of an aircooled condenser.
After the machine has been in operation for ten hours the pulleys must be re-tightent to ensure that they
are still fixed.
7.4 Maintenance
A cooling machine contains a harmful refrigerant overpressure. LEAK DANGER! Keep room
well vented. In the presence of an open flame freon is liable to decompose in toxic gasses.
Always1 put the main- and/or workswitch off during activities at the installation. Start the
installation only if all shields, doors etc. are mounted. After disconnecting the compressorset
will run out for some time, and some parts will be hot (e.g. compressor) and others will be cold
(e.g. tubes). BURNING AND FREEZING DANGER! Only qualified personal is authorized to
execute the maintenance of the cooling machine.
1 = Excluding the commissioning of the cooling machine
7.4.1 General
7.4.1.1 Daily
• Check by sight glass whether the freon is clear and no bubbles are present (replenish).

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
7.4.1.2 Monthly
• Check all connections for leakage.
The presence of oil on the tubes indicates a leakage.
7.4.2 Compressorset
7.4.2.1 Weekly
• Clean the compressorset.
7.4.2.2 Electric motor
• Ensure that the motor is clean and the air inlet is free.
• Check regularly whether the motor is noisy, when this occurs, the bearings may be worn and the electric motor or bearings
must be replaced.
Removal of the electric motor
• Disconnect the motor from the supply.

• Remove the shields over the transmission.
• Disconnect the transmission between motor and compressor.
• Dismount the motor and remove it.
Never place or move the motor by the shaft.
7.4.2.3 Compressor
• When the compressor is opened, all parts must be cleaned before they will be replaced.
Daily
• Check the suction and discharge pressure.

• Check the oilpressure.
• Check the oil level (sight glass), a correct oil level is halfway the sight glass.
Yearly
• Replace the compressor oil yearly.
7.4.3 Transmission of the compressorset
7.4.3.1 V-belt driven type

RULER
Removing of the V-belt
• Remove the front part of the shield over the transmission.

• The electric motor is placed on a cradle, that is secured with nuts.
• Loosen the nuts and move the cradle to loosen the V-belt. ALIGNMENT
• Remove the V-belt. V-BELT PULLEY'S
figure 3-51

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
Mounting of the V-belt
Never force the V-belts on the sheaves, as this may damage the belt core, so that the belt will break after a short time of
operation.
• Shorten the distance between the centers, by moving the electric motor, until the belts can be fitted easily without the use of
tools.
• Then increase the distance until the V-belt is tensed.
• Align the V-belt with a ruler or something like that (figure 3-51).
• Give the V-belt the pre-discribed tension and secure the cradle.
• Replace the front part of the shield. After about 15 minutes of loaded operation the V-belt should be tightened (see tightening
of the V-belt).
• During the continued operation the tension should be checked after about 50 working hours, and there upon it should be
checked occasionally.
Tightening of the V-belt
• Measure the center distance.

• Deflect the V-belt in the middle. PUSH DOWN
• Measure the deflection and check according the table.
Profile diameter of smallest pulley (mm) Deflection (mm)

CENTRE DISTANCE (cm)
SPZ-ALPHA 67 - 95 1.0 - 1.5
DEFLECTION (mm)
100 - 200 1.5 - 2.0
SPB-BETA 160 - 224 3.6 - 5.1

250 - 400 5.1 - 6.6
Always ascertain that the V-belt is aligned correctly and at the right tension. Replace a figure 3-52
V-belt that shows signs of wear immediately.
V-belt pulley's
The V-belt pulley's are provided with a taper-lock bush and can be removed easily without the use of blow- or pull-tools.
Removing of the pulley’s
• loosen the screws and place one screw in the pressure hole of the pulley.
• Turn the screw in until the pulley is released.
• Remove the pulley from the shaft.
Mounting of the pulley’s
• Place the taper-lock bush and pulley together, so that the holes in the pulley and taper-lock bush are corresponding.
• Turn the screws in the holes and fasten them slightly.
• Align the pulley's.
• Tighten the screws equally until they are fixed.
7.4.3.2 Direct driven type
Removal of the coupling.
• The coupling can be disassembled by removing the screws.

• Clean the compressor and motor shafts and the coupling flanges. Remove all burrs.
Tighten the compressor hold down bolts.
figure 3-53

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
Mounting of the coupling
• Fit the compressor flange to the compressor crankshaft. The flange has a tapered bore and
a keyway. Be sure the key fits in the keyway before placing the flange on the shaft.
• After the flange is in place, install the bolt and washer provided with the compressor. Tighten
the bold securely
Do not use the bolt and washer to force the flange in place.
• Fit the motor flange to the motor shaft, be sure that the key fits in the keyway. All parts
should fit snugly but easily. Do not force them into place.
• Start the motor and scribe a line adjacent to the motor bearing housing to locate the running
position of the armature. figure 3-54
• If the motor cannot be started, measure the amount of end play in the motor shaft. Set the
motor shaft at half this measurement and mark the position.
• The coupling is to be aligned with the motor shaft in this running position.
• Re-assemble the coupling and make a preliminary adjustment of dimension “E” (distance between flanges), shown in figure
3-53.
For the correct dimension of “E” is referred to the manufacturers documents.
• Tighten the motor flange screws.
Alignment of the coupling
• Move and shim the motor until dimension “E” is correct when measured at four positions at 90E
apart, and until the edges of the flanges are in line when tested with a straight edge (figure 3-53).
• Tighten the motor hold-down bolts.

• Check dimensions A, B, C and D. See figure 3-54 and 3-55. If the dimensions are all equal the
coupling is correctly aligned.
A convenient way to compare the dimensions is to set an inside capilar at the smaller
dimension and measure the extra width at the larger dimension with the capilar and a feeler
gauge.
figure 3-55
• If A and B are larger than C and D (figure 3-54) the coupling is in angular misalignment.
Move and shim the motor until the dimensions are within tolerances.
• If A and D are larger than B and C (fig. 3-55) the coupling is in parallel misalignment. Move and shim the motor until the
dimensions are in tolerances.
• Run the compressor until it warms up and re-check the alignment.
7.4.4 Drier
7.4.4.1 Normally
• Check regularly whether the drier filling is not saturated. Green is active and yellow indicates saturation.
• Before the drier is opened all freon must be pumped in the condenser.
• Always replace the drier filling in case of reparations at the cooling machine.
• When a new installation is taken into operation the drier filling must be regularly checked to determine the replacement
interval.
7.4.4.2 Yearly
• Replace the drier filling.
It is possible that the drier filling has to be changed more than once a year

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
7.4.5 Thermostatic expansion valve
The cooling machine must be in operation several hours before the thermostatic expansion valve can be adjusted.
The thermostatic expansion valve is usually set to 10 EC superheating. The value can be set by the adjusting screw, by turning it
in the freon supply is enlarged (less superheating) and by turning it out the supply is reduced (more superheating).
When the thermostatic expansion valve is not set correctly, the adjusting screw must be turned slightly. Thereupon let the
installation operate for at least 15 minutes before another adjustment is made.
In case of freeze-up of the suction line the adjusting screw must be turned out slightly.
For further information is referred to the manufacturer documents.
7.4.6 Condenser
7.4.6.1 Weekly
• Check the freon level weekly.
7.4.6.2 Yearly
• Checking and possible cleaning of the condensor tubes must be performed yearly. This may only be performed by skilful
personnel.
8 Guidelines for troubleshooting
8.1 Troubleshooting
Once a source of trouble in a refrigeration system is located, it may be an easy matter to correct it. The main difficult in
servicing work generally being the location of the trouble. It is important that a systematic method of analyzing will be followed. It
would be considerably better for the serviceman to take the first half-hour to observe the arrangement and operation of the
machine. This is better than to make a hasty decision as to the cause of the trouble and make any adjustment in the hope that it
will solve the trouble. Such a procedure often adds trouble because the adjustment was not necessary or proper. When the
serviceman is following a systematic method of fault locating, he should first listen to the complaint of the owner or operator of
the equipment. This will give him his first impression as to the cause of the trouble. He should then carefully check the complaint
to look that it is justified.
In some instances, the cause of the trouble will be immediately apparent, but in the large majority of cases, some measuring of
pressures, temperatures and running time will have to be made. In this case, it will be necessary to determine the type of
machine since the method of locating the trouble will depend upon the type of refrigerating machine and the method of control.
The following table is put in as a guide for locating and correcting those troubles found more frequently within refrigeration
plants.
8.1.1 Frosted or sweating suction line
Cause Remedy
Thermostatic expansion valve adjusted so that refrigerant is Adjust the thermostatic expansion valve.
admitted to the expansion coil faster then it can be
evaporated.
The control adjustment is set for too low temperature and Adjust the control for a higher temperature of the cooling
does not correspond with the adjustment of the thermostatic unit.
expansion valve.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
In weather conditions where the relative humidity is very high This is not serious but may be avoided by insulating the
there may be some condensation on the suction line tubing. suction line by a vapour barrier material.
8.1.2 Warm liquid line
Cause Remedy
The system contains less than the required amount of Recharge with refrigerant.
refrigerant and warm vapour is passing through the liquid
line.
The thermostatic expansion valve is opened too far. Adjust the thermostatic expansion valve for correct back-
pressure.
8.1.3 Frosted liquid line
Cause Remedy
The liquid receiver shut-up valve is partly closed or Make sure the liquid line valve is wide open and if the liquid
obstructed with foreign matter, causing it to act as an receiver valve is partially obstructed it will be necessary to
expansion valve. either remove it and repair it or replace it by a new one.
8.1.4 Back pressure lower than normal
Cause Remedy
Thermostatic expansion valve adjusted so that too little liquid Re-adjust the thermostatic expansion valve for the correct
passes through the expansion coil. suction pressure setting.
Little or no refrigerant in the system. Locate the leak, repair it and recharge the system.
Thermostatic expansion valve blocked with ice from moisture Change or clear the thermostatic expansion valve and if
in the system or accumulation of dirt. moisture is the source of the trouble install a system drier.
8.1.5 No frost of the thermostatic expansion valve or cooling unit
Cause Remedy
Liquid line valve closed. Open the valve.
Liquid line completely blocked. Clear the line or replace the tubing.
Strainer completely stopped up with dirt. Clear the strainer.
The suction line closed. Open the suction line.
No refrigerant in the system. Locate the leak and recharge the system with refrigerant.
Inefficient compressor. Check compressor for efficiency. Make the necessary

repairs.
Motor operates but the compressor is idle. Tighten or replace the V-belt.
The operation cycle is short. Adjust the control.
8.1.6 System operates too much or all time

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
Cause Remedy
Control will not cut out. Adjust, repair or replace the control.
Little or no refrigerant in the system. Locate the leak and recharge as necessary.
Incorrect adjustment of the thermostatic expansion valve. Adjust as necessary.
Inefficient compressor. Check the compressor and make the necessary repairs.
Compressor operating at too low a speed. See that the motor specifications correspond with the supply
voltage. See that the V-belt is not slipping and has the
correct tension.
Presence of air in the system. Purge air from the system as outlined under 'Purging the
system'.
Restricted circulation over the coolingcoils. See that there is unrestricted air flow around the coils.
8.1.7 Storage compartment too cold
Cause Remedy
Control set too low. Adjust to the desired temperature.
Control will not cut out. Repair and replace control.
8.1.8 Low operating head pressure on condensing unit
Cause Remedy
Insufficient refrigerant. Locate and repair the leak and recharge with correct amount
of refrigerant.
Inefficient compressor. Test the compressor for efficiency and make the necessary
repairs.
Thermostatic expansion valve clogged with ice or dirt Replace or clear the thermostatic expansion valve and
replace the system drier if moisture is the cause of the
trouble.
8.1.9 Head pressure too high
Cause Remedy
Presence of air in the system Remove the air from the system as outlined under 'Purging
the system'.
Too much refrigerant in the system. Blow of the refrigerant as necessary.
Dirty condensortubes or insufficient water supply to a Action as necessary.

watercooled condensing unit
Too much oil in the system which would tend to retard the Remove the oil charge from the compressor during the
removal of heat in the condenser. normal cycle and recharge the compressor with the correct
oil charge.
8.1.10 Frost on the thermostatic expansion valve only

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
Cause Remedy
Thermostatic expansion valve clogged with ice or dirt. Replace or clear the thermostatic expansion valve and
dehydrate the system if moisture is the cause of the trouble.
8.1.11 Storage compartment warm
Cause Remedy
Control set too high. Adjust control for correct temperature.
Control will not cut out. Re-adjust or replace with a new or repaired control.
Insufficient refrigerant in the system. Locate the leak and recharge the system.
Too much frost on the cooling coil or evaporator. Defrost as necessary.
Insufficient compressor. Check the compressor and repair as necessary.
Fuses burned out and the motor idle. Replace fuses and check current supply line from the
switches.
8.1.12 Troubles with electric installation
Motor troubles usually develop during hot weather when the maximum load is put on the unit. Especially dangerous in hot
weather, are :
a. High head pressure due to air being present in the system.
b. Dirty condenser restricting the flow of heat.
c. Overcharged plants.
d. Cold room doors left open.
The following causes are some of the more usual complaints (applying to electric motors in general), of which the service
engineer will be confronted with.
Cause Remedy
Fuses blown. Fit the recommended size of fuses.
Low voltage. See that the supply voltage is within 10 % of the nameplate
volt.
Incorrect wiring up. Check with the wiring diagram supplied with the plant.
Break in the motor circuit. Check the circuit for continuity including also the starter
circuit.
Excessive load. Larger size of motor required.
Worn brushes making poor contact (where applicable). Replace and clean as necessary.
8.2 Complaints with a enumeration of possible causes
8.2.1 Compressor does not run
Check for following causes:
Electric line to motor open Head pressure too high
Fuse blown Loose flywheel

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
Tripped overload V-belt(s) slipping
Cord not plugged in V-belt(s) broken
Control off-cold location Piston stuck
Control stuck open Stuck compressor or motor
8.2.2 Compressor shortcycles
Compressor capacity too great for evaporator Shortage of refrigerant
Control differential set too close Leaky thermostatic expansion valve
Discharge valve leak Overcharge of refrigerant
Motor overload relay cutting out Cycling on high pressure switch
8.2.2 Condensing pressure too high
Refrigerant overcharge Supply water too warm
Air in the system Water shut off or restricted water-cooled condenser
Dirty condenser Restricted water or drain lines
Too hot unit location Poor air circulation around unit
8.2.4 Refrigerated product not cold enough
Shortage of refrigerant Evaporator too small
Control set too high Compressor too small
Expansion valve, strainer or drier plugged Not enough circulation of cooled air
Leaking discharge or suction valve Restricted or too small refrigerant lines
Expansion valve not opening wide enough Service load too great
Iced or dirty coil
8.2.5 Condensing unit runs too much
Shortage of refrigerant Leaking discharge or suction valve
Unit too small or service load too great Iced or plugged coil
Control contacts stuck or closed Defective insulation

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
Dirty condenser Air in system
Location too warm Inadequate air circulation around unit assembly
8.2.6 Hot liquid line
Shortage of refrigerant Condensing temperature too high
8.2.7 Frosted or sweating suction line
Thermostatic expansion valve adjusted to pass to much Therm. expansion valve bulb too warm or in wrong location
refrigerant
Capillary tube units-overcharge Refrigerant or condenser pressure too high
8.2.8 Liquid line very cold
Receiver shut-off valve partially closed or restricted Evaporator too high above condenser
Restricted drier or strainer
8.2.9 Condensing unit noisy
Insufficient compressor oil Mounting loose
V-belts defective or loose Motor brushes riding on commutator
Tubing rattle Oil sludging or refrigerant flooding back
Compressor flywheel or motorpully loose Condensing pressure too high
Worn motor or compressor bearings
8.2.10 Condensing pressure too low
Shortage of refrigerant Cold room
Compressor suction or discharge valves leaking Cold water, and water valve stuck open
8.2.11 Not cool enough
General

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
Insufficient airmovenment in conditioned spaces User expecting results not designed fop
High wet bulb outside Unequal distribution
Too much make-up air Insufficient capacity of equipment
Excessive smoke or odors Dampers incorrectly set or position moved
Unusual loads, e.g. extra lights, appliance or population Ducts too small or badly laid out
Insufficient capacity of evaporator
Originally chosen too small Excessive static pressure of ducts
Not enough air over coil-belts slipping Coil not fully active; insufficient refrigerant
Blower motor underspeed (low voltage) Thermostatic expansion valve misadjusted, dirty defective
Coil dirty Coil oil-logged
Filters dirty
Insufficient capacity of condensing unit
Originally chosen too small Underspeed, belts, slipping, motor pulley too small
Under-size suction lines Suction valves leaking (dirty, broken or corroded)
Not enough water through condenser Discharge valves leaking (dirty, broken or corroded)
Stoppage in condenser, water or drain lines, water control Discharge or suction valve springs broken, rings worn or
valve, strainers or water pressure regulating valves broken
High head in drain lines Pistons worn
Misadjusted or defective water control valve Cylinder walls worn or scored : gasket leak between cylinder
Low or fluctuating water pressure heads Not enough lift of discharge or suction valves
Stoppage in suction or discharge shutoff valves or strainers Compressor not delivering full capacity
Stoppage in gas passages in condenser
8.1.12 Noisy operation
Vibrating sounds
Motor, pulley, belts out of line Piping connections too rigid
Belts loose Loose or insecure parts rattling
Inadequate foundation-insecure mounting Sheet metal panels inadequately braced

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
High side or low side units not level Pulleys out of balance
Weight of units unequally supported at corners Ducts connected rigidly to low side
Knocking or pounding sounds
Excessive end-play of motor or fan shaft Seal squeaking-not being lubricated
Pulley loose on shaft, motor or compressor Oil grooves in bearings stopped
Motor or compressor not bolded tightly to base Oil pumping-liquid refrigerant returned to compressor
Water hammer-dirt in water control valve Broken suction or discharge valves
Too much refrigerant in system Solder or other foreign matter in cylinders
Too much make or too little oil in compressor Excessive lift of suction or discharge valves
Air noise
Excessive air velocities Bad design of supply grilles
Supply grilles too small

9 Summery Chapter 3
The dictionary defines refrigeration as a process of making something cold, and "cold" can be defined as an absence of heat.
A cooling machine has the task to cool parts or substances to a temperature that is lower than the surrounding area and keep it
at this temperature.
The applications of cooling installations are multiple. Examples are:
• conserving of provisions
• cooling of drinkingwater
• cool containers
• heat pumps
• freeze drying
• air drying (dismoisterizing of air)
• air handling
Heat is an invisible form of energy that arise from the conversion of other forms of energy in energy of heat. Only the effect of
heat is perceptible and the measuring of it is the way to define heat. The indication for heat is Q. The specific heat (cp) is the
amount of heat needed to raise the temperature 1EC of 1 kg of a substance.
Every substance can appear in three conditions (states): solid, liquid and gaseous. Water is the most known example, in solid
state as ice, in liquid state as water and in gaseous state as steam or vapour. When ice changes into water the temperature
during melting does not change. All the supplied energy is needed to change the substance from solid form into liquid form. Only
if the substance is entirely melted, the supply of heat will raise the temperature again. The change-of-state process is important
to the mechanical refrigeration cycle for two reasons. First, the change absorbs a relatively large amount of heat per kg of
substance; and second, this change-of-state takes place at constant temperature.
The point of saturated vapour is reached if there is added enough heat to a fluid. If the fluid is completely evaporated and there is
more heat added, we call this additional heat 'superheat'.
In every refrigeration installation there is a quantity of refrigerant. The refrigerant is a liquid or a gas with fixed properties.
Because the boilingpoint of refrigerants lays far below 0EC, the refrigerants only exist in gaseous state at surrounding pressure
(1 bar). When we raise the pressure with a compressor the gaseous refrigerant will at some point change of state and
becomes liquid. The refrigeration effect of a cooling installation is based on the evaporation of liquid refrigerant at low
temperature.

Tel.: +31 - (0)33 - 299 25 00
The principle of the cooling machine is based on the following four functions:
• Expansion
• Evaporation
• Compression
• Condensation
These four functions are obtained by the following three main-components of the cooling machine:
• Evaporator
• Compressor
• Condenser
Refrigerant circuit components of a cooling machine are:

• Evaporator and condenser heat exchanger
- Finned heat exchanger
- Tube heat exchanger
- Plate heat exchanger
• Thermostatic expansion valve

BOCK HG... HA...
Series
HG I HA
R134a R404A R507 R407C R22
Semi-hermetic compressors,
Single-stage
> At a glance
> Semi-hermetic Pluscom 2 and 4 cylinder compressors
> Semi-hermetic 4, 6 and 8 cylinder compressors
> Progressive technology in and around the compressor
> Trend-setting compressor variants
> Operating limits an performance data
R134a, R404A, R507, R407C, R22
> Technical data
> Dimensions and connections
> Scope of supply and accessories
Series HG(HA)
Single-stage compressors
At a glance
The Bock semi-hermetic compressor programme provides a Available versions:
full performance range of innovative and modern compressor The Bock semi-hermetic programme provides the following
designs in 2, 4, 6 and 8 cylinder constructions. product variants:
The ideal solution for any kind of application. > Single-stage HG (HA) compressors
> Two-stage HGZ compressors
HG (Hermetic Gas-cooled) > 8/4 pole HG compressors
Conventional suction gas-cooled compressor design. > Duplex DHG (DHA) compressors
> SHG (SHA) compressor units with receiver
HA (Hermetic Air-cooled) > SHG (SHA) condenser units air-cooled
Special Bock design for deep-freezing (R22/R404A) with an
air-cooled motor and direct suction at the cylinder. Forward looking compressor models
Bock offers a choice of interesting compressor versions in the
All the compressors display the same particularly remarkable established semi-hermetic range for current market trends such
features: as alternative refrigerants, deep-freezing or EX protection.
> Outstanding running comfort > Compressors for CO2 in subcritical cascade systems
> High performance and reliability to the highest quality > Compressors according to ATEX, for explosion risk
standard environments
> Easy maintenance, e.g. interchangeable motors > HA (Hermetic Air-cooled) compressors for low temperatures
> Oil pump lubrication
> Bock MP10 electronic motor protection, especially easy to
operate with LED status indicators
> Suitable for conventional and chlorine-free HFC refrigerants
The entire programme

...8 model sizes with 26 capacity stages
6
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
At a glance
Type key
¹) HG = Hermetic Gas-cooled
HGX22P/125-4 S (suction gas-cooled)
Series 1)
HA = Hermetic Air-cooled
Ester oil filling 2)
(for deep-freezing)
Size
Number of cylinders 3) 2) X = Ester oil filling (HFC refrigerants
Pluscom 3) e.g. R134a, R404A, R507, R407C)
Swept volume 3)
= Additional declaration for
Number of poles
Pluscom compressors
Motor variant 4)
4)
S = More powerful motor
e.g. cooling applications
All compressors at a glance

HG-gas-cooled
HG12P HG22P HG34P HG4 HG5 HG6 HG7 HG8
HA-air-cooled, purpose-built for refrigeration

(further information see page 22)
HA12P HA22P HA34P HA4 HA5 HA6
7
Series HG(HA)
Semi-hermetic Pluscom
2 and 4 cylinder compressors
New 2 and 4 cylinder models
with 5,4 to 33 m³/h capacity (50 Hz)
The new compressor generation with its special advantages: Pluscom models
+ Outstanding running comfort
+ High performance operation
+ Compact design
+ Top cost/performance ratio
+ Oil pump lubrication as standard
HG
HA
At a glance
Universal
- e.g. R134a, R404A, R507, R407C, R22
One compressor design for all standard refrigerants -
for air conditioning applications, normal refrigeration and
deep-freezing
- Maximum allowed operating pressure: 28 bar
High refrigeration capacity combined with

minimum power requirement
- Optimized gas flow
- Efficient service valves
- Minimum dead space
Safe, reliable oil supply
- Powerful economic drive motors
- Conventional lubricating system incorporating an oil pump
independent of direction of rotation
Wide range of applications without additional cooling
- Large volume oil sump
- Deep-freezing range with R404A, R507 also available with
suction gas cooling (HG version)
Stable valve plate design
- Universally proven valve design with intake and discharge
Wear-resistant long service life driving gear
reed valve clamped on one side.
- Solid construction and design
- Valve made of high quality impact-resistant spring steel
- Low friction sleeve bearings
- Aluminium pistons with double ring fittings
Adjustable suction gas shutoff
valve setting (HG)
- Shutoff valve rotates
through 90˚
- Flexible location for suction
line connection
8
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
Semi-hermetic Pluscom
2 and 4 cylinder compressors
Quiet and low vibration IP65 electric terminal box
- Generously dimensioned crank mechanism - Robust aluminium construction
- Optimized mass balance - Easy electrical installation due to large internal space
- Large volume pressure section for pulsation absorption - Terminal block with cables in glass-seal model
- 4 cylinder design from as little as 19 m³/h - Hinged and removable cover 1 with snap closure 2
- Terminal strip for add-on components
Economic capacity control

- Option 1
1 2
50% by shutting down one bank of cylinders in four cylinder
compressors (optional)
- Option 2
Continuously adjustable speed control using the EFC
(Electronic Frequency Control) (optional)
> Compactly fitted onto the compressor and connected
ready to operate
> Up to 25% reduction in power consumption
> Further information see page 15
1 2
Oil sump heater (optional)
- Installed in the housing bore
- PTC heater, self-regulating
Start unloader with the Bock ESS

(Electronic-Soft-Start) (optional)
- Continuous compressor start-up to nominal speed
- No need for conventional start unloaders
- IP44 unit for wall mounting (supplied loose)
- Further information see page 19
Minimum space requirement

- Particularly low installation height and width
- HG(HA)34P with the same attachment hole locations
as the preceding HG(HA)3 model
Bock MP10 electronic motor protection

- Standard with all Pluscom compressors
- Temperature monitoring with PTC sensors and optical status
ESS ESP indicators
- Discharge gas temperature sensor (optional)
Single phase AC operation
(Electronic Single Phase) (option)
- Standard three phase AC compressor can be used on
a single phase supply
- No start-up or operating condensers or relays required
- Unit designed for installation in switch cabinet
9
Series HG(HA)
Semi-hermetic
4-, 6- und 8-Zylinder-Verdichter
4, 6, and 8 cylinder compressors
Proven 4, 6 and 8 cylinder models
with 40 to 280 m³/h capacity (50 Hz)
HG 4, 6, and 8 cylinder compressors

HA
At a glance
Universal Safe reliable, oil supply
- e.g. R134a, R404A, R507, R407C, R22 - Oil pump lubrication independent of direction of rotation
Compressor design for all standard refrigerants for air condi- - 4 and 6 cylinder with a conventional single circuit lubricating
tioning applications, normal refrigeration and deep-freezing system
- Maximum allowed operating pressure: 28 bar - 8 cylinder compressor with a dual circuit lubricating system
(two oil circuits), each of the two main bearings supplied as
High refrigeration capacity combined the first lubrication point
with minimum power requirement - Connection possibility for oil pressure monitoring by using a
- Optimized gas flow Dp-oil differential pressure sensor
- Efficient service valves - Large volume oil sump
- Minimum dead space - Direct coupling option for oil level regulator as standard
- Powerful economic drive motors
Wide range of applications without additional refrigeration Dual circuit lubricating system
- Deep-freezing range with R404A, R507 also available with
suction gas cooling (HG version)
Wear-resistant long service life driving gear

- Solid construction and design
- Surface-hardened crankshaft
- Low friction sleeve bearings
- Aluminium pistons with three piston rings, hard-chromium
plated compression ring, HG(HA)4 with two piston rings
- Aluminium connecting rod with high-strength small end
bearings starting HG(HA)5
8 cylinder drive unit
10
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
Semi-hermetic
4-, 6- und 8-Zylinder-Verdichter
4, 6, and 8 cylinder compressors
Stable valve plate design IP54 electric terminal box
- Valve made of high quality impact-resistant spring steel - Easy electrical installation due to large internal volume
- Consentric reed valve on the suction side 1 - Terminal block with cables in glass seal model
finger reed valve in HG(HA)4 2 - Hinged lifting cover with a single quick fastener
(6 cylinder versions) 1
1 2 - Cover with simple snap closure (8 cylinder) 2
- Insulation between terminal studs
- Inspection window for compressor monitoring
(8 cylinder version)
1 2
Variable suction gas shutoff valve position (HG)

- Shutoff valve rotates through 90° (4 cylinder)
suction cover rotates through 90° (8 cylinder)
- Flexible location for suction line connection
4 cylinder 8 cylinder
Bock Compressor Management BCM2000
- Innovative and advanced compressor management system
- Standard with 8 cylinder compressors, optional for 4 and 6
cylinder compressors.
Quiet and low vibration

- Generously dimensioned crank mechanism
- Optimized mass balance
- Large volume pressure section for pulsation absorption
- 8 cylinder design from 214 m³/h
Economic capacity control MP10 electronic motor protection

- Cylinder cover incorporating a connection for capacity control - Standard with all 4 and 6 cylinder models
- Possible control stages: - Temperature monitoring with PTC sensors and
4 cylinder: 50% optical status indicators
6 cylinder: 33%/66% - Discharge gas temperature sensor (optional)
8 cylinder: 25%/50%/75% - Further information see page 13
- Continuously adjustable speed control (25 - 60 Hz) using an
external frequency converter
Minimum space requirement
- Extremely compact dimensions
Oil sump heater
- Standard
- Immersion case design
- Replacement possible
without opening the
refrigerating circuit
11
Series HG(HA)
Bock Innovations
Progressive technology in
and around the compressor
Bock has been the pioneer under this motto in developing
technical solutions which set the benchmarks for energy and
efficiency, operating safety, and reliability, not only for
compressors but for the whole refrigeration plant.
MP10 Motor Protection Availibility

Activate motor protection
compressor
MP10 BCM2000 EFC/ERC ESS ESP
BCM2000 Bock Compressor Management models
The multifunctional management system
HG(HA)12P
EFC Electronic Frequency Control HG(HA)22P
Progressively adjustable speed control for Pluscom
compressors HG(HA)34P
HG(HA)4
ERC Electronic Rack Control
Rack control for Pluscom compressors HG(HA)5
ESS Electronic Soft Start HG(HA)6

Start Electronic for Pluscom compressors
HG7
ESP Electronic Single Phase HG8
Phase converter from single to three phase AC
standard optional
12
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
Bock Innovations
The MP10
Motor Protection
Temperature safety device for the drive motor Technical data
Standard on all compressors (except HG8)

Unit designation MP10
The exceptional feature is that the monitoring function and Connection voltage AC 230 V - 1 - 50/60 Hz
mains availability are shown by coloured LEDs. There are no
complicated or time-consuming defect locating processes. Relay AC 250 V, 3 A, 750 VA ind.
Dimensions L/B/H 100 x 60 x 52 mm

The MP10 also provides the usual functions as standard, e.g.
a reconnection preventing device, a reset, free terminals for
PTC temperature sensors (e.g. heat protection thermostat) and
other useful items.
At a glance
13
Series HG(HA)
Bock Innovations
The BCM2000
Bock Compressor Management
Multifunctional management system Practical and easily accessible positioning in the compressor
connection box
Included as standard in HG8 > Installed in place of the usual motor protection unit MP10
Available as an option for HG(HA) 4, 5, 6 and HG7 (same dimensions)
> Optimal visibility by inspection window in the cover of the
As the leading compressor manufacturer, Bock offers the connection box (HG8 only)
BCM2000, a complete management system providing all the
main functions for safe compressor operation in a practical Reliable and economical
compact assembly, user friendly and economical. > Eight monitoring functions in one central unit
> Monitoring of the various functions including operating hour
Two central functions metering
> Protection against liquid slugging during start-up through > Simple recognition of the current status using an optical
the start-up identification system display
> Oil service recommendations (calculation is based on > Each function can be short cut for emergency operation
operating data) > Read facility for stored messages for fast and safe error
analysis in the event of a fault or breakdown
Other important functions > Loss-proof error memory even after power failure
Monitoring of discharge gas temperature, motor winding > Self-monitoring sensor technology
temperature, oil temperature as well as oil pressure and cycle > Connection facility for remote data monitoring
protection
Simple and logical operation Technical data

> Self-explanatory symbols
> Status is indicated by LEDs
Unit designation BCM2000
> Clearly designed control unit
Connection voltage AC 230 V - 1 - 50/60 Hz
Simple electrical connection
> All monitoring fuctions are wired ready for operation Relay AC 250 V, 3 A, 750 VA ind.
> Simple integration of the BCM2000 into the control circuit Dimensions L/B/H 100 x 60 x 52 mm
> All cable connections have screwless terminals
At a glance
14
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
Bock Innovations
The EFC System
Electronic Frequency Control
Progressively adjustable speed control using frequency
converter technology
Optionally available for all Pluscom compressors

HG(HA)12P, 22P, 34P
The Bock EFC system offers the most efficient way of adapting
the capacity of the compressor to current refrigeration plant
requirements: “Progressively adjustable speed control using
frequency converter technology“.
Up to 25 % less power consumption
The equipment is compactly mounted on the compressor, wired HG34P with mounted EFC
and connected ready for use. It is activated by a pressure trans- system and connected device
ducer mounted on the suction side. The adjustment range can for programming and Readout
be set individually.
Thanks to the oil pump lubrication, Pluscom compressors are

ideal for speed control, in particular also for low frequencies
Versions
15
Series HG(HA)
Bock Innovations
At a glance
The advantages:
> Supplied wired and adjusted ready for operation

> Compact mounting on the compressor
> Fully variable adjustment of the refrigerating capacity
on demand
> Up to 25% less power consumption
> Reduced mechanical compressor load for longer service life
> Always optimum machine pressures and operating conditions
> Lower pressure losses in the heat exchangers
> Lower cooling down and heating up losses throughout
the machine
> Control module also included for simple adjustment of the
EFC-System
> Reduced start-up current at full torque
> Auxiliary module ERC4 also suitable for racks
Further savings:
> No additional parts required

> No high energy, high-wear start/stop operation
> No additional wiring required
> No programming necessary
> Takes up no space in the switchboard
> Part windings and star-delta circuits no longer required
> Needs no screened supply lines to the compressor
16
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
Bock Innovations
Calculating the maximum possible frequency of the Technical data
compressor under specific operating conditions:
The following calculation is used to obtain the maximum

Unit designation EFC 2.2 EFC 4.0 EFC 7.5
possible frequency at the selected operating point:
Compressor models HG(HA)12P HG(HA)22P HG(HA)34P
P x 50 Hz Protection IP 65 IP 54 IP 54
fmax = max
Pe Max. output current
6A 9,5 A 19 A
under contiuous load
Max. output power 2.2 kW 4 kW 7.5 kW
fmax = maximum possible frequency [Hz]
Input AC 400/500 V -3- PE 50/60 Hz
Pmax = maximum power consumption [kW] 5.5/4.5 A 12.3/9.8 A 21.5/17.3 A
(see technical data, compressors) Output AC 0-400/500 V -3- PE 0-650 Hz
Permissible control range 30 - 70 Hz 30 - 70 Hz 25 - 70 Hz
Pe = power consumption at the operating point
at 50 Hz [kW] (see performance data, compressors)
Notes:
As a rule, the maximum permissible power consumption of the
compressor must not be exceeded. The maximum permissible
frequency (70 Hz) is always restricted for a higher evaporation
temperature and at the same time high condensation pressure
with refrigerants R404A, R507, R407C, R22, ...
Calculating the corresponding refrigerating capacity:
Refrigeration capacity can be determined as a function of Scope of supply

frequency from the following calculation:
> Basic equipment with intermediate adaptor mounted on
compressor terminal box, programmed and assembled ready
for operation
. EFC 2.2 for HG(HA)12P
. f x Q0 50Hz
Qo operation= operation EFC 4.0 for HG(HA)22P
50 Hz EFC 7.5 for HG(HA)34P
. > Pressure transducer for suction pressure based speed
Qo operation = refrigerating capacity at the chosen control 1)
operating point [W] > Incl. engine monitoring
> Device for programming and Readout equipment with
f operation = frequency at the chosen operating point [Hz] connector cable
.
Qo 50 Hz = refrigerating capacity at the operating point 1)
Configuration based on design required.
at 50 Hz [W] (see performance data, compressors) For possible designs see page 15
Dimensional variations with the EFC System

DB
DB
DB
HG(HA)12P HG(HA)22P HG(HA)34P

Dimensions in ( ) = HA version Dimensions in mm
17
Series HG(HA)
Bock Innovations
The ERC System
Electronic Rack Control
Principal regulating and control device for each Tecnical data

compressor of the rack
In racks with progressively adjustable speed control, the Unit designation ERC4
equipment is part of the EFC system (see page 15).
Protection IP20
It takes on the function of rack control. The basic load of each
Power consumption DC 24 V 4,2 A
individual compressor, and fine-tuning of the EFC frequency
converter (control signal 0-10 V) is controlled by a pressure 3 digital Inputs DC 24 V à 8 mA
transducer on the suction side.
4 digital Outputs DC 24 V à 1 A
} busy
The equipment is also equipped with operating time register

and compensation, switch-on and switch-off delays, surge
protection etc. There are max. four compressors controllable.
It‘s intended for installation in the swich cabinet.
18
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
Bock Innovations
The ESS System
Electronic Soft Start
Electronic compressor starter unit Technical data
Available as option for HG(HA)22P and HG(HA)34P

Unit designation ESS 25
The start process uses an electronic soft start unit, instead of Protection IP20 (connector terminal IP00)
the conventional start unloader through the bypass solenoid
valve, non-return valve and star-delta protector combination. Max. output power up to 11 kW
This means that the compressor gets up to its nominal speed Max. output current up to 25 A
in a set time and therefore produces much lower power peaks
than the classical star-delta start. Input AC 400 V - 3 - 50/60 Hz
The unit is designed to fit into a switch cabinet.
Dimensions a/b/c 125 x 45 x 125 mm
Only a single unit size is needed for either the HG(HA)22P
or the HG(HA)34P models.
At a glance
The advantages:
> Soft compressor start from zero to nominal speed, time
controlled and monitored
> Up to 40% lower start-up power consumption than when
using star-delta start
> No star-delta protection combination needed, no bypass
between pressure and suction side needed. No solenoid
valve or non-return valve needed.
> No compressor damage resulting from malfunction of the
start unloader
Scope of supply
Unit programmed ready to operate, compressor allotment can
be set by the potentiometer. Unit suitable for fitting into a
switch cabinet.
Voltage AC 400 V - 3 - 50/60 Hz
19
Series HG(HA)
Bock Innovationen
The ESP System

Electronic Single Phase
Phase converter from single to three phase AC Technical data
Available as an option for HG(HA)12P Unit designation ESP 1/3 - 2.2
consisting of: phase converter and power choke
The ESP System consists of a phase converter and a power
choke to limit the power. This unit converts single phase input Phase converter:
power to three phase output power and therefore enables the
compressor model HG(HA)12P to operate with a standard three Protection IP 20
phase AC motor using a single phase mains supply. Max. output current under
The unit is designed to be fitted into a switch cabinet. 9.5 A
continuous load
Max. output power 2.2 kW
Input AC 230/240 V - 1 - 50/60 Hz
Output AC 230/240 V - 3 - 50/60 Hz
Permissable control range
30 - 60 Hz
(compressor)*
* only for extension to stepless speed capacity control
Phase converter Power choke
Another option is to have the possibility of stepless speed

capacity control. The parts for this are a suction pressure
sensor and a read out unit.
Power choke:
Protection IP 20
Power consumtion: AC 230/240 V - 1 - 50/60 Hz 18 A
At a glance
The Advantages:
> Standard three phase AC compressor can be used on a Scope of supply:
single phase supply. ESP 1/3 - 2.2, comprising phase converter, programmed and
> Soft compressor start from zero to nominal speed, time tuned to the compressor and also a power choke to control the
controlled and monitored. power. Both units are intended for use in switching cabinets.
> Up tp 40 % lower start-up power consumption than Input: Single phase AC 230/240 V
using star delta-start. Output: Three phase AC 230/240 V
> No start-up or operating condensers or relays required.
> Contact free switching of main phases, no switch protection
needed. Accessories: (only possible ex-works, not retrofit)
> Option available for stepless speed capacity control. Extension of function to stepless speed capacity control
30-60 Hz comprising:
> Suction pressure sensor 4-20 mA
> Read out and programming unit
20
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
Bock Innovations
Trend-setting
compressor variants
For current market trends e.g. alternative refrigerants,
deep-freezing applications, Ex protection offers Bock a
selection of interesting compressor variants from the
established semi-hermetic range.
HA (Hermetic Air-cooled)
Semi-hermetic air-cooled compressor for the deep-freeze
Availability
temperature (R22/R404A)
compressor
HA ATEX CO2
ATEX (ATmosphéres EXplosibles) models
Semi-hermetic compressors in explosion-risk environments HG12P
CO2 compressors HG22P

Semi-hermetic compressors for subcritical cascade systems
HG34P
HG4
HG5
HG6
HG7
HG8
21
Series HG(HA)
Bock Innovations
The HA System
Hermetic Air-cooled
Semi-hermetic air-cooled compressor for the deep-freezing

temperature (R22/R404A)
Can be obtained for all 2 and 4 cylinder versions
Increasingly high specifications are being set for all suction

gas-cooled semi-hermetic compressors for deep-freezing
applications.
Compressors rapidly reach their temperature limits due to the
rise in temperature of the suction gas caused by the drive mo-
tor. The refrigeration capacity also diminishes. But not in Bock
HA compressors.
The unique “Bock HA principle“ prevents this. The drive motor

is air-cooled and compressor suction is direct. The suction gas
is not heated by the motor, but is fed directly to the compressor
without being diverted through the motor. The motor is cooled
by a compact integrated ventilation unit. Its precise airflow
cools not only the motor but also the compressor and especially
the cylinder heads.
A semi-hermetic compressor with the advantages

of an open type.
1 Suction gas is fed directly into the compressor

2 The motor is cooled by an integrated ventilation unit
3 Cool air is directed over the motor through an air duct hood
This results in a reduced discharge gas temperature and there-

fore an extended range of applications combined with improved
capacity (deep-freezing - e.g. R22, R404A).
In addition, the compressor is separate from the motor, which
is a particular advantage in the event of a motor burn-out.
22
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
Bock Innovations CO2 / ATEX

CO2 Compressors Available compressors
Semi-hermetic compressors for subcritical cascade systems
A range of very powerful 2 and 4 cylinder Pluscom compressors

are available for CO2 use in subcritical cascades.
Informations from page 63.
ATEX Compressors Available compressors
Semi-hermetic compressors in explosion-risk environments
Bock is the first European manufacturer to offer semi-hermetic

compressors which are conform to ATEX machine category 2.
Informations from page 71.
23
Series HG(HA)
Operating limits and notes R134a

Operating limits
HGX12P / HGX22P / HGX34P /
HGX4 / HGX5 / HGX6 / HGX7 / HGX8
Unlimited
application range
Supplementary cooling or
reduced suction gas temperature
Motor version -S-

(more powerful motor)
tO Evaporating temperature (°C)

tC Condensing temperature (°C)
$tOh Suction gas superheat (K)
tOh Suction gas temperature (°C)
Notes
Operating limits Performance data
Compressor operation is possible within the limits shown on The performance data for R134a are based on ISO-DIS 9309
the application diagrams. Please note the coloured areas. (DIN 8928) with a 50 Hz power supply frequency.
Compressor application limits should not be chosen for design This signifies: 25 °C suction gas temperature without
purposes or continuous operation. liquid subcooling.
Pluscom compressors operating at 50 Hz already comply with
Restrictions to the operating limits may occur when using the EN 12900.
Bock EFC (Electronic Frequency Control). This signifies: 20 °C suction gas temperature without
The sample calculation on page 17 gives a more detailed liquid subcooling.
explanation. A comprehensive modification to 20 °C suction gas
temperature will follow at a later date.
Conversion factor for 60 Hz = 1.2
The Bock software gives performance data for other operating

points.
24
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
R134a Performance data 50 Hz

•
Type Cond. Cooling capacity QO [W] Power consumption Pe [kW]
temp.
°C Evaporating temperature °C
12,5 10 7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30
Q 4920 4486 4078 3697 3009 2415 1908 1480 1125 836 605
30 P 0,70 0,71 0,71 0,71 0,68 0,65 0,60 0,54 0,49 0,44 0,40
Q 4254 3874 3518 3185 2585 2066 1622 1246 931 670 455
40 P 0,85 0,84 0,83 0,81 0,77 0,71 0,65 0,59 0,54 0,49 0,45
Q 3620 3292 2985 2698 2181 1734 1349 1021 742 504 302
HGX12P/60-4 S 50 P 0,99 0,97 0,94 0,91 0,85 0,77 0,70 0,63 0,57 0,52 0,49
Q 3018 2740 2480 2237 1799 1419 1090 806 558 340 145
60 P 1,12 1,08 1,04 1,00 0,91 0,82 0,74 0,66 0,59 0,55 0,52
Q 2450 2220 2004 1804 1441 1124 846 601 381
70 P 1,23 1,18 1,12 1,07 0,96 0,85 0,75 0,66 0,60
Q 6147 5604 5095 4619 3760 3017 2383 1849 1405 1044 756
30 P 0,88 0,89 0,89 0,88 0,85 0,81 0,75 0,68 0,61 0,55 0,50
Q 5315 4840 4395 3979 3229 2581 2027 1557 1163 837 569
40 P 1,06 1,05 1,04 1,02 0,96 0,89 0,82 0,74 0,67 0,61 0,57
Q 4523 4113 3729 3371 2725 2166 1686 1276 927 630 377
HGX12P/75-4 50 P 1,24 1,21 1,18 1,14 1,06 0,97 0,88 0,79 0,71 0,65 0,62
Q 3770 3423 3098 2795 2248 1773 1362 1006 697 425 182
60 P 1,40 1,35 1,30 1,25 1,14 1,03 0,92 0,82 0,74 0,68 0,65
Q 3060 2773 2504 2253 1800 1404 1058 751 476
70 P 1,53 1,47 1,40 1,33 1,19 1,06 0,94 0,83 0,74
Q 7295 6663 6069 5511 4501 3623 2869 2229 1696 1259 911
30 P 1,09 1,11 1,12 1,13 1,11 1,06 1,00 0,92 0,83 0,74 0,65
Q 6377 5811 5280 4782 3883 3104 2437 1872 1402 1016 707
40 P 1,34 1,34 1,32 1,30 1,24 1,16 1,06 0,96 0,85 0,74 0,65
Q 5481 4981 4513 4075 3286 2606 2025 1535 1127 792 521
HGX12P/90-4 50 P 1,60 1,57 1,53 1,49 1,39 1,27 1,14 1,01 0,89 0,77 0,67
Q 4611 4176 3771 3393 2714 2132 1637 1222 876 591 358
60 P 1,83 1,78 1,72 1,65 1,51 1,36 1,21 1,06 0,91 0,79 0,69
Q 3771 3402 3059 2740 2172 1687 1279 937 652
70 P 2,01 1,93 1,85 1,76 1,59 1,40 1,23 1,06 0,90
Q 8619 7858 7145 6477 5272 4231 3342 2593 1971 1464 1060
30 P 1,23 1,24 1,25 1,24 1,20 1,13 1,05 0,95 0,86 0,78 0,71
Q 7453 6787 6163 5580 4528 3619 2842 2183 1631 1173 797
40 P 1,49 1,48 1,45 1,42 1,35 1,25 1,14 1,04 0,94 0,85 0,79
Q 6342 5767 5229 4726 3820 3037 2364 1789 1299 883 528
HGX12P/110-4 50 P 1,74 1,70 1,65 1,60 1,48 1,36 1,23 1,11 1,00 0,92 0,87
Q 5287 4800 4344 3919 3152 2486 1910 1411 977 596 255
60 P 1,96 1,89 1,82 1,75 1,60 1,44 1,29 1,15 1,04 0,96 0,91
Q 4291 3888 3511 3159 2524 1969 1483 1053 667
70 P 2,15 2,06 1,96 1,87 1,68 1,49 1,31 1,16 1,04
Q 10141 9246 8406 7620 6203 4978 3932 3050 2319 1722 1247
30 P 1,45 1,46 1,47 1,46 1,41 1,33 1,23 1,12 1,01 0,91 0,83
Q 8769 7985 7251 6565 5327 4258 3344 2569 1919 1380 938
40 P 1,75 1,74 1,71 1,68 1,58 1,47 1,35 1,22 1,10 1,00 0,93
Q 7461 6785 6152 5561 4495 3573 2781 2105 1529 1039 621
HGX22P/125-4 50 P 2,04 2,00 1,94 1,88 1,74 1,60 1,45 1,30 1,18 1,08 1,02
Q 6221 5648 5112 4611 3708 2925 2248 1661 1150 701 300
60 P 2,31 2,23 2,15 2,06 1,88 1,69 1,52 1,36 1,22 1,13 1,08
Q 5049 4575 4131 3717 2969 2317 1745 1239 785
70 P 2,53 2,42 2,31 2,20 1,97 1,75 1,55 1,37 1,23
Q 12519 11414 10378 9408 7658 6146 4854 3766 2862 2126 1539
30 P 1,79 1,81 1,81 1,80 1,74 1,64 1,52 1,39 1,25 1,13 1,03
Q 10826 9859 8952 8105 6577 5257 4128 3171 2369 1704 1158
40 P 2,17 2,15 2,11 2,07 1,95 1,82 1,66 1,51 1,36 1,24 1,15
Q 9212 8377 7595 6865 5549 4412 3434 2598 1887 1283 767
HGX22P/160-4 50 P 2,52 2,47 2,40 2,32 2,15 1,97 1,78 1,61 1,45 1,33 1,26
Q 7680 6972 6311 5692 4578 3611 2775 2050 1420 865 370
60 P 2,85 2,75 2,65 2,54 2,32 2,09 1,87 1,67 1,51 1,39 1,33
Q 6233 5648 5101 4589 3666 2860 2154 1530 969
70 P 3,12 2,99 2,85 2,71 2,43 2,16 1,91 1,69 1,51
Performance data 50 Hz Supplementary cooling or

Relating to 20 °C suction gas temperature, reduced suction gas temperature
without liquid subcooling
25
Series HG(HA)

•
temp.
12,5 10 7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30
Q 15148 13811 12557 11383 9266 7436 5874 4557 3464 2573 1862
30 P 2,17 2,19 2,19 2,17 2,10 1,99 1,84 1,68 1,51 1,36 1,24
Q 13099 11929 10832 9807 7958 6361 4995 3837 2867 2062 1401
40 P 2,62 2,60 2,56 2,50 2,37 2,20 2,01 1,82 1,65 1,50 1,39
Q 11146 10136 9190 8307 6715 5338 4155 3144 2284 1552 928
HGX22P/190-4 50 P 3,05 2,98 2,90 2,81 2,61 2,38 2,16 1,95 1,76 1,61 1,52
Q 9293 8436 7636 6888 5540 4370 3357 2481 1718 1047 447
60 P 3,45 3,33 3,21 3,08 2,80 2,53 2,26 2,03 1,83 1,68 1,61
Q 7543 6834 6172 5553 4436 3461 2606 1851 1173
70 P 3,78 3,62 3,45 3,28 2,94 2,61 2,31 2,04 1,83
Q 17159 15564 14080 12701 10243 8152 6394 4932 3730 2752 1963
30 P 2,41 2,41 2,39 2,37 2,28 2,16 2,01 1,83 1,62 1,40 1,18
Q 14865 13459 12154 10944 8794 6972 5443 4171 3120 2253 1536
40 P 2,99 2,94 2,88 2,80 2,63 2,43 2,20 1,96 1,70 1,44 1,18
Q 12675 11451 10317 9269 7412 5844 4530 3434 2519 1749 1089
HGX34P/215-4 50 P 3,53 3,42 3,31 3,19 2,93 2,64 2,35 2,04 1,73 1,42 1,12
Q 10566 9516 8546 7652 6075 4747 3633 2698 1904 1217 600
60 P 3,99 3,83 3,67 3,50 3,15 2,79 2,42 2,05 1,69 1,33 1,00
Q 8515 7632 6819 6072 4759 3656 2728 1939 1252
70 P 4,37 4,16 3,95 3,73 3,29 2,84 2,40 1,97 1,55
Q 20281 18491 16812 15241 12405 9956 7864 6101 4637 3444 2493
30 P 2,90 2,93 2,93 2,91 2,82 2,66 2,46 2,25 2,03 1,83 1,66
Q 17538 15971 14503 13130 10655 8517 6687 5137 3838 2761 1876
40 P 3,51 3,48 3,42 3,35 3,17 2,94 2,69 2,44 2,21 2,01 1,87
Q 14923 13570 12305 11122 8990 7147 5563 4209 3057 2078 1243
HGX34P/255-4 50 P 4,09 3,99 3,88 3,76 3,49 3,19 2,89 2,61 2,36 2,16 2,04
Q 12441 11295 10223 9222 7417 5851 4495 3321 2300 1402 599
60 P 4,61 4,46 4,29 4,12 3,75 3,39 3,03 2,71 2,45 2,25 2,15
Q 10098 9150 8263 7435 5939 4634 3489 2478 1570
70 P 5,06 4,85 4,62 4,40 3,94 3,50 3,09 2,74 2,45
Q 24601 22392 20325 18396 14932 11958 9437 7329 5593 4192 3085
30 P 3,52 3,51 3,49 3,45 3,33 3,15 2,92 2,67 2,38 2,09 1,79
Q 21499 19546 17721 16021 12972 10361 8147 6292 4755 3498 2481
40 P 4,30 4,24 4,16 4,06 3,83 3,55 3,24 2,89 2,53 2,17 1,81
Q 18484 16780 15193 13715 11072 8812 6895 5282 3933 2810 1872
HGX34P/315-4 50 P 5,03 4,91 4,77 4,62 4,28 3,89 3,48 3,05 2,61 2,17 1,75
Q 15541 14083 12727 11467 9219 7299 5668 4286 3115 2114 1244
60 P 5,69 5,50 5,30 5,09 4,63 4,14 3,63 3,11 2,59 2,07 1,58
Q 12659 11441 10310 9263 7398 5808 4452 3291 2286
70 P 6,24 5,98 5,72 5,45 4,87 4,27 3,66 3,04 2,43
Q 30297 27623 25115 22767 18531 14873 11748 9114 6927 5145 3724
30 P 4,33 4,37 4,38 4,35 4,21 3,97 3,68 3,36 3,03 2,73 2,48
Q 26198 23858 21664 19613 15916 12723 9990 7674 5734 4124 2802
40 P 5,24 5,19 5,11 5,01 4,73 4,39 4,02 3,65 3,30 3,00 2,79
Q 22292 20272 18381 16614 13430 10676 8310 6288 4567 3105 1857
HGX34P/380-4 50 P 6,11 5,97 5,80 5,62 5,21 4,77 4,32 3,89 3,52 3,23 3,05
Q 18585 16873 15271 13776 11079 8740 6715 4961 3435 2094 895
60 P 6,89 6,66 6,41 6,15 5,61 5,06 4,53 4,05 3,65 3,36 3,21
Q 15085 13668 12343 11106 8872 6922 5213 3702 2345
70 P 7,56 7,24 6,91 6,57 5,89 5,23 4,62 4,09 3,67
Q 36844 33673 30698 27910 22866 18484 14705 11472 8725 6406 4458
30 P 6,44 6,21 5,98 5,77 5,37 4,98 4,62 4,26 3,89 3,50 3,10
Q 33160 30273 27568 25038 20475 16524 13128 10228 7765 5682 3920
40 P 7,25 6,97 6,70 6,44 5,94 5,46 4,98 4,52 4,04 3,54 3,02
Q 28823 26257 23862 21629 17623 14181 11244 8754 6653 4882 3383
HGX4/465-4 50 P 8,09 7,75 7,42 7,10 6,48 5,87 5,28 4,68 4,07 3,44 2,78
Q 23760 21555 19507 17610 14239 11382 8981 6979 5316 3934 2775
60 P 8,96 8,55 8,15 7,76 6,99 6,24 5,50 4,75 3,98 3,19 2,37
Q 17901 16094 14433 12910 10249 8055 6268 4829 3682
70 P 9,85 9,37 8,89 8,42 7,49 6,57 5,65 4,73 3,79
Performance data 50 Hz
Relating to 20 °C suction gas temperature, Supplementary cooling or
(HGX4 25 °C suction gas temperature) reduced suction gas temperature
26
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)

•
temp.
12,5 10 7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30
Q 43847 40074 36533 33215 27212 21997 17501 13652 10383 7624 5305
30 P 7,66 7,39 7,12 6,87 6,38 5,93 5,50 5,06 4,63 4,17 3,69
Q 39463 36027 32808 29798 24367 19665 15624 12172 9241 6762 4665
40 P 8,63 8,30 7,98 7,66 7,07 6,49 5,93 5,37 4,80 4,21 3,59
Q 34302 31248 28398 25741 20973 16876 13381 10418 7917 5810 4026
HGX4/555-4 50 P 9,63 9,23 8,83 8,45 7,71 6,99 6,28 5,57 4,84 4,09 3,30
Q 28277 25652 23215 20958 16945 13545 10688 8305 6326 4682 3302
60 P 10,66 10,17 9,70 9,23 8,32 7,43 6,54 5,65 4,74 3,80 2,82
Q 21303 19153 17176 15363 12198 9586 7459 5747 4382
70 P 11,73 11,15 10,58 10,02 8,91 7,82 6,72 5,63 4,51
Q 51459 47031 42875 38981 31937 25816 20539 16023 12186 8948 6226
30 P 8,99 8,67 8,36 8,06 7,49 6,96 6,45 5,94 5,43 4,90 4,33
Q 46314 42282 38504 34971 28597 23079 18336 14285 10846 7936 5474
40 P 10,13 9,74 9,36 8,99 8,29 7,62 6,96 6,31 5,64 4,95 4,22
Q 40257 36673 33328 30209 24614 19806 15704 12227 9292 6818 4724
HGX4/650-4 50 P 11,30 10,83 10,37 9,92 9,05 8,20 7,37 6,53 5,68 4,80 3,88
Q 33186 30106 27246 24596 19887 15897 12544 9747 7424 5494 3876
60 P 12,51 11,94 11,38 10,84 9,77 8,72 7,68 6,63 5,56 4,46 3,31
Q 25002 22478 20158 18031 14315 11250 8754 6745 5142
70 P 13,76 13,08 12,41 11,75 10,45 9,17 7,89 6,60 5,29
Q 57279 52351 47725 43390 35549 28736 22862 17835 13564 9960 6930
30 P 10,01 9,65 9,30 8,97 8,34 7,75 7,18 6,62 6,04 5,45 4,81
Q 51552 47064 42859 38926 31832 25690 20410 15901 12072 8834 6094
40 P 11,27 10,84 10,42 10,01 9,23 8,48 7,75 7,02 6,28 5,51 4,69
Q 44810 40821 37097 33626 27398 22047 17481 13610 10343 7589 5259
HGX5/725-4 50 P 12,58 12,05 11,54 11,04 10,07 9,13 8,20 7,27 6,32 5,34 4,31
Q 36939 33511 30327 27378 22136 17695 13963 10849 8264 6116 4314
60 P 13,92 13,29 12,67 12,06 10,87 9,71 8,55 7,38 6,19 4,97 3,69
Q 27829 25020 22438 20070 15934 12523 9744 7508 5724
70 P 15,32 14,56 13,82 13,08 11,64 10,21 8,78 7,35 5,89
Q 65754 60097 54786 49810 40808 32988 26244 20474 15571 11433 7956
30 P 11,49 11,08 10,68 10,30 9,58 8,90 8,24 7,59 6,94 6,25 5,53
Q 59180 54028 49200 44686 36541 29491 23430 18254 13859 10141 6995
40 P 12,94 12,44 11,96 11,49 10,60 9,74 8,90 8,06 7,21 6,32 5,39
Q 51440 46861 42586 38601 31452 25309 20067 15623 11873 8712 6037
HGX5/830-4 50 P 14,44 13,83 13,25 12,67 11,56 10,48 9,42 8,35 7,26 6,13 4,95
Q 42405 38469 34814 31429 25412 20313 16029 12455 9487 7021 4952
60 P 15,98 15,26 14,55 13,85 12,48 11,14 9,81 8,47 7,11 5,70 4,24
Q 31947 28722 25758 23040 18292 14376 11186 8619 6571
70 P 17,59 16,72 15,86 15,02 13,36 11,72 10,08 8,44 6,76
Q 74814 68376 62334 56673 46431 37533 29860 23294 17717 13009 9052
30 P 13,08 12,60 12,15 11,71 10,89 10,12 9,38 8,64 7,89 7,12 6,29
Q 67334 61471 55979 50842 41576 33554 26658 20768 15768 11538 7959
40 P 14,73 14,16 13,61 13,08 12,06 11,08 10,12 9,17 8,20 7,19 6,13
Q 58527 53317 48453 43920 35785 28796 22832 17776 13509 9913 6869
HGX5/945-4 50 P 16,43 15,74 15,07 14,42 13,16 11,93 10,71 9,50 8,26 6,98 5,64
Q 48247 43769 39611 35759 28913 23112 18237 14171 10794 7988 5635
60 P 18,19 17,36 16,55 15,76 14,20 12,68 11,16 9,64 8,09 6,49 4,82
Q 36349 32680 29306 26214 20812 16356 12727 9807 7476
70 P 20,01 19,02 18,05 17,09 15,20 13,33 11,47 9,60 7,69
Q 85736 78334 71386 64875 53098 42867 34049 26509 20114 14729 10219
30 P 14,90 14,37 13,87 13,39 12,46 11,59 10,74 9,90 9,04 8,14 7,19
Q 77231 70507 64206 58310 47666 38441 30501 23712 17939 13049 8906
40 P 16,80 16,16 15,53 14,93 13,77 12,65 11,56 10,47 9,36 8,22 7,01
Q 67028 61090 55541 50366 41068 33062 26213 20387 15449 11267 7704
HGX6/1080-4 50 P 18,77 17,98 17,21 16,46 15,01 13,59 12,20 10,82 9,41 7,96 6,46
Q 54908 49861 45172 40824 33086 26510 20965 16315 12425 9163 6393
60 P 20,84 19,87 18,93 18,01 16,20 14,44 12,70 10,96 9,20 7,40 5,54
Q 40651 36602 32879 29464 23497 18566 14537 11275 8647
70 P 23,02 21,85 20,71 19,59 17,38 15,22 13,08 10,93 8,77

27
Series HG(HA)

•
temp.
12,5 10 7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30
Q 98422 89924 81948 74474 60954 49209 39087 30432 23090 16908 11731
30 P 17,10 16,50 15,92 15,37 14,31 13,31 12,33 11,36 10,38 9,35 8,25
Q 88658 80940 73706 66937 54718 44128 35014 27220 20593 14979 10224
40 P 19,29 18,55 17,83 17,14 15,81 14,52 13,27 12,02 10,75 9,43 8,05
Q 76946 70129 63759 57818 47145 37954 30091 23403 17735 12934 8844
HGX6/1240-4 50 P 21,55 20,64 19,76 18,90 17,23 15,61 14,01 12,42 10,80 9,14 7,41
Q 63033 57239 51856 46865 37981 30433 24067 18729 14264 10519 7339
60 P 23,92 22,81 21,73 20,67 18,60 16,58 14,58 12,58 10,56 8,50 6,36
Q 46666 42017 37743 33824 26974 21313 16688 12944 9926
70 P 26,42 25,09 23,77 22,48 19,95 17,47 15,01 12,55 10,06
Q 111982 102314 93239 84735 69352 55989 44472 34624 26271 19237 13347
30 P 19,46 18,77 18,11 17,48 16,28 15,14 14,03 12,93 11,81 10,63 9,39
Q 100873 92091 83861 76160 62257 50208 39838 30970 23431 17043 11632
40 P 21,95 21,10 20,29 19,50 17,98 16,53 15,10 13,68 12,23 10,73 9,16
Q 87547 79791 72544 65784 53640 43183 34237 26628 20179 14716 10062
HGX6/1410-4 50 P 24,52 23,49 22,48 21,50 19,60 17,76 15,94 14,13 12,29 10,40 8,43
Q 71717 65125 59000 53322 43214 34626 27383 21309 16229 11968 8350
60 P 27,22 25,96 24,73 23,52 21,16 18,86 16,59 14,32 12,02 9,67 7,23
Q 53096 47807 42943 38484 30690 24250 18987 14727 11294
70 P 30,06 28,54 27,05 25,58 22,70 19,88 17,08 14,28 11,45
Q 121493 110976 101143 91966 75469 61262 49126 38837 30174 22916 16842
30 P 16,46 16,72 16,84 16,83 16,46 15,69 14,61 13,32 11,90 10,44 9,03
Q 108919 99297 90317 81950 66947 54067 43088 33788 25945 19339 13748
40 P 21,03 20,91 20,66 20,30 19,29 17,97 16,41 14,72 12,99 11,29 9,73
Q 95988 87281 79173 71637 58168 46654 36872 28600 21618 15703 10634
HGX7/1620-4 50 P 25,19 24,70 24,11 23,42 21,82 19,98 17,99 15,95 13,94 12,05 10,37
Q 82743 74970 67755 61069 49175 39066 30521 23318 17235 12052 7545
60 P 28,86 28,03 27,11 26,12 23,97 21,65 19,28 16,92 14,68 12,64 10,89
Q 69228 62411 56108 50292 40012 31348 24080 17985 12842
70 P 31,98 30,82 29,60 28,32 25,66 22,92 20,19 17,56 15,13
Q 139469 127396 116108 105573 86635 70327 56394 44583 34639 26307 19334
30 P 18,89 19,20 19,34 19,32 18,90 18,01 16,78 15,29 13,66 11,98 10,37
Q 125034 113989 103680 94075 76853 62067 49463 38787 29784 22201 15782
40 P 24,14 24,00 23,72 23,31 22,15 20,62 18,84 16,90 14,91 12,96 11,17
Q 110190 100194 90887 82236 66775 53557 42327 32832 24817 18027 12208
HGX7/1860-4 50 P 28,92 28,36 27,68 26,89 25,05 22,94 20,65 18,31 16,00 13,83 11,91
Q 94985 86063 77780 70105 56451 44847 35037 26768 19786 13835 8662
60 P 33,13 32,18 31,12 29,99 27,51 24,86 22,13 19,42 16,85 14,51 12,50
Q 79471 71645 64409 57733 45932 35987 27643 20646 14742
70 P 36,71 35,38 33,98 32,51 29,45 26,31 23,18 20,16 17,37
Q 158685 144949 132106 120119 98571 80016 64164 50725 39411 29932 21997
30 P 21,49 21,84 22,00 21,99 21,50 20,49 19,09 17,40 15,54 13,64 11,80
Q 142261 129694 117965 107037 87442 70618 56278 44131 33888 25259 17956
40 P 27,47 27,31 26,99 26,52 25,20 23,47 21,44 19,23 16,96 14,75 12,71
Q 125371 113999 103409 93566 75975 60936 48159 37356 28236 20510 13890
HGX7/2110-4 50 P 32,90 32,26 31,49 30,59 28,50 26,10 23,50 20,83 18,20 15,74 13,55
Q 108072 97921 88497 79764 64229 51026 39864 30456 22512 15741 9855
60 P 37,70 36,61 35,41 34,12 31,30 28,28 25,18 22,10 19,17 16,50 14,22
Q 90421 81516 73284 65688 52260 40945 31451 23490 16773
70 P 41,77 40,25 38,66 36,99 33,51 29,93 26,37 22,94 19,77
Q 183602 167520 152443 138333 112875 90860 72001 56010 42601 31487 22381
30 P 31,01 30,56 29,96 29,22 27,37 25,15 22,69 20,11 17,54 15,12 12,96
Q 164740 149967 136145 123239 100027 80046 63008 48626 36614 26683 18548
40 P 36,21 35,28 34,22 33,06 30,45 27,59 24,59 21,60 18,74 16,13 13,90
Q 145090 131705 119218 107593 86785 68995 53936 41320 30861 22271 15265
HGX8/2470-4 S 50 P 41,17 39,77 38,28 36,71 33,37 29,90 26,41 23,04 19,91 17,16 14,90
Q 124663 112744 101670 91405 73158 57716 44792 34099 25351 18260 12539
60 P 45,99 44,15 42,24 40,27 36,25 32,19 28,25 24,53 21,17 18,30 16,04
Q 103467 93093 83511 74684 59155 46218 35587 26974 20094
70 P 50,77 48,50 46,19 43,85 39,17 34,57 30,19 26,16 22,61

28
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)

•
temp.
12,5 10 7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30
Q 210768 192307 174998 158801 129576 104304 82654 64297 48905 36146 25692
30 P 35,60 35,08 34,39 33,54 31,42 28,87 26,05 23,09 20,14 17,35 14,88
Q 189115 172156 156289 141473 114827 91890 72331 55821 42031 30631 21293
40 P 41,56 40,50 39,29 37,95 34,95 31,67 28,23 24,80 21,51 18,52 15,96
Q 166558 151192 136858 123512 99626 79203 61916 47433 35427 25566 17523
HGX8/2830-4 50 P 47,26 45,66 43,95 42,14 38,31 34,32 30,32 26,45 22,86 19,69 17,10
Q 143108 129426 116713 104929 83982 66256 51419 39145 29102 20961 14394
60 P 52,79 50,68 48,49 46,23 41,61 36,96 32,42 28,16 24,30 21,00 18,41
Q 118776 106867 95867 85734 67907 53056 40852 30965 23067
70 P 58,28 55,68 53,02 50,34 44,96 39,69 34,66 30,03 25,95
Q 239807 218802 199109 180680 147429 118675 94042 73156 55642 41126 29232
30 P 40,50 39,92 39,13 38,16 35,75 32,85 29,63 26,27 22,92 19,75 16,93
Q 215170 195875 177822 160965 130648 104550 82296 63512 47822 34852 24226
40 P 47,29 46,08 44,70 43,17 39,77 36,03 32,12 28,22 24,47 21,07 18,16
Q 189506 172023 155713 140530 113352 90116 70446 53969 40308 29089 19937
HGX8/3220-4 50 P 53,77 51,95 50,00 47,94 43,59 39,05 34,50 30,09 26,01 22,41 19,46
Q 162825 147258 132794 119386 95553 75384 58504 44538 33111 23849 16377
60 P 60,06 57,66 55,17 52,60 47,34 42,05 36,89 32,04 27,65 23,90 20,95
Q 135141 121591 109075 97546 77263 60366 46481 35232 26245
70 P 66,32 63,35 60,33 57,28 51,16 45,15 39,44 34,17 29,53

29
Series HG(HA)
Operating limits R404A/R507

HGX12P / HGX22P / HGX34P / HAX12P / HAX22P / HAX34P / HAX4
HGX4 / HGX5 / HGX6 1 / HGX7 / HGX8 2
HAX5 HAX6
1 HGX6/1410-4 S Unlimited
max. evaporating temperature application range
tO = 2 °C
HGX6/1410-4 -HG Supplementary cooling or
max. evaporating temperature reduced suction gas temp.
tO = -7 °C -HA Reduced suction gas temp.
2 HGX8/2830-4 Motor version -S-

max. evaporating temperature (more powerful motor)
tO = 0 °C
30
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
Notes R404A/R507
Operating limits
Compressor operation is possible within the limits shown on
the application diagrams. Please note the coloured areas.
Compressor application limits should not be chosen for design
purposes or continuous operation.
Restrictions to the operating limits may occur when using the

Bock EFC (Electronic Frequency Control).
The sample calculation on page 17 gives a more detailed
explanation.
Performance data
The performance data for R404A/R507 are based on European
Standard EN 12900 with a 50 Hz power supply.
This signifies: 20 °C suction gas temperature without liquid
subcooling.
This leads to significant differences compared to systems with

liquid subcooling and/or other suction gas temperatures.
Performance data were compiled for R404A and R507.

The base values are the data for R404A.
The Bock software gives performance data for other

operating points.
ASERCOM certified performance data

ASERCOM certified performance data
The performance data of compressors bearing
this label has been certified to the strict
requirements of ASERCOM.
ASERCOM is the Association of European Refrigeration

Compressors and Controls Manufacturers. Information
about the Association and the constantly updated overview
of certified Bock compressors can be found at
www.asercom.org and www.bock.de
31
Series HG(HA)
R404A/R507 Performance data 50 Hz

•
temp.
7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40 -45
Q 6565 6009 4996 4107 3333 2665 2095 1614 1215 887 623 413
30 P 1,24 1,26 1,26 1,24 1,19 1,12 1,04 0,94 0,84 0,74 0,64 0,56
Q 5556 5076 4204 3440 2778 2207 1720 1307 961 672 433 234
HGX12P/60-4 S 40 P 1,50 1,50 1,47 1,41 1,33 1,22 1,11 0,98 0,85 0,73 0,61 0,50
Q 4527 4123 3392 2755 2205 1733 1329 986 694 446 232
50 P 1,73 1,71 1,64 1,54 1,42 1,28 1,13 0,98 0,82 0,67 0,53
Q 2327 1851 1442 1097 809 573
30 P 1,04 0,95 0,86 0,75 0,66 0,56
Q 1956 1538 1182 883 635 435
HAX12P/60-4 40 P 1,12 1,00 0,88 0,76 0,65 0,54
Q 1582 1223 921 670 465 301
50 P 1,18 1,04 0,89 0,75 0,62 0,51
Q 8323 7643 6401 5301 4310 3460 2738 2129 1621 1198 849 558
30 P 1,51 1,53 1,53 1,50 1,44 1,36 1,26 1,14 1,01 0,88 0,76 0,65
HGX12P/75-4 Q 7061 6469 5393 4436 3594 2873 2260 1741 1302 930 611 331
40
HGX12P/75-4 S P 1,85 1,84 1,79 1,71 1,61 1,48 1,34 1,19 1,03 0,89 0,75 0,63
Q 5811 5308 4396 3587 2887 2289 1779 1343 967 638 343
50 P 2,17 2,12 2,02 1,89 1,74 1,57 1,39 1,21 1,03 0,86 0,72
Q 2888 2296 1789 1361 1004 711
30 P 1,29 1,18 1,06 0,94 0,81 0,70
Q 2427 1908 1466 1095 788 540
HAX12P/75-4 40 P 1,39 1,25 1,10 0,95 0,80 0,67
Q 1962 1517 1143 831 577 374
50 P 1,46 1,29 1,11 0,93 0,77 0,63
Q 9798 9007 7562 6336 5170 4172 3325 2612 2014 1515 1098 743
30 P 1,80 1,81 1,82 1,80 1,73 1,62 1,50 1,36 1,21 1,05 0,90 0,76
HGX12P/90-4 Q 8340 7653 6402 5326 4335 3489 2771 2163 1647 1207 825 483
40
HGX12P/90-4 S P 2,24 2,22 2,16 2,07 1,94 1,78 1,62 1,44 1,25 1,07 0,89 0,73
Q 6894 6311 5253 4325 3504 2805 2210 1703 1264 878 526
50 P 2,63 2,57 2,44 2,30 2,11 1,91 1,69 1,47 1,26 1,05 0,85
Q 3407 2698 2089 1574 1146 796
30 P 1,56 1,43 1,29 1,15 1,00 0,86
Q 2853 2229 1699 1254 889 596
HAX12P/90-4 40 P 1,67 1,50 1,33 1,15 0,98 0,82
Q 2287 1752 1303 932 633 399
50 P 1,75 1,54 1,33 1,13 0,93 0,76
Q 11620 10686 8980 7370 6029 4883 3912 3094 2408 1832 1347 929
30 P 2,24 2,24 2,21 2,11 2,01 1,89 1,74 1,57 1,40 1,22 1,04 0,87
HGX12P/110-4 Q 9830 9026 7561 6215 5076 4105 3281 2584 1992 1485 1039 635
40
HGX12P/110-4 S P 2,73 2,69 2,59 2,43 2,27 2,09 1,89 1,68 1,47 1,25 1,04 0,84
Q 8079 7403 6177 5063 4121 3321 2642 2063 1561 1117 709
50 P 3,19 3,12 2,95 2,70 2,48 2,25 2,00 1,74 1,49 1,23 0,99
Q 4092 3265 2558 1960 1461 1051
30 P 1,78 1,63 1,46 1,28 1,11 0,94
Q 3451 2726 2109 1590 1159 806
HAX12P/110-4 40 P 1,94 1,74 1,52 1,30 1,10 0,92
Q 2809 2189 1664 1227 866 572
50 P 2,05 1,80 1,55 1,30 1,07 0,88
Q 13852 12750 10723 8607 7108 5792 4645 3656 2811 2097 1500 1009
30 P 2,33 2,33 2,30 2,32 2,21 2,08 1,93 1,77 1,59 1,39 1,18 0,94
HGX22P/125-4 1) Q 11749 10788 9028 7247 5949 4813 3827 2978 2253 1639 1122 690
40
HGX22P/125-4 S P 2,90 2,86 2,73 2,70 2,52 2,32 2,11 1,89 1,65 1,39 1,11 0,82
Q 9671 8853 7362 5912 4815 3861 3036 2328 1723 1209 773
50 P 3,40 3,30 3,09 3,03 2,78 2,51 2,24 1,95 1,64 1,32 0,99
Q 4728 3791 2981 2291 1715 1247
30 P 1,92 1,71 1,51 1,32 1,13 0,94
Q 3959 3158 2466 1876 1382 977
HAX22P/125-4 40 P 2,09 1,84 1,60 1,37 1,14 0,92
Q 3211 2538 1956 1458 1037 689
50 P 2,22 1,92 1,64 1,37 1,10 0,83
Motor version -S-

Performance data 50 Hz -HG Supplementary cooling or

Relating to 20 °C suction gas temperature, 1) ASERCOM reduced suction gas temp.
without liquid subcooling certified -HA Reduced suction gas temp.
32
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)

•
temp.
7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40 -45
Q 17097 15737 13235 10533 8707 7104 5707 4503 3474 2604 1878 1279
30 P 2,87 2,88 2,84 2,83 2,71 2,55 2,37 2,15 1,92 1,66 1,39 1,10
HGX22P/160-4 1) Q 14501 13315 11143 8856 7282 5906 4712 3684 2806 2062 1436 913
40
HGX22P/160-4 S P 3,58 3,53 3,37 3,28 3,07 2,83 2,56 2,28 1,98 1,66 1,33 1,00
Q 11936 10926 9086 7225 5903 4754 3761 2909 2182 1563 1037
50 P 4,19 4,08 3,81 3,67 3,37 3,05 2,70 2,35 1,98 1,61 1,23
Q 5837 4680 3680 2828 2118 1540
30 P 2,37 2,11 1,87 1,63 1,40 1,17
Q 4888 3899 3044 2316 1706 1207
HAX22P/160-4 40 P 2,58 2,27 1,98 1,69 1,41 1,14
Q 3964 3134 2414 1799 1281 851
50 P 2,74 2,38 2,03 1,69 1,36 1,03
Q 20292 18689 15749 12757 10574 8658 6990 5550 4321 3282 2415 1700
30 P 3,82 3,79 3,68 3,39 3,26 3,08 2,85 2,58 2,28 1,97 1,66 1,35
HGX22P/190-4 1) Q 17156 15775 13251 10707 8833 7196 5775 4552 3508 2623 1879 1256
40 4,67 4,57 4,34 3,98 3,72 3,41 3,07 2,71 2,34 1,96 1,60 1,26
HGX22P/190-4 S 1) P
Q 14097 12937 10826 8714 7148 5787 4612 3603 2742 2010 1387
50 P 5,42 5,26 4,90 4,49 4,10 3,68 3,24 2,79 2,35 1,93 1,52
Q 7063 5663 4453 3422 2562 1863
30 P 2,87 2,55 2,26 1,97 1,69 1,41
Q 5915 4718 3684 2802 2064 1460
HAX22P/190-4 40 P 3,12 2,75 2,39 2,05 1,71 1,37
Q 4797 3792 2922 2177 1550 1030
50 P 3,31 2,88 2,45 2,04 1,64 1,25
Q 23278 21390 17923 14216 11674 9440 7493 5813 4381 3174 2173 1356
30 P 4,05 4,03 3,95 3,87 3,63 3,35 3,04 2,72 2,38 2,03 1,68 1,34
HGX34P/215-4 Q 19686 18039 15025 11728 9554 7654 6005 4587 3380 2364 1518 821
40
HGX34P/215-4 S P 4,90 4,81 4,59 4,42 4,05 3,65 3,23 2,81 2,38 1,96 1,55 1,16
Q 16141 14736 12176 9362 7553 5982 4626 3466 2482 1652 956
50 P 5,61 5,46 5,10 4,87 4,37 3,86 3,34 2,83 2,33 1,84 1,38
Q 8042 6449 5071 3897 2918 2122
30 P 3,26 2,91 2,57 2,24 1,92 1,61
Q 6735 5372 4194 3190 2350 1662
HAX34P/215-4 40 P 3,56 3,13 2,73 2,33 1,95 1,57
Q 5462 4317 3327 2479 1765 1172
50 P 3,77 3,27 2,79 2,33 1,87 1,42
Q 27185 24984 20950 16761 13836 11270 9038 7117 5483 4111 2978 2060
30 P 4,70 4,69 4,61 4,71 4,40 4,05 3,68 3,30 2,90 2,50 2,11 1,73
HGX34P/255-4 1) Q 22968 21058 17569 13911 11421 9247 7366 5753 4385 3238 2287 1510
40
HGX34P/255-4 S P 5,74 5,64 5,39 5,40 4,95 4,48 4,00 3,51 3,03 2,56 2,12 1,70
Q 18828 17208 14263 11197 9135 7347 5809 4498 3390 2460 1686
50 P 6,63 6,44 6,03 5,98 5,40 4,82 4,23 3,66 3,11 2,59 2,10
Q 9456 7582 5962 4582 3430 2495
30 P 3,84 3,42 3,02 2,64 2,26 1,89
Q 7919 6317 4932 3751 2763 1955
HAX34P/255-4 40 P 4,18 3,68 3,20 2,74 2,29 1,84
Q 6422 5076 3911 2915 2075 1379
50 P 4,44 3,85 3,28 2,73 2,20 1,67
Q 33430 30726 25777 20555 16965 13816 11077 8718 6711 5025 3631 2499
30 P 5,76 5,76 5,68 5,60 5,27 4,89 4,48 4,03 3,57 3,11 2,65 2,20
HGX34P/315-4 1) Q 28225 25887 21624 17340 14226 11506 9150 7129 5413 3972 2777 1798
40
HGX34P/315-4 S 1) P 7,07 6,95 6,65 6,41 5,91 5,37 4,81 4,25 3,68 3,12 2,58 2,07
Q 23134 21159 17576 14176 11541 9253 7284 5603 4181 2989 1995
50 P 8,22 7,99 7,49 7,10 6,43 5,74 5,05 4,37 3,70 3,06 2,45
Q 11674 9361 7360 5657 4235 3080
30 P 4,74 4,22 3,73 3,26 2,79 2,33
Q 9776 7798 6088 4631 3411 2413
HAX34P/315-4 40 P 5,16 4,55 3,96 3,38 2,82 2,27
Q 7929 6267 4829 3599 2562 1702
50 P 5,48 4,75 4,05 3,38 2,71 2,06
Motor version -S-


33
Series HG(HA)

•
temp.
7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40 -45
Q 39972 36782 30933 25416 21012 17148 13786 10891 8424 6350 4631 3231
30 P 7,50 7,43 7,21 6,90 6,47 5,98 5,45 4,89 4,31 3,73 3,15 2,59
HGX34P/380-4 1) Q 33700 30957 25948 21192 17444 14172 11339 8907 6840 5101 3653 2459
40
HGX34P/380-4 S 1) P 9,19 8,97 8,49 7,94 7,29 6,61 5,91 5,21 4,50 3,81 3,15 2,53
Q 27621 25320 21140 17179 14077 11387 9071 7093 5415 4000 2813
50 P 10,65 10,31 9,58 8,83 7,99 7,14 6,29 5,45 4,64 3,87 3,14
Q 14125 11327 8906 6845 5125 3726
30 P 5,73 5,11 4,51 3,94 3,38 2,82
Q 11829 9436 7367 5604 4128 2920
HAX34P/380-4 40 P 6,25 5,50 4,79 4,09 3,42 2,75
Q 9594 7583 5843 4355 3100 2059
50 P 6,63 5,75 4,91 4,09 3,28 2,49
Q 50100 46098 38757 31777 26336 21492 17229 13535 10396 7799 5729 4174
30 P 9,57 9,46 9,15 8,16 7,79 7,28 6,66 5,96 5,21 4,46 3,72 3,04
HGX4/465-4 Q 42830 39331 32928 27259 22373 18047 14267 11020 8292 6070 4340 3089
40 11,34 11,10 10,54 9,52 8,80 8,00 7,14 6,26 5,38 4,54 3,78 3,12
HGX4/465-4 S P
Q 35593 32597 27133 22089 17908 14250 11103 8453 6286 4589 3348
50 P 12,89 12,52 11,72 10,47 9,47 8,44 7,40 6,39 5,43 4,57 3,84
Q 19337 15374 11937 9036 6676 4867
30 P 6,82 6,19 5,53 4,83 4,11 3,37
Q 16471 12914 9897 7428 5515 4165
HAX4/465-4 40 P 7,47 6,66 5,84 5,03 4,21 3,41
Q 12988 10068 7701 5897 4661 4003
50 P 7,96 6,99 6,05 5,14 4,27 3,44
Q 59592 55162 46891 39392 32648 26643 21359 16779 12888 9668 7102 5175
30 P 10,23 10,34 10,36 10,12 9,66 9,02 8,25 7,39 6,46 5,53 4,61 3,76
HGX4/555-4 Q 52080 48054 40560 33792 27735 22372 17687 13661 10279 7525 5380 3829
40 13,25 13,07 12,53 11,80 10,91 9,92 8,85 7,76 6,67 5,63 4,68 3,87
HGX4/555-4 S P
Q 43295 39767 33234 27384 22200 17666 13764 10479 7792 5689 4151
50 P 15,61 15,16 14,13 12,98 11,74 10,46 9,17 7,92 6,74 5,67 4,76
Q 23013 18296 14207 10753 7945 5792
30 P 8,11 7,37 6,58 5,75 4,89 4,01
Q 19602 15368 11778 8840 6563 4957
HAX4/555-4 40 P 8,89 7,93 6,95 5,98 5,02 4,06
Q 15457 11981 9165 7018 5548 4764
50 P 9,47 8,32 7,20 6,12 5,09 4,09
Q 72188 66387 55787 44444 36811 30119 24302 19297 15039 11465 8510 6110
30 P 13,75 13,58 13,13 12,51 11,70 10,80 9,84 8,84 7,82 6,80 5,80 4,85
HGX4/650-4 1) Q 61558 56523 47353 37928 31232 25384 20322 15982 12298 9208 6647 4550
40 16,24 15,89 15,09 14,30 13,15 11,94 10,70 9,45 8,21 7,01 5,86 4,79
HGX4/650-4 S P
Q 51046 46772 39023 31303 25565 20586 16302 12650 9564 6980 4835
50 P 18,65 18,12 16,98 15,79 14,31 12,81 11,31 9,83 8,39 7,02 5,73
Q 27008 21472 16673 12620 9325 6798
30 P 9,52 8,65 7,72 6,75 5,74 4,71
Q 23005 18036 13823 10374 7702 5817
HAX4/650-4 40 P 10,44 9,30 8,16 7,02 5,89 4,76
Q 18140 14062 10757 8236 6511 5591
50 P 11,12 9,77 8,45 7,19 5,97 4,81
Q 78433 72414 61290 51330 42474 34658 27821 21901 16835 12562 9019 6145
30 P 14,31 14,08 13,55 12,93 12,21 11,40 10,50 9,52 8,46 7,32 6,10 4,80
HGX5/725-4 Q 67322 62055 52346 43683 36006 29251 23357 18261 13902 10218 7146 4624
40 17,30 16,88 15,97 14,99 13,93 12,79 11,58 10,30 8,96 7,55 6,07 4,54
HGX5/725-4 S P
Q 55429 50949 42724 35428 28999 23375 18493 14292 10709 7683 5151
50 P 19,86 19,25 17,97 16,63 15,23 13,76 12,24 10,67 9,04 7,36 5,64
Q 30082 24112 18897 14394 10562 7357
30 P 10,84 9,82 8,72 7,56 6,40 5,25
Q 26533 21194 16580 12649 9360 6669
HAX5/725-4 40 P 12,28 11,04 9,77 8,51 7,28 6,13
Q 21674 17163 13350 10191 7645 5668
50 P 13,29 11,84 10,41 9,04 7,76 6,61
Motor version -S-


34
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)

•
temp.
7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40 -45
Q 90412 83291 70193 58550 48272 39272 31461 24750 19052 14278 10339 7148
30 P 15,93 15,85 15,52 14,97 14,23 13,32 12,27 11,09 9,83 8,48 7,09 5,68
HGX5/830-4 Q 76568 70393 59076 49063 40264 32591 25957 20272 15449 11398 8033 5263
40
HGX5/830-4 S P 19,64 19,26 18,35 17,27 16,05 14,69 13,24 11,71 10,12 8,50 6,88 5,27
Q 62975 57747 48211 39826 32506 26161 20703 16044 12095 8769 5976
50 P 22,87 22,21 20,78 19,22 17,55 15,80 13,99 12,14 10,29 8,44 6,63
Q 34532 27679 21693 16524 12125 8445
30 P 12,44 11,27 10,01 8,68 7,34 6,03
Q 30459 24329 19033 14521 10745 7656
HAX5/830-4 40 P 14,09 12,68 11,22 9,77 8,36 7,04
Q 15325 11699 8776 6506
50 P 11,95 10,38 8,91 7,58
Q 101020 93136 78569 64175 53404 43813 35342 27933 21526 16063 11484 7732
30 P 17,70 17,70 17,41 17,72 16,57 15,28 13,86 12,36 10,80 9,20 7,62 6,07
HGX5/945-4 Q 86568 79623 66824 54255 44830 36467 29107 22692 17163 12459 8523 5296
40
HGX5/945-4 S P 21,80 21,42 20,43 20,42 18,73 16,93 15,06 13,15 11,23 9,33 7,48 5,71
Q 71645 65668 54693 44344 36305 29211 23004 17623 13011 9108 5855
50 P 25,71 24,94 23,24 22,67 20,46 18,19 15,90 13,61 11,36 9,17 7,09
Q 30863 24188 18425 13519 9417
30 P 12,57 11,16 9,68 8,19 6,72
Q 21222 16191 11981 8537
HAX5/945-4 40 P 12,51 10,89 9,32 7,85
Q 13045 9785 7254
50 P 11,57 9,93 8,46
Q 118782 108966 91051 72501 59869 48801 39180 30889 23810 17826 12819 8672
30 P 22,17 22,01 21,40 20,82 19,21 17,56 15,88 14,16 12,40 10,60 8,76 6,86
HGX6/1080-4 Q 100771 92302 76904 61734 50695 41062 32716 25541 19419 14233 9866 6200
40
HGX6/1080-4 S P 27,47 26,83 25,31 23,74 21,61 19,46 17,30 15,13 12,94 10,72 8,49 6,22
Q 83206 76052 63105 51086 41654 33468 26411 20366 15214 10840 7125
50 P 32,07 30,98 28,64 26,12 23,48 20,85 18,23 15,62 13,01 10,40 7,78
Q 43512 35202 27683 21054 15412 10858
30 P 15,53 14,09 12,65 11,14 9,49 7,63
Q 29932 23158 17177 12089 7992
HAX6/1080-4 40 P 15,42 13,60 11,66 9,54 7,17
Q 18358 13258 8954 5547
50 P 14,28 11,87 9,23 6,30
Q 133368 122554 102765 83399 68935 56229 45169 35643 27538 20744 15146 10634
30 P 27,78 27,28 26,04 23,70 22,26 20,54 18,62 16,56 14,43 12,29 10,21 8,25
HGX6/1240-4 1) Q 113720 104299 87122 71042 58440 47422 37874 29684 22741 16931 12143 8265
40
HGX6/1240-4 S P 33,36 32,38 30,24 27,42 25,14 22,68 20,13 17,53 14,97 12,49 10,17 8,08
Q 94323 86295 71734 58323 47668 38420 30468 23698 17998 13257 9362
50 P 38,27 36,83 33,86 30,45 27,41 24,30 21,19 18,14 15,22 12,49 10,02
Q 40411 31779 24169 17693 12465
30 P 16,17 14,52 12,78 10,89 8,76
Q 26584 19719 13878 9175
HAX6/1240-4 40 P 15,61 13,39 10,95 8,23
Q 15219 10279 6367
50 P 13,62 10,59 7,23
Q 113817 95386 76961 63138 51088 40671 31748 24176 17817 12528
30 P 30,21 28,42 26,50 24,11 21,69 19,26 16,84 14,43 12,06 9,73
HGX6/1410-4 1) Q 96364 80489 65316 53413 43056 34104 26417 19854 14276 9540
40
HGX6/1410-4 S P 35,72 32,92 30,24 26,98 23,78 20,67 17,65 14,74 11,96 9,32
Q 79954 66491 53148 43254 34677 27278 20915 15450 10739
50 P 40,61 36,85 33,29 29,21 25,29 21,54 17,98 14,63 11,49
Q 36158 27499 20130 14182
30 P 16,52 14,54 12,39 9,97
Q 22435 15790 10439
HAX6/1410-4 40 P 15,23 12,46 9,37
Q 17316 11695 7245
50 P 15,50 12,05 8,22
Motor version -S-


35
Series HG(HA)

•
temp.
7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40 -45
Q 163130 150297 126636 106031 87518 71107 56728 44306 33770 25047 18065 12751
30 P 32,39 32,05 30,98 30,00 28,31 26,22 23,83 21,24 18,56 15,88 13,30 10,93
HGX7/1620-4 1) Q 139724 128531 107945 89756 73736 59585 47232 36603 27628 20232 14343 9890
40
HGX7/1620-4 S P 38,16 37,38 35,48 34,27 31,69 28,79 25,68 22,46 19,22 16,08 13,12 10,45
Q 115792 106272 88826 73671 60144 48254 37928 29093 21678 15609 10816
50 P 43,47 42,23 39,46 37,57 34,13 30,47 26,68 22,85 19,10 15,52 12,22
Q 184191 169853 143432 113878 95888 79336 64301 50860 39091 29070 20876 14587
30 P 37,41 37,14 36,15 34,44 32,50 30,10 27,35 24,38 21,30 18,23 15,27 12,55
HGX7/1860-4 Q 157436 144933 121960 96963 81426 67098 54058 42382 32148 23434 16317 10876
40 45,37 44,40 42,11 39,34 36,38 33,05 29,48 25,78 22,07 18,45 15,06 11,99
HGX7/1860-4 S P
Q 130989 120333 100832 79548 66554 54540 43583 33762 25154 17836 11886
50 P 51,97 50,38 46,93 43,13 39,18 34,98 30,62 26,23 21,93 17,82 14,02
Q 201969 186202 157288 129541 109077 90249 73146 57856 44467 33069 23748 16593
30 P 46,49 45,47 43,22 39,18 36,97 34,24 31,12 27,74 24,23 20,73 17,37 14,28
HGX7/2110-4 Q 173523 159904 134971 110300 92626 76327 61493 48211 36570 26657 18562 12371
40 54,03 52,52 49,31 44,75 41,38 37,60 33,54 29,33 25,10 20,99 17,13 13,64
HGX7/2110-4 S 1) P
Q 144329 132872 111953 90490 75708 62041 49578 38406 28614 20289 13521
50 P 60,77 58,78 54,63 49,06 44,57 39,79 34,83 29,84 24,94 20,27 15,95
Q 254335 233623 195759 162377 133162 107796 85963 67346 51629 38495 27628 18711
30 P 53,08 52,10 49,73 46,88 43,64 40,08 36,28 32,33 28,29 24,24 20,27 16,46
Q 216832 198811 165981 137171 112064 90344 71694 55797 42338 30999 21464 13416
HGX8/2470-4 S 40 P 62,30 60,54 56,70 52,50 48,02 43,33 38,53 33,68 28,86 24,15 19,63 15,37
Q 179905 164564 136749 112490 91472 73378 57891 44695 33474 23910 15687
50 P 70,32 67,83 62,61 57,15 51,53 45,82 40,10 34,44 28,94 23,66 18,68
Q 280334 258363 218657 182105 149962 121929 97702 76982 59466 44852 32841 23130
30 P 58,49 57,89 57,29 54,05 50,41 46,43 42,19 37,75 33,17 28,54 23,91 19,37
HGX8/2830-4 Q 240502 221237 187179 155251 127305 103039 82152 64342 49308 36749 26363 17849
40 70,92 69,19 66,01 61,11 55,95 50,60 45,12 39,59 34,06 28,62 23,33 18,26
HGX8/2830-4 S P
Q 200747 184227 155772 128523 104826 84382 66888 52043 39545 29094 20387
50 P 81,06 78,33 73,50 67,07 60,51 53,90 47,31 40,80 34,45 28,32 22,48
Q 299972 277577 236052 199764 165297 135207 109154 86797 67796 51812 38503 27530
30 P 71,59 69,90 66,21 63,87 59,10 54,07 48,87 43,59 38,29 33,07 28,00 23,17
HGX8/3220-4 Q 260037 240407 204062 170917 141015 114985 92486 73180 56724 42781 31008 21066
40 83,60 81,08 75,80 71,84 65,49 59,02 52,53 46,09 39,78 33,68 27,88 22,45
HGX8/3220-4 S 1) P
Q 217197 200466 169563 141839 116555 94639 75750 59548 45693 33845 23663
50 P 93,88 90,58 83,77 78,71 70,87 63,06 55,36 47,84 40,60 33,72 27,26
Motor version -S-

Relating to 20 °C suction gas temperature, 1) ASERCOM Supplementary cooling or
without liquid subcooling certified reduced suction gas temp.
36
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
Operating limits and notes R407C

Operating limits
HGX12P / HGX22P / HGX34P /

HGX4 / HGX5 / HGX6 / HGX7 / HGX8 1
Unlimited
application range
Supplementary cooling or
reduced suction gas temp.
Motor version -S-


1 HGX8/2830-4 - HGX8/3220-4
max. evaporating temperature tO = 0 °C
Notes
Operating limits Performance data

The performance data for R407C are based on ISO-DIS 9309
(DIN 8928) with a 50Hz power supply frequency.
This signifies: 25 °C suction gas temperature without liquid
subcooling.
EN 12900 is already valid for Pluscom compressors and HGX4
operating at 50 Hz. This signifies:
20 °C suction gas temperature without liquid subcooling.
Evaporation and condensing temperatures are based on the
explanation.
dew point values (saturated vapour conditions).
A comprehensive modification to 20 °C suction gas


operating points.
37
Series HG(HA)
R407C Performance data 50 Hz

•
temp.
12,5 10 7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25
Q 6778 6172 5606 5079 4136 3330 2648 2078 1608 1225
30 P 0,88 0,90 0,92 0,92 0,91 0,88 0,82 0,76 0,69 0,62
Q 5863 5332 4837 4377 3556 2856 2265 1770 1359 1018
HGX12P/60-4 S 40 P 1,16 1,16 1,15 1,14 1,08 1,01 0,92 0,83 0,74 0,66
Q 5001 4542 4115 3720 3016 2417 1911 1486 1129 826
50 P 1,42 1,39 1,36 1,32 1,23 1,12 1,01 0,90 0,79 0,69
Q 8736 7954 7225 6546 5330 4291 3413 2679 2072 1578
30 P 1,13 1,16 1,18 1,19 1,18 1,13 1,06 0,98 0,89 0,79
HGX12P/75-4 Q 7557 6872 6234 5641 4583 3681 2919 2281 1751 1312
40 1,50 1,50 1,49 1,46 1,39 1,30 1,19 1,07 0,96 0,84
HGX12P/75-4 S P
Q 6446 5854 5304 4794 3887 3115 2463 1915 1455 1065
50 P 1,83 1,79 1,75 1,70 1,58 1,44 1,30 1,15 1,01 0,89
Q 10419 9487 8617 7807 6357 5118 4071 3195 2472 1882
30 P 1,35 1,38 1,41 1,42 1,40 1,35 1,27 1,17 1,06 0,95
HGX12P/90-4 Q 9013 8196 7435 6728 5466 4390 3482 2721 2088 1565
40 1,79 1,79 1,77 1,75 1,66 1,55 1,42 1,28 1,14 1,01
HGX12P/90-4 S P
Q 7688 6982 6326 5718 4636 3715 2938 2284 1735 1270
50 P 2,18 2,14 2,09 2,03 1,89 1,72 1,55 1,38 1,21 1,06
Q 12250 11154 10131 9179 7474 6017 4786 3756 2906 2213
30 P 1,58 1,63 1,65 1,67 1,65 1,59 1,49 1,37 1,24 1,11
HGX12P/110-4 Q 10596 9635 8741 7910 6426 5161 4093 3199 2455 1840
40 2,11 2,10 2,08 2,05 1,96 1,83 1,67 1,51 1,34 1,18
HGX12P/110-4 S P
Q 9038 8208 7437 6723 5450 4368 3454 2686 2040 1493
50 P 2,56 2,51 2,45 2,38 2,22 2,03 1,82 1,62 1,42 1,25
Q 14412 13123 11920 10799 8794 7080 5631 4419 3419 2604
30 P 1,86 1,91 1,95 1,96 1,94 1,87 1,75 1,61 1,46 1,31
HGX22P/125-4 Q 12467 11337 10284 9306 7561 6073 4816 3764 2889 2165
40
HGX22P/125-4 S P 2,48 2,47 2,45 2,41 2,30 2,15 1,97 1,77 1,58 1,39
Q 10634 9658 8751 7910 6412 5140 4064 3160 2400 1757
50 P 3,01 2,96 2,89 2,80 2,61 2,38 2,14 1,90 1,67 1,47
Q 17793 16201 14716 13333 10857 8741 6951 5456 4221 3214
30 P 2,30 2,36 2,40 2,42 2,40 2,30 2,16 1,99 1,80 1,62
HGX22P/160-4 Q 15391 13996 12697 11489 9334 7497 5946 4646 3567 2673
40
HGX22P/160-4 S P 3,06 3,05 3,03 2,98 2,84 2,65 2,43 2,19 1,95 1,72
Q 13129 11923 10803 9765 7917 6345 5018 3901 2963 2169
50 P 3,72 3,65 3,56 3,46 3,22 2,94 2,65 2,35 2,07 1,82
Q 21530 19604 17806 16133 13137 10576 8411 6602 5108 3889
30 P 2,78 2,86 2,91 2,93 2,90 2,79 2,62 2,41 2,18 1,96
HGX22P/190-4 Q 18624 16935 15363 13902 11294 9072 7194 5622 4316 3234
40
HGX22P/190-4 S P 3,70 3,69 3,66 3,61 3,44 3,21 2,94 2,65 2,35 2,08
Q 15886 14427 13072 11815 9579 7678 6071 4720 3585 2624
50 P 4,50 4,42 4,31 4,19 3,90 3,56 3,20 2,84 2,50 2,20
Q 24515 22322 20275 18370 14959 12043 9578 7517 5816 4429
30 P 3,17 3,26 3,31 3,34 3,30 3,18 2,98 2,74 2,48 2,23
HGX34P/215-4 Q 21206 19284 17494 15830 12861 10330 8192 6402 4914 3683
40
HGX34P/215-4 S P 4,21 4,21 4,17 4,11 3,91 3,65 3,34 3,01 2,68 2,37
Q 18089 16428 14885 13454 10907 8742 6913 5375 4082 2988
50 P 5,12 5,03 4,91 4,77 4,44 4,05 3,65 3,24 2,85 2,50
Q 28825 26246 23840 21599 17588 14160 11261 8839 6838 5207
30 P 3,72 3,83 3,89 3,92 3,88 3,73 3,51 3,23 2,92 2,62
HGX34P/255-4 Q 24934 22674 20569 18613 15121 12145 9632 7527 5778 4330
40
HGX34P/255-4 S P 4,95 4,94 4,90 4,83 4,60 4,30 3,93 3,54 3,15 2,79
Q 21269 19315 17501 15819 12825 10279 8129 6320 4799 3514
50 P 6,03 5,91 5,77 5,61 5,22 4,77 4,29 3,81 3,35 2,94
Q 35586 32403 29432 26665 21714 17482 13903 10912 8443 6429
30 P 4,60 4,73 4,81 4,84 4,79 4,61 4,33 3,98 3,61 3,23
HGX34P/315-4 Q 30783 27992 25394 22979 18668 14994 11891 9293 7133 5346
40
HGX34P/315-4 S P 6,12 6,10 6,05 5,96 5,68 5,30 4,86 4,37 3,89 3,44
Q 26257 23846 21606 19530 15833 12690 10035 7802 5925 4338
50 P 7,44 7,30 7,13 6,92 6,44 5,88 5,29 4,70 4,13 3,63
Relating to 20 °C suction gas temperature, Supplementary cooling or Motor version -S-
without liquid subcooling reduced suction gas temp. (more powerful motor)
38
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)

•
temp.
12,5 10 7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25
Q 43059 39207 35612 32265 26274 21153 16823 13203 10215 7779
30 P 5,56 5,72 5,82 5,86 5,80 5,58 5,24 4,82 4,36 3,91
HGX34P/380-4 Q 37247 33870 30726 27804 22589 18143 14388 11244 8631 6469
40
HGX34P/380-4 S P 7,40 7,39 7,32 7,21 6,88 6,42 5,87 5,29 4,71 4,16
Q 31771 28854 26144 23631 19158 15355 12143 9441 7169 5249
50 P 9,00 8,83 8,62 8,37 7,79 7,12 6,41 5,69 5,00 4,40
Q 52241 47689 43438 39475 32358 25527 20464 16165 12523 9431
30 P 7,84 7,76 7,67 7,56 7,31 7,04 6,56 6,02 5,43 4,80
HGX4/465-4 Q 45881 41827 38049 34532 28226 22167 17676 13827 10512 7621
40 9,73 9,55 9,36 9,16 8,69 8,17 7,44 6,67 5,85 5,00
HGX4/465-4 S P
Q 39635 36073 32759 29681 24173 18922 14938 11472 8414 5658
50 P 11,44 11,16 10,86 10,55 9,85 9,14 8,16 7,13 6,08 5,00
Q 62010 56703 51739 47101 38751 31207 25091 19907 15531 11833
30 P 9,36 9,30 9,22 9,12 8,84 8,53 7,92 7,29 6,62 5,87
HGX4/555-4 Q 54852 50089 45636 41481 34003 27316 21859 17204 13225 9795
40 11,45 11,27 11,07 10,84 10,31 9,88 9,02 8,13 7,19 6,18
HGX4/555-4 S P
Q 47717 43491 39547 35869 29256 23377 18539 14373 10752 7550
50 P 13,51 13,20 12,86 12,49 11,67 11,13 9,97 8,78 7,52 6,17
Q 73505 67118 61158 55607 45658 36887 29718 23650 18538 14235
30 P 11,85 11,66 11,45 11,22 10,68 10,03 9,28 8,56 7,80 6,95
HGX4/650-4 Q 64535 58930 53705 48840 40118 32465 26041 20581 15939 11970
40 14,25 13,95 13,62 13,26 12,48 11,59 10,60 9,60 8,54 7,35
HGX4/650-4 S P
Q 55792 50933 46405 42188 34616 27833 22140 17274 13090 9442
50 P 16,75 16,31 15,84 15,34 14,26 13,13 11,79 10,42 8,96 7,34
Q 82066 75111 68581 62458 51370 41718 33371 26199 20072 14859
30 P 12,72 12,43 12,13 11,81 11,13 10,38 9,57 8,68 7,72 6,69
HGX5/725-4 Q 73653 67297 61341 55769 45715 37005 29506 23091 17627 12986
40
HGX5/725-4 S P 15,09 14,67 14,23 13,79 12,86 11,88 10,85 9,75 8,60 7,39
Q 64721 58974 53605 48597 39600 31854 25228 19592 14817 10770
50 P 17,35 16,80 16,24 15,67 14,50 13,30 12,06 10,77 9,44 8,06
Q 94208 86225 78728 71699 58971 47891 38309 30076 23042 17057
30 P 14,60 14,27 13,92 13,56 12,78 11,92 10,99 9,97 8,87 7,68
HGX5/830-4 Q 84551 77254 70417 64021 52480 42480 33872 26507 20235 14907
40 17,32 16,84 16,34 15,83 14,76 13,64 12,45 11,20 9,88 8,48
HGX5/830-4 S P
Q 74298 67700 61536 55787 45459 36567 28961 22491 17009 12364
50 P 19,92 19,28 18,64 17,99 16,65 15,27 13,84 12,37 10,84 9,25
Q 107188 98104 89575 81578 67096 54489 43587 34219 26216 19407
30 P 16,61 16,23 15,84 15,43 14,54 13,56 12,50 11,34 10,09 8,74
HGX5/945-4 Q 96200 87898 80118 72842 59710 48332 38539 30159 23023 16961
40 19,71 19,16 18,59 18,01 16,80 15,52 14,17 12,74 11,24 9,65
HGX5/945-4 S P
Q 84534 77027 70014 63473 51722 41605 32951 25590 19352 14068
50 P 22,66 21,94 21,21 20,46 18,94 17,37 15,75 14,07 12,33 10,53
Q 122447 112071 102327 93191 76648 62246 49792 39091 29948 22170
30 P 18,97 18,55 18,10 17,62 16,61 15,49 14,28 12,96 11,53 9,98
HGX6/1080-4 Q 109895 100411 91524 83211 68210 55213 44025 34453 26301 19376
40 22,51 21,88 21,24 20,57 19,19 17,72 16,18 14,55 12,84 11,02
HGX6/1080-4 S P
Q 96568 87993 79981 72509 59085 47528 37642 29233 22107 16070
50 P 25,89 25,06 24,23 23,38 21,64 19,85 17,99 16,08 14,09 12,03
Q 140564 128652 117467 106980 87989 71456 57159 44875 34379 25450
30 P 21,78 21,29 20,77 20,23 19,06 17,79 16,39 14,88 13,23 11,46
HGX6/1240-4 Q 126155 115267 105066 95523 78303 63382 50539 39550 30193 22243
40 25,84 25,12 24,38 23,61 22,02 20,35 18,58 16,71 14,74 12,65
HGX6/1240-4 S P
Q 110857 101013 91815 83238 67828 54560 43211 33558 25378 18448
50 P 29,72 28,77 27,81 26,84 24,84 22,78 20,66 18,45 16,17 13,81
Q 159931 146378 133651 121719 100112 81301 65035 51058 39116 28957
30 P 24,78 24,22 23,64 23,02 21,69 20,24 18,65 16,92 15,05 13,03
HGX6/1410-4 Q 143537 131149 119542 108684 89091 72115 57503 45000 34352 25307
40 29,40 28,58 27,74 26,87 25,06 23,15 21,14 19,01 16,77 14,40
HGX6/1410-4 S P
Q 126130 114930 104466 94706 77173 62077 49165 38182 28875 20990
50 P 33,81 32,73 31,64 30,53 28,26 25,92 23,50 21,00 18,40 15,71
Relating to 20 °C suction gas temperature,
(HGX34P and HGX4 to 20 °C suction gas temperature) Supplementary cooling or Motor version -S-
39
Series HG(HA)

•
temp.
12,5 10 7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25
Q 176654 161203 146809 133424 109484 88991 71553 56778 44276 33654
30 P 28,74 28,45 28,06 27,56 26,30 24,73 22,92 20,92 18,79 16,61
HGX7/1620-4 Q 156630 142783 129901 117934 96552 78246 62623 49292 37862 27940
40
HGX7/1620-4 S P 35,77 34,91 33,96 32,93 30,69 28,23 25,62 22,93 20,21 17,53
Q 136448 124231 112886 102364 83592 67524 53768 41933 31626 22457
50 P 42,12 40,70 39,22 37,69 34,51 31,21 27,86 24,53 21,26 18,13
Q 202792 185054 168531 153166 125683 102158 82139 65179 50827 38633
30 P 32,99 32,66 32,21 31,64 30,19 28,39 26,31 24,01 21,57 19,07
HGX7/1860-4 Q 179805 163909 149121 135384 110838 89823 71888 56585 43464 32074
40
HGX7/1860-4 S P 41,07 40,07 38,98 37,81 35,23 32,40 29,41 26,32 23,20 20,13
Q 156636 142612 129589 117510 95960 77515 61724 48137 36305 25779
50 P 48,35 46,72 45,03 43,27 39,61 35,83 31,99 28,15 24,41 20,82
Q 230732 210551 191751 174268 143000 116233 93456 74159 57829 43956
30 P 37,54 37,16 36,65 36,00 34,35 32,30 29,93 27,32 24,55 21,70
HGX7/2210-4 Q 204578 186492 169666 154036 126109 102198 81793 64381 49452 36493
40 46,72 45,59 44,35 43,01 40,08 36,87 33,47 29,95 26,40 22,90
HGX7/2110-4 S P
Q 178217 162261 147443 133700 109182 88195 70228 54769 41308 29331
50 P 55,02 53,16 51,23 49,23 45,07 40,77 36,39 32,03 27,77 23,68
Q 281120 256346 233240 211728 173189 140131 111960 88080 67896 50811
30 P 43,67 43,36 42,85 42,16 40,29 37,85 34,94 31,67 28,15 24,49
Q 244845 223034 202726 183847 150078 121131 96410 75319 57263 41646
HGX8/2470-4 S 40 P 54,20 52,96 51,56 50,03 46,59 42,75 38,62 34,30 29,91 25,53
Q 210247 191369 173829 157552 128493 103595 82263 63901 47913 33704
50 P 63,42 61,32 59,12 56,81 51,97 46,90 41,70 36,50 31,38 26,45
Q 322714 294275 267750 243056 198814 160865 128526 101113 77942 58329
30 P 50,13 49,77 49,19 48,40 46,25 43,45 40,11 36,36 32,32 28,11
HGX8/2830-4 Q 281072 256034 232721 211049 172284 139053 110674 86463 65736 47808
40
HGX8/2830-4 S P 62,22 60,80 59,19 57,43 53,48 49,08 44,34 39,38 34,33 29,31
Q 241355 219683 199548 180864 147505 118923 94435 73356 55002 38691
50 P 72,80 70,39 67,86 65,22 59,66 53,84 47,87 41,89 36,02 30,37
Q 367177 334819 304640 276543 226206 183029 146234 115044 88680 66365
30 P 57,03 56,63 55,97 55,07 52,62 49,43 45,64 41,37 36,77 31,99
HGX8/3220-4 Q 319797 291310 264785 240127 196021 158212 125923 98376 74793 54395
40 70,80 69,17 67,35 65,34 60,85 55,84 50,45 44,81 39,06 33,35
HGX8/3220-4 S P
Q 274608 249951 227041 205783 167828 135308 107446 83462 62580 44022
50 P 82,83 80,09 77,21 74,20 67,88 61,25 54,47 47,67 40,98 34,55
Relating to 25 °C suction gas temperature, Supplementary cooling or Motor version -S-
with no liquid subcooling reduced suction gas temp. (more powerful motor)
40
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
Operating limits R22

HG12P / HG22P / HG34P / HA12P / HA22P / HA34P / HA4
HG4/ HG5 / HG6 / HG7 1/ HG8 2
HA5 HA6
1 HG7 „Motorvariante S“ Unlimited

in the evaporation range from application range
tO = 5 - 12.5 °C limited condensing
temperature up to tC = 50 °C -HG Supplementary cooling or
2 HG8/2830-4 -HA Reduced suction gas temp.
max. evaporating temperature
tO = 0 °C Supplementary cooling and
HG8/2470-4 S reduced suction gas temp.
in the evaporation range from
tO = 7 °C - 12.5 °C limited condensing Motor version -S-
temperature up tC = 55 °C (more powerful motor)
HG8/3220-4 S
max. evaporating temperature tO Evaporating temperature (°C)
tO = 5 °C tC Condensing temperature (°C)
41
Series HG(HA)
Notes R22
Operating limits

explanation.
Performance data
The performance data for R22 are based on ISO-DIS 9309
(DIN 8928) with a 50 Hz power supply frequency. This
signifies:
25°C suction gas temperature without liquid subcooling.
Pluscom compressors and HGX4 operating at 50 Hz already
comply with EN 12900. This signifies 20°C suction gas
temperature without liquid subcooling.
A comprehensive modification to 20 °C suction gas


operating points.
42
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
R22 Performance data 50 Hz

•
temp.
12,5 10 7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40
Q 7110 6523 5971 5454 4518 3703 2997 2390 1868 1422 1039 708
30 P 0,89 0,91 0,93 0,94 0,94 0,92 0,89 0,84 0,78 0,71 0,63 0,55
Q 6288 5759 5263 4799 3958 3227 2593 2044 1570 1158 798 477
HG12P/60-4 S 40 P 1,20 1,19 1,19 1,18 1,14 1,08 1,01 0,94 0,85 0,76 0,66 0,57
Q 5494 5023 4581 4168 3422 2772 2207 1716 1287 909
50 P 1,47 1,44 1,42 1,38 1,31 1,22 1,12 1,02 0,91 0,80
Q 1824 1407 1054 758 512
30 P 0,72 0,63 0,53 0,43 0,33
Q 1599 1237 930 672 456
HA12P/60-4 40 P 0,79 0,68 0,57 0,46 0,35
Q 1437 1127 865 643 455
50 P 0,84 0,73 0,62 0,51 0,40
Q 8883 8149 7460 6814 5645 4626 3745 2985 2334 1776 1298 884
30 P 1,11 1,14 1,16 1,17 1,17 1,15 1,11 1,05 0,97 0,88 0,79 0,69
HG12P/75-4 Q 7856 7195 6575 5995 4945 4031 3239 2554 1961 1447 997 596
40
HG12P/75-4 S P 1,49 1,49 1,48 1,47 1,42 1,35 1,27 1,17 1,06 0,95 0,83 0,71
Q 6864 6275 5723 5207 4275 3463 2758 2144 1608 1135
50 P 1,83 1,80 1,77 1,73 1,63 1,52 1,40 1,27 1,13 0,99
Q 2265 1748 1310 942 637
30 P 0,90 0,78 0,66 0,53 0,41
Q 1986 1536 1156 836 568
HA12P/75-4 40 P 0,99 0,85 0,72 0,58 0,44
Q 1785 1400 1075 800 567
50 P 1,05 0,91 0,78 0,64 0,51
Q 10595 9719 8897 8127 6732 5518 4466 3561 2784 2119 1548 1054
30 P 1,32 1,36 1,38 1,40 1,40 1,37 1,32 1,25 1,16 1,05 0,94 0,83
HG12P/90-4 Q 9370 8582 7842 7150 5898 4808 3863 3046 2339 1726 1189 711
40
HG12P/90-4 S P 1,78 1,78 1,77 1,75 1,69 1,61 1,51 1,39 1,27 1,13 0,99 0,85
Q 8186 7484 6826 6211 5098 4130 3289 2557 1918 1354
50 P 2,19 2,15 2,11 2,06 1,95 1,82 1,67 1,51 1,35 1,19
Q 2702 2084 1562 1123 758
30 P 1,06 0,92 0,77 0,62 0,47
Q 2369 1832 1378 996 676
HA12P/90-4 40 P 1,16 1,00 0,84 0,67 0,51
Q 2129 1669 1281 953 674
50 P 1,22 1,06 0,90 0,74 0,58
Q 12456 11427 10460 9555 7915 6487 5251 4186 3273 2491 1820 1240
30 P 1,56 1,60 1,62 1,64 1,65 1,61 1,55 1,47 1,36 1,24 1,11 0,97
HG12P/110-4 Q 11016 10089 9220 8406 6934 5653 4542 3581 2750 2029 1398 836
40
HG12P/110-4 S P 2,10 2,09 2,08 2,06 1,99 1,90 1,78 1,64 1,49 1,33 1,16 1,00
Q 9625 8799 8025 7302 5994 4856 3867 3007 2255 1592
50 P 2,57 2,53 2,48 2,42 2,29 2,14 1,96 1,78 1,59 1,39
Q 3175 2449 1835 1320 891
30 P 1,25 1,09 0,92 0,74 0,57
Q 2783 2153 1619 1170 794
HA12P/110-4 40 P 1,38 1,19 1,00 0,81 0,62
Q 2501 1961 1505 1119 792
50 P 1,46 1,27 1,08 0,89 0,70
Q 14656 13444 12308 11242 9312 7632 6178 4925 3851 2931 2141 1459
30 P 1,83 1,88 1,91 1,93 1,94 1,90 1,83 1,73 1,60 1,46 1,30 1,14
HG22P/125-4 Q 12961 11871 10848 9891 8159 6651 5344 4213 3236 2387 1645 984
40
HG22P/125-4 S P 2,47 2,46 2,45 2,42 2,34 2,23 2,09 1,93 1,75 1,56 1,37 1,18
Q 11324 10352 9442 8591 7053 5713 4550 3537 2653 1873
50 P 3,03 2,98 2,92 2,85 2,70 2,51 2,31 2,09 1,87 1,64
Q 3866 2983 2235 1607 1085
30 P 1,53 1,33 1,12 0,91 0,69
Q 3390 2621 1972 1425 967
HA22P/125-4 40 P 1,68 1,45 1,22 0,98 0,75
Q 3046 2389 1833 1363 965
50 P 1,78 1,55 1,32 1,09 0,86
-HG Supplementary cooling or

-HA Reduced suction gas temp.
Relating to 20 °C suction gas temperature, Supplementary cooling and Motor version -S-
43
Series HG(HA)

•
temp.
12,5 10 7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40
Q 18093 16598 15194 13879 11497 9423 7627 6081 4754 3618 2644 1801
30 P 2,26 2,32 2,36 2,38 2,39 2,35 2,26 2,13 1,98 1,80 1,61 1,41
HG22P/160-4 Q 16002 14655 13393 12211 10072 8211 6597 5201 3994 2947 2030 1214
40
HG22P/160-4 S P 3,04 3,04 3,02 2,99 2,89 2,76 2,58 2,38 2,16 1,93 1,69 1,46
Q 13981 12781 11657 10606 8707 7054 5617 4367 3276 2313
50 P 3,73 3,67 3,60 3,52 3,33 3,10 2,85 2,58 2,31 2,02
Q 4773 3682 2759 1984 1340
30 P 1,89 1,64 1,38 1,12 0,86
Q 4185 3236 2434 1760 1194
HA22P/160-4 40 P 2,07 1,79 1,50 1,21 0,93
Q 3761 2949 2262 1683 1191
50 P 2,20 1,91 1,63 1,34 1,06
Q 21893 20084 18385 16793 13911 11402 9229 7358 5753 4378 3199 2179
30 P 2,74 2,81 2,85 2,88 2,89 2,84 2,73 2,58 2,39 2,18 1,95 1,70
HG22P/190-4 Q 19362 17733 16206 14775 12188 9935 7982 6294 4833 3566 2457 1469
40 3,68 3,68 3,66 3,62 3,50 3,33 3,12 2,88 2,62 2,33 2,05 1,76
HG22P/190-4 S P
Q 16916 15465 14105 12834 10535 8535 6796 5284 3963 2798
50 P 4,52 4,45 4,36 4,26 4,03 3,75 3,45 3,13 2,79 2,45
Q 5775 4456 3338 2401 1621
30 P 2,28 1,98 1,67 1,35 1,04
Q 5064 3916 2945 2129 1445
HA22P/190-4 40 P 2,51 2,17 1,82 1,47 1,12
Q 4550 3568 2738 2036 1441
50 P 2,66 2,31 1,97 1,62 1,28
Q 24929 22869 20935 19122 15840 12983 10509 8378 6550 4985 3642 2481
30 P 3,12 3,20 3,25 3,28 3,29 3,23 3,11 2,94 2,72 2,48 2,22 1,94
HG34P/215-4 Q 22047 20192 18453 16824 13878 11313 9089 7166 5504 4061 2797 1673
40
HG34P/215-4 S P 4,19 4,19 4,16 4,12 3,99 3,80 3,56 3,28 2,98 2,66 2,33 2,01
Q 19262 17609 16061 14613 11996 9718 7739 6017 4513 3186
50 P 5,15 5,06 4,96 4,85 4,58 4,27 3,93 3,56 3,18 2,79
Q 6576 5074 3801 2734 1846
30 P 2,60 2,25 1,90 1,54 1,18
Q 5766 4459 3354 2425 1646
HA34P/215-4 40 P 2,86 2,47 2,07 1,67 1,28
Q 5181 4063 3117 2318 1641
50 P 3,02 2,63 2,24 1,85 1,46
Q 29311 26889 24615 22484 18625 15265 12356 9851 7702 5862 4283 2917
30 P 3,67 3,76 3,82 3,86 3,87 3,80 3,66 3,45 3,20 2,92 2,61 2,28
HG34P/255-4 Q 25923 23742 21697 19782 16317 13302 10687 8426 6471 4775 3289 1967
40
HG34P/255-4 S P 4,93 4,92 4,90 4,85 4,69 4,46 4,18 3,86 3,50 3,13 2,74 2,36
Q 22648 20705 18885 17182 14105 11427 9099 7075 5306 3746
50 P 6,05 5,95 5,84 5,70 5,39 5,03 4,62 4,19 3,74 3,28
Q 7732 5965 4469 3214 2170
30 P 3,06 2,65 2,23 1,81 1,39
Q 6779 5243 3943 2851 1935
HA34P/255-4 40 P 3,36 2,90 2,44 1,97 1,50
Q 6092 4777 3665 2726 1930
50 P 3,56 3,10 2,63 2,17 1,71
Q 36186 33196 30389 27758 22994 18846 15254 12162 9509 7237 5287 3602
30 P 4,52 4,64 4,72 4,77 4,78 4,69 4,51 4,26 3,95 3,60 3,22 2,82
HG34P/315-4 Q 32004 29311 26786 24422 20145 16422 13194 10403 7989 5895 4061 2429
40
HG34P/315-4 S P 6,09 6,08 6,04 5,98 5,79 5,51 5,16 4,76 4,32 3,86 3,38 2,91
Q 27961 25562 23315 21213 17414 14107 11233 8734 6551 4625
50 P 7,47 7,35 7,21 7,04 6,65 6,20 5,70 5,17 4,61 4,05
Q 9546 7365 5518 3969 2679
30 P 3,77 3,27 2,76 2,24 1,71
Q 8369 6473 4868 3519 2389
HA34P/315-4 40 P 4,15 3,58 3,01 2,43 1,85
Q 7521 5898 4525 3365 2382
50 P 4,39 3,82 3,25 2,68 2,12

44
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)

•
temp.
12,5 10 7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40
Q 43786 40167 36771 33587 27822 22803 18458 14716 11505 8756 6398 4358
30 P 5,48 5,61 5,71 5,77 5,78 5,68 5,46 5,16 4,78 4,36 3,89 3,41
HG34P/380-4 Q 38724 35466 32411 29550 24375 19870 15965 12587 9667 7132 4913 2939
40
HG34P/380-4 S P 7,36 7,36 7,31 7,24 7,00 6,67 6,25 5,76 5,23 4,67 4,09 3,52
Q 33833 30930 28211 25667 21071 17070 13592 10569 7927 5596
50 P 9,04 8,89 8,72 8,52 8,05 7,51 6,90 6,25 5,58 4,90
Q 11550 8911 6677 4802 3242
30 P 4,57 3,96 3,34 2,71 2,07
Q 10127 7832 5891 4259 2890
HA34P/380-4 40 P 5,02 4,33 3,64 2,94 2,24
Q 9101 7136 5475 4072 2882
50 P 5,31 4,62 3,93 3,24 2,56
Q 56368 52042 47946 44073 36965 30657 25090 20203 15935 12226 9016 6244
30 P 6,99 6,93 6,86 6,80 6,64 6,46 6,24 5,98 5,66 5,28 4,83 4,29
HG4/465-4 Q 51425 47427 43647 40077 33537 27748 22649 18178 14277 10884 7939 5382
40
HG4/465-4 S P 8,92 8,77 8,61 8,45 8,11 7,74 7,33 6,88 6,37 5,80 5,15 4,42
Q 45657 42026 38601 35374 29481 24288 19734 15759 12303 9304
50 P 10,92 10,66 10,39 10,11 9,55 8,96 8,33 7,66 6,92 6,13
Q 16459 12893 9840 7251 5074
30 P 5,74 5,32 4,83 4,26 3,58
Q 14621 11365 8586 6234 4256
HA4/465-4 40 P 6,58 5,98 5,29 4,51 3,61
Q 12490 9599 7148 5086 3362
50 P 7,24 6,42 5,50 4,48 3,32
Q 67083 61934 57059 52450 43991 36485 29859 24043 18964 14550 10730 7431
30 P 8,32 8,25 8,17 8,09 7,90 7,69 7,43 7,11 6,74 6,28 5,74 5,11
HG4/555-4 Q 61200 56442 51943 47695 39912 33023 26954 21634 16991 12953 9449 6405
40 10,62 10,43 10,25 10,05 9,65 9,21 8,72 8,18 7,58 6,90 6,13 5,27
HG4/555-4 S P
Q 54335 50015 45939 42098 35085 28905 23485 18755 14641 11072
50 P 13,00 12,68 12,36 12,04 11,37 10,67 9,92 9,11 8,24 7,29
Q 19587 15343 11711 8630 6039
30 P 6,83 6,33 5,75 5,07 4,26
Q 17400 13525 10218 7419 5065
HA4/555-4 40 P 7,83 7,12 6,30 5,36 4,29
Q 14864 11423 8507 6053 4001
50 P 8,61 7,64 6,55 5,33 3,95
Q 78729 72686 66965 61556 51628 42819 35043 28217 22256 17076 12593 8721
30 P 9,77 9,68 9,59 9,49 9,28 9,02 8,72 8,35 7,90 7,37 6,74 6,00
HG4/650-4 Q 71825 66241 60961 55975 46842 38756 31633 25390 19941 15202 11089 7518
40 12,46 12,25 12,03 11,80 11,32 10,81 10,24 9,60 8,89 8,09 7,19 6,18
HG4/650-4 S P
Q 63768 58698 53914 49406 41176 33923 27562 22011 17183 12995
50 P 15,25 14,88 14,51 14,13 13,34 12,52 11,64 10,69 9,67 8,56
Q 22988 18007 13744 10128 7087
30 P 8,01 7,43 6,75 5,95 5,00
Q 20421 15873 11993 8707 5944
HA4/650-4 40 P 9,19 8,35 7,39 6,30 5,04
Q 17445 13407 9984 7104 4696
50 P 10,11 8,97 7,69 6,25 4,63
Q 87633 80907 74539 68518 57467 47662 39007 31409 24774 19008 14017 9708
30 P 10,87 10,77 10,67 10,56 10,33 10,04 9,70 9,29 8,80 8,21 7,50 6,68
HG5/725-4 Q 79948 73733 67856 62306 52139 43139 35211 28261 22196 16921 12343 8368
40 13,87 13,63 13,39 13,13 12,60 12,03 11,39 10,69 9,90 9,01 8,01 6,88
HG5/725-4 S P
Q 70981 65337 60012 54994 45833 37759 30680 24500 19126 14464
50 P 16,98 16,57 16,15 15,72 14,85 13,93 12,95 11,90 10,76 9,52
Q 25631 20086 15342 11316 7926
30 P 8,94 8,29 7,52 6,62 5,56
Q 22752 17689 13371 9718 6646
HA5/725-4 40 P 10,25 9,31 8,24 7,01 5,61
Q 19423 14921 11112 7912 5239
50 P 11,27 9,99 8,57 6,97 5,18

Performance data 50 Hz -HA Reduced suction gas temp.
Relating to 25 °C suction gas temperature,
(HG34P 20 °C suction gas temperature) Supplementary cooling and Motor version -S-
45
Series HG(HA)

•
temp.
12,5 10 7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40
Q 100599 92878 85568 78656 65970 54713 44778 36056 28439 21820 16091 11144
30 P 12,48 12,37 12,25 12,13 11,85 11,53 11,14 10,67 10,10 9,42 8,61 7,66
HG5/830-4 Q 91777 84642 77896 71525 59854 49522 40421 32443 25480 19425 14169 9606
40
HG5/830-4 S P 15,93 15,65 15,37 15,08 14,47 13,81 13,08 12,27 11,36 10,34 9,19 7,90
Q 81483 75004 68891 63131 52614 43346 35219 28125 21956 16605
50 P 19,49 19,02 18,54 18,05 17,05 15,99 14,87 13,66 12,36 10,93
Q 29343 22994 17562 12953 9072
30 P 10,24 9,49 8,61 7,58 6,37
Q 26046 20248 15306 11124 7609
HA5/830-4 40 P 11,73 10,66 9,43 8,03 6,42
Q 22234 17080 12720 9059 6003
50 P 12,90 11,44 9,81 7,98 5,92
Q 114460 105675 97357 89493 75059 62252 50947 41024 32358 24827 18308 12679
30 P 14,20 14,07 13,94 13,80 13,49 13,12 12,67 12,14 11,49 10,72 9,80 8,72
HG5/945-4 Q 104422 96304 88628 81379 68100 56345 45990 36912 28991 22101 16122 10929
40
HG5/945-4 S P 18,12 17,80 17,48 17,15 16,46 15,71 14,88 13,96 12,93 11,77 10,46 8,98
Q 92709 85338 78383 71829 59863 49318 40072 32000 24981 18892
50 P 22,17 21,64 21,09 20,54 19,40 18,20 16,92 15,55 14,06 12,44
Q 33374 26174 20007 14774 10374
30 P 11,64 10,78 9,78 8,61 7,24
Q 29594 22995 17376 12635 8674
HA5/945-4 40 P 13,35 12,14 10,75 9,15 7,32
Q 25305 19387 14394 10227 6786
50 P 14,68 13,04 11,20 9,12 6,77
Q 129363 119434 110034 101145 84833 70357 57581 46365 36571 28059 20692 14330
30 P 18,28 18,00 17,72 17,43 16,80 16,10 15,29 14,33 13,22 11,91 10,38 8,61
HG6/1080-4 Q 118019 108844 100169 91976 76968 63681 51978 41719 32765 24979 18221 12352
40
HG6/1080-4 S P 22,56 22,15 21,72 21,28 20,33 19,27 18,07 16,71 15,16 13,38 11,36 9,06
Q 104781 96450 88589 81182 67658 55740 45289 36167 28234 21352
50 P 26,66 26,07 25,47 24,83 23,49 22,00 20,35 18,51 16,44 14,13
Q 37747 29595 22620 16702 11720
30 P 12,65 11,26 9,89 8,49 7,05
Q 33470 26012 19664 14306 9816
HA6/1080-4 40 P 14,58 12,95 11,30 9,62 7,86
Q 28580 21920 16301 11605 7710
50 P 16,24 14,31 12,36 10,34 8,23
Q 148504 137106 126315 116111 97384 80768 66101 53225 41982 32211 23754 16451
30 P 20,98 20,66 20,34 20,01 19,29 18,48 17,55 16,45 15,17 13,67 11,92 9,88
HG6/1240-4 Q 135481 124948 114989 105584 88356 73103 59668 47891 37613 28675 20917 14180
40 25,90 25,43 24,94 24,43 23,34 22,12 20,75 19,18 17,40 15,36 13,04 10,40
HG6/1240-4 S P
Q 120284 110720 101696 93193 77669 63987 51990 41518 32411 24511
50 P 30,61 29,93 29,23 28,51 26,96 25,26 23,36 21,25 18,88 16,22
Q 43328 33978 25970 19174 13463
30 P 14,52 12,92 11,35 9,75 8,10
Q 38417 29848 22551 16399 11262
HA6/1240-4 40 P 16,74 14,87 12,98 11,05 9,03
Q 32848 25165 18685 13281 8824
50 P 18,64 16,44 14,20 11,89 9,46
Q 168964 155996 143718 132108 110802 91895 75208 60559 47766 36649 27026 18717
30 P 23,87 23,51 23,14 22,77 21,95 21,03 19,96 18,72 17,26 15,56 13,56 11,24
HG6/1410-4 Q 154147 142163 130832 120131 100529 83176 67889 54490 42796 32626 23799 16134
40 29,47 28,93 28,37 27,80 26,55 25,17 23,61 21,83 19,80 17,48 14,84 11,83
HG6/1410-4 S P
Q 136857 125975 115708 106033 88370 72803 59153 47238 36877 27889
50 P 34,82 34,06 33,26 32,44 30,67 28,73 26,58 24,17 21,48 18,46
Q 38625 29529 21803 15324
30 P 14,69 12,90 11,08 9,20
Q 25605 18595 12767
HA6/1410-4 40 P 14,77 12,57 10,28
Q 15015 9929
50 P 13,54 10,78

46
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)

•
temp.
12,5 10 7,5 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40
Q 178802 164852 151711 139349 116850 97132 79968 65133 52401 41547 32345 24570
30 P 23,29 24,07 24,65 25,03 25,25 24,85 23,94 22,64 21,04 19,26 17,42 15,60
HG7/1620-4 Q 163682 150728 138537 127084 106272 88068 72246 58580 46844 36813 28261 20963
40
HG7/1620-4 S P 31,23 31,46 31,51 31,39 30,68 29,46 27,83 25,89 23,77 21,56 19,38 17,34
Q 148020 136086 124873 114354 95282 78644 64215 51770 41082 31926
50 P 38,75 38,45 37,98 37,37 35,77 33,74 31,41 28,87 26,24 23,62
Q 205257 189244 174158 159966 134139 111504 91800 74770 60154 47694 37131 28205
30 P 26,74 27,64 28,29 28,73 28,98 28,53 27,49 25,99 24,16 22,11 19,99 17,91
HG7/1860-4 Q 187901 173029 159035 145887 121996 101099 82935 67247 53775 42259 32442 24065
40
HG7/1860-4 S P 35,85 36,12 36,17 36,03 35,22 33,82 31,94 29,72 27,28 24,75 22,25 19,90
Q 169921 156221 143350 131274 109380 90280 73717 59429 47160 36649
50 P 44,49 44,14 43,60 42,90 41,06 38,73 36,05 33,14 30,12 27,12
Q 233537 215317 198153 182006 152621 126866 104448 85072 68442 54266 42247 32091
30 P 30,42 31,44 32,19 32,69 32,98 32,46 31,27 29,57 27,48 25,16 22,75 20,38
HG7/2110-4 Q 213789 196869 180947 165987 138805 115028 94362 76512 61184 48082 36912 27380
40 40,79 41,09 41,16 41,00 40,08 38,48 36,35 33,82 31,04 28,16 25,31 22,64
HG7/2110-4 S P
Q 193332 177745 163100 149360 124450 102719 83873 67618 53658 41699
50 P 50,62 50,22 49,61 48,81 46,72 44,07 41,02 37,70 34,27 30,85
Q 267888 247010 227287 208683 174692 144757 118594 95923 76462 59928 46042 34520
30 P 43,56 44,15 44,42 44,40 43,54 41,76 39,22 36,11 32,59 28,85 25,05 21,37
Q 243384 224002 205721 188504 157123 129580 105592 84877 67154 52140 39556 29118
HG8/2470-4 S 40 P 58,85 58,09 57,09 55,85 52,76 49,00 44,75 40,19 35,48 30,81 26,34 22,26
Q 217933 200057 183226 167405 138654 113522 91727 72987 57021 43547
50 P 72,17 70,15 67,95 65,58 60,43 54,87 49,08 43,23 37,50 32,07
Q 307524 283557 260916 239559 200540 166175 136141 110115 87775 68795 52854 39628
30 P 50,00 50,68 51,00 50,97 49,99 47,94 45,03 41,45 37,41 33,11 28,75 24,54
HG8/2830-4 Q 279395 257146 236159 216394 180371 148752 121215 97435 77090 59855 45409 33426
40
HG8/2830-4 S P 67,55 66,69 65,53 64,11 60,56 56,25 51,37 46,13 40,73 35,37 30,24 25,55
Q 250178 229657 210336 192175 159170 130319 105299 83786 65458 49990
50 P 82,84 80,53 78,00 75,28 69,37 62,99 56,34 49,63 43,05 36,81
Q 272565 228170 189070 154898 125287 99868 78274 60136 45087
30 P 57,99 56,87 54,54 51,23 47,16 42,57 37,68 32,72 27,92
HG8/3220-4 Q 246209 205222 169247 137916 110859 87711 68102 51665 38032
40
HG8/3220-4 S P 72,94 68,91 64,00 58,45 52,49 46,34 40,24 34,41 29,07
Q 218652 181100 148274 119807 95330 74477 56878
50 P 85,66 78,92 71,66 64,10 56,46 48,98 41,89

47
Series HG(HA)
Technical data - HG
Type Number Swept volume Electrical data 3 Weight Connections Oil charge
of 50 / 60 Hz
Voltage Max. Max. power Starting Discharge line Suction line
cylinders (1450/1740 1/min)
working current consumption current DV SV
(rotor locked)
1 2 2
m³/h A kW A kg mm I inch mm I inch Ltr.

¨< ¨<
HG12P/60-4 S 2 5.40 / 6.40 4 6,8 / 3,9 2,2 40 / 23 48 12 / 1/2 16 / 5/8 0.9
HG12P/75-4 2 6.70 / 8.10 4 7,1 / 4,1 2,3 40 / 23 48 1
12 / /2 16 / 5/8 0.9
HG12P/75-4 S 2 6.70 / 8.10 4 8,0 / 4,6 2,6 43 / 25 49 12 / 1/2 16 / 5/8 0.9
HG12P/90-4 2 8.00 / 9.60 4 8,5 / 4,9 2,8 43 / 25 49 12 / 1/2 16 / 5/8 0.9
HG12P/90-4 S 2 8.00 / 9.60 4 8,8 / 5,1 2,9 45 / 26 49 12 / 1/2 16 / 5/8 0.9
HG12P/110-4 2 9.40 / 11.30 4 9,2 / 5,3 3,1 43 / 25 48 1
12 / /2 16 / 5/8 0.9
HG12P/110-4 S 2 9.40 / 11.30 4 10,6 / 6,1 3,6 45 / 26 48 12 / 1/2 16 / 5/8 0.9
HG22P/125-4 2 11.10 / 13.30 4 9,7 / 5,6 3,2 38 / 25 73 16 / 5/8 22 / 7/8 1.1
HG22P/125-4 S 2 11.10 / 13.30 4 10,9 / 6,3 3,7 53 / 32 74 16 / 5/8 22 / 7/8 1.1
HG22P/160-4 2 13.70 / 16.40 4 10,5 / 6,0 3,5 53 / 32 74 16 / 5/8 22 / 7/8 1.1
HG22P/160-4 S 2 13.70 / 16.40 4 12,8 / 7,4 4,4 67 / 40 75 16 / 5/8 22 / 7/8 1.1
HG22P/190-4 2 16.50 / 19.80 4 13,3 / 7,7 4,6 53 / 32 74 5
16 / /8 22 / 7/8 1.1
HG22P/190-4 S 2 16.50 / 19.80 4 16,1 / 9,3 5,7 67 / 40 75 16 / 5/8 22 / 7/8 1.1
HG34P/215-4 4 18.80 / 22.60 4 14,4 / 8,3 5,0 67 / 40 94 16 / 5/8 22 / 7/8 1.4
HG34P/215-4 S 4 18.80 / 22.60 4 18,1 / 10,5 6,1 96 /57 96 16 / 5/8 22 / 7/8 1.4
HG34P/255-4 4 22.10 / 26.60 4 17,3 / 10,0 6,1 67 / 40 94 16 / 5/8 28 / 11/8 1.4
HG34P/255-4 S 4 22.10 / 26.60 4 21,8 / 12,6 7,5 96 / 57 96 16 / 5/8 28 / 11/8 1.4
HG34P/315-4 4 27.30 / 32.80 4 21,1 / 12,2 7,3 96 / 57 93 5
16 / /8 28 / 11/8 1.4
HG34P/315-4 S 4 27.30 / 32.80 4 26,5 / 16,3 8,9 134 / 77 96 22 / 7/8 28 / 11/8 1.4
HG34P/380-4 4 33.10 / 39.70 4 26,1 / 15,1 9,1 96 / 57 91 22 / 7/8 28 / 11/8 1.4
HG34P/380-4 S 4 33.10 / 39.70 4 32,4 / 18,7 11,1 134 / 77 94 22 / 7/8 28 / 11/8 1.4
* PW 1+2 * PW1 / PW1+2
HG4/465-4 4 40.50 / 48.60 5 18 11.0 57 / 75 150 28 / 11/8 35 / 13/8 3.4
HG4/465-4 S 4 40.50 / 48.60 5 27 13.0 82 / 107 154 28 / 11/8 35 / 13/8 3.4
HG4/555-4 4 48.20 / 57.80 5 27 12.9 82 / 107 152 28 / 11/8 35 / 13/8 3.4
HG4/555-4 S 4 48.20 / 57.80 5 34 15.2 107 / 140 157 28 / 11/8 35 / 13/8 3.4
HG4/650-4 4 56.60 / 67.90 5 27 15.7 82 / 107 153 28 / 11/8 42 / 15/8 3.4
HG4/650-4 S 4 56.60 / 67.90 5 34 18.4 107 / 140 159 1
28 / 1 /8 42 / 15/8 3.4
HG5/725-4 4 62.90 / 75.50 5 33 16.5 82 / 107 200 28 / 11/8 42 / 15/8 4.5
HG5/725-4 S 4 62.90 / 75.50 5 37 19.4 107 / 140 203 28 / 11/8 42 / 15/8 4.5
HG5/830-4 4 72.20 / 86.70 5 33 18.9 82 / 107 203 28 / 11/8 42 / 15/8 4.5
HG5/830-4 S 4 72.20 / 86.70 5 49 22.3 126 / 160 208 28 / 11/8 42 / 15/8 4.5
HG5/945-4 4 82.20 / 98.60 5 37 22.6 107 / 140 208 35 / 13/8 54 / 21/8 4.5
HG5/945-4 S 4 82.20 / 98.60 5 49 22.8 126 / 160 209 3
35 / 1 /8 54 / 21/8 4.5
HG6/1080-4 4 93.70 / 112.40 5 47 26.3 149 / 189 221 35 / 13/8 54 / 21/8 4.5
HG6/1080-4 S 4 93.70 / 112.40 5 57 31.0 172 / 212 224 35 / 13/8 54 / 21/8 4.5
HG6/1240-4 4 107.60 / 129.10 5 57 30.5 172 / 212 221 35 / 13/8 54 / 21/8 4.5
HG6/1240-4 S 4 107.60 / 129.10 5 71 36.0 204 / 250 227 35 / 13/8 54 / 21/8 4.5
HG6/1410-4 4 122.40 / 146.90 5 57 35.6 172 / 212 222 35 / 13/8 54 / 21/8 4.5
HG6/1410-4 S 4 122.40 / 146.90 5 71 42.6 204 / 250 225 3
35 / 1 /8 54 / 21/8 4.5
HG7/1620-4 6 140.60 / 168.80 6 76 38.7 227 / 340 277 42 / 15/8 54 / 21/8 4.8
HG7/1620-4 S 6 140.60 / 168.80 6 83 46.3 268 / 373 293 42 / 15/8 54 / 21/8 4.8
HG7/1860-4 6 161.40 / 193.70 6 83 44.6 268 / 373 292 42 / 15/8 54 / 21/8 4.8
HG7/1860-4 S 6 161.40 / 193.70 6 98 53.3 343 / 494 297 42 / 15/8 54 / 21/8 4.8
HG7/2110-4 6 183.60 / 220.30 6 98 51.2 343 / 494 290 42 / 15/8 64 / 25/8 4.8
HG7/2110-4 S 6 183.60 / 220.30 6 115 60.5 344 / 500 299 5
42 / 1 /8 64 / 25/8 4.8
HG8/2470-4 S 8 214.30 / 257.10 6 155 72.5 475 / 551 414 54 / 21/8 76 / 31/8 9.0
HG8/2830-4 8 245.90 / 295.10 6 155 77.5 475 / 551 413 54 / 21/8 76 / 31/8 9.0
HG8/2830-4 S 8 245.90 / 295.10 6 170 84.5 520 / 605 433 54 / 21/8 76 / 31/8 9.0
HG8/3220-4 8 279.80 / 335.80 6 155 78.3 475 / 551 412 1
54 / 2 /8 76 / 31/8 9.0
HG8/3220-4 S 8 279.80 / 335.80 6 170 94.2 520 / 605 432 54 / 21/8 76 / 31/8 9.0
* PW = Part Winding, motors for part winding starting

1 = 1. part winding
2 = 2. part winding
48
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
Technical data - HA
Type Number Swept volume Electrical data 3 Weight Connections Oil charge
of 50 / 60 Hz
Voltage Max. working Max. power Starting Discharge line Suction line
cylinders (1450/1740 1/min)
current consumption current DV SV
(rotor locked)
1 2 2
m³/h A kW A kg mm I inch mm I inch Ltr.

¨< ¨<
HA12P/60-4 2 5.40 / 6.40 4 5.5 / 3.2 1.7 40 / 23 52 12 / 1/2 12 / 1/2 0.9
HA12P/75-4 2 6.70 / 8.10 4 5.9 / 3.4 1.8 40 / 23 52 1
12 / /2 12 / 1/2 0.9
HA12P/90-4 2 8.00 / 9.60 4 6.6 / 3.8 2.0 43 / 25 53 12 / 1/2 12 / 1/2 0.9
HA12P/110-4 2 9.40 / 11.30 4 6.9 / 4.0 2.2 43 / 25 52 12 / 1/2 12 / 1/2 0.9
HA22P/125-4 2 11.10 / 13.30 4 7.1 / 4.1 3.0 53 / 32 78 12 / 1/2 16 / 5/8 1.1
HA22P/160-4 2 13.70 / 16.40 4 8.2 / 4.8 4.0 67 / 40 78 1
12 / /2 16 / 5/8 1.1
HA22P/190-4 2 16.50 / 19.80 4 9.0 / 5.2 4.0 67 / 40 79 12 / 1/2 16 / 5/8 1.1
HA34P/215-4 4 18.80 / 22.60 4 10.9 / 6.3 3.7 67 / 40 100 16 / 5/8 22 / 7/8 1.4
HA34P/255-4 4 22.10 / 26.60 4 12.5 / 7.2 4.3 67 / 40 98 16 / 5/8 22 / 7/8 1.4
HA34P/315-4 4 27.30 / 32.80 4 16.2 / 9.4 5.3 96 / 57 98 16 / 5/8 22 / 7/8 1.4
HA34P/380-4 4 33.10 / 39.70 4 18.9 / 11.0 6.4 96 / 57 97 16 / 5/8 22 / 7/8 1.4
PW*1+2 PW*1/PW*1+2
HA4/465-4 4 40.50 / 48.60 5 21 11.2 82 / 107 157 28 / 11/8 35 / 13/8 3.4
HA4/555-4 4 48.20 / 57.80 5 26 13.3 107 / 140 160 28 / 11/8 35 / 13/8 3.4
HA4/650-4 4 56.60 / 67.90 5 26 15.6 107 / 140 163 28 / 11/8 35 / 13/8 3.4
HA5/725-4 4 62.90 / 75.50 5 26 12.5 107 / 140 207 1
28 / 1 /8 42 / 15/8 4.5
HA5/830-4 4 72.20 / 86.70 5 26 12.8 126 / 160 210 28 / 11/8 42 / 15/8 4.5
HA5/945-4 4 82.20 / 98.60 5 26 12.9 126 / 160 213 28 / 11/8 42 / 15/8 4.5
HA6/1080-4 4 93.70 / 112.40 5 31 15.8 172 / 212 227 28 / 11/8 42 / 15/8 4.5
HA6/1240-4 4 107.60 / 129.10 5 31 15.9 172 / 212 224 28 / 11/8 42 / 15/8 4.5
HA6/1410-4 4 122.40 / 146.90 5 31 16.2 172 / 212 221 28 / 11/8 42 / 15/8 4.5
* PW = Part Winding, motors for part winding starting
1 = 1. part winding
2 = 2. part winding
Oil sump heater 110-240 V - 1 - 50/60 Hz Explanations:

> HG(HA)12P, HG(HA)22P, HG(HA)34P: 50-120 W
PTC heater, self-regulating (optional) 1 Tolerance (± 10%) relates to the mean value of the voltage
Oil sump heater at 230V - 1 - 50/60Hz range. Other voltages and current types on request.
> HG(HA)4: 80 W (standard)
> HG(HA)5, HG(HA)6, HG7: 140 W (standard) 2 Take account of the max. operating current / max. power
> HG8: 200 W (standard) consumption when designing contactors, leads and fuses.
Switches: Service category AC3
Fan motors for the HA version 230V - 1 - 50/60 Hz 3 All data are based on voltage rms values
> HA12P: 40 W / 0.3 A (¨/Y data at 230 V) (PW data at 400 V)
> HA22P, HA34P: 72 W / 0.55 A
> HA4, HA5, HA6: 160 W / 0.71 A 4 220-240 V ¨ / 380-420 V Y - 3 - 50 Hz
265-290 V ¨ / 440-480 V Y - 3 - 60 Hz
5 380-420 V Y/YY - 3 - 50 Hz PW
440-480 V Y/YY - 3 - 60 Hz PW
PW = Part Winding, motors for part winding starting
(no start unloaders required)
Winding ratios: HG(HA)4, HG(HA)5, HG(HA)6 = 66% / 33%
Designs for Y/¨ on request
6 380-420 V ¨/ YYY - 3 - 50 Hz PW
440-480 V ¨/ YYY - 3 - 60 Hz PW
PW = Part Winding, motors for part winding starting
(no start unloaders required)
Winding ratios: HG7, HG8 = 60% / 40%
Designs for Y/¨ on request
49
Series HG(HA)
Dimensions and connections - HG
HG12P HG12P/60-4 S HG12P/75-4

HG12P/75-4 S
HG12P/90-4
HG12P/90-4 S
HG12P/110-4
HG12P/110-4 S
DB

B1 DV
A
B,L
DB H,D1
SV 1) E

A1 K,O
F
Y
J

DB
1)
SV 90° rotatable Dimensions in mm
HG22P/125-4 HG22P/160-4 HG22P/190-4

HG22P HG22P/125-4 S HG22P/160-4 S HG22P/190-4 S

DV B1
A
B,L
DB
SV 1) B
H,D1

A1 E K,O

F J
Y

DB DB
1)
• Connections see page 58

• Dimensions for anti-vibration pad see page 57
50
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
HG34P HG34P/215-4
HG34P/215-4 S
HG34P/255-4
HG34P/255-4 S
HG34P/315-4
HG34P/315-4 S
HG34P/380-4
HG34P/380-4 S
DB
DV B1
DB
B,L

A1
H,D1
SV 1)
E K,O
A1

F J

Y

DB

1)
SV 90° rotatable
Dimensions in ( ) = HG34P/215-4 HG34P/255-4
HG34P/215-4 S HG34P/255-4 S Dimensions in mm
HG4 HG4/465-4
HG4/465-4 S
HG4/555-4
HG4/555-4 S
HG4/650-4
HG4/650-4 S
DB

B B1
DV L N
C
E
A
SV 1) D H
DB
A P D1

O
A1 F X
K

J
Y

DB

1)
SV 90° rotatable
Dimensions in ( ) = HG4/650-4, HG4/650-4 S Dimensions in mm

• Dimensions for view X see page 57
51
Series HG(HA)
HG5 HG5/725-4
HG5/725-4 S
HG5/830-4
HG5/830-4 S
HG5/945-4
HG5/945-4 S
DB

DV B A N B B1
C
E
L H
DB
SV 1) D1
D
O

K X
A1 P
F
J
Y

DB

1)
SV 90° rotatable
Dimensions in ( ) = HG5/945-4, HG5/945-4 S Dimensions in mm
HG6/1080-4 HG6/1240-4 HG6/1410-4

HG6 HG6/1080-4 S HG6/1240-4 S HG6/1410-4 S
DB

DV B A N B B1
C
E
H
L
DB
SV 1) D1
P O

A1 D X
K

F
J
Y

DB
1)

52
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
HG7 HG7/1620-4
HG7/1620-4 S
HG7/1860-4
HG7/1860-4 S
HG7/2110-4
HG7/2110-4 S
DB
DV B N A SV A2 B1 A1 B
L
C
P E
DB H

D
D1

F X
J K,O
Y

DB
Dimensions in mm
HG8 HG8/2470-4 S HG8/2830-4

HG8/2830-4 S
HG8/3220-4
HG8/3220-4 S
DB
DV B N A SV 1) A2 B B1 A1
L1
C
E
DB
P1
H

D
K,O

D1
X

F Q1
J

ÖV
Y

DB
1)
suction cover rotatable 90° Dimensions in mm

53
Series HG(HA)
Dimensions and connections - HA
HA12P HA12P/60-4 HA12P/75-4 HA12P/90-4 HA12P/110-4
DB

SV A1 B1 DV
A
DB
B,L
E H,D1

K,O

F

J Y
DB

Dimensions in mm
HA22P HA22P/125-4 HA22P/160-4 HA22P/190-4
DB

SV A1 DV B1
A
B,L
B
DB
H,D1

E K,O

F J
Y
DB

Dimensions in mm

54
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
HA34P HA34P/215-4 HA34P/255-4 HA34P/315-4 HA34P/380-4
DB
A1 SV A1 DV B1
A
DB B,L
H,D1

E K,O
F
J
Y

DB
Dimensions in mm
HA4 HA4/465-4 HA4/555-4 HA4/650-4
DB

DV L A A1 N B SV B1
C
E
A
D H
DB
P D1

O
F X

K
J
Y

DB
Dimensions in mm

55
Series HG(HA)
HA5 HA5/725-4 HA4/830-4 HA4/945-4
DB

DV B A A1 N B SV B1
C
E
DB H
L D1
D O
P X
F K
J
Y

DB
Dimensions in mm
HA6 HA6/1080-4 HA6/1240-4 HA6/1410-4
DB

DV B A A1 N B1 SV B
C
E
H
DB
L D1
P

O

D X
K

F
J
Y

DB
Dimensions in mm

56
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
Dimensions and connections
View X:
Possibility to connect to oil level regulator
HG(HA) 4, 5, 6
HG7, 8
Three-hole connection for oil level regulator

make ESK, AC+R, CARLY (3x M6, 10 deep)
Three-hole connection for oil level regulator

make TRAXOIL (3 x M6 x 10 deep)
Dimensions in mm
Dimensions for anti-vibration pad

Øa b c d
Type
mm mm mm mm
HG(HA)12P 30 30 M8 20
HG(HA)22P 40 30 M10 20
HG(HA)34P 40 30 M10 20
HG(HA)4 40 30 M10 20
HG(HA)5 50 30 M10 25
HG(HA)6 50 30 M10 25
HG7 50 30 M10 25
HG8 70 45 M12 37
57
Series HG(HA)
Dimensions and connections

Connections HG(HA)12P HG(HA)22P HG(HA)34P HG(HA)4 HG(HA)5 HG(HA)6 HG7 HG8
SV Suction line
Please refer to technical data, page 48 and 49
DV Discharge line
Connection suction side,
A 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF
not lockable
A1 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF
lockable
A2 - - - - - - 1
/4 " NPTF 1
/4 " NPTF
not loackable
Connection discharge side,
B 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF
not lockable
Connection discharge side,
B1 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF
lockable
Connection oil pressure
C - - - 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF
safety switch OIL
D - - - 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF
safety switch LP
Connection oil return from
D1 1
/4 " NPTF 1
/4 " NPTF 1
/4 " NPTF 1
/4 " NPTF 1
/4 " NPTF 1
/4 " NPTF 1
/4 " NPTF 1
/4 " NPTF
oil separator
E 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF 7
/16 " UNF
gauge
F Oil drain M8 M 10 M 10 M 22 x 1,5 M 22 x 1,5 M 22 x 1,5 M 22 x 1,5 M 22 x 1,5
H Oil charge plug 1

/4 " NPTF 1
/4 " NPTF 1
/4 " NPTF M 22 x 1,5 M 22 x 1,5 M 22 x 1,5 M 22 x 1,5 M 33 x 2
J Oil sump heater Ø 15 mm 1) Ø 15 mm 1) Ø 15 mm 1) M 22 x 1,5 M 22 x 1,5 M 22 x 1,5 M 22 x 1,5 M 22 x 1,5
K Sight glass 11/8" - 18 UNEF 11/8" - 18 UNEF 11/8" - 18 UNEF 4 Loch M 6 4 Loch M 6 4 Loch M 6 3 Loch M 6 3 Loch M 6
Connection thermal
L 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF 1
/8 " NPTF -
protection thermostat
Thermal protection
L1 - - - - - - - 1
/8 " NPTF
thermostat
Connection capacity
N - - - M 48 x 1,5 M 45 x 1,5 M 45 x 1,5 M 45 x 1,5 M 45 x 1,5
controller
Connection oil level
O 11/8" - 18 UNEF 11/8" - 18 UNEF 11/8" - 18 UNEF 1 1 1 1 1
regulator
ÖV Oil service valve - - - - - - - 7

/16 " UNF

P - - - M 20 x 1,5 2) M 20 x 1,5 2) M 20 x 1,5 2) M 20 x 1,5 3) -
differential sensor
Oil pressure differential
P1 - - - - - - - M 20 x 1,5 3)
sensor
Q1 Oil temperature sensor - - - - - - - 1

/8 " NPTF
1) = Possibility of connection of oil sump heater

2) = Available from 2. quarter 2006
3) = 3/4 " UNF until autumn 2006
1 Dimensions see view X page 57
58
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
Scope of supply - HG
Scope of supply HG HG12P HG22P HG34P HG4 HG5 HG6 HG7 HG8
Semi-hermetic 2 cylinder piston compressor with drive motor for direct start
220-240 V ¨ / 380-420 V Y - 3 - 50 Hz
265-290 V ¨ / 440-480 V Y - 3 - 60 Hz
Single-section compressor housing with hermetically integrated electric motor
220-240 V ¨ / 380-420 V Y - 3 - 50 Hz
265-290 V ¨ / 440-480 V Y - 3 - 60 Hz
Semi-hermetic four cylinder reciprocating compressor with drive motor for
part winding start
380-420 V Y/YY - 3 - 50 Hz
440-480 V Y/YY - 3 - 60 Hz
Motor unit flanshed onto the compressor housing
Semi-hermetic six cylinder reciprocating compressor with drive motor for
part winding start
380-420 V ¨ /YYY - 3 - 50 Hz
440-480 V ¨ /YYY - 3 - 60 Hz
Semi-hermetic eight cylinder reciprocating compressor with drive motor for
part winding start
380-420 V ¨/YYY - 3 - 50 Hz
440-480 V ¨/YYY - 3 - 60 Hz
Winding protection with PTC resistor sensors and electronic triggering unit
Bock MP10
Winding protection with resistor sensors, readily wired and connected with
Individual protection of the cylinder heads with thermal protection thermo-
stats, readily wired and connected with Bock Compressor Management
BCM2000
Oil temperature sensor in the oil sump, readily wired and connected with
Oil differential pressure sensor (¨p-switch Kriwan make), ready wired and
connected with Bock Compressor Mangagement BCM2000
Oil pump cover with screwed connection for differential oil pressure switch 1) 1) 1)
(¨p-switch Kriwan make)
Possibility to connect to oil level controllers ESK, AC+R or CARLY
Possibility to connect to oil level controllers e.g. Traxoil
Oil sump heater 230 V - 1 - 50/60 Hz, 80 W
Oil service valve
Oil charge
HG: FUCHS Reniso SP 46
HGX: FUCHS Reniso Triton SE 55
Sight glass
Two sight glasses
Three sight glasses
Prepared for capacity regulator (1 cylinder cover)
Prepared for capacity regulator (2 cylinder covers)
Prepared for capacity regulator (3 cylinder covers)
Compressor safety valve
Suction and discharge line valve
Inert gas charge
4 anti-vibration pads enclosed
1) Available from second quarter 2006
59
Series HG(HA)
Scope of supply - HA
Scope of supply HA HA12P HA22P HA34P HA4 HA5 HA6

220-240 V ¨ / 380-420 V Y - 3 - 50 Hz
265-290 V ¨ / 440-480 V Y - 3 - 60 Hz
220-240 V ¨ / 380-420 V Y - 3 - 50 Hz
265-290 V ¨ / 440-480 V Y - 3 - 60 Hz
Semi-hermetic four cylinder reciprocating compressor with drive motor for part
winding start
380-420 V Y/YY - 3 - 50 Hz
440-480 V Y/YY - 3 - 60 Hz
Motor unit flanged onto the compressor housing
Motor is cooled by an integrated fan with air deflection hood
230 V - 1 - 50/60 Hz, 40 W, 0,3 A
230 V - 1 - 50/60 Hz, 72 W, 0,53 A
230 V - 1 - 50/60 Hz, 160 W, 0,71 A
Winding protection with PTC resistor sensors and electronic triggering unit
Bock MP10
Oil pump cover with screwed connection for differential oil pressure switch 1) 1) 1)
(¨p-switch make Kriwan)
Possibility to connect to oil level controllers ESK, AC+R or CARLY
Possibility to connect to oil level controllers Traxoil
Oil charge:
HA: FUCHS Reniso SP 46
HAX: FUCHS Reniso Triton SE 55
Oil charge
Prepared for capacity regulator (1 cylinder cover)
Compressor safety valve
Suction and discharge line valve
Inert gas charge
4 anti-vibration pads enclosed
1) Available from second quarter 2006
60
BOCK HG... HA...
Series HG(HA)
Accessories
Accessories HG(HA) HG(HA)12P HG(HA)22P HG(HA)34P HG(HA)4 HG(HA)5 HG(HA)6 HG7 HG8
1 Start unloader 230 V - 1 - 50/60 Hz, IP65, less check valve
Start unloader 230 V - 1 - 50/60 Hz, IP65, less check valve,
including thermal protection thermostat (PTC sensor)
2 Start unloader by means of a Bock-ESS (Electronic Soft Start) IP20
(Connection clamps IP00) for installation in switch cabinet
3 Capacity regulator 230 V - 1 - 50/60 Hz, IP65
1 capacity regulator = 50% residual capacity
Capacity regulator 230 V - 1 - 50/60 Hz, IP65
1-2 capacity regulator = 66/33% residual capacity
Capacity regulator 230 V - 1 - 50/60 Hz, IP65
1-3 capacity regulator = 75/50/25% residual capacity
4 Progressively adjustable speed control by means of a Bock EFC
(Electronic Frequency Control), compactly built onto compressor and
connected ready-to-operate HG12P: IP65 HG22P/HG34P: IP54
5 Phase converter from single to three phase AC
for installation in switch cabinet, IP20
6 Cylinder cover prepared for capacity regulator
7 Oil sump heater
110-240 V - 1 - 50/60 Hz, 50-120 W, IP65
PTC heater self-regulating
8 Oil pressure safety switch MP 54 230 V - 1 - 50/60 Hz, IP20
incl. mounting
9 Oil service valve (only possible ex-works)
10 Thermal protection thermostat (resistor) IP67
11 Bock Compressor Management BCM2000
including oil pressure control, oil temperature control (NTC),
thermal protection thermostat (PTC) per cylinder cover
12 Water-cooled cylinder covers
Sea water resistant water-cooled cylinder covers
13 Additional fan 220-240 V ¨ / 380-420 V Y - 3 - 50/60 Hz, 1)
72/68 W, IP44 enclosed
Additional fan 220-240 V ¨ / 380-420 V Y - 3 - 50/60 Hz, 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
120/180 W, IP54 enclosed
14 Connection piece suction and discharge valve in welded construction
15 Intermediate adapter for discharge line valve 1) 1) 1)
Special voltage and/or frequency (on request)
1)
Only available for HG compressors
Pictures see page 62
61
Series HG(HA)
Accessories
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12
13 14 15
62
Operating instructions ®
Hermetic motor compressor E-0.122-06.00
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 1
, Operating instructions
Hermetic motor compressor
/*
Type: HG 7/1620-4 HG 7/1620-4S
HG 7/1860-4 HG 7/1860-4S
. HG 7/2110-4 HG 7/2110-4S
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 2
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF

HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 3
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on deciding to purchase a BOCK refrigerating compressor!
You have purchased a reliable quality product.
We would like to ask you just one thing:
Before you start working with the machine, please read the information
summarised for you in this manual.
It contains important tips and instructions for handling, initial commissioning and operation,
together with information about maintenance, spare parts and accessories.
Some instructions are marked specially with the following meanings:
This symbol is used when inaccurate compliance or failure to comply

with these instructions could result in damage to the machine.
This symbol marks important instructions you should

follow during your work with the machine.
The high standard of quality of BOCK compressors is guaranteed by the on-going further
development of the design, the features and the accessories. This could possibly result in
certain deviations between this manual and your compressor. Please understand that no
claims can be derived from the data, illustrations and descriptions in the manual.
The BOCK service team or your local dealer are always available to answer any other
technical questions.
Yours sincerely,
Bock Kältemaschinen GmbH
Bock Kältemaschinen GmbH Q U A L IT Y S Y S T E M
Postfach 11 61
D-72632 Frickenhausen
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
Benzstr. 7
D-72636 Frickenhausen
Tel. +49 7022 9454-0
Fax +49 7022 9454-137
mail@bock.de
www.bock.de c e rtifie d b y D Q S a c c o rd in g to
D IN E N ISO 9 0 0 1 R e g . N o . 2 1 7 7
Subject to change without notice.

HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 4
1.0 Contents
Page
1.0 Contents ................................................................................................................. 4
2.0 Safety instructions ................................................................................................. 5
3.0 Compressor type ................................................................................................... 5
4.0 Main functioning components ................................................................................ 6
5.0 Nameplate .............................................................................................................. 7
6.0 Type key ................................................................................................................. 7
7.0 Limits of application ................................................................................................ 8
8.0 Installation instructions ........................................................................................... 9
8.1 General ...................................................................................................... 9
8.2 Pipe connections / pipelines ................................................................... 10
8.3 Shut-off valves ........................................................................................ 10
9.0 Electrical connection ............................................................................................. 11
9.1 General instructions ................................................................................. 11
9.2 Series motor, version for direct and part-winding start ........................... 11
9.3 Special motor, version for direct or star delta start ................................ 12
9.4 Electronic trigger MP 10 .......................................................................... 12
9.5 Connection of the electronic trigger MP 10 ............................................ 12
9.6 Main-line circuit diagram for part-winding start ...................................... 13
9.7 Function test MP 10 ................................................................................ 13
9.8 Oil sump heating ...................................................................................... 14
10.0 Initial commissioning ............................................................................................ 14
10.1 Leak test, evacuation .............................................................................. 14
10.2 Coolant filling ............................................................................................ 15
10.3 Lubrication / oil check ............................................................................. 15
10.4 Connection oil level controller ................................................................. 15
10.5 Liquid shocks .......................................................................................... 16
11.0 Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 16
11.1 Safety instructions .................................................................................. 16
11.2 Service intervals ...................................................................................... 16
11.3 Recommended spare parts .................................................................... 17
11.4 Excerpt from the lubricant table .............................................................. 17
12.0 Accessoires ......................................................................................................... 17
12.1 Start unloader .......................................................................................... 17
12.2 Capacity regulation ................................................................................. 18
12.3 Capacity regulation by frequency converter .......................................... 18
12.4 Oil pressure safety switch ...................................................................... 19
12.5 Heat protection thermostat ..................................................................... 19
12.6 Additional filter, series HG ....................................................................... 19
13.0 Connections, dimensions and specifications ...................................................... 20
14.0 Declaration of conformity CE 96 .......................................................................... 23
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
15.0 Manufacturers declaration .................................................................................. 24

HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 5
2.0 Safety instructions

Coolant compressors are pressurised machines and therefore require particularly
careful and meticulous handling.
• Only qualified staff are allowed to handle these machines.
• National safety regulations, accident prevention regulations, technical standards
and other valid directives must be observed.
• The compressor may only be operated in refrigerating systems, and only with
the coolants approved by Bock.
• The maximum tolerable operating overpressure may not be exceeded (not even
for test purposes).
• Pressure switches are required to safeguard the machine from excess pressure.
• New compressors are provided with an inert gas filling (approx. 3 bar nitrogen)
in the factory. Relieve the pressure on the compressor before connecting up to
the refrigerating system.
• Before starting the compressor, the discharge shut-off valve and suction shut-off
valve are to be opened.
• Before starting up, check that all components mounted by the user have been
properly mounted and are connected pressure-tight with the compressor
(e.g. pipelines, bungs, union nuts, replaced parts, etc.).
• During initial commissioning, do not start the compressor in a vacuum.
Only operate the compressor when the machine is full (see page 14, item 10.1).
• Surface temperatures of more than 100 °C are possible on the pressure side
respectively under 0 °C on the suction side, depending on the operating
conditions.
For queries, please contact our technical service department phone ++49 (0)70 22/94 54-0.
3.0 Compressor version
Series HG 7 ⇒ hermetic motor compressor, suction-gas cooled,

in 6-cylinder W-design
• Hermetic reciprocating motor compressor with suction-gas cooled drive motor.
• The coolant flow sucked in from the evaporator is guided over the motor with
particularly intensive cooling. This means that particularly under high load, the
motor can be kept to a relatively low temperature level.
• Cylinders arranged in pairs in W-design.
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 6
4.0 Main and functioning components
%
#
"
! $
'
%

&
Fig. 1
" $
#

!
Fig. 2
01. Compressor housing 11. Oil sump heating

02. Suction shut-off valve 12. Sight glass 1, connection oil level regulator
03. Discharge shut-off valve 13. Sight glass 2,
04. Electrical connection box 14. Connection for heat protection thermostat
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
05. Valve plate 15. Connection for capacity regulation 1

06. Cylinder cover 16. Connection for capacity regulation 2
07. Oil filler plug 17. Transport eyelet
08. Oil drain plug / oil filter
09. Oil pump
10. Connection electronic oil differential
pressure switch (e.g. make Kriwan)
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 7
5.0 Nameplate
The compressor nameplate contains the following information:
1. Type of compressor 8. Blocked rotor current
2. Serial number ∆ : part-winding
3. Year of manufacturer YYY : winding 1 and 2
4. Rated speed 9. Max. permissible operating
5. Theoretic volume flow rate overpressure
6. Voltage, switching, frequency ND (LP) = suction side
7. Max. permissible operating flow HD (HP) = discharge side
10. Protection
11. Oil grade filled in the compressor by
the manufacturer
$
Ty p : H G 7/2110-4 380 -4 20V ∆/YYY - 3 - 50H z
N r. : A H09 259-001 B a u j.: 200 1 n : 145 0 m in -1 V th : 183 ,6 m 3 /h
I m a x : 17 ,0 A 440 -4 80V ∆/YYY - 3 - 60H z
% I b lo c k : ∆: 343 A YYY: 494 A n : 174 0 m in -1 V th : 220 ,3 m 3 /h
& p m a x : N D (L P )/H D (H P )= 19/25bar IP5 4 Ö l: SP46

#
' " Fig. 3
6.0 Type key (example)
H G 7/2110-4S
S e ries
HG = H erm etic G as-cooled (suc tion gas cooling)
S iz e
C od e
3
geom etric displacem ent in cm
N o. o f po les
M o to r ve rs ion for air-c ond itio ning
C om p re sso rs w h ich ha ve bee n filled w ith e s ter oil
in the fa ctory (e.g. fo r R 134 a ) are m arked in the
typ e co de w ith th e su ffix X , e .g. H G X 7 /2110 -4
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 8
7.0 Limits of application
Refrigeran t R 2 2 Refrigeran t R 2 2
L M H L M H
70 70
63 63
60 60
50 oo lin g 50 li ng
al c c oo
it io n nal
40 Add 40 it io
20K A dd 20 K °C
∆t o h ∆t o h + 25
30 30 t oh
20 5°C 20
+2
t oh
10 10
-4 0 -3 5 -3 0 -2 5 -2 0 -1 5 -1 0 -5 0 5 10 15 -4 0 -3 5 -3 0 -2 5 -2 0 -1 5 -1 0 -5 0 5 10 15
F ig . 4 : M o d e l HG 7 su c tio n g a s c o o le d
Refrigeran t R 1 34a
L M H
79
K
70 20
∆t o h
60 5°C
+2
50 t oh
40
30
20
10
-4 0 -3 5 -3 0 -2 5 -2 0 -1 5 -1 0 -5 0 5 10 15
F ig . 6 : M o d e l HG X 7 s u ctio n -g a s co o le d
Refrigeran t R 4 04A / R 50 7 Refrigeran t R 4 04A / R 50 7
60 60
54 54
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
Refrigeran t R 4 07 C Refrigeran t R 4 07 C
61 61
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
10 10
-3 0 -2 5 -2 0 -1 5 -1 0 -5 0 5 10 15 -3 0 -2 5 -2 0 -1 5 -1 0 -5 0 5 10 15
L = deep-freeze temp. range t0 = evaporation temp. toh 25 °C = suction gas temp. 25 °C

M = normal range tc = condensation temp. ∆toh 20K = suction gas overheating 20 K
H = air conditioning
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 9
Explanations:
Operation of HG 7 compressors is possible within the limits shown in the diagrams.
The maximum discharge end temperature of 140 °C may not be exceeded. In the pale-grey area,
a reduction of the suction gas overheating or additional cooling may be necessary. In the dark
grey area, compressor operation is only possible with additional cooling.
Additional cooling can consist of:
- additional fan (see page 19, fig. 29)
- water-cooled cylinder cover
For operation with additional cooling, we recommend:
• Use of a heat protection thermostat (accessory).
• Use only thermally highly stable oils (see lubricant table).
Recommendation:
for R 134a, R 404A,
R 407C, R 507: Bock Standard-Öl FUCHS DEA Reniso Triton SE 55
for R 22: Bock Standard-Öl FUCHS DEA Reniso SP 46
• When using capacity regulators, it may be necessary to reduce the suction gas over-
heating temperatures. Individual adjustment is required.
• Continuous operation in the limit zone is not recommended.
• When using frequency converters, please note:
The limits of application can be restricted on reaching the max. permissible current
consumption of the drive motor.
Max. permissible ON/OFF switching frequency of the drive motor: 12 switching cycles/hr.
Ratings for other areas on request
8.0 Installation instructions

8.1 General
• Lift the compressor only at the transport eyelet.
• Lifting gear must be suitable for the compressor width.
• Erection of the compressor horizontally on enclosed
anti-vibration pads, or rigid erection if necessary.
The enclosed anti-vibration pads are specially rated
for HG 7 and marked with a white coloured dot to avoid
confusion (fig. 11).
• Leave adequate clearance for maintenance work.
• Direct installation on water-cooled bundle pipe eva-
porator only with anti-vibration pads. Risk of vibration
breakages from rigid installation.
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
Fig. 11
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 10
8.2 Pipe connections / pipelines

Caution!
Compressor is under overpressure (inert gas). Shut-off valves should remain
closed until evacuation.
The pipe connections are designed in such a way that pipes of all normal metric and inch
dimensions can be used. The solder connections of the shut-off valves should be removed when
soldering the pipes to the shut-off valve.
Note:
For compressors HG 7/2110-4 and HG 7/2110-S, solder connections are mounted to the
suction shut-off valve for pipe diameter 64. Solder connections for pipe diameter 2 5/8
are enclosed with the compressor.
Pipes and machine components should always be clean and dry on the inside, and free of
cinders, metal chips, rust and phosphate coats. Furthermore, the parts including hoses must be
delivered sealed air-tight.
8.3 Shut-off valves
Opening the shut-off valve
a) Spindle 1: open by turning to the left
(counter-clockwise) as far as it will go.
⇒ Shut off valve fully open
(service connection 2 closed
(position A), fig. 12
Fig. 12
Opening the service connection (2)

b) Turn spindle 1: 1/2 - 1 revolution to the right.
⇒ Service connection 2 open/
shut-off valve open (setting B), fig. 13.
Connection 3 is intended for the safety
devices and cannot be locked.
Fig. 13
Note:
Before opening or closing the shut-off valve, loosen the valve spindle seal (fig. 14)
by about 1/4 turn. After operating the shut-off valve, carefully tighten the valve
spindle seal again (fig. 15).
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
Fig. 14 Fig. 15
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 11
9.0 Electrical connection

9.1 General instructions
• The motor is to be connected up electrically according to the main-line circuit diagram
(see inside of the terminal box).
• The local safety regulations are to be observed.
• Dimensioning of the motor contactors, supply lines and fuses is based of the maximum
operating current (see compressor nameplate).
• Voltage and frequency specifications on the nameplate are to be compared with the
specifications of the power mains. The motor may only be connected up when these
specifications coincide.
9.2 Series motor, version for direct of part-winding start

Features:
• Designation on the nameplate: ∆ / YYY
• Designation on the yellow sticker
of the terminal box (fig. 16): Fig. 16
Compressors marked in this way are suitable for direct or part-winding start.
The motor winding is divided into two parts:
• Part-winding 1 = 60 %
• Part-winding 2 = 40 %
This winding division reduces the starting current in part-winding start to approx. 65 %
of the value for direct starting.
Note 1:
A mechanical start unloader with by-pass solenoid is not required.
Note 2:
When testing coils with resistance tester, please note that partial winding 1
and partial winding 2 are wired internally in HG 7.
The motor is wired in

the factory for direct
start (YYY) (fig. 17): bridges
•
•
Fig. 17 •
Terminal box with inserted
bridges for direct start
For part-winding right wrong

start ∆ / YYY, the
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
part-winding 2 = 40 %
bridges are to be re-
moved and the motor
supply connected up
as per wiring diagram:
part-winding 1 = 60 %
Fig. 18 Fig. 19
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 12
Caution!
• Failure to comply with these instructions results in reverse fields of rotation
and causes motor damage.
• After the motor has started up with part-winding 1, part-winding 2 has to be
switched on after maximum 1 second delay.
Failure to comply with these instructions can reduce the service life of the motor.
9.3 Special motor, version for direct or star-delta start
Features:
• Designation on the nameplate: ∆ /Y
• Designation on the yellow sticker of
the terminal box (fig. 20):
Fig. 20
Compressors with this marking are suitable for star delta starting in voltage range ∆.
Note: Star-delta starting requires a mechanical start unloader with bypass solenoid
(accessory). The motor is wired in the factory for direct starting (400V / Y).
9.4 Electronic trigger MP 10

(Description of functions see also leaflet No. 09732 in the terminal box)
The compressor motor and HP side of the compressor are equipped with posistor temperature
sensors (PTC). The temperature sensors are wired to the electronic trigger MP 10 in the terminal
box. In the event of overtemperature in the motor winding or on the hot gas side of the HP stage,
the unit switches the compressor off and the corresponding LEDs H1 or H2 light up.
When the device has triggered, this indicates an overload or intolerable operating
conditions. Ascertain and eliminate the cause.
The device has a reclosure preventing feature. At the end of the fault, the device is quit by
interruppting the mains power with the external alarm reset swtich S1 (see mainline wiring diagram
page 13). The reclosure preventing feature is unlocked and the LEDs H1 or H2 go off again.
9.5 Connection of the electronic trigger MP 10

The electronic connection is to be completed according
to the circuit diagram (fig. 22, page 13). The trigger is to
be protected with a fuse (F) of max. 4 A, slow-acting. R2
R1
To guarantee the protection function, the electronic
Relais
trigger is mounted as first element in the control current AC230 V 50/60 Hz B1 B2
circuit. (R) (R) 43 43 11 12 14 H1 H2 1 2 3 4 5 6 H3
X1 X2
L1 L1
• Connection temperature
monitoring motor winding Terminals 1 - 2
• Connection temperature
monitoring hot gas side HP stage Terminals 3 - 4
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
Caution!
Terminals 1 - 6 on the electronic trigger MP 10
and the terminals PTC 1 and PTC 2 on the com-
pressor terminal board may not come into
contact with mains voltage (fig. 21), as this
would destroy the electronic trigger and PTC
sensors.
4
Fig. 21
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 13
9.6 Main-line circuit diagram for part-winding start

PE
N
! #
" $
L3
L2
L1
Q1
R1 R2
F2
F1.1 F1.2 Relais
B1 B2
S1 X (R) (R) 43 43 11 12 14 H1 H2 X 1 2 3 4 5 6 H3
Power OFF/ON 1 L1 L1 2
division (Reset)
for series
4-7
I> I> I> I> I> I>
I=60% I=40%
P>
K1
>
Duo R2
1 3 5 1 3 5 F3
K1 K2 F1.2
2 4 6 2 4 6
F4
Power division Th.
60 % 40 % T2 L
1U1 2U1 B1
M1
1V1 2V1 N S M
1W1
∆/YYY 2W1 K1T
K1
1 2
Fig. 22 R1 K1 K2 K1T
0,5-1 sec.
Caution!
• Ensure that the power supply comes via K1 to winding 1 (60 %) (1U1 / 1V1 / 1W1)
and the power supply via K2 to winding 2 (40 %) (2U1 / 2V1 / 2W1).
• The motor contactors (K1 / K2) are each to be rated to approx. 70 % of the
max. operating current.
1-2 Connections for the PTC sensor K2 Mains contactor (part-winding 2)
R1 Posistor (PTC sensor) motor winding K1T Delay relay max. 1s
R2 Heat protection thermostat (PTC sensor) A1 Motor protection unit MP 10
F1 2 Motor protective switches Q1 Main switch
(60%:40% of IA total) S1 Switch control voltage
F2 Fuse control current circuit M1 Compressor monitor
F3 Fuse chain (high/low pressure monitoring) F4 Oil differential pressure controller
B1 Enable switch (thermostat)
K1 Mains contactor (part-winding 1)
9.7 Function test MP 10
Before starting up and after any faults or changes to the control current circuit of the machine,
check the electronic trigger to ensure that it functions properly.
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
• Disconnect the machine from the power supply.

• Interrupt the thermistor circuit (winding protection motor) by disconnecting a terminal (1 or 2).
• Switch on the control current circuit.
• Control voltage must be available between terminals 12 and N. LED H1 lights up.
• There may be no voltage between terminals 14 and N.
• Repeat the procedure for the heat protection thermostat by disconnecting terminals 3 or 4.
• Switch on the control current circuit, LED H2 lights up.
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 14
9.8 Oil sump heating

For description, please also refer to DEF-1.39 Oil sump heating
When the compressor is at a standstill, coolant diffuses into the lubricating oil of the compressor
housing, depending on pressure and ambient temperature. This reduces the lubricating capacity
of the oil. When the compressor starts up, the coolant contained in the oil evaporates out through
the reduction in pressure. The consequences can be foaming and migration of the oil, which
causes oil shocks under certain circumstances.
In order to avoid damage to the compressor, HG 7 compressors are equipped with an oil sump
heating as standard feature. The oil sump heating should always be connected up and operated.
Operation:
The oil sump heating operates when the compressor is at a standstill. When the compressor
starts, the oil sump heating is switched off again.
Note:
The oil sump heating must be connected via an auxiliary contact (or parallel wired
auxiliary contact) of the compressor contactor to a separate electric circuit. It may
not be connected to the electric circuit of the safety control chain.
Electric data:
230 V ~ / 140 W
10.0 Initial commissioning

The compressor has undergone trials in the factory and all functions have been tested. There are
therefore no special running-in instructions.
Caution!
In order to protect the compressor against hot permitted operating conditions,
high and low pressure switches are necessary. Accident pevention regulations
must be observed!
10.1 Leak test, evacuation
• Check the cooling system for leaks without including the compressor
(preferably with dried nitrogen N2)
• Then include the compressor in the following evacuation process:
- Release pressure in the compressor.
- Open the suction and discharge shut-off valve.
- Evacuate the suction and high-pressure side with the vacuum pump.
Vacuum < 1.5 mbar while the pump is switched off.
- Repeat procedure several times.
• The refrigerating plant is dry and tight when the pressure increase in the refrigerating
system is < 0.5 mbar / 24 h while the vacuum pump is switched off.
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
Caution!
Do not start the compressor in a vacuum. Do not apply voltage not even for
test purposes (may only run with refrigerant).
In a vacuum the flashover and creeping current distances to the terminal board
connection boards are reduced, this can cause damage to the windings and to
the terminal board.
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 15
10.2 Refrigerant filling

• Check whether the compressor suction and discharge shut-off valves are open.
• With the compressor switched off, fill the liquid coolant into the system (breaking the
vacuum), straight into the condenser or receiver.
• Start operation of the compressor. If the coolant needs topping up after starting the
compressor, it can be topped up in vapour form on the suction side or, taking suitable
precautions, in liquid form at the inlet to the evaporator.
Caution:
• Do not fill liquid coolant into the suction shut-off valve on the compressor.
• Do not mix additives with the oil or coolant.
10.3 Lubricant / oil check Oil level

Immediately after starting, check the oil level of the compressor.
• Oil pressure check by pressure gauge when starting up via
the gauge connection with valve on the oil pump (connection
position see page 21-22): oil differential pressure 1.5 - 5.0 bar
(depending on operating conditions, refrigerant and lubricant).
• On reaching the steady state condition (continuous operating
conditions), check the oil level of the compressor. The oil level
must be visible in the lower part of the sight glass (fig. 23).
• Automatic monitoring by oil differential pressure switch or sensor
functioning of the oil differential pressure / sensor.
When the unit causes the system to close down, proceed Fig. 23
with fault analysis (comply with the instructions on the cover of the switch).
Caution!
If larger quantities of oil have to be topped up, there is a risk of liquid shocks;
the oil return must then be checked.
10.4 Connection oil level controller
In the case of compound connections of several compressors, oil level controllers have proven
very successful. The HG 7 compressor is equipped with 2 oil sight glasses. The sight glass on the
nameplate side is prepared for fitting oil level controllers (fig. 24).
All normal oil level controllers by AC&R, ESK and the electronic control system TRAXOIL by ALCO
can be connected here directly without adapter (fig. 25). A sight glass is not required on the oil level
controller.
124
Connection diagram °
on the compressor
sight glass
4°
124
12
°
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
3 hole connection M6x10

pattern for ESK, AC&R ,6
47 3 each
3 hole connection 4°
12
pattern for TRAXOIL
Fig. 24
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 16
For further instructions referring to compound

connection, please refer to the brochure
Possibilities for compound connections with
Bock compressors, DEF-1.154
HG 7 with mechanical oil level

controller,without sight glass,
fig. 25.
10.5 Liquid shocks

Liquid shocks can cause damage to the compressor
and leakage of coolant.
To avoid liquid shocks, the following points should be carefully observed:

• The whole plant must be properly designed.
• All components must be rated to be compatible with each other with regard
to output (particularly evaporator and expansion valve).
• Suction gas overheating at the evaporator outlet should be min. 7 - 10 K
(check setting of the expansion valve).
• The machine must be at equilibrium, not in cycle mode.
• Particularly in the case of critical plant (e.g. with several evaporator points), suitable
measures are recommended, for example liquid traps, solenoid valve in the liquid pipe, etc.
11.0 Maintenance
11.1 Safety instructions
Before any work is carried out on the compressor:
• Switch the machine off and secure it to prevent it being switched on again.
• Relieve the system pressure in the machine.
After maintenance work has been completed:
• Connect up the safety switch and check functions.
• Evacuate the compressor.
• Remove the switching-on safeguard.
11.2 Service intervals
In order to guarantee optimum operating safety and service life of the compressor, we
recommend carrying out the following service tasks at regular intervals:
• Oil change: for the first time after approx. 100 - 200 operating hours, then once
every twelve months. Always clean the oil suction filter when changing the oil.
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
Used oil must be disposed of properly, in line with national regulations.

• Function checks: once every twelve months: compressor leaks, running noises,
pressures, temperatures, functioning of the additional equipment, e.g. capacity regulation,
oil sump heating, pressure switches etc.
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 17
11.3 Recommended spare parts

The following table gives an overview of the most important spare parts:
HG 7/1620-4 HG 7/1860-4 HG 7/2110-4
Compressor type
HG 7/1620-4S HG 7/1860-4S HG 7/2110-4S
Designation Art. No. Art. No. Art. No.
Seal kit 80094 80094 80094
Valve plate kit 08498 08498 08498
Oil pump kit 80116 80116 80116
Oil sump heating 230 V ~ 08426 08426 08426
Solenoid valve kit including magnetic
coil for start unloader and capacity 08821 08821 08821
regulation 230 V ~ / 50 ... 60 Hz
Use only original Bock spare parts.
11.4 Extract from the lubricant table

Bock standard oil grade Recommended alternatives
For H-CFCs, e.g. R 22
FUCHS DEA MOBIL SHC 425 SUNOIL Suniso 4GS
Reniso SP46 SHELL Clavus SD 22-12 TEXACO Capella WF 46
SUNOIL Suniso 3GS
For fluorocarbons, e.g. R 134a, R 404A, R 407C
FUCHS DEA FUCHS DEA SEZ 32 MOBIL Arctic EAL 46
Reniso Triton SE55 ICI Emkarate RL 46 S SHELL Clavus R 46
Caution!
The oils and refrigerating conditions should be checked for suitability according
to the operating conditions.
12.0 Accessoires
12.1 Start unloader
(Not necessary for part-winding start, see page 11,
item 9.2). (Retrofit kit, article number 08981)
For description please also refer to DEF - 1.11
Startunloader.
When installed in the factory, the start unloader is inte-
grated in a cylinder cover specially designed for this
purpose (fig. 26). In the case of the retrofit kit, the start
unloader is supplied including cylinder cover and heat
protection thermostat. It is required for Y/∆ starting (special
version motor). With start unloader, a non-return valve is
required in the pressure pipe. Non-return valve rated
Abb. 26
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
according to operating conditions.
Caution!
• The start unloader may only operate during the start-up phase
(risk of overheating from bypass operation).
• Electrical activation of the solenoid: switched idle.
• Cylinder covers for start unloader are marked SU (start unloader).
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 18
12.2 Capacity regulatioin

(Retrofit kit article number 08821) LR 1
For description please also refer to
DEF-1.10 Capacity regulation
The compressor capacity can be adjusted to the
current refrigerating requirements by means of
capacity regulation.
The HG 7 compressors are equipped with
connection possibilities for maximum 2 capacity
regulators as a standard feature (fig. 27). Each
regulator affects one bank of cylinders, resulting in
capacity reduction of 33% respectively 66%.
LR 2
• In the retrofit solution, the screw plugs M45 x 1.5
are to be replaced by capacity regulation valves.
Fig. 27
Caution!
• When operating with capacity regulation, the gas speeds and pressure conditions
in the refrigerating plant change: suction line routing and dimensions should be
adjusted accordingly, the regulation intervals should not be too short (the refri-
gerating plant must be in equilibrium, continuous operation in the regulation
phase is not recommended uneconomical).
• Electrical activation of the solenoid: switched idle (corresponds to 100 %
compressor capacity)
• Cylinder covers for capacity regulation are marked CR (capacity regulator).
12.3 Capacity regulation using frequency converters

The capacity of the compressor can be regulated by adjusting the speed with suitable
frequency converters. The following important criteria must be observed here:
• Regulation range of the compressor 25 - 60 Hz (720 - 1800 rpm).
• Max. tol. current consumption may not be exceeded
The application limit can therefore be restricted at max. speed.
• Max. discharge end temperature +140 °C and max. tol. ambient temperature +50 °C.
• Use heat protection thermostat and oil pressure safety switch.
• Do not use any additional capacity regulators.
• Provide a sine filter at the frequency converter output, max. voltage 500 V.
Note:
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
The system compressor/frequency converter makes certain requirements of the

electronic capacity components. For optimum efficiency, please consult the
manufacturer with regard to the operating conditions of the compressor and
frequency conformer.
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 19
12.4 Oil pressure safety switch

(retrofit kit article number 08920)
When installed in the factory, the switch is mounted directly in the compressor and equipped with
corresponding pipes. The electrical connection should be made according to the enclosed
description. When retrofitting, the switch is supplied together with the required attachment console
and connection hoses. (Connection position see page 21-22). When using oil differential pressure
sensors (e.g. make Kriwan), the oil pump cover is equipped with a possibility for screwing these in
position (see page 21-22).
Caution!
Check the functions when starting up the compressor.
12.5 Heat protection thermostat

A possibility for screwing in the sensor element is provided
on the hot gas side of the compressor housing (connection
position see page 21 - 22). The measuring lead is to be wired
in series with the motor PTC. In compressors with start un-
loader, the sensor is already installed and connected in the
factory (fig. 28).
Fig. 28
Heat protection
thermostat
12.6 Additional fan, series HG
When the HG 7 compressor is operating in the deep-freeze
temperature range (R22), the range of application can be ex-
panded by additional cooling of the cylinder heads (see application
limits page 6, fig. 4 - 5). The kit is supplied complete with all
fastening parts needed to mount the fan to the cylinder covers.
Electrical data:
230 / 400 V - 3 - 50 Hz / 120 W / 0.5/0.29 A and
230 / 400 V - 3 - 60 Hz / 180 W / 0.55/0.32 A
Extended outer dimensions see fig. 29
Fig. 29
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 20
13.0 Connections, Dimensions and specifications
SV
DV
A3
CR
90 472 439
150 612
ca. 830
Fig. 30
HG 7/1620-4 HG 7/1860-4 HG 7/2110-4

Connections Dim.
HG 7/1620-4S HG 7/1860-4S HG 7/2110-4S
SV Suction shut-off valve, pipe ø (*L) mm 54 64
SV Suction shut-off valve, pipe ø (*L) inch 2 1/8" 2 5/8"
DV Discharge shut-off valve, pipe ø (*L) mml 42
DV Discharge shut-off valve, pipe ø (*L) inch 1 5/8"
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
A Suction side connection, cannot be shut off inch 1/4" NPTF

A1 Suction side connection, can be shut-off inch 7/16" UNF
A2 Suction side connection inch 1/8" NPTF
A3 Suction side connection inch 1/4" NPTF
B Pressure side connection, cannot be shut off inch 7/16" UNF
B1 Pressure side connection, can be shut off inch 1/4" NPTF
B2 Pressure side connection inch 1/8" NPTF
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 21
ca. 510
L A1 A L1
B1 B
C
N
P
A2
ca. 500
A2
H
331
E
D1
D
189
K/O
K
J F
ø11 (4x)
290
340
Erection with
anti-vibration pads
30
(enclosed)
25
25
50 Dimensions in mm
HG 7/1620-4 HG 7/1860-4 HG 7/2110-4

Connections Dim.
HG 7/1620-4S HG 7/1860-4S HG 7/2110-4S
C Oil pressure safety switch connection OIL inch 7/16" UNF
D Oil pressure safety switch connection LP inch 7/16" UNF
D1 Connection for oil return from separator inch 1/4" NPTF
E Oil pressure gauge connection (Schrader) inch 7/16" UNF
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
F Oil drain bung (oil filter) mm M 22 x 1.5

H Oil filling bung mm M 22 x 1.5
J Oil sump heating mm M 22 x 1.5
K Sight glass both sides - ---
L Connection heat protection thermostat mm M6
N Connection capacity regulator mm M45 x 1.5
O Connection oil level controller mm 3 x M6
P Con. oil diff. pressure sens. make Kriwan, DELTA-P inch 3/4" UNF
*) L = soldering connection
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 22
Specifications Dim. HG 7/1620-4 HG 7/1860-4 HG 7/2110-4

No. of cylinders 6
Rated speed 50 Hz rpm 1450
Theoretical flow rate 50 Hz m3/h 140.7 161.4 183.6
Lubrication
Forced circulation lubrication oil pump, independent of direction of rotation
Oil grade for R 22 FUCHS DEA Reniso SP46
Oil grade for R 134a, R 404A, R 407C, R 507 FUCHS DEA Reniso Triton SE 55
Oil filling litres 5.0
Weights
Weights including oil filling kg 277 297 290
Electrical data
Voltage / phases / frequency V/Ph/Hz 380 - 420 ∆ / YYY / 3 / 50 / 440 - 480 ∆ / YYY / 3 / 60
Max. operating current A 76 80 96
Start up current (rotor blocked) PW-/direct start A 227 / 340 268 / 373 343 / 494
Max. permissible operating overpressure
Pressure side HD bar 25
Pressure side ND bar 19
Specifications Dim. HG 7/1620-4S HG 7/1860-4S HG 7/2110-4S

No. of cylinders 6
Lubrication
Forced circulation lubrication oil pump, independent of direction of rotation
Oil grade for R 22 FUCHS DEA Reniso SP46
Oil grade for R 134a, R 404A, R 407C, R 507 FUCHS DEA Reniso Triton SE 55
Oil filling litres 5,0
Weights
Weights including oil filling kg 293 292 299
Electrical data
Voltage / phases / frequency V/Ph/Hz 380 - 420 ∆ / YYY / 3 / 50 bzw. 440 - 480 ∆ / YYY / 3 / 60
Max. operating current A 80 98 115
Start up current (rotor blocked) PW-/direct start A 268 / 373 356 / 494 344 / 500
Max. permissible operating overpressure
Pressure side HD bar 25
Pressure side ND bar 19
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 23
14.0 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY CE 96

(as per EU low voltage directive 73/23/EEC, in the version 93/68/EEC)
We herewith declare that the hermetic refrigerating compressors
HG7 / 1620-4 HGX7 / 1620-4

HG7 / 1860-4 HGX7 / 1860-4
HG7 / 2110-4 HGX7 / 2110-4
HG7 / 1620-4S HGX7 / 1620-4S
HG7 / 1860-4S HGX7 / 1860-4S
HG7 / 2110-4S HGX7 / 2110-4S
conforms with the low voltage directive 73/23/EEC, in the version 93/68/EEC
Applied harmonised standards
EN 60335-2-34
(HD 277 S1)
The manufacturers installation declaration on the next page must be taken into account
during the installation of our product.

Benzstraße 7 Wolfgang Etter
D-72636 Frickenhausen (Managing Director)
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
HG 7 Art. No. 09706
Page 24
15.0 Manufacturers Declaration

(referring to EC Machine Directive 98/37/EG, Annex II B)
We herewith declare that the hermetic refrigerating compressors
HG7 / 1620-4 HGX7 / 1620-4

HG7 / 1860-4 HGX7 / 1860-4
HG7 / 2110-4 HGX7 / 2110-4
HG7 / 1620-4S HGX7 / 1620-4S
HG7 / 1860-4S HGX7 / 1860-4S
HG7 / 2110-4S HGX7 / 2110-4S
are intended in the version supplied by us for installation in a machine covered by

Machine Directive 98/37/EG.
Applied harmonised standards
EN 292-1 EN 349 EN 60529-1

EN 292-2 EN 60204-1
However, operations with our products may not be commenced before the machine in which they
have been installed has been tested and found to comply with all pertinent statutory regulations
and legislation.

Benzstraße 7 Wolfgang Etter
D-72636 Frickenhausen (Managing director)
09706 - 02.02 - DGBF
POS QTY DESCRIPTION H&H PART NO.
01.1 2 Compressor HH01661600
01.2 2 Marine execution HH02061735
02 2 Crankcase heater HH01660010
03 4 Capacity regulator P990002012
04 2 Unload start HH02061317
05 2 Oil pressure gauge HH00726250
06 2 Oil pressure pressostat HH00579410
07 2 Low pressure gauge HH00726250
08 6 Low pressure pressostat HH00577900
09 2 High pressure gauge HH00726230
10 2 High pressure pressostat HH00578180
11 2 Muffler HH00723950
12 2 Oil seperator HH01720680
13 2 B all valve HH00685620
14 2 Sightglass HH00550160
15 2 Non return valve HH02063490
16 2 Condensor HH01709360
17 2 Safety relieve valve HH01936550
18.1 2 Filter-drier HH00722740
18.2 6 Filter block HH00722870
19 2 Drain- / charge valve HH00720830
22 1 Liquid seperator HH00723840
23 1 Frame Steel
24 4 Vibration damper HH02060341
25 1 Anaconda liquid line HH01935770
26 1 Anaconda suction line HH01935800
27.1 1 Solenoid valve HH00564040
27.2 1 Coil for solenoid valve HH00554100
28.1 1 Thermostatic element HH02021410
28.2 1 Orifice HH02021840
28.3 1 Valve body HH02021630
29 1 Air handling unit 2x 142 kW
30 1 Thermostat HH00552760
31 4 B ellow HH01303200
35.1 2 Pipe coupling 5/8" Nr. 4182900028
35.2 2 Teflon gasket Nr. 4119002000
35.3 2 Pipe coupling 1 1/8" Nr. 4182900024
35.5 2 3/4" adapter Nr. 4151011900
35.6 2 28mm adapter Nr. 4151022800
POS QTY DESCRIPTION H&H PART NO.
01.1 2 Compressor HH01661450
01.2 2 Marine execution HH02061735
02 2 Crankcase heater HH01660010
03 2 Oil pressure gauge HH00726250
04 2 Oil pressure pressostat HH00579410
05 2 Low pressure gauge HH00726250
06 4 Low pressure control HH00577900
07 2 High pressure gauge HH00726230
08 2 High pressure control HH00578180
09 2 Muffler HH00723930
10 2 Oil seperator HH01720790
14 2 Condensor HH01290090
15 2 Safety relieve valve HH01936550
16.1 2 Filter-drier HH00722660
16.2 2 Filter block HH00722870
17 4 Drain- / charge valve HH00720830
20 1 Liquid seperator HH00723830
21 1 Frame Steel
22 4 Vibration damper HH02060341
23 1 Anaconda HH01935750
24 1 Anaconda HH01935790
26.1 1 Thermostatic element HH02021370
26.2 1 Orifice HH02021800
26.3 1 Valve body HH02021640
27 1 Air handling unit 63 kW
28 1 Thermostat HH00552760
29 4 B ellow HH01303200
33.1 2 Pipe coupling 5/8" Nr. 4182900028
33.3 2 Pipe coupling 1 1/8" Nr. 4182900024
33.5 2 3/4" adapter Nr. 4151011900
33.6 2 28mm adapter Nr. 4151022800
34 2 Heatexchanger ACH-30EQ-40H
37.1 2 Expansion valve HH00593340
37.2 2 Orifice HH00592090
38 2 Capacity regulator P990002012
Wassergekühlte Water-cooled Condenseurs
Verflüssiger Condensers à eau
Enthitzer Desuperheaters Désurchauffeurs
DP-200-2
Wassergekühlte Water-cooled Shell and Condenseurs à eau multitubulaires à
Bündelrohr-Verflüssiger Tube Condensers and calandre et désurchauffeurs de gaz
und Druckgas-Enthitzer Discharge Gas Desuperheaters sous pression
Die sicherheitstechnische Design safety L’exécution la plus sûre

Ausführung complies with AD codes of practice, est conforme aux normes AD., au TRB,
entspricht den AD-Merkblättern, dem TRB, DIN regulations 8975 and Pressure aux prescriptions DIN 8975 et à la régle-
TRB, den DIN-Vorschriften 8975 und Vessel Ordinance BGBL. I. mentation concernant le réservoirs sous
der Druckbehälterverordnung BGBL. I. pression BGBL. I.
Konstruktionsmerkmale: Design features: Caractéristiques de construction:

❏ Wärmetauscherrohre: aus Cu bzw. Cu- ❏ Heat-exchanger pipes: made of Cu or ❏ Tubes de l’échangeur: en Cu resp. Cu-
Ni (seewasserbeständige Ausführung) Cu-Ni (seawater-resistant design) with Ni (version marin), avec une nouvelle
mit neu entwickelter Rohrgeometrie newly developed pipe geometry and géométrie des tubes et un profil „low
und „Low Fouling“-Profil auf der Was- low-fouling profile on the water side. fouling“ côté eau.
serseite. ❏ Heat-exchanger pipes are soldered ❏ Les tubes de l’échangeur sont brasés
❏ Wärmetauscherrohre sind in Loch- into orifice plates, thus enshuring high dans des plaques tubulaires, d’où une
scheiben eingelötet, dadurch hohe safety with respect to leaks sécurité accrue du point de vue étan-
Sicherheit in Bezug auf Dichtheit. ❏ Shell and orifice plates are made of chéité.
❏ Mantelrohr und Lochscheiben aus Kes- boiler plate P 265 GH ❏ Bâches tubulaires et plaques tubulaires
selblech P 265 GH ❏ End cover: en tôle pour chaudière P 265 GH
❏ Umlenkdeckel: – detachable, permits mechanical ❏ Couvercle à l’eau:
– abnehmbar, ermöglicht mechanische cleaning of the pipes – démontable, ce qui permet le net-
Reinigung der Rohre – connecting and baffle side are toyage mécanique des tubes
– Anschluß- und Umlenkseite ver- interchangeable – côté raccords et côté déflecteur
tauschbar – drain plugs from K 573 H(B) interchangeables
– Entleerungsstopfen ab K 573 H(B) – additional venting plugs from – bouchon de vidange à partir de
– zusätzlich Entlüftungsstopfen ab K 3803 T(B) K 573 H(B)
K 3803 T(B) ❏ Orifice plates are plastic-coated – bouchons pour le dégazage en sup-
❏ Lochscheiben kunststoffbeschichtet ❏ Water connections: pipe thread or plément à partir de K 3803 T(B)
❏ Wasseranschlüsse: Rohrgewinde bzw. flange ❏ Plaques tubulaires revêtues d’une rési-
Flansch ❏ Sight glass as standard ne synthétique
❏ Schauglas serienmäßig ❏ Securing brackets ❏ Raccordement de la conduite d’eau:
❏ Befestigungswinkel – Bottom: receiver with code letter „N“ par filetage ou par bride
– unten: Behälter mit Kennbuchstaben „N“ – Bottom and top: receiver with code ❏ Voyant en exécution standard
– unten und oben: Behälter mit Kenn- letter „H“ (for fitting single compres- ❏ Equerres de fixation
buchstaben „H“ (für Montage von sors) and „T“ (for single and tandem – en bas: réservoirs avec indice „N“
Einzelverdichtern) und „T“ (für Einzel- compressors) – en bas et en haut: réservoirs avec
und Tandemverdichter) ❏ Refrigerant connections indice „H“ (pour montage des com-
❏ Kältemittelauschlüsse – Discharge gas: Rotalock adapter/ presseurs uniques ) et „T“ (pour com-
– Druckgas: Rotalock-Adapter/Lötbuchse solder bushing with flange from presseurs uniques ou en tandem)
mit Flansch ab K 1053 H(B) K 1053 H(B) ❏ Raccords de fluide frigorigène
– Flüssigkeit: Absperrventil – liquid: shut-off valve – gaz de refoulement: raccord Rotalock
– zweiter Flüssigkeitsanschluß ab – second liquid outlet connection from manchon à brasser avec bride à par-
Typ K 123 HB Type K 123 HB tir de K 1053 H(B)
❏ K 033 N(B) bis K 123 H(B) Sicherheits- ❏ K 033 N(B) to K 123 H(B) safety valve – liquide: vanne d’arrêt
ventil-Anschluß 3/8” - 18 NPTF connection 3/8” - 18 NPTF – Second raccord liquide à partir du
❏ ab K 203 H Rotalock-Anschluß für ❏ From K 203 H safety valve connection type K 123 HB
Sicherheitsventil 1 1/4”- 12 UNF with Rotalock 1 1/4” - 12 UNF ❏ De K 033 N(B) à K 123 H(B), raccord
❏ TÜV- bzw. Baumusterabnahme ent- ❏ TÜV or type approval in accordance pour soupape de sûreté en 3/8” - 18 NPTF
sprechend Druckbehälterverordnung with Pressure Vessel Ordinance from ❏ À partir de K 203 H(B), raccord
ab Typ K 203 H(B) Type K 203 H(B) Rotalock pour soupape de sûreté en 1
❏ geeignet für (H)FCKW / HFKW-Kälte- ❏ Suitable for (H)CFC/ HFC refrigerants 1/4” - 12 UNF
mittel (Kältemittel mit einem Tempera- (refrigerants with a temperature glide ❏ À partir de K 203 H, avec réception
turgleit > 2 K auf Anfrage) > 2 K on request) TÜV resp. avec épreuve de modèle
❏ Betriebsüberdruck / Betriebstemperatur ❏ Operating pressure / Operating tem- type conformément à la réglementation
– Kältemittelseite: max. 28 bar / -10°C perature concernant le réservoirs sous pression
bis 120°C – refrigerant side: max. 28 bar / -10°C ❏ Adaptés pour fluides frigorigènes
– Wasserseite: max 10 bar / -10°C (mit to 120°C (H)CFC / HFC (sur demande, pour les
Frostschutzmittel) bis 95°C – water side: max. 10 bar / -10°C (with fluides frigorigènes avec un glissement
❏ Schutzgasfüllung anti-freeze agent) to 95°C de température supérieur à 2 K)
❏ Holding charge ❏ Surpression de service / température
de service
– côté fluide frigorigène: max. 28 bar /
de -10°C à +120°C
– côté eau: max. 10 bar / de -10°C
(avec produit antigel) à +95°C
❏ Charge de gaz de protection
2
Sonderausführung: Special versions: Exécution spéciale:
❏ Seewasserbeständige Ausführung: ❏ Seawater-resistant design: ❏ Exécution résistante à l’eau de mer:
– Cu-Ni-Rohr, Wasserumlenkdeckel – Cu-Ni pipe, plastic coated end – Tube Cu-Ni, couvercle à l’eau revê-
kunststoffbeschichtet covers tu d’une résine synthétique
❏ Wasserumlenkdeckel kunststoffbe- ❏ Plastic coated end cover for the ❏ Couvercle à l’eau revêtu d’une résine
schichtet für Standardausführung standard version with Cu pipes synthétique pour exécution standard
mit Cu-Rohren ❏ Fixing rails (e.g. for compressor avec tubes Cu
❏ Befestigungsschienen mounting) ❏ Rails de fixation (par ex. pour suppor-
(z.B. für Verdichteraufbau) ❏ Adapter for safety valve connection ter un compresseur)
❏ Adapter für Sicherheitsventilanschluß from K 203 H(B) ❏ Adaptateur pour raccordement de la
ab K 203 H(B) ❏ Threaded flange or weld neck flange soupape de sûreté, à partir de K 203 H(B)
❏ Gewinde- bzw. Vorschweißflansche ❏ Refrigerant intake and outlet ❏ Brides à visser resp. à souder à
❏ Kältemittel- Ein- und Austritt mit ver- with various adapter and valve collerette
schiedenen Adapter- und Ventilkom- combinations ❏ Raccords entrée et sortie fluide frig-
binationen ❏ Approval in accordance with foreign origène avec différentes combi-
❏ Abnahme entsprechend ausländi- regulations and various approval bod- naisons d’adaptateurs et de vannes
scher Vorschriften und diversen ies (e.g. Bureau Veritas, German d’isolement
Abnahmegesellschaften (z.B. Bureau Lloyd, Lloyd’s Register of Shipping) ❏ Réception conformément aux régle-
Veritas, Germanischer Lloyd, Lloyd’s mentations étrangères et de diverses
Register of Shipping) sociétés habilitées (par ex. Bureau
Veritas, Germanischer Lloyd, Lloyd’s
Register of Shipping)
Lieferumfang / Zubehör Extent of delivery / accessories Compris dans la livraison /

❏ Lieferumfang und Zubehör siehe ❏ See Price List for standard equipment accessoires
Preisliste and accessories ❏ Compris dans la livraison et
❏ 4Pass-Ausführung entspricht ❏ 4pass design corresponds to accessoires, voir Tarif
Standard-Version standard version ❏ L’exécution 4passes correspond à
standard
Leistungsangaben Performance data Données de puissance

Die angegebenen Verflüssigerleistungen The published condenser performances Les puissances „condenseur“ indiquées
basieren auf Meßwerten bei einer are based on measured values with a reposent sur des mesures effectuées
Druckgastemperatur von 90°C und discharge gas temperature of 90°C and avec un température de gaz au refoule-
einem wasserseitigen Verschmutzungs- a fouling factor on the water side of ment de 90°C et un facteur d’encrasse-
faktor r=0,4x10-4 m2 K/W. r=0,4x10-4 m2 K/W. ment côté eau r=0,4x10-4 m2 K/W.
Erläuterung der Typenbezeichnung Explanation of model designation Explication de la désignation des types
Beispiel Example Exemple
K 1053 H B – 4 K 1053 H B – 4 K 1053 H B – 4
K = Verflüssiger K = Condenser K = Condenseur
K 1053 H B – 4 K 1053 H B – 4 K 1053 H B – 4
Kennziffer Index Ciffre-reprère
K 1053 H B – 4 K 1053 H B – 4 K 1053 H B – 4
Befestigungswinkel Angle Bracket Cornière de fixation
N = unten N = below N = en bas
H = unten und oben für Einzelverdichter- H = below and above for single com- H = en bas et en haut pour le montage
Aufbau (Halbhermetik) pressor assembly (semi-hermetic) du compresseur individuel (semi-
T = unten und oben für Einzel- und TD- T = below and above for assembly of hermétique)
Verdichter-Aufbau single and tandem compressor T = en bas et en haut pour le montage
du compresseur individuel et tandem
K 1053 H B – 4 K 1053 H B – 4 K 1053 H B – 4
Seewasserbeständige Ausführung Sea-water resistant design Type résistant à l'eau de mer
K 1053 H B – 4 K 1053 H B – 4 K 1053 H B – 4
Anzahl der Wasserdurchgänge (Pässe) No. of water passes Nombre de passages d'eau
3
Verflüssigerauslegung Condenser selection Dimensionnement du condenseur
Berechnung der Verflüssiger- Calculation of the condenser Calcul de la puissance de liquéfac-

leistung Q capacity Q tion Q
Zur Verflüssigerauswahl ist es zunächst For condenser selection, it is first neces- Le choix du condenseur est à faire avant
erforderlich, die Verflüssigungsleistung Q sary to determine the condenser capacity de déterminer la puissance de liquéfac-
zu ermitteln. Die am Verflüssiger abzu- Q. The power to be dissipated at the tion Q. La puissance, qui ets à évacuer
führende Leistung kann auf zwei unter- condenser can be calculated in two diffe- par le condenseur peut être déterminée
schiedliche Arten berechnet werden: rent ways: de 2 manières différentes:
Verflüssigerleistung als Summe Condenser duty as a sum of refrige- Puissance de liquéfaction considérée
von Kälteleistung und Leistungsauf- rating capacity and power consump- comme étant la somme de la puis-
nahme tion sance frigorifique et de la puissance
A A A
Bei diesen Verfahren werden Kältelei- With this method, the refrigerating capa- absorbée
stung und Leistungsaufnahme des Ver- city and power consumption of the com- Dans ce procédé la puissance frigorifique
dichters (bzw. der Verdichter bei Ver- pressor (or compressors in the case of et la puissance absorbée par le compres-
bundanlagen) addiert. Die Leistungsdaten parallel systems) are added. Refer to the seur (respectivement les compresseur en
können den Verdichter-Prospekten oder compressor leaflets or software for the installations parallèles) sont additionnées.
der Software entnommen werden. performance data. Les données de puissance sont disponi-
bles dans les prospectus des compres-
seurs ou dans le logiciel de selection.
Überschlägige Berechnung mittels Approximate calculation by means of Détermination approximative basée

Faktoren factors sur des graphiques
B B B
Für übliche Auslegungen kann auch eine A simplified method can also be used in Pour un dimensionnement usuel une
vereinfachte Methode angewendet wer- normal cases. For this purpose, the refri- méthode de calcul approximative peut
den. Zur Ermittlung der Verflüssigungslei- gerating capacity of the compressor is être utilisée. Pour cela on part de la puis-
stung wird dazu die Kälteleistung des multiplied by the factor from the graph sance frigorifique du compresseur que
Verdichters mit dem Faktor aus nachste- below in order to calculate the condenser l'on multiple par le coefficient relevé sur le
hendem Diagramm multipliziert. capacity. diagramme ci-après, pour obtenir la puis-
sance de liquefaction.
Halbhermetische Verdichter Offene Verdichter

Semi-hermetic compressors Open Compressors
Compresseurs semi-hermétiques Compresseurs ouverts
2,2 1,8
1,7
Faktor/Factor/Coefficient f
Faktor/Factor/Coefficient f
2,0
tc = 50°C 1,6 tc = 50°C
1,8
1,5
tc = 40°C tc = 40°C
1,6 1,4
1,3
1,4
1,2
1,2 tc = 30°C tc = 30°C
1,1
1,0 1,0
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20
Verdampfung/Evaporation to [°C] Verdampfung/Evaporation to [°C]
Besonderer Hinweise Special notes Remarques

❏ Insbesondere bei Tiefkühlanlagen ist ❏ The condenser must be designed so ❏ En particulier pour les installations de
der Verflüssiger so auszulegen, daß that there is sufficient capacity reserve congélation, le condenseur est à
auch für Abkühlvorgänge bzw. nach for pull down conditions or after dimensionner de manière à conserver
Abtauperioden genügend Leistungsre- defrosting periods (check calculation une réserve de puissance suffisante
serve vorhanden ist (Kontrollrechnung required at maximum evaporation tem- pour la phase de congélation ou pour
bei höchster Verdampfungstemperatur perature). celle suivant une période de décon-
erfoderlich). gélation. Il y a alors lieu d’effectuer un
calcul de contrôle à la température
d’evaporation la plus élevée.
Verflüssigerauswahl Condenser selection Choix du condenseur

Der passende Verflüssigertyp kann nach The suitable condenser type can be Le type de condenseur adapté au problè-
folgenden Methoden ausgewählt werden: selected in accordance with the following me à résoudre peur être déterminé à
❏ Leistungstabelle – Nennleistung bei methods l’aide de la méthode suivante
∆te 15 K und 10 K – (Seite 5) ❏ Performance table – rated capacity at ❏ Tableau de puissance: puissance
❏ BITZER-Software – für variable ∆te 15 K and 10 K – (page 5) nominale pour ∆te 15 K et 10 K – (page 5)
Betriebsbedingungen – auf Anforde- ❏ BITZER software – for variable operat- ❏ Logiciel de selection BITZER – pour
rung oder zum Download ing conditions – on request or for conditions de fonctionnement variables
(http://www.bitzer.de) download (http://www.bitzer.de) – sur demande ou par download
(http://www.Bitzer.de)
4
Verflüssigerleistung Condenser capacity Puissance du condenseur
Wassermenge Water flow Débit d'eau
Druckabfall Pressure drop Perte de charge
2 Pass 4 Pass
Typ Leistung Leistung max. Wassermenge Druckabfall Leistung Leistung max. Wassermenge Druckabfall
∆te 15 K ∆te 10 K ∆te 15 K ∆te 10 K
Type Capacity Capacity max. Water flow Pressure drop Capacity Capacity max. Water flow Pressure drop
∆te 15 K ∆te 10 K ∆te 15 K ∆te 10 K
Type Puissance Puissance Débit d'eau max. Perte de charge Puissance Puissance Débit d'eau max. Perte de charge
∆te 15 K ∆te 10 K ∆te 15 K ∆te 10 K
kW kW l/s m3/h bar kW kW l/s m3/h bar
Standardausführung Standard design Version standard

K 033 N 8000 5330 0,38 1,37 0,11 6900 4600 0,19 0,68 0,22
K 073 H 15300 10200 0,76 2,74 0,11 13200 8800 0,38 1,37 0,22
K 123 H 21400 14270 0,76 2,74 0,15 17200 11500 0,38 1,37 0,28
K 203 H 36100 24100 1,78 6,41 0,33 30800 20500 0,89 3,20 0,64
K 283 H 51100 34100 2,38 8,56 0,33 43600 29100 1,19 4,28 0,64
K 373 H 77700 51800 2,98 10,71 0,40 63500 42300 1,49 5,35 0,78
K 573 H 124800 83200 5,09 18,32 0,30 100200 66800 2,31 8,33 0,59
K 813 H 157100 104700 6,48 23,32 0,30 131100 87400 3,24 11,66 0,58
K 1053 H 204600 136400 6,48 23,32 0,38 161300 107500 3,24 11,66 0,74
K 1353 T 262200 174800 8,33 30,00 0,38 206900 138000 4,17 15,00 0,74
K 1973 T 377400 251600 12,03 43,32 0,38 298300 198900 6,02 21,66 0,74
K 2923 T 540800 360500 17,56 63,22 0,38 426800 284500 8,78 31,61 0,74
K 3803 T 713400 475600 23,17 83,40 0,38 562900 375300 11,58 41,70 0,74
K 4803 T 913200 608800 29,64 106,70 0,39 720500 480300 14,83 53,40 0,75
Seewasserbeständige Ausführung Seawater-resistant design Version marine

K 033 NB 6600 4450 0,38 1,38 0,10 5700 3900 0,19 0,69 0,22
K 073 HB 13200 8900 0,76 2,75 0,11 11500 7700 0,38 1,38 0,22
K 123 HB 18600 12300 0,76 2,75 0,14 15000 10000 0,38 1,37 0,28
K 203 HB 31400 21100 1,78 6,42 0,32 27100 18200 0,89 3,21 0,64
K 283 HB 44700 29700 2,38 8,56 0,32 37900 25500 1,89 4,28 0,64
K 373 HB 67100 45600 2,97 10,71 0,39 55000 37300 1,49 5,35 0,78
K 573 HB 107300 71550 5,09 18,32 0,30 86200 57500 2,31 8,33 0,59
K 813 HB 130700 87700 6,48 23,34 0,29 110100 74000 3,24 11,66 0,58
K 1053 HB 176000 117000 6,48 23,34 0,37 136800 91200 3,24 11,66 0,74
K 1353 TB 221000 150000 8,33 30,00 0,37 175500 117900 4,17 15,00 0,74
K 1973 TB 321700 215000 12,04 43,33 0,37 255000 170300 6,02 21,66 0,74
K 2923 TB 452400 304500 17,56 63,22 0,37 361000 241000 8,78 31,61 0,74
K 3803 TB 596000 402000 23,17 83,40 0,37 484000 322700 11,58 41,70 0,74
K 4803 TB 780000 524000 29,67 106,80 0,37 621000 416400 14,83 53,40 0,75
Vorläufige Daten – Tentative data – Données provisoires -

gelten für Kältemittel R134a, R404A, R507 valid for refrigerants R134a, R404A, R507 and R22. valables pour les fluides frigorigènes R134a, R404A,
und R22. Discharge gas temperature 90°C, fouling factor R507 et R22.
Druckgastemperatur 90°C und Verschmutzungs- r = 0,4 x 10-4 m2 K/W Température de gaz au refoulement +90°C et facteur
faktor r = 0,4 x 10-4 m2 K/W d’encrassement r = 0,4 x 10-4 m2 K/W
5
Maßzeichnungen Dimensioned drawings Croquis cotés
B
K 033 N
K 073 H T U F
50°
Z
K 123 H FL E MA DL
SV
C
E1
øD
L
S
6
ø9
Y
R1 R G
X I H B1
A1 V
A W
K 203 H
K 283 H
K 373 H B
T U DL F
K 573 H FL E Z 60
MA SV °
K 813 H
K 1053 H
OUT
E1
C
øD
4 Pass
L
IN
S
7
Y
ø18 R1 R ø9 G
I H B1
X A1 V
A W
K 1353 T
K 1973 T
K 2923 T B
K 3803 T T U1 U U2 DL F SV 45°
42 27,5 27,5 42 Z
K 4803 T
C1
4 Pass
L
øD
R
C
S
8
Y
E1
E R1 ø13 FL G MA
X I H ø18 B1
A1 V
A W
6
Abmessungen Dimensions Dimensions
Typ Abmessungen in mm
Type Dimensions in mm
A A1 B B1 C C1 ØD E E1 F G H I
K 033 N 602 517 151 130 184 – 108 50 156 50 110 400 59
K 073 H 602 517 151 130 184 – 108 50 156 50 110 400 59
K 123 H 852 767 151 130 184 – 108 60 155 60 110 400 184
K 203 H 863 767 197 130 245 – 159 60 216 60 110 400 184
K 283 H 863 767 197 130 257 – 159 60 224 60 110 400 184
K 373 H 1113 1017 197 130 257 – 159 60 224 60 110 740 139
K 573 H 1176 1070 245 200 307 – 216 60 280 60 180 740 165
K 813 H 1176 1070 245 200 307 – 216 60 280 60 180 740 165
K 1053 H 1634 1528 245 200 311 – 216 70 280 70 180 900 314
K 1353 T 1634 1528 245 200 381 311 216 70 27 70 180 900 314
K 1973 T-4(2) 1661 (1694) 1527 332 280 543 403 298 103 97 103 250 900 314
K 2923 T-4(2) 1661 (1694) 1527 332 280 563 403 298 103 43 103 250 900 314
K 3803 T-4(2) 1747 (1757) 1527 391 280 690 490 368 115 111 115 250 900 314
K 4803 T-4(2) 1747 (1757) 1527 391 280 690 490 368 115 111 115 250 900 314
L R R1 S T U U1 U2 V W X Y Z
K 033 N _ 60 45 62,5 – – – – 212 250 43 6 86

K 073 H 125 60 45 62,5 133 236 – – 212 250 43 6 86
K 123 H 125 60 45 62,5 252 295 – – 275 320 43 6 86
K 203 H 190 60 50 95 218 335 – – 275 320 54 8 113

K 283 H 190 60 50 95 218 335 – – 275 320 54 8 113
K 373 H 190 60 50 95 344 335 – – 275 320 54 8 113
K 573 H 236 60 50 118 300 381 – – 305 360 53 8 133

K 813 H 236 60 50 118 300 381 – – 305 360 53 8 133
K 1053 H 236 130 130 118 498 381 – – 305 360 53 8 133
K 1353 T 236 130 70 118 116 381 381 381 305 360 53 70 133
K 1973 T 337 80 70 169 108 381 381 381 305 360 67 (100) 140 177
K 2923 T 337 80 80 169 108 381 381 381 360 420 67 (100) 160 177
K 3803 T-4(2) 413 80 80 205 108 381 381 381 360 420 130 (140) 200 201
K 4803 T-4(2) 413 80 80 205 108 381 381 381 360 420 130 (140) 200 201
❏ Für kunststoffbeschichtete Umlenkdeckel gelten ❏ For plastic coated end covers dimensions are ❏ Pour couvercles à l’eau revêtus d’une résine syn-
die Maße der Seewasser-Ausführung equal with seawater-resistant design thétique, mêmes dimensions que pour l’exécution
pour eau de mer
Kältemittelanschlüsse siehe Seite 10 Refrigerant connections see page 10 Raccordements de frigorigène voir page 10
Wasseranschlüsse siehe Seite 11 Water connections see page 11 Raccordements d'eau voir page 11
MA ^ = Manometeranschluß MA ^ = Pressure gauge connection MA ^= Raccordement du manomètre
bis K1973 T 7/16” – 20 UNF to K1973 T 7/16” – 20 UNF à K1973 T 7/16” – 20 UNF
ab K 2923 T 1/4” – 18 NPTF from K 2923 T 1/4” – 18 NPTF à partir de K 2923 T 1/4” – 18 NPTF
SV = Anschluß für Sicherheitsventil SV = Connection for safety valve SV = Raccord pour soupape de sûreté
siehe Seite 11 see page 11 voir page 11
ST = Stopfen 1/8” – 27 NPTF ST = Plug 1/8” – 27 NPTF ST = Bouchon1/8” – 27 NPTF
7
Maßzeichnungen Dimensioned drawings Croquis cotés
K 033 NB B
K 073 HB T U F
50°
FL Z
E MA DL
SV
C
E1
øD
L
S
6
ø9
Y
R1 R G
~X I H B1
A1 V
~A W
K 123 HB B
K 203 HB T U DL F
50
°
K 283 HB FL E MA SV Z
K 373 HB
K 573 HB
K 813 HB
C1
E1
øD
C
S
Y
5
R1 FL * R ø9 ø13 G
H/2 B1
~X I H V
A1 W
~A
K 1053 HB
K 1353 TB
K 1973 TB
K 2923 TB B
Z
T U1 U U2 DL F SV 60
°
42 27,5 27,5 42
C1
OUT
øD
4 Pass
C
L
R IN
S
E1
Y
6
FL E MA R1 ø9 ø18 G
I H FL* E B1
~X A1 V
~A W
K 3803 TB
B
K 4803 TB 45°
T U1 U U2 DL F SV
42 27,5 27,5 42 Z
C1
4 Pass
øD
R
C
S
Y
E1
6
E R1 ø13 FL* E FL G MA
X I H ø18 B1
A1 V
A W
8
Abmessungen Dimensions Dimensions
A A1 B B1 C C1 ØD E E1 F G H I
K 033 NB 622 517 151 130 184 – 108 50 156 50 110 400 59
K 073 HB 622 517 151 130 184 – 108 50 156 50 110 400 59
K 123 HB 872 767 151 130 249 184 108 60 155 60 110 400 184
K 203 HB 890 767 197 130 310 245 159 60 216 60 110 400 184
K 283 HB 890 767 197 130 322 257 159 60 224 60 110 400 184
K 373 HB 1140 1017 197 130 322 257 159 60 224 60 110 740 139
K 573 HB 1213 1070 245 200 377 307 216 60 280 60 180 740 165
K 813 HB 1213 1070 245 200 377 307 216 60 280 60 180 740 165
K 1053 HB 1671 1528 245 200 381 311 216 70 26 70 180 900 314
K 1353 TB 1671 1528 245 200 381 311 216 70 27 70 180 900 314
K 1973 TB 1694 1527 332 280 543 403 298 103 97 103 250 900 314
K 2923 TB 1694 1527 332 280 543 403 298 103 43 103 250 900 314
K 3803 TB -4(2) 1747 (1757) 1527 391 280 690 490 368 115 111 115 250 900 314
K 4803 TB -4(2) 1747 (1757) 1527 391 280 690 490 368 115 111 115 250 900 314
L R R1 S T U U1 U2 V W X Y Z
K 033 NB _ 60 45 62,5 – – – – 212 250 63 6 86

K 073 HB 125 60 45 62,5 133 236 – – 212 250 63 6 86
K 123 HB 125 60 50 62,5 252 295 – – 275 320 63 65 86
K 203 HB 190 60 50 95 218 335 – – 275 320 81 65 113

K 283 HB 190 60 50 95 218 335 – – 275 320 81 65 113
K 373 HB 190 60 50 95 334 335 – – 275 320 81 65 113
K 573 HB 236 60 70 118 300 381 – – 305 360 85 70 133

K 813 HB 236 60 70 118 300 381 – – 305 360 85 70 133
K 1053 HB 236 130 70 118 498 381 – – 305 360 85 85 133
K 1353 TB 236 130 70 118 116 381 381 381 305 360 85 85 133
K 1973 TB 337 80 70 169 108 381 381 381 305 360 100 140 177
K 2923 TB 337 80 80 169 108 381 381 381 360 420 100 160 177
K 3803 TB -4(2) 413 80 80 205 108 381 381 381 360 420 130 (140) 200 201
K 4803 TB -4(2) 413 80 80 205 108 381 381 381 360 420 130 (140) 200 201
* Zweiter Flüssigkeitsanschluß * Second liquid outlet connection * Second raccord liquide
Wasseranschlüsse siehe Seite 11 Refrigerant connections see page 10 Raccordements de frigorigène voir page 10
Kältemittelanschlüsse siehe Seite 10 Water connections see page 11 Raccordements d'eau voir page 11
MA ^ = Manometeranschluß MA ^ = Pressure gauge connection MA ^= Raccordement du manomètre
bis K1973 TB 7/16” – 20 UNF to K1973 TB 7/16” – 20 UNF à K1973 TB 7/16” – 20 UNF
ab K 2923 TB 1/4” – 18 NPTF from K 2923 TB 1/4” – 18 NPTF à partir de K 2923 TB 1/4” – 18 NPTF
SV = Anschluß für Sicherheitsventil SV = Connection for safety valve SV = Raccord pour soupape de sûreté
siehe Seite 11 seee page 11 voir page 11
ST = Stopfen 1/8” – 27 NPTF ST = Plug 1/8” – 27 NPTF ST = Bouchon1/8” – 27 NPTF
9
Technische Daten Technical data Caractéristique techniques
Typ Behälterinhalt Wärmeträger max. Kältemittel- Anschlüsse 2 Anschlußgewinde/-flansch Gewicht

3
Kältemittel füllung 1 Eintritt ø DL Austritt ø FL Eintritt Austritt
2
Type Tank volume Heat transfer Maximum Connections 3
Connection thread/-flange Weight
1
Refrigerant fluide refrigerant charge Inlet ø DL Outlet ø FL Inlet Outlet
Type Contenance Eau Charge maximum Raccords 2 Raccord fileté/-flasque Poids

3
Frigorigène de fluide frigorigene 1 Entrée ø DL Sortie ø FL Entrée Sortie
R134a R404A R22

dm3 dm3 (kg) (kg) (kg) mm Zoll/Inch/Pouce mm Zoll/Inch/Pouce kg
K 033 N (B) 3,8 0,4 4,0 3,2 3,9 12 L 1/ ”
2 10 L 1/ ”
2 1” – 14 3/ ”
4 – 16 9 (9,5)
K 073 H (B) 3,4 0,7 3,6 2,9 3,5 12 L 1/ ”
2 10 L 1/ ”
2 1” – 14 3/ ”
4 – 16 11 (11,5)
K 123 H (B) 5,1 0,9 5,3 4,4 5,2 16 L 5/ ”
8 16 L 5/ ”
8 1” – 14 1” – 14 14 (15)
K 203 H (B) 11,8 1,8 12,4 10,1 12,2 16 L 5/ ”

8 16 L 5/ ”
8
11/4” – 12 1” – 14 25 (27)
K 283 H (B) 11,3 2,1 11,8 9,7 11,6 22 L 7/8” 22 L 7/8” 11/4” – 12 11/4” – 12 26 (28)
K 373 H (B) 14,5 3,1 15,2 12,4 14,9 28 L 11/8” 22 L 7/8” 13/4” – 12 11/4” – 12 35 (37)
K 573 H (B) 29,4 5,8 30,8 25,2 30,3 35 L 13/8” 28 L 11/8” 13/4” – 12 13/4” – 12 61 (63)
K 813 H (B) 27,7 7,0 29,0 23,7 28,5 35 L 13/8” 28 L 11/8” 13/4” – 12 13/4” – 12 65 (67)
K 1053 H (B) 40,0 9,3 41,9 34,2 41,2 42 L 15/8” 35 L 13/8” 21/4” – 12 13/4” – 12 87 (92)
K 1353 T (B) 37,0 11,5 38,8 31,7 38,1 42 L 15/8” 35 L 13/8” 21/4” – 12 13/4” – 12 103 (104)
K 1973 T (B) 76,0 18,8 79,7 65,1 78,3 54 L 21/8” 42 L 15/8” 112 x 112 21/4” – 12 191 (193)
K 2923 T (B) 67,0 25,0 70,2 57,4 69,0 54 L 21/8” 54 L 21/8” 112 x 112 112 x 112 221 (226)
K 3803 T (B) 108,0 37,4 113,2 92,5 111,3 76 L 31/8” 76 L 31/8” 140 x 140 140 x 140 332 (338)
K 4803 T (B) 98,0 45,0 102,7 83,9 101,0 76 L 31/8” 76 L 31/8” 140 x 140 140 x 140 356 (362)
L = Lötmuffe L = Solder tail piece L = Mancon à braser

1 Bei 50°C Flüssigkeitstemperatur und 1 At 50°C liquid temperature and 95% tank 1 A une temperature de liquide de 50°C et pour
95% Behälterinhalt capacity une contenance de réservoir de 95%
2 Andere Anschlüsse siehe Preisliste 2 Other connections see price list 2 Autre raccords voir Tarif
3 Zusätzlicher Flüssigkeitsaustritt (unten) 3 Additional liquid outlet (bottom) with seawater- 3 Sortie liquide supplémentaire (en bas) pour
bei seewasserbeständiger Ausführung ab resistant design from Type K 123HB – see also exécution eau de mer à partir du type K 123HB –
Typ K 123HB – siehe nachfolgende Tabelle. the following table. voir aussi tableau suivant.
Zusätzlicher Flüssigkeitsaustritt für Additional liquid outlet for Sortie de liquide additionnelle pour
K 123 HB .. K4803 TB K 123 HB .. K4803 TB K 123 HB .. K 4803 TB
Typ Anschluß
Austritt ø FL
Type Connection
Outlet Ø FL
Type Raccord
Sortie Ø FL
Zoll/Inch/Pouce
K 033 NB –
K 073 HB –
K 123 HB 11/4” - 12 UNF
K 203 HB 11/4” - 12 UNF

K 283 HB 11/4” - 12 UNF
K 373 HB 13/4” - 12 UNF
K 573 HB 13/4” - 12 UNF

K 813 HB 13/4” - 12 UNF
K 1053 HB 21/4” - 12 UNF
K 1353 TB 21/4” - 12 UNF
K 1973 TB 21/4” - 12 UNF

K 2923 TB 112 x 112
K 3803 TB 140 x 140

K 4803 TB 140 x 140
Zusatzanschluß ist mit Verschlußmutter oder Additional connection has a sealing nut or blank Le raccord additionnel est équipé avec un
Blindflansch versehen. flange. bouchon d'obturation six pans ou une bride d'ob-
Ventil als Zubehör lieferbar – siehe Preisliste. Valve can be delivered as accessory – see Price turation.
List. La vanne est disponible comme accessoire – voir
Tarif.
10
Wasseranschlüsse Water connections Raccordements d'eau
Befestigungsschienen Fixing rails Rails de fixation
2 Pass 4 Pass Schienen Rails Rails
Typ Wasser- Eintritt Austritt Wasser- Eintritt Austritt Unten Oben Für Verdichter
durch- durch-
gänge gänge
Type No. of Inlet Outlet No. of Inlet Outlet Below Above For compressor
water water
passes passes
Type Nombre Entrée Sortie Nombre Entrée Sortie En dessous An dessous Pour compresseur
de pas- de pas-
sages sages
d'eau d'eau Nr./No. Nr./No. Typ/Type
K 033 N (B) 2 2 x R 1/2” R 3/4” 4 R1/2” R1/2” 327 301-01 – –
K 073 H (B) 2 2 x R 1/2” R 3/4” 4 R1/2” R1/2” 327 301-01 327 301-12 2KC-05.2 .. 2FC-3.2
327 301-01 2HL-1.2 .. 2FL-2.2
K 123 H 2 2 x R 1/2” R 3/4” 4 R1/2” R1/2” 327 301-04 327 301-21 2EC-2.2 .. 2CC-4.2
327 301-09 2EL-2.2 .. 2CL-4.2
K 123 H B 2 2 x R 1/2” R 3/4” 4 R1/2” R1/2” S 327 301-21 2EC-2.2 .. 2CC-4.2
327 301-09 2EL-2.2 .. 2CL-4.2
K 203 H 2 2 x R 3/4” R 1” 4 R3/4” R3/4” 327 301-04 327 301-21 2EC-2.2 .. 2CC-4.2
327 301-22 4FC-3.2 .. 4CC-6.2
327 301-09 2EL-2.2 .. 4N-20.2
K 203 H B 2 2 x R 3/4” R 1” 4 R3/4” R3/4” S 327 301-21 2EC-2.2 .. 2CC-4.2
327 301-22 4FC-3.2 .. 4CC-6.2
327 301-09 2EL-2.2 .. 4N-20.2
K 283 H 2 2 x R 3/4” R 1” 4 R3/4” R3/4” 327 301-04 327 301-21 2EC-2.2 .. 2CC-4.2
327 301-22 4FC-3.2 .. 4CC-6.2
327 301-09 2EL-2.2 .. 4N-20.2
K 283 H B 2 2 x R 3/4” R 1” 4 R3/4” R3/4” S 327 301-21 2EC-2.2 .. 2CC-4.2
327 301-22 4FC-3.2 .. 4CC-6.2
327 301-09 2EL-2.2 .. 4N-20.2
K 373 H 2 2 x R 3/4” R 1” 4 R3/4” R3/4” 327 301-04 327 301-21 2EC-2.2 .. 2CC-4.2
327 301-22 4FC-3.2 .. 4CC-6.2
327 301-09 2EL-2.2 .. 4N-20.2
K 373 H B 2 2 x R 3/4” R 1” 4 R3/4” R3/4” S 327 301-21 2EC-2.2 .. 2CC-4.2
327 301-22 4FC-3.2 .. 4CC-6.2
327 301-09 2EL-2.2 .. 4N-20.2
K 573 H 2 R 2” R 2” 4 R 11/4” R 11/4” 327 301-05 327 301-10 4Z-5.2 .. 6F-50.2
K 573 H B 2 R 2” R 2” 4 R 11/4” R 11/4” S 327 301-10 4Z-5.2 .. 6F-50.2
K 813 H 2 R 2” R 2” 4 R 11/4” R 11/4” 327 301-05 327 301-10 4Z-5.2 .. 6F-50.2
K 813 H B 2 R 2” R 2” 4 R 11/4” R 11/4” S 327 301-10 4Z-5.2 .. 6F-50.2
K 1053 H 2 R 2” R 2” 4 R 11/4” R 11/4” 327 301-06 327 301-10 4Z-5.2 .. 6F-50.2
K 1053 H B 2 R 2” R 2” 4 R 11/4” R 11/4” S 327 301-10 4Z-5.2 .. 6F-50.2
K 1353 T (B) 2 R 2” R 2” 4 R 11/4” R 11/4” S 327 301-10 4Z-5.2 .. 6F-50.2
1 1
326 057-01 44H-30.2 .. 66F-100.2
K 1973 T (B) 2 NW 65 NW 65 4 R 2” R 2” S 327 301-10 4Z-5.2 .. 6F-50.2
1 1 326 057-01 44H-30.2 .. 66F-100.2
K 2923 T (B) 2 NW 65 NW 65 4 R 2” R 2” S 327 301-10 4Z-5.2 .. 6F-50.2
326 057-01 44H-30.2 .. 66F-100.2
1 1
K 3803 T (B) 2 NW 100 1
NW 100 1 4 NW 80 NW 80 S 327 301-10 4Z-5.2 .. 6F-50.2
326 057-01 44H-30.2 .. 66F-100.2
1 1 1 1
K 4803 T (B) 2 NW 100 NW 100 4 NW 80 NW 80 S 327 301-10 4Z-5.2 .. 6F-50.2
326 057-01 44H-30.2 .. 66F-100.2
S = Standard
SV Anschluß für SV Connection for SV Raccord pour soupape

Sicherheitsventil safety valve de sûreté
K 033N(B) … K 123H(B) 1/ ” – 14 NPTF
2
K 203H(B) … K 4083T(B) 11/4” – 12 UNF
Zubehörteile Accessories Accessoires
Adapter für Sicherheitsventil Adaptor for safety valve Adaptateur pour soupape de sûreté
1"
G 1/2" /2 -14NPTF
1"
/2 -14NPTF G 1/2" 3"
/8 -18NPTF
SW 12 SW 22 SW 22 SW 12 SW 22
11/4"-12UNF 11/4"-12UNF 11/4"-12UNF 11/4"-12UNF 11/4"-12UNF
Nr. 366 005 - 01 Nr. 366 005 - 02 Nr. 366 005 - 03 Nr. 366 005 - 04 Nr. 366 005 - 05
1 Für Vorschweißflansche DIN 2633, ND 10/16 1 For welding flanges DIN 2633, ND 10/16 or 1 Pour brides à souder à collerette DIN 2633,
oder Gewindeflansche DIN 2566, ND 10/16 screwed flanges DIN 2566, ND 10/16 ND 10/16 ou pour brides à visser DIN 2566,
ND 10/16
11
Wasserumlenkdeckel End Covers Couvercles à l’eau
Typ Anschlußseite Umlenkseite Wasserdurchgänge Eintritt Austritt
Type Connection side Return cover side No. of passes Inlet Outlet
Type Côte raccordement Côte inversion du circuit Nombre de passages Entrée Sortie
26 18
3 2
K 033 N(B) 4 Pass 1 2
K 073 H(B)
K 123 H(B) oder/or/ou
26
ø 115
26
2 Pass 1+2 3
1
34 26 2
K 203 H(B)
K 283 H(B) 4 Pass 1 2
K 373 H(B)
45
oder/or/ou
ø 168
45
2 Pass 1+2 3
3 1
35 2
K 573 H(B)-4
K 813 H(B)-4 OUT
48
K 1053 H(B)-4 4 Pass
K 1353 T(B)-4 4 Pass 1 2

48
IN
1
TOP
ø 224
2 1
K 573 H(B)-2
K 813 H(B)-2 EN
K 1053 H(B)-2
17
K 1353 T(B)-2 2 Pass 1 2

17
2 Pass
52 52
50 2
K 1973 T(B)-4 OUT

70
4 Pass
K 2923 T(B)-4
4 Pass 1 2
70
IN
1
TOP
ø 312
2 55 55
K 1973 T(B)-2 EN
76
K 2923 T(B)-2
2 Pass
2 Pass 1 2
76
2 50
103
K 3803 T(B)-4 4 Pass 4 Pass 1 2

K 4803 T(B)-4
103
EN
1
TOP
ø 380
2 80 80
EN
80 80
K 3803 T(B)-2 2 Pass 1 2

K 4803 T(B)-2 2 Pass
1
(EN = Entleerung / Water drain / Vidange R1/4”)
Bedienungsanleitung
Operating Instruction
Instruction de service
DB-200-1
Druckbehälter: Pressure vessels: Réservoirs sous pression:

Wassergekühlte Verflüssiger Water-Cooled Condensers Condenseurs à eau et
und Ölkühler and Oil Coolers Refroidisseurs d'huile
• K033N .. K4803T • K033N .. K4803T • K033N .. K4803T

• K033NB .. K4803TB • K033NB .. K4803TB • K033NB .. K4803TB
• OW401 .. OW941 • OW401 .. OW941 • OW401 .. OW941
• OW401B .. OW941B • OW401B .. OW941B • OW401B .. OW941B
Inhalt Seite Content Page Sommaire Page

1 Sicherheit 1 1 Safety 1 1 Sécurité 1
2 Anwendungsbereiche 4 2 Application ranges 4 2 Champs d’applications 4
3 Projektierung 5 3 Plant design 5 3 Conception 5
4 Montage 8 4 Mounting 8 4 Montage 8
5 Inbetriebnahme 12 5 Commissioning 12 5 Mise en service 12
6 Betrieb 15 6 Operation 15 6 Fonctionnement 15
1 Sicherheit 1 Safety 1 Sécurité
Diese Druckbehälter sind zum Einbau These pressure vessels are intended Ces réservoirs sous pression sont prévus
in Kälteanlagen entsprechend der for installation in refrigeration plants pour être incorporés dans des installations
EU-Maschinenrichtlinie 98/37/EG according to the EC Machines frigorifiques conformément à la Directive
und der EU-Druckgeräterichtlinie Directive 98/37/EEC and the EC Machines CE 98/37/CEE et à la Direc-
97/23/EG vorgesehen. Sie dürfen nur Pressure Equipement Directive tive Equipements sous Pression CE
in Betrieb genommen werden, wenn 97/23/EEC. They may be put to servi- 97/23/CEE. Leur mise en service est uni-
sie gemäß vorliegender Anleitung in ce only, if they have been installed in quement autorisée s’ils ont été incorporés
diese Kälteanlagen eingebaut worden these refrigeration plants according to dans des installations frigorifiques confor-
sind und als Ganzes mit den entspre- the existing instruction and as a whole mément à la présente instruction et si cet-
chenden gesetzlichen Vorschriften agree with the corresponding provi- tes installations frigorifiques répondent
übereinstimmen (angewendete sions of legislation (applied standards: dans leur totalité aux réglementations
Normen: siehe Herstellererklärung).* refer to Manufacturers Declaration).* légales en vigueur (les normes utilisées:
voir la Déclaration du Constructeur).*
Autorisiertes Fachpersonal Authorized staff Personnel autorisé

Sämtliche Arbeiten an Verfüssigern, All work on condensers, oil coolers Tous les travaux ainsi que l’entretien de
Ölkühlern und Kälteanlagen dürfen and refrigeration systems shall be car- condenseurs, refroidisseurs d’huile et
nur von qualifiziertem und autorisier- ried out by qualified and authorized d’installations frigorifiques ne peuvent
tem Fachpersonal ausgeführt werden. refrigeration personnel only. être exécutés que par du personnel quali-
fié et autorisé.
* Hinweis gilt nur für Länder der EU * Information is valid for countries of the EC * Indication valable pour les pays de la CE
Die Druckbehälter sind nach dem The pressure vessels are constructed Les réservoirs sous pression sont conçus
aktuellen Stand der Technik und ent- according to the state of the art and d'après les règles de l'art actuelles et
sprechend den geltenden Vorschriften valid regulations. Particular emphasis conformément aux prescriptions en
gebaut. Auf die Sicherheit der Anwen- has been placed on the users' safety. vigueur. Une attention particulière a été
der wurde besonderer Wert gelegt. apportée à la sécurité de l'utilisateur.
Restgefahren Residual dangers Dangers résiduels

Vom Druckbehälter können unver- Certain residual dangers from the Le réservoir sous pression peut être la
meidbare Restgefahren ausgehen. pressure vessel are unavoidable. source de dangers résiduels inévitables.
Jede Person, die an diesem Gerät All persons working on these units Par conséquent, toute personne qui tra-
arbeitet, muss deshalb diese Bedie- must therefore read these operating vaille sur cet appareil doit lire attentive-
nungsanleitung sorgfältig lesen! instructions carefully! ment cette instruction de service !
Es gelten zwingend All of the following have validity: A prendre en considération
• die einschlägigen Unfallverhütungs- • specific rules for the prevention of • les prescriptions relatives à la
vorschriften (z. B. UVV "Kälteanla- accidents (e. g. German rule "refri- prévoyance contre les accidents
gen" VGB 20), geration plants" VGB 20), (par ex. prescription allemande
• die allgemein anerkannten • generally safety standards, "installation frigorifique" VGB 20),
Sicherheitsregeln, • EU guidelines, • les règles de sécurité généralement
• die EU-Richtlinien, • national standards and regulations reconnues,
• länderspezifische Normen und e. g. EN 378. • les directives de l'UE,
Bestimmungen z. B. EN 378. • les normes et dispositions spécifiques
du pays concerné par ex. EN 378.
Sicherheitshinweise Safety notes Les indications de sécurité

sind Anweisungen um Gefährdungen are instructions intended to prevent sont des instructions pour éviter les
zu vermeiden. dangers. mises en danger.
Sicherheitshinweise genauestens ein- Safety instructions must be exactly Respecter scrupuleusement les indicati-
halten! observed! ons de sécurité !
Achtung! Attention! Attention !
! Anweisung um eine mögliche

Gefährdung von Geräten zu ver-
meiden.
! Instructions on preventing possi-
ble damage to equipment. ! Instruction pour éviter une possible
mise en danger d'appareils.
Vorsicht! Caution! Prudence !

Anweisung um eine mögliche Instructions on preventing a pos- Instruction pour éviter une possible
minderschwere Gefährdung von sible minor danger to persons. mise en danger bénigne de person-
Personen zu vermeiden. nes.
Warnung! Warning! Avertissement !

! Anweisung um eine mögliche ! Instructions on preventing a pos- ! Instruction pour éviter une possible
schwere Gefährdung von sible serious danger to persons. mise en danger grave de person-
Personen zu vermeiden. nes.
Gefahr! Danger! Danger !

Anweisung um eine unmittelbare Instructions on preventing a high Instruction pour une imminente mise
schwere Gefährdung von risk of serious danger to per- en danger grave de personnes.
Personen zu vermeiden. sons.
2 DB-200-1
Allgemeine Sicherheitshinweise General safety notes Indications de sécurité générales

! Der Druckbehälter ist im Anliefe- ! The pressure vessel is under ! A la livraison, le réservoir sous pres-
rungszustand mit Schutzgas ge- pressure with a holding charge, sion est rempli d’un gaz de protec-
füllt (Überdruck ca. 0,5 .. 1 bar). which is above atmospheric tion et sont en surpression
Bei unsachgemäßer Handha- pressure (approx. 0,5 .. 1 bar). (environ 0,5 .. 1 bar).
bung sind Verletzungen von Injury of skin and eyes is possi- Des blessures à la peau et aux yeux
Haut und Augen möglich. ble. sont possibles en cas de manie-
Bei Arbeiten am Druckbehälter Wear safety goggles while wor- ment inapproprié.
Schutzbrille tragen! king on pressure vessel. Lors de travaux sur le réservoir
Anschlüsse nicht öffnen, bevor Do not open connections before sous presion, porter des lunettes de
Überdruck abgelassen ist. pressure has been released. protection !
Ne pas ouvrir les raccords avant
d'avoir évacué la surpression.
Vorsicht! Caution! Prudence !

Im Betrieb können am Kälte- During operation surface tempe- Pendant le service, des tempéra-
mittel-Eintritt Oberflächen- ratures exceeding 100°C can be tures de surface excédant 100°C
Temperaturen von über 100°C reached at the refrigerant inlet. pourront être atteintes à l’entrée du
auftreten. Burnings possible. fluide frigorigène.
Verbrennungen möglich. Mark accessible sectors. Possibilité de brulures.
Zugängliche Stellen kennzeich- Veuillez marquer les endroits acces-
nen. sibles.
Bei Arbeiten am Druckbehälter, nach- For any working at the pressure ves- Pour des travaux au réservoir sous pres-
dem die Anlage in Betrieb genommen sel after the plant has been commission après l’installation a été mise en ser-
wurde: sioned: vice:
! Druckbehälter kann unter Druck ! Pressure vessel can be under ! Le réservoir sous pression peut-être
stehen! pressure! sous pression !
Schwere Verletzungen möglich. Serious injuries possible. Graves blessures possible.
Druckbehälter auf drucklosen Release the pressure in the Retirer la pression sur le réservoir
Zustand bringen! pressure vessel! sous pression !
Bei Arbeiten am Rohrsystem des For any working at the pipe system Pour des travaux à la tuyauterie en plus:
Kühlmediums gilt zusätzlich: additionally:
! Kühlmedium kann Haut und ! Coolant can cauterize skin and ! Fluide caloporteur peut cautériser
Augen verätzen! eyes! peau et yeux !
Schutzbrille tragen! Wear safety goggles! Porter des lunettes de protection !
DB-200-1 3
2 Anwendungsbereiche 2 Application ranges 2 Champs d’application
Ausführung Gruppe / Substanzklasse

td max
Design group / substance class PS
td min
Version groupe / classe de matière
Zulässige Kältemittel (Verflüssiger) EN 378-1:

120°C
Permitted refrigerants (condenser) L1 28 bar
-10°C
Fluides frigorigènes autorisés (condenseur) L2 ➁ L3 ➁
Zulässige Kältemaschinenöle (Ölkühler)

entsprechend / according to / suivant
Permitted refrigerantion compressor oils (oil cooler) 120°C
ISO 6743-3 28 bar
Huiles pour machines frigorifiques autorisées -10°C
DIN 51503-1
(Refroidisseurs d’huile)
Wasser oder Kühlsole

Kühlmedien Standard water or brine 95°C
eau ou saumure -10°C
Coolants ➀ 10 bar Frostschutz!
Seewasser Seewasser, Wasser oder Kühlsole anti-freeze!
Fluides caloporteurs seawater seawater, water or brine antigel!
marine eau de mer, eau ou saumure
➀ Kühlsole-Konzentrationen siehe ➀ For concentration of the brine see ➀ Pour concentration du saumure voir logi-
Software software ciel
➁ nur nach Rücksprache mit BITZER ➁ only after consultation with BITZER ➁ seulement après avoir consulté BITZER
PS maximaler Betriebsdruck PS maximum operating pressure PS pression maximale de service
td max maximale Betriebstemperatur td max maximum operating temperature td max température maximale de service
td min minimale Betriebstemperatur td min minimum operating temperature td min température minimale de service
Achtung – Korrosion! Attention – Corrosion! Attention – Corrosion !
! Das Kühlmedium darf gegen-

über dem Rohrmaterial der
Druckbehälter und dem Werk-
! The coolant must not react
aggressively with the pipe mate-
rial of the pressure vessel or the
! Le fluide caloporteur ne doit pas
être agressif envers les matériaux
constituant les tubes et les couver-
stoff der Umlenkdeckel nicht material of the end covers: cles déflecteurs des réservoirs sous
aggressiv sein: pression:
K033N .. K4803T / OW401 .. OW941 K033N .. K4803T / OW401 .. OW941 K033N .. K4803T / OW401 .. OW941:
(Standard-Ausführung): (Standard design): (Version standard):
Rohre: Kupfer pipes: cooper tubes: cuivre
Umlenkdeckel: Grauguss end covers: grey cast iron couvercles déflecteurs: fonte grise
K033NB .. K4803TB / OW401B .. K033NB .. K4803TB / OW401B .. K033NB .. K4803TB / OW401B ..
OW941B (Seewasser-Ausführung): OW941B (seawater-resistant design): OW941B (Version marine):
Rohre: Kupfer-Nickel-Legierung pipes: copper-nickel-alloy tubes: alliage cuivre-nickel
Umlenkdeckel: Kunststoff beschichtet end covers: plastic coated couvercles déflecteurs: revêtus d'une
résine synthétique
OW160A .. OW860A (Standard): OW160A .. OW860A (standard):
Rohre: Stahl pipes: steel OW160A .. OW860A (standard):
Umlenkdeckel: Grauguss end covers: grey cast iron tubes: acier
couvercles déflecteurs: fonte grise
OW160AC .. OW860AC (Seewasser): OW160AC .. OW860AC (seawater):
Rohre: Kunststoff beschichtet pipes: plastic coated OW160AC .. OW860AC (marine):
Umlenkdeckel: Kunststoff beschichtet end covers: plastic coated tubes: revêtus d'une résine synthétique
couvercles déflecteurs: revêtus d'une
résine synthétique
4 DB-200-1
Als kostenlosen Service prüft As a free service, BITZER will Sur présentation d'une analyse
BITZER die Eignung der Rohr- examine the suitability of pipe d'eau, BITZER contrôle la compati-
materialien gegen Vorlage einer materials if a water analysis is bilité avec les matériaux constituant
Wasser-Analyse. provided. les tubes (service gratuit).
Prüf-Grundlage ist der aktuelle The basis for the examination is Le contrôle repose sur l'état actuel
Stand der Erfahrungen. the current status of knowledge. des expériences acquises.
Eine absolute Gewährleistung However, due to the complexity Cependant, en raison de la comple-
auf Korrosions-Sicherheit kann of the situation, no absolute gua- xité des rapports, une garantie
jedoch aufgrund der komplexen rantee can be given that materi- absolue quant à la sécurité contre la
Verhältnisse nicht gegeben wer- als will be corrosion proof. corrosion ne peut pas être donnée.
den.
3 Projektierung 3 Plant design 3 Conception
3.1 Aufstellort 3.1 Location 3.1 Emplacement
Bei Einsatz an extremen Standorten When installed in extreme locations En cas d'utilisation dans des conditions
(z.B. aggressive Atmosphäre, niedrige (e.g. aggressive / corrosive atmosphe- extrêmes (par ex. atmosphère agressive,
Außentemperaturen u.a.) geeignete res, low ambient temperatures etc.) températures extérieures basses, ...)
Maßnahmen treffen. Ggf. empfiehlt suitable measures must be taken. prendre des mesures adéquates. Le cas
sich Rücksprache mit BITZER. Consultation with BITZER is recom- échéant, il est conseillé de consulter
mended. BITZER.
Achtung – Einfriergefahr! Attention – Danger of freezing! Attention – Risque de prise en glace !
! Es muss sichergestellt sein,

dass die Temperatur am Auf-
stellort ausreichend oberhalb
! It is necessary to ensure that the
temperature at the location is
high enough above the freezing
! Il faut s'assurer que la température
à l’emplacement est suffisamment
plus élevée que le point de gel du
dem Gefrierpunkt des Kühl- point of the coolant. fluide caloporteur.
mediums liegt.
3.2 Aufbau der Anlage 3.2 Plant design 3.2 Conception de l'installation
Bei Montage eines Verdichters auf If a compressor is mounted on the En cas de montage d'un compresseur sur
den Verflüssiger: condenser: le condenseur:
! Auf den Verflüssiger dürfen

keine Schwingungen übertragen
werden!
! No vibrations should be trans-
mitted to the condenser!
Do not use the condenser as
! N'admettre pas la transmission des
vibrations au condenseur !
Ne pas utiliser le condenseur
Verflüssiger nicht als tragendes load-bearing element! comme bâti !
Element verwenden! Mount the compressor on the Toujours prévoir des éléments anti-
Verdichter nur mit Dämpfungs- condenser only with damper vibratoires entre le compresseur et
elementen auf Verflüssiger mon- elements! le condenseur !
tieren!
The discharge line must be sufficiently La conduite de refoulement devra être
Die Druckleitung muss ausreichend elastic so that a minimum of vibrations suffisamment élastique pour ne pas
elastisch sein, damit auf den Verflüs- and movement is transferred to the transmettre trop de vibrations et de mou-
siger möglichst wenig Schwingungen condenser. It may be necessary to fit vements du compresseur au condenseur.
und Bewegungen des Verdichters flexible vibration dampers. Le cas échéant, prévoir la mise en place
übertragen werden. Eventuell kann es de flexibles antivibratoires.
Extreme pressure pulsations should
notwendig sein, flexible Schwingungs-
be damped by fitting mufflers. Des pulsions de pression extrêmes
Ausgleicher einzubauen.
devront être atténuées par un silencieux.
Extreme Druck-Pulsationen sollten
durch den Einbau von Mufflern
gedämpft werden.
DB-200-1 5
3.3 Kältemittel- bzw. Öl-Seite 3.3 Refrigerant resp. oil side 3.3 Côté fluide frigorigène / huile
Die gesamte Anlage sollte so ausge- The entire plant should be designed Toute l'installation devra être conçue et
legt und betrieben werden, dass der and operated so that the maximum exploitée de façon à ce que la pression
maximale Betriebsdruck im Druckbe- operating pressure in the pressure de service maximale dans le réservoir
hälter nicht überschritten werden kann vessel (28 bar) cannot be exceeded. sous pression ne puisse pas être dépas-
(28 bar). sée (28 bar).
Safety valves are essential if
Sicherheitsventile sind zwingend • it is to be expected that the maxi- Des soupapes de sécurité sont vraiment
erforderlich, wenn mum operating pressure will be nécessaires quand:
• damit zu rechnen ist, dass der exceeded due to external heat • il est possible que la pression de servi-
maximale Betriebsdruck durch sources (e.g. fire), or if ce maximale soit dépassée (influence
äußere Wärmequellen überschrit- de sources de chaleur extérieures tel-
ten wird (z. B. Brand) oder wenn les que incendie par ex.), ou quand
• the entire refrigerant charge of the
• die gesamte Kältemittel-Füllung der • La charge totale en fluide frigorigène
plant is more than 90% of the pres-
Anlage größer ist, als 90% des est supérieure à 90% de la contenan-
sure vessel’s charge capacity at
Druckbehälter-Fassungsvolumens ce du réservoir sous pression à 20°C
20°C (in the table called "volume").
bei 20°C (in der Tabelle mit (qualifiée dans la table comme "volu-
"Volumen" bezeichnet). me").
In these cases relief devices should
In diesen Fällen sollten bevorzugt Dans ces cas, il faudrait préconiser l'em-
be prefered that lead the refrigerant or
Überström-Einrichtungen eingesetzt ploi de systèmes de décharge qui dévient
the oil to the low-pressure side of the
werden, die das Kältemittel oder das le fluide frigorigène ou l’huile vers le côté
plant (emission reduction).
Öl auf die Niederdruck-Seite der basse pression de l'installation (limitation
Anlage leiten (Emissions-Minderung). de rejets).
Safety switching device
Sicherheitsschalteinrichtung Dispositif de sécurité par coupure
In conformance with local regulations,
Entsprechend den örtlichen Vorschrif- Conformément à la réglementation locale
pressure limiting safety switching devi-
ten müssen druckbegrenzende en vigueur, il faut prévoir des dispositifs
ces must provided for.
Sicherheitsschalteinrichtungen vorge- de sécurité par coupure pour limiter la
sehen werden. pression.
3.4 Kühlmedium-Seite 3.4 Coolant side 3.4 Côté fluide caloporteur
Das Kühlmedium sollte weder Fest- The coolant should contain neither Le fluide caloporteur ne devrait contenir
stoffe noch Gasanteile enthalten: solids nor gases: ni corps solide ni élément gazeux:
• Feststoffe müssen durch geeignete • Any solids must be separated out • Les corps solides doivent être
Filter abgeschieden werden. using suitable filters. récupérés par des filtres adéquats.
• Gasanteile sollten durch konstrukti- • A gas content should be avoided • La présence de gaz peut être évitée
ve Maßnahmen vermieden werden. through suitable design measures. par certaines adaptations.
Offene Kreisläufe: Open circuits: Circuits ouverts:

Der Druckbehälter darf sich während The pressure vessel must not drain Durant les phases d'arrêt, le réservoir
des Stillstands nicht entleeren. Dazu off while not in use. For this reason, fit sous pression ne doit pas se vider.
entweder either Prévoir donc:
• einen Kühlmedium-Regler am • a coolant regulator at the coolant • un régulateur à la sortie du fluide calo-
Kühlmedium-Austritt des Druck- outlet of the pressure vessel, or porteur du réservoir sous pression ou
behälters einbauen • a swan-neck at the outlet. • un coude surélevé à la sortie.
• oder einen Schwanenhals am
Auslauf. When using tap-water as a coolant, it Si le fluide caloporteur est de l'eau de
is necessary to check whether the ville, vérifier si la mise en place d'un dis-
Bei Leitungswasser als Kühlmedium installation of a pipe disconnector is connecteur de conduite est prescrit.
muss geprüft werden, ob der Einbau stipulated.
eines Rohrtrenners vorgeschrieben
wird.
6 DB-200-1
Bei Kühlung mit Seewasser: When cooling with seawater: Refroidissement par eau de mer:
Wenn das verwendete Seewasser auf If, due to local conditions, the seawa- Si, en raison des conditions locales, l'eau
Grund der örtlichen Bedingungen zu ter in use can lead to scale or shell de mer utilisée peut provoquer la formati-
Muschel-Bildung führen kann, sollten deposits, suitable filters should be fit- on de coquillages, des filtres adéquats
geeignete Filter eingebaut werden. ted. This also serves to protect the doivent être installés. Ceux-ci serviront
Dies dient auch zum Schutz der pipe lines from shell deposits. également à protéger les tuyauteries con-
Rohrleitungen vor Muschelbefall. tre ce genre de dépôts.
Volumen Kategorie der Konformitätsbewertung nach 97/23/EG

Typ
Volume Category of conformity assessment according to 97/23/EEC
Contenance Catégorie de l’évaluation de la conformité d’après 97/23/CEE
Type
Kältemittel- / Öl-Gruppe L1 Kältemittel-Gruppe L3
Type
Refrigerant / oil group L1 Refrigerant group L3
dm3 (l) Groupe de fluide frig / d’huile. L1 Groupe de fluide frig. L3
K033N(B) 3,8 2 2
K073H(B) 3,4 2 2
K123H(B) 5,1 2 2
K203H(B) 11,8 3 3
K283H(B) 11,3 3 3
K373H(B) 14,5 3 3
K573H(B) 29,4 3 3
K813H(B) 27,7 3 3
K1053H(B) 40,0 4 4
K1353T(B) 37,0 4 4
K1973T(B) 76,0 4 4
K2923T(B) 67,0 4 4
K3803T(B) 108,0 4 4
K4803T(B) 98,0 4 4
OW401(B) 10,5 3 –––
OW501(B) 14,0 3 –––
OW781(B) 18,0 3 –––
OW941(B) 24,0 3 –––
3.5 Anlage anmelden 3.5 Plant registration 3.5 Déclaration de l'installation
Verflüssiger und Ölkühler sind Druck- Condensers and oil coolers are pres- Les condenseurs et les refroidisseurs
behälter nach der Druckgerätericht- sure vessels according to the d’huile sont des réservoirs sous pression
linie 97/23/EG. Deshalb muss die Pressure Equipment Directive d'après la directive équipements sous
gesamte Anlage entsprechend den 97/23/EEC. For this reason the entire pression 97/23/CEE. Par conséquent,
örtlichen Vorschriften bei der Auf- plant must be registered with the l'ensemble de l'installation devra être
sichtsbehörde angemeldet und von ihr supervisory authority and duly appro- déclaré à l'organisme de contrôle et auto-
genehmigt werden. ved in accordance with local regulati- risé par celui-ci, conformément à la régle-
Die Kategorie der Konformitätsbewer- ons. mentation locale en vigueur.
tung des jeweiligen Druckbehälters ist The category of conformity assess- La catégorie de l'évaluation de conformité
in der oberen Tabelle aufgelistet. ment of each pressure vessel is listed par chaque réservoir sous pression est
in the table above. indiquée dans le tableau ci-dessus.
In Ländern außerhalb der EU müssen
die jeweiligen Vorschriften eingehalten In countries outside the EU the appli- Dans les pays en dehors de l'UE, les
werden. cable regulations must be complied règlementations respectives seront à
with. prendre en considération.
DB-200-1 7
4 Montage 4 Mounting 4 Montage
4.1 Lieferzustand 4.1 Condition as delivered 4.1 Etat à la livraison
Der Druckbehälter ist im Lieferzustand In delivery condition the pressure ves- A la livraison, le réservoir sous pression
verschlossen und mit Schutzgas sel is closed and filled with holding est clos et rempli d'un gaz de protection.
befüllt. Der Schutzgas-Überdruck charge. The holding charge has an La surpression du gaz de protection est
beträgt 0,5 .. 1 bar. Alle Rotalock- und overpressure of 0.5 to 1 bar. All de 0,5 .. 1 bar. Tous les raccords rotalock
Flansch-Anschlüsse sind durch eine Rotalock and flange connections are et à brides sont obturés par une plaque
eingelegte Metallscheibe verschlos- closed by an inserted metal plate. métallique.
sen.
4.2 Rohrleitungen anschliessen 4.2 Pipe line connections 4.2 Raccordement de la tuyauterie
Die Rohranschlüsse für Kältemittel The pipe connections for refrigerant Les raccords pour le fluide frigorigène /
bzw. Öl sind so ausgeführt, dass resp. oil are designed for tubes having pour l’huile sont exécutés de façon à ce
Rohre in den gängigen Millimeter- und the normal millimetre or inch dimen- que les tubes usuels en millimètres et en
Zoll-Abmessungen verwendet werden sions. Brazing connections have step- pouces puissent être utilisés. Les rac-
können. Löt-Anschlüsse haben gestuf- ped diameters. According to the size cords à braser ont plusieurs diamètres
te Durchmesser. Je nach Abmessung the tube can be pushed more or less successifs. Suivant la section, le tube
wird das Rohr mehr oder weniger tief into the fitting. If not required the end sera inséré plus ou moins profondément.
eintauchen. Im Bedarfsfall kann das with the largest diameter can be cut- Si nécessaire, l'extrémité avec le plus
Buchsen-Ende mit dem größeren off. grand diamètre peut être sciée.
Durchmesser auch abgesägt werden.
Positions of connections see page 11. Positions des raccords, voir page 11.
Anschluss-Positionen siehe Seite 11.
! Ventile nicht überhitzen!

Während und nach dem Löten
Ventilkörper kühlen.
! Avoid overheating of the valves!
Cool valve body while and after
brazing!
! Ne pas surchauffer les vannes !
Refroidir les corps de vanne lors du
brasage et après !
Maximale Löttemperatur 700°C. Max. brazing temperature Température de brasage maximale
700°C. 700°C.
Zuerst Überdruck aus dem Druckbe- Release the pressure from the pres- Evacuer tout d'abord la surpression du
hälter ablassen: Anschlüsse vorsichtig sure vessel first: Open the connec- réservoir sous pression: Ouvrir les rac-
öffnen. tions carefully. cords prudemment.
Durchmesser gestuft
Stepped diameters
Plusieurs diamètres
successifs
!
Vor Anschluss des Rohres Verschlussblech entfernen!
Remove sealing plate before connecting the tube!
Avant raccordement du tube, retirer la plaque d'obturation !
Abb. 1 Rohr-Anschluss mit Rotalock- Fig. 1 Pipe connection with Rotalock Fig. 1 Raccord de tube avec raccord à visser
Verschraubung adaptor Rotalock
8 DB-200-1
! Druckbehälter steht unter Über- ! Pressure vessel is under pressu- ! Le réservoir sous pression est en
druck durch Schutzgas. re with holding charge. pression avec du gaz de protection.
Verletzungen von Haut und Injury of skin and eyes possible. Blessures de la peau et des yeux
Augen möglich. Wear safety goggles while wor- possibles.
Bei Arbeiten am Druckbehälter king on pressure vessel! Porter des lunettes de protection
Schutzbrille tragen! durand les travaux sur le réservoir
sous pression !
Absperrventile und / oder Lötan- Remove shut-off valves and / or Retirer les vannes d'isolement et / ou les
schlüsse entfernen. brazed connections. raccords à braser.
! Eintritt von Luftfeuchtigkeit mög-

lichst vermeiden!
Offenen Druckbehälter umge-
! If possible, prevent any humidity
from entering!
Open pressure vessels should
! Eviter si possible l'introduction
d'humidité !
Connecter immédiatement le réser-
hend in die Anlage einbauen. be immediately installed into the voir de pression ouvert à l'installation.
plant.
Druckbehälter während Montage- Close the pressure vessel again Refermer le réservoir sous pression
Unterbrechungen wieder verschlies- during any installation interruptions. durant les arrêts de travail.
sen.
Flush out the relevant pipes with inert Durant les travaux de brasage et de sou-
Während der Löt- oder Schweiß- gas during any brazing or welding dage, rincer les portions de tuyauterie
arbeiten die entsprechenden work. concernées avec du gaz de protection.
Leitungsteile mit Schutzgas spülen.
Sauberkeit der Rohre Cleanliness of the pipes Propreté des tubes

Grundsätzlich nur Rohrleitungen und Only use tubes and components D'une manière générale, n’utiliser que
Anlagen-Komponenten verwenden, which are des tubes et des composants qui
die • clean and dry inside (free from • sont propres et secs à l'intérieur (pas
• innen sauber und trocken sind (frei slag, swarf, rust, and phosphate de calamine, de copeaux métalliques,
von Zunder, Metallspänen, Rost- coatings) and de dépôts de rouille et de phosphates)
und Phosphat-Schichten) und • which are delivered with an air tight et
• luftdicht verschlossen angeliefert seal. • sont livrés hermétiquement clos.
werden.
Sicherheitsventil montieren Mounting the safety valve Montage de la soupape de sécurité

Sicherheitsventil in Adapter ein- Screw the safety valve into the Visser la soupape de sécurité dans l’ad-
schrauben. Dann den Adapter mit der adaptor. Then fasten the adaptor at aptateur. Puis fixer l’adaptateur sur le
Überwurfmutter am Druckbehälter the pressure vessel with the union réservoir sous pression avec l’ecrou-rac-
befestigen. nut. cord.
Lieferbare Adapter siehe Abb. 2, Available adaptors see figure 2, Adaptateurs disponibles voir figure 2,
Anschluss-Position Seite 11. position of connection page 11. position de raccord page 11.
1/2"-14 NPTF G 1/2" 1/2"-14 NPTF G 1/2" 3/8"-18 NPTF

SW 12 SW 22 SW 22 SW 12 SW 22
1 1/4"-12 UNF 1 1/4"-12 UNF 1 1/4"-12 UNF 1 1/4"-12 UNF 1 1/4"-12 UNF
366005-01 366005-02 366005-03 366005-04 366005-05
Abb. 2 Lieferbare Adapter für das Sicher- Fig. 2 Available adaptors for the safety Fig. 2 Adaptateurs disponibles pour la soupa-
heitsventil valve pe de sécurité
DB-200-1 9
4.3 Kühlmedium-Durchgänge 4.3 Coolant passes 4.3 Passes du fluide caloporteur
Je nach Umlenkdeckel wird das Kühl- Depending on the end covers the Dépendent du couvercle déflecteur le flui-
medium entweder 2, 3, 4 oder 6 mal coolant passes the pressure vessel 2, de caloporteur passe le réservoir sous
durch den Druckbehälter geführt. 3, 4, or 6 times. pression 2, 3, 4, ou 6 fois.
K573H(B) .. K4803T(B): K573H(B) .. K4803T(B): K573H(B) .. K4803T(B):
4-Pass-Deckel sind standardmäßig 4-pass end covers are monted as stan- Couvercles à 4-pass sont standardement
montiert. Alternative: 2-Pass-Deckel dard. Alternative: 2-pass end covers montés. Alternative: couvercles à 2-pass
Bei allen anderen Geräten kann zwi- At all other devices it can be choosen Chez touts autres appareils on peut
schen 4- oder 2- bzw. 6- oder 3-Pass between 4 or 2 resp. 6 or 3 passes. choissir entre 4 or 2 resp. 6 or 3 passa-
gewählt werden, je nach Kühlmedium- This is determined by the coolant inlet ges. Cela dépend de l’entrée et sortie du
Eintritt und Austritt (Abb. 3). and outlet (see fig. 3). fluide caloporteur (voir fig. 3).
K033N(B) .. K373H(B)
K573N(B) .. K4803T(B) OW781(B) / OW861(B)
OW401(B) / OW501(B)
2 pass 4 pass 2 pass 4 pass 3 pass 6 pass
Abb. 3 Kühlmedium Anschuss-Positionen Fig. 3 Coolant connection positions at the Fig. 3 Positions des raccords du fluide
am Umlenkdeckel end cover caloporteur au couvercle déflecteur
1 2 2a 3a 3b 4a 4b 7 9
Ø Ø 4 pass 2 pass 4 pass 2 pass
K033N(B) 12L 1/2" 10L 3/ "
8 ––– G 1/2 2 x G 1/2 G 1/2 G 3/4 3/ "-18 NPTF
8 –––
K073H(B) 12L 1/2" 10L 3/ "
8 ––– G 1/2 2 x G 1/2 G 1/2 G 3/4 3/ "-18 NPTF
8 –––
K123H(B) 16L 5/8" 12L 1/ "
2 (1 1/4"-12 UNF) G 1/2 2 x G 1/2 G 1/2 G 3/4 3/ "-18 NPTF
8 –––
K203H(B) 16L 5/8" 16L 5/ "
8 (1 1/4"-12 UNF) G 3/4 2 x G 3/4 G 3/4 G1 1
1 /4"-12 UNF –––
K283H(B) 22L 7/8" 22L 7/ "
8 (1 1/4"-12 UNF) G 3/4 2 x G 3/4 G 3/4 G1 1 1/4"-12 UNF –––
K373H(B) 28L 11/8" 22L 7/ "
8 (1 3/4"-12 UNF) G 3/4 2 x G 3/4 G 3/4 G1 1 1/4"-12 UNF –––
K573H(B) 35L 13/8" 28L 11/8" (1 3/4"-12 UNF) G 11/4 G2 G 11/4 G2 1 1/4"-12 UNF –––
K813H(B) 35L 13/8" 28L 1
1 /8" (1 3/4"-12 UNF) G 11/4 G2 G 11/4 G2 1 1/4"-12 UNF –––
K1053H(B) 42L 15/8" 35L 13/8" (1 3/4"-12 UNF) G 11/4 G2 G 11/4 G2 1 1/4"-12 UNF –––
K1353T(B) 42L 15/8" 35L 13/8" (1 3/4"-12 UNF) G 11/4 G2 G 11/4 G2 1 1/4"-12 UNF –––
K1973T(B) 54L 21/8" 42L 15/8" (2 1/4"-12 UNF) G2 DN 65 G2 DN 65 1 1/4"-12 UNF –––
K2923T(B) 54L 21/8" 54L 21/8" (112x112) G2 DN 65 G2 DN 65 1 1/4"-12 UNF –––
K3803T(B) 76L 31/8" 76L 31/8" (140x140) DN 80 DN 100 DN 80 DN 100 1 1/4"-12 UNF –––
K4803T(B) 76L 31/8" 76L 31/8" (140x140) DN 80 DN 100 DN 80 DN 100 1 1/4"-12 UNF –––
OW401(B) 22L 7/8" 22L 7/ "
8 ––– G 3/4 2 x G 3/4 G 3/4 G1 ––– Ø10B
OW501(B) 22L 7/8" 22L 7/ "
8 ––– G 3/4 2 x G 3/4 G 3/4 G1 ––– Ø10B
6 pass 3 pass 6 pass 3 pass
OW781(B) 28L 11/8" 28L 11/8" ––– G1 2xG1 G1 G 11/2 ––– Ø10B
OW941(B) 35L 13/8" 35 13/8" ––– G1 2xG1 G1 G 11/2 ––– Ø10B
1 Kältemittel- bzw. Öl-Eintritt 1 Refrigerant resp. oil inlet 1 Entrée de fluide frigorigène resp. d’huile
2 Kältemittel- bzw. Öl-Austritt 2 Refrigerant resp. oil outlet 2 Sortie de fluide frigorigène resp. d’huile
2a Alternativer Kältemittel-Austritt 2a alternative refrigerant outlet 2a Sortie alternative de fluide frigorigène
3 Kühlmedium-Eintritt 3 Coolant inlet 3 Entrée de fluide caloporteur
3a: 4 oder 6 pass / 3b: 2 oder 3 pass 3a: 4 or 6 pass / 3b: 2 or 3 pass 3a: 4 ou 6 pass / 3b: 2 ou 3 pass
4 Kühlmedium-Austritt 4 Coolant outlet 4 Sortie de fluide caloporteur
4a: 4 oder 6 pass / 4b: 2 oder 3 pass 4a: 4 or 6 pass / 4b: 2 or 3 pass 4a: 4 ou 6 pass / 4b: 2 ou 3 pass
5 Kühlmedium-Ablass 5 Coolant drain 5 Vidage de fluide caloporteur
6 Anschluss für Manometer 6 Connection for pressure gauge 6 Raccord du manomètre
7 Anschuss für Sicherheitsventil 7 Connection for safety valve 7 Raccord du soupape de sûreté
8 Schauglas 8 Sight glass à partir de K203H(B) 11/4"-12 UNF
9 Ölablass 9 Oil drain 8 Voyant
10 Umlenkdeckel, abnehmbar 10 End cover, removable 9 Vidage d’huile
11 untere Befestigungs-Schiene 11 Fixing rail below 10 Couvercle déflecteur, amovible
12 obere Befestigungs-Schiene 12 Fixing rail above 11 Rail de fixation en dessous
12 Rail de fixation en dessus
10 DB-200-1
Anschlüsse Connections Raccords
K033N(B) .. K373H(B) 2 6 12 7 1 4a / 3b
7/16"-20 UNF
TOP
10 8 11 2a 11 10 4b 3a / 3b
K573H(B) & K1053H 2 6 12 7 1 4a

7/16"-20 UNF
OUT
TOP 4 Pass
IN
5 10 8 11 2a 11 10 3a
G 1/4
K1053HB & 8 12 7 1 4a
K1353T(B) .. K4803T(B)
OUT
TOP 4 Pass
IN
5 10 2 6 11 11 2a 10 3a
G 1/4 7/16"-20 UNF
OW401(B) .. OW941(B) 2 6 1 4a / 3b
7/16"-20 UNF G1
TOP OUT
IN
4b 5 10 6 9 10 3a / 3b
G 1 1/2 G 1/4 7/16"-20 UNF G1
DB-200-1 11
5 Inbetriebnahme 5 Commissioning 5 Mise en Service
Der Druckbehälter wurde im Werk als The pressure vessels have been Le réservoir sous pression a été contrôlé
einzelnes Gerät geprüft. Nach der tested in the factory as individual en usine en tant qu'appareil individuel.
Montage muss die Dichtheit der units. After installation it is necessary Après montage, l'étanchéité des raccords
Anschlüsse und des Rohrleitungs- to test again for any leaks of the et du système de tuyauterie doit être
systems erneut geprüft werden. connections and pipe work. recontrôlée.
5.1 Dichtheit prüfen 5.1 Leak testing 5.1 Essai d’étanchéité
Mit getrocknetem Stickstoff Überdruck Test for leaks by pressurizing the pre- Créer une surpression avec de l'azote sé-
erzeugen. Druckbehälter und Leitun- sure vessel and pipes using dry nitro- ché. Rechercher la présence de fuites dans
gen auf Lecks prüfen. gen. le réservoir sous pression et la tuyauterie.
Gefahr! Danger! Danger !

Prüfdruck darf den maximalen Test pressure may not exceed Le timbrage ne doit pas excéder la
Betriebsdruck nicht überschrei- the maximum operating pressure pression maximale de service (voir
ten (siehe Typschild)! (see name plate)! plaque d'identité) !
Sicherheitsvorschriften unbe- Safety regulations have absolu- Exécuter absolument les prescripti-
dingt befolgen (z. B. EN 378 tely to be observed (e. g. EN 378 ons de sécurité (par ex. EN 378 ou
oder äquivalent). or equivalents). équivalente).
5.2 Kältemittel einfüllen 5.2 Refrigerant charging 5.2 Remplissage du fluide frigorigène
• Bevor Kältemittel eingefüllt wird: • Before refrigerant is charged: • Avant le remplissage du fluide frigori-
Kühlmedium-Kreislauf in Betrieb Put the coolant circuit into operati- gène:
nehmen. Das Kühlmedium könnte on. Otherwise the coolant might Mettre le circuit du fluide caloporteur
sonst einfrieren. freeze. en service, sinon celui-ci pourrait geler.
• Flüssiges Kältemittel direkt in den • Charge liquid refrigerant directly • Remplisser le fluide frigorigène liquide
Verflüssiger bzw. Sammler füllen, into the condenser resp. receiver. directement dans le condenseur resp.
bei Systemen mit überflutetem For systems with flooded evapora- le réservoir de liquide. Pour les systè-
Verdampfer evtl. auch in den Ver- tor possibly charge also into the mes avec évaporateur noyé, le rem-
dampfer. evaporator. plissage peut aussi se faire dans l'éva-
porateur.
• Nach Inbetriebnahme kann es not- • After commissioning it may be nec-
wendig werden, Kältemittel zu cessary to add refrigerant: • Après la mise en service, un appoint
ergänzen: While the compressor is running, en fluide frigorigène peut s'avérer
Bei laufendem Verdichter Kälte- charge the refrigerant from the suc- nécessaire: le compresseur étant en
mittel auf der Saugseite einfüllen, tion side, preferably at the evapora- service, introduire le fluide frigorigène
am besten am Verdampfer-Eintritt. tor inlet. du côté aspiration, de préférence à
Gemische müssen als blasenfreie Blends must be take from the l'entrée de l'évaporateur. Les mélanges
Flüssigkeit dem Füllzylinder ent- charging zylinder as "solid liquid". doivent être retirées du cylindre de
nommen werden. remplissage en phase liquide, sans
bulles.
5.3 Kühlmedium 5.3 Coolant 5.3 Fluide caloporteur
In der folgenden Tabelle ist der maxi- The following table lists the maximum Dans le tableau ci-après, sont indiqués
mal zulässige Durchsatz an Kühlme- permitted coolant volume flow. These les débits de fluide caloporteur maximaux
dium aufgelistet. Dieser Wert bezieht values refer to clean, gas-free water admissibles. Ces valeurs se réfèrent à de
sich auf sauberes und gasfreies Was- with a flow velocity of 2.5 m/s. l'eau propre et sans gaz ayant une vites-
ser mit einer Durchfluss-Geschwindig- se de passage de 2,5 m/s.
The pressure vessel can be operated
keit von 2,5 m/s.
with water containing a slight amount Le réservoir sous pression peut être uti-
Der Druckbehälter kann mit gering of solids or gases with a flow speed of lisé avec de l'eau faiblement "chargée" en
feststoff- oder gasbelastetem Wasser up to about 1.5 m/s. However, positive corps solides et en gaz pour une vitesse
bei einer Durchfluss-Geschwindigkeit experience must first have been gai- de passage jusqu'à 1,5 m/s. Pour ceci, il
bis ca. 1,5 m/s betrieben werden. ned from comparable applications. faut disposer de résultats probants ob-
Dazu müssen aus vergleichbaren tenus dans des conditions similaires.
Anwendungen positive Erfahrungen
vorliegen.
12 DB-200-1
Verflüssiger Condensers Condenseurs
Volumen
2 Pass 4 Pass
Typ
Volume max. Durchsatz Druckabfall max. Durchsatz Druckabfall
Type max. flow Pressure drop max. flow Pressure drop
Volume Quantité passée max. Perte de pression Quantité passée max. Perte de pression
Type
l l/s m3/h bar l/s m3/h bar
K033N 0,4 0,38 1,37 0,11 0,19 0,68 0,22
K073H 0,7 0,76 2,74 0,11 0,38 1,37 0,22
K123H 0,9 0,76 2,74 0,15 0,38 1,37 0,28
K203H 1,8 1,78 6,41 0,33 0,89 3,20 0,64
K283H 2,1 2,38 8,56 0,33 1,19 4,28 0,64
K373H 3,1 2,98 10,71 0,40 1,49 5,35 0,78
K573H 5,8 5,09 18,32 0,30 2,31 8,33 0,59
K813H 7,0 6,48 23,32 0,30 3,24 11,66 0,58
K1053H 9,3 6,48 23,32 0,38 3,24 11,66 0,74
K1353T 11,5 8,33 30,00 0,38 4,17 15,00 0,74
K1973T 18,8 12,03 43,32 0,38 6,02 21,66 0,74
K2923T 25,0 17,56 63,22 0,38 8,78 31,61 0,74
K3803T 37,4 23,17 83,40 0,38 11,58 41,70 0,74
K4803T 45,0 29,64 106,70 0,39 14,83 53,40 0,75
K033NB 0,4 0,38 1,38 0,10 0,19 0,69 0,22
K073HB 0,7 0,76 2,75 0,11 0,38 1,38 0,22
K123HB 0,9 0,76 2,75 0,14 0,38 1,37 0,28
K203HB 1,8 1,78 6,42 0,32 0,89 3,21 0,64
K283HB 2,1 2,38 8,56 0,32 1,89 4,28 0,64
K373HB 3,1 2,97 10,71 0,39 1,49 5,35 0,78
K573HB 5,8 5,09 18,32 0,30 2,31 8,33 0,59
K813HB 7,0 6,48 23,34 0,29 3,24 11,66 0,58
K1053HB 9,3 6,48 23,34 0,37 3,24 11,66 0,74
K1353TB 11,5 8,33 30,00 0,37 4,17 15,00 0,74
K1973TB 18,8 12,04 43,33 0,37 6,02 21,66 0,74
K2923TB 25,0 17,56 63,22 0,37 8,78 31,61 0,74
K3803TB 37,4 23,17 83,40 0,37 11,58 41,70 0,74
K4803TB 45,0 29,64 106,80 0,37 14,83 53,40 0,75
Ölkühler Oil coolers Refroidisseurs d’huile

Volumen Öltemp.
Typ
(Eintritt) max. Durchsatz [m3/h] und Druckabfall [bar] bei Kühlmedium-Eintritts- / Austritts-Temperatur
Volume Oiltemp. max. flow [m3/h] and pressure drop [bar] with coolant inlet and outlet temperature
Type
(inlet) Quantité passée max. [m3/h] et perte de pression [bar] à temp. entrée / sortie fluide caloporteur
Volume Temp.
Type
d’huile 15°C / 25°C 27°C / 32°C * 40°C / 50°C 50°C / 60°C
(entrée)
l °C l/s m3/h bar l/s m3/h bar l/s m3/h bar l/s m3/h bar
80 0,42 1,5 0,13 0,61 2,2 0,04 0,19 0,7 0,03 0,11 0,4 0,02
OW401(B) 2,2
100 0,58 2,1 0,25 1,00 3,6 0,1 0,39 1,4 0,12 0,28 1,0 0,06
80 0,53 1,9 0,24 0,81 2,9 0,08 0,25 0,9 0,06 0,14 0,5 0,03
OW501(B) 2,6
100 0,75 2,7 0,45 1,33 4,8 0,2 0,50 1,8 0,22 0,11 1,4 0,13
80 0,75 2,7 0,13 1,14 4,1 0,04 0,36 1,3 0,03 0,19 0,7 0,01
OW781(B) 4,5
100 1,06 3,8 0,25 1,81 6,5 0,1 0,69 2,5 0,12 0,55 2,0 0,07
80 1,00 3,6 0,28 1,53 5,5 0,09 0,47 1,7 0,07 0,28 1,0 0,02
OW941(B) 5,4
100 1,42* 5,1* 0,1* 2,44 8,8 0,22 0,92 3,3 0,22 0,72 2,6 0,15
Standard 4- oder 6-Pass Standard 4 or 6 pass Standard 4 ou 6 pass

* 2- oder 3-Pass * 2 or 3 pass * 2 ou 3 pass
DB-200-1 13
Druckprobe / Probebetrieb Pressure test / Test operation Essai de pression / Mise en service
d'essai
Bei geschlossenen Kühlmedium- A pressure test should be carried out
Kreislauf sollte eine Druckprobe with a closed coolant circuit (maxi- Dans les cas d'un circuit fermé, il est sou-
durchgeführt werden (maximaler mum operating pressure: 10 bar). With haitable de procéder à un essai de pres-
Betriebsdruck 10 bar). Bei offenem an open circuit a short test run is suf- sion (pression de service maximale
Kreislauf genügt ein kurzer Probe- ficient. 10 bar). Dans le cas d'un circuit ouvert,
betrieb. une courte mise en service d'essai suffit.
Achtung – Korrosion! Attention – Corrosion!
! Wenn die Anlage nach

Druckprobe bzw. Probebetrieb
längere Zeit stillsteht, müssen
! If the plant is not operated for a
long time after pressure test
resp. test run, the pipes must be
!
Attention – Corrosion !
Si l'installation reste assez long-
temps à l'arrêt après l’essai de pres-
sion / la mise en service d’essai, les
die Rohre vor Korrosion protected against corrosion by:
tubes doivent être protégés contre
geschützt werden durch:
• pressure test with clean water or la corrosion par:
• Druckprobe mit sauberem Wasser dry gas,
• essai de pression avec de l'eau propre
oder trockenem Gas,
• test run with clean water. ou un gaz sec,
• Probebetrieb mit sauberem
• mise en service d'essai avec de l'eau
Wasser.
If this is not possible, the pipes must propre.
be cleaned:
Wenn dies nicht möglich ist, müssen
Flush pipes and dry them or fill them Si ceci n'est pas possible, les tubes doi-
die Rohre gereinigt werden:
with clean water. See also chapter vent être nettoyés:
Rohre spülen und trocknen oder mit
6.1. Rincer et sécher les tubes ou les remplir
sauberem Wasser befüllen. Siehe
avec de l'eau propre. Voir également cha-
auch Kapitel 6.1.
pitre 6.1.
Running-in time with open cooling Temps de mise en œuvre pour les cir-
Einlauf-Zeit bei offenen Kühl-
circuits (corrosion protection) cuits ouverts (protection anticorrosion)
Kreisläufen (Korrosionsschutz)
Within the first months coolant should Durant les premiers mois, le fluide calo-
Innerhalb der ersten Monate sollte der
constantly flow through the pressure porteur devrait circuler en permanence à
Druckbehälter ständig vom Kühlmedi-
vessel so that a protective layer can travers le réservoir sous pression. Une
um durchströmt werden, damit sich
form. couche de protection peut ainsi se for-
eine Schutzschicht bilden kann.
mer.
While inoperative a low flow rate is
Während Stillstandszeiten genügt ein
sufficient. Un faible débit suffit durant les périodes
geringer Durchfluss.
d'arrêt.
14 DB-200-1
6 Betrieb 6 Operation 6 Fonctionnement
Der Druckbehälter muss regelmäßig The pressure vessel must be regularly Le réservoir sous pression doit être con-
von einem Sachkundigen geprüft wer- inspected by authorized personnel. trôlé régulièrement par une personne
den. Die Prüfintervalle sind von Kälte- The inspection intervals depend on compétente. La périodicité des contrôles
mittel, Kühlmedium und Betriebsweise refrigerant, cooling agent and mode of dépend du fluide frigorigène, du fluide
abhängig. Sie müssen vom Betreiber operation. They must be determined caloporteur et du mode d'exploitation. Elle
festgelegt werden. by the end user. doit être déterminée par l'exploitant.
6.1 Stillstand 6.1 Non-operation 6.1 Périodes d'arrêt
Achtung – Korrosion! Attention – Corrosion! Attention – Corrosion !
! Während des Stillstands die

Kühlmedium-Seite des
Druckbehälters vor Korrosion
! While not operating, the coolant
side of the pressure vessel must
be protected against corrosion.
! Durant les périodes d’arrêt, le côté
fluide caloporteur du réservoir sous
pression doit être protégé contre la
schützen! This applies especially with corrosion.
Insbesondere bei aggressiven aggressive coolants, e.g. Notamment pour les fluides calopor-
Kühlmedien z. B. Brackwasser, brackish water, water containing teurs agressifs comme par ex. eau
Feststoff-belastetes oder Bio- solids or liable to bio-fouling. saumâtre, eau chargée en corps
Fouling-anfälliges Wasser solides ou soumise au bio-fouling.
Außer Betrieb nehmen Decommissioning Mise hors service

Verschmutzungen des Kühlmedium- Any contamination of the coolant pipe Les dépôts dans le système tubulaire du
Rohrsystems sollten vor längeren system should be removed before any fluide caloporteur doivent être retirés
Stillstandszeiten entfernt werden. Dies long periods of non-operation. This avant les arrêts prolongés. Sont con-
gilt insbesondere für organische applies especially in cases of organic cernés avant tout les dépôts organiques
Stoffe und Muschelbefall. Siehe hierzu materials and shell deposits. See et les formations de coquillages. Voir pour
Kapitel 6.2. chapter 6.2. celà chapitre 6.2.
Bei aggressiven Kühlmedien muss With aggressive or corrosive coolants, Pour les fluides caloporteurs agressifs, il
das Rohrsystem gereinigt und an- the pipe system must be cleaned and est recommandé de nettoyer le système
schließend getrocknet oder mit saube- dried or filled with clean water. tubulaire puis de le sécher ou de le rem-
rem Wasser befüllt werden. plir avec de l'eau propre.
6.2 Wartung 6.2 Maintenance 6.2 Maintenance
Die Druckbehälter sind für wartungs- The pressure vessels are designed for Les réservoirs sous pression sont dimen-
freien Betrieb ausgelegt. Dennoch ist maintenance-free operation. However, sionnés pour un service sans entretien. Il
es ratsam, die Rohre des Kühlmedi- it is advisable to clean the coolant est cependant recommandé de nettoyer
ums regelmäßig zu reinigen. Ihre Ver- pipes regularly. The contamination régulièrement les tubes du fluide calopor-
schmutzung ist direkt von der Qualität depends directly on the quality of the teur. L'encrassement est en rapport direct
des verwendeten Kühlmediums ab- coolant used. avec la qualité du fluide caloporteur uti-
hängig. lisé.
• Materials in the coolant in dissol-
• In den Rohren können sich gelöste ved or solid form can be deposited • Des composants solides ou dissous
oder feste Bestandteile des Kühl- in the pipes, e.g. lime, sand, algae dans le fluide caloporteur tels que
mediums absetzen wie Kalk, Sand, or silt. chaux, sable, algues ou limon peuvent
Algen oder Schlick. se déposer sur les tubes.
• Organic materials such as algae
• Organische Stoffe z. B. Algen kön- can build up local elements. In the • Des substances organiques telles que
nen Lokalelemente bilden. Daraus worst case this can lead to pitting. les algues peuvent constituer des élé-
kann im schlimmsten Fall Lochfraß ments locaux. Dans le cas extrême,
• With seawater cooling, shells can
entstehen. une corrosion localisée peut apparaître
also grow on the insides of the
(piqûres).
• Bei Meerwasser-Kühlung können pipes.
auch innen auf die Rohre Muscheln • Avec le refroidissement par eau de
aufwachsen. mer, des coquillages peuvent se déve-
lopper à l'intérieur des tubes.
DB-200-1 15
Reinigung Cleaning Nettoyage
! Kühlmedium kann unter Über- ! Coolant can be under pressure! ! Fluide caloporteur peut être en sur
druck stehen! Serious injuries possible. pression !
Schwere Verletzungen möglich. Release the pressure first! Graves blessures possibles.
Zuerst auf drucklosen Zustand D'abord évacuer la pression !
bringen!

! Kühlmedium kann Haut und ! Coolant can burn the skin and ! Fluide caloporteur peut provoquer
Augen verätzen! eyes! des brûlures aux yeux et à la peau !
Die geeignete Reinigungsmethode Suitable cleaning methods and clea- La méthode de nettoyage appropriée et
und die Reinigungs-Intervalle sind von ning intervals depend on the type and la périodicité du nettoyage dépendent du
Art und Grad der Verschmutzung extent of contamination. type et du degré d'encrassement.
abhängig.
! Reinigungsmittel darf das

Rohrmaterial nicht angreifen! ! Cleaning agents must not react
with the pipe material! ! Le produit de nettoyage ne doit pas
attaquer le matériau des tubes !
• Weiche Ablagerungen • Soft deposits • Dépôts mous
z. B. Algen, Schlick: such as algae or silt: comme par ex. algues, limon:
Vorsichtig abbürsten. Ggf Brush off carefully. Use cleaning Retirer prudemment à la brosse.
Reinigungsmittel verwenden. agent if necessary. Utiliser éventuellement un produit de
Anschließend gut durchspülen. Rinse well afterwards. nettoyage.
Rincer ensuite abondamment.
• Feste Beläge z. B. Kalk, Muscheln: • Solid coatings such as lime or
Spülen mit geeignetem Lösungs- shells: • Dépôts solides
mittel. Rinse with suitable solvent. comme par ex. chaux, coquillages:
Rincer avec un produit dissolvant
Sehr wirkungsvoll und Umwelt The use of citric acid is very effec-
approprié.
freundlich ist die Verwendung von tive and environmentally friendly:
Zitronensäure: - Fill with a 25% citric acid / water L'emploi d'acide citrique est très effica-
- Mit einer wässrigen Lösung aus solution. ce et non polluant:
25-prozentiger Zitronensäure - Allow to react for 24 hours. - Remplir avec une solution aqueuse
befüllen. Occasional circulation by pumping composé de 25% d'acide citrique.
- 24 Stunden einwirken lassen. increases the effect. - Laisser agir pendant 24 heures. Un
Gelegentliches Umpumpen ver- - Afterwards, flush the released transvasement occasionnel renforce
stärkt die Wirkung. materials out of the pressure ves- l'efficacité.
- Anschließend die gelösten Stoffe sel. - Rincer le réservoir sous pression
aus dem Druckbehälter heraus- pour en retirer les composants dis-
spülen. sous.
Verunreinigtes Kühlmedium Umwelt Dispose of contaminated coolant in an Le fluide caloporteur contaminé devra
gerecht entsorgen! ecologically beneficial way! être recyclé de façon adaptée !
16 DB-200-1
6.3 Kältemittel absaugen 6.3 Sucking-off refrigerant 6.3 Retrait du fluide frigorigène
bei Reparatureingriffen oder Außer- for repair work at the condensers or en vue d'une réparation ou de la mise
Betriebnahme der Verflüssiger when decommissioning them hors service des condenseurs
Achtung – Einfriergefahr! Attention – Danger of freezing! Attention – Risque de prise en
! Es muss sichergestellt sein,

dass die Siedetemperatur des
Kältemittels zu jedem Zeitpunkt
! It is necessary to ensure that the
boiling point of the refrigerant is
at all times high enough above
! glace !
Il faut s'assurer que la température
d'ébullition du fluide frigorigène est
ausreichend oberhalb dem the freezing point of the coolant. toujours suffisamment plus élevée
Gefrierpunkt des Kühlmediums For this reason it is essential to que le point de gel du fluide
liegt. observe the following points: caloporteur.
Dazu unbedingt folgende Tenir toujours compte des points
Hinweise beachten: suivants:
Kältemittel möglichst flüssig absaugen Pump-off refrigerant as a liquid if pos- Si possible, aspirer ou pomper le fluide
oder abpumpen. Siedetemperatur des sible. Monitor the boiling point of the frigorigène en phase liquide. Surveiller la
Kältemittels überwachen. Sie darf bei- refrigerant. With water as a coolant, température d'ébullition du fluide frigori-
spielsweise beim Kühlmedium Wasser for example, it may not fall below 4°C. gène. Si le fluide caloporteur est de l'eau,
nicht unter 4°C fallen. elle ne doit pas chuter en-dessous de
If the refrigerant is sucked off as a
4°C.
Wird das Kältemittel gasförmig abge- gas, the coolant circuit must also be
saugt, muss zusätzlich der Kreislauf in operation. The temperature of the Si le fluide frigorigène est aspiré en
des Kühlmediums in Betrieb sein. Die coolant must be monitored where the phase gazeuse, le circuit du fluide
Temperatur des Kühlmediums muss refrigerant is sucked off and increased caloporteur doit être en service. La
am Absaugort überwacht und ggf. ent- if necessary. température du fluide caloporteur doit
sprechend erhöht werden. être surveillée au point d'aspiration et
Dispose the refrigerant in an environ-
rehaussée le cas échéant.
Kältemittel Umwelt gerecht entsorgen. mentally friendly way.
Recycler le fluide frigorigène de façon
adaptée.
6.4 Öl ablassen 6.4 Draining the oil 6.4 Vidage d’huile
bei Reparatureingriffen oder Außer- for repair work at the oil coolers or en vue d'une réparation ou de la mise
Betriebnahme der Ölkühler when decommissioning them hors service des refroidisseurs d’huile
Anlage ausschalten. Wenn möglich Switch off the plant. If possible shut Mettre l’installation hors de service. Si
Kältemittel- und Öl-Leitungen vor und off the refrigerant pipes and oil pipes possible, fermer les tuyaus de fluide frigo-
hinter dem Ölkühler absperren. before and behind the oil cooler. rigène et de l’huile devant et derrière le
refroidisseur d’huile.
! Ölkühler kann unter Druck ste- ! Oil cooler can be under ! Le refroidisseur d’huile peut-être
hen! pressure! sous pression !
Schwere Verletzungen möglich. Serious injuries possible. Graves blessures possible.
Ölkühler zuerst auf drucklosen Release the pressure in the Retirer la pression sur le refroidis-
Zustand bringen! oil cooler! seur d’huile !
Wanne bereithalten. Ölablass-Stopfen Take an oil pan ready. Remove the oil Tenir prête une gouttière à l’huile . Retirer
entfernen. Öl auffangen und Umwelt drain plug. Collect the oil and dispose le bouchon à vidage d’huile. Recueillir
gerecht entsorgen. it in an environmentally friendly way. l’huile et recycler la de façon adaptée.
DB-200-1 17
6.5 Außer Betrieb nehmen 6.5 Decommissioning 6.5 Mise hors service
Im Schadensfall muss der Druckbe- In the case of damage the pressure En cas de sinistre, le réservoir sous pres-
hälter vom Kältesystem getrennt und vessel must be disconnected from the sion doit être déconnecté du système fri-
ausgetauscht werden. Dazu Kältemit- refrigeration system and replaced. For gorifique et remplacé. Pour celà, il faut
tel absaugen und Kühlmedium entfer- this purpose the refrigerant and the retirer le fluide frigorigène et le fluide
nen. coolant must be removed. caloporteur.
Verunreinigte Stoffe Umwelt gerecht Dispose of contaminated fluids in an Les fluides contaminés devront être
entsorgen! environmentally friendly way! recyclé de façon adaptée.
18 DB-200-1
DB-200-1 19
Änderungen vorbehalten / Subject to change / Toutes modifications résérvées 11.00
Bitzer Kühlmaschinenbau GmbH

P. O. Box 240
D-7 10 44 Sindelfingen (Germany)
Tel. +49 (0) 70 31 / 9 32-0
Fax +49 (0) 70 31 / 9 32-1 46+1 47
http://www.bitzer.de • mail@bitzer.de
PSC9717 European Refrigeration Controls Catalogue
Catalog Section 5
Product Bulletin P99
Issue 9705
Series P99
Electronic pressure Transducer
Introduction
The P99 Series Pressure Transducers are
solid-state electronic devices suitable for use
with air, water, non-corrosive refrigerants and
ammonia. The P99 Series features rugged
stainless steel construction in a lightweight and
compact housing. The 1/4" male and female
flare fitting speeds installation and provides
easy pressure port mounting. They can be used
with controllers that can provide a supply
voltage between 15 and 28 V dc, and accept an
input voltage of 0 to 10 V dc, or 4 to 20 mA.
P99 Electronic Pressure Transducer
Typical applications include:
-computer room air conditioning
-commercial refrigeration fixtures
-compressor rack controllers
-food service equipment
Feature and Benefits
q Direct mount Speeds installation and reduces cost
q Lightweight and Compact Allows for mounting by pressure port alone;

no additional hardware required
q Rugged stainless steel Provides durability for use with water,

construction ammonia and most non-corrosive
refrigerants
q Environmentally sealed Prevents problems due to condensation
transducer electronics
q No O-ring seals No parts which are susceptible to leakage
q SMD technology Shock and vibration resistant electronics
q Piezo resistive principle Great longtime stability and highly reliable

pressure sensitive chip
© 1997 Johnson Controls Inc. Catalogue Section 5

Order No. PD-P99-E
P99
2 Issue 9705
Description Important:
Within the P99, a pressure-sensitive chip, All P99 Series Transducers are designed for
(located in a oil-filled cavity between the use only in conjunction with operating controls
stainless steel pressure diaphragm and the Where an operating control failure would result
solid base), converts the sensed pressure to an in personal injury and/or loss of property, it is
electrical signal. the responsibility of the installer to add devices
A signal conditioning chip, also inside the or systems that protect against, or warn of,
transducer, converts the electrical signal control failure.
produced by the pressure sensitive chip to an
Wiring
output signal of 0 to 10 V dc or 4 to 20 mA. This
linear output signal is proportional to the sensed
pressure within the range of the transducer (see
page 2 output curves). The standard models have 2 m shielded cable.
Terminal and wiring identification
Mounting P99 wire

colour
P99V models P99A models
The pressure transducers may be mounted in

any convenient location provided that ambient
Brown VDC (+) VDC(+)
temperature is within -20 to +65 °C. When
there are no severe pulsations and/or vibrations Green COM(-) COM(-)
the models with a female connection may be White sensor output
mounted directly to the machine. When this is
not the case, use models with male connectors. The shield has to be connected to the - (or
These should be connected using a capillary common) terminal of the control.
having a minimum length of 90 cm with a
maximum inside diameter of 1.6 mm.
Gauge pressure output curves

10 20
9
18
8
16
7
Output current (mA)
Output voltage (V)
6 14
5 12
4
10
3
8
2
1 6
0 4
-1 0 5 8 10 15 20 25 30
Gauge pressure (bar)
Fig. 1
P99 models
Gauge pressure VS output curve
Catalogue Section 5 © 1997 Johnson Controls Inc.

Order No. PD-P99-E
P99
Issue 9705 3
Typenumber selection table

Order number Range (bar) Output Connection (style)
P99A-9300 -1 to 8 4 to 20 mA male
P99A-9700 -1 to 8 4 to 20 mA female
P99A-9350 0 to 30 4 to 20 mA male
P99A-9750 0 to 30 4 to 20 mA female
P99V-9300 -1 to 8 0 to 10 V male
P99V-9700 -1 to 8 0 to 10 V female
P99V-9350 0 to 30 0 to 10 V male
P99V-9750 0 to 30 0 to 10 V female
Dimensions (mm)
C
60 23
17
C
60 19
17
Fig. 2
A. Pressure connector male 7/16 - 20 UNF.
B. Pressure connector female 7/16 - 20 UNF.
C. Shielded cable L = 2 meters

Order No. PD-P99-E
P99
4 Issue 9705
Specifications
Low pressure range - 1 to 8 bar
High pressure range 0 to 30 bar
Continuous Low pressure range 12 bar
overpressure High pressure range 45 bar
Pressure connection Male or female 7/16-20 UNF (1/4 inch flare). Female models
have a built-in valve core depressor.
Supply voltage 15 to 28 V dc
Output load P99V models R>2kΩ
P99A models R < (voltage supply -8V)/ 20 mA
Ambient temp. limits - 20 to +65 °C
Medium temp. limits - 40 to +125 °C
Ambient hum. limits 0 to 100 % R.H.
Material Stainless steel 1.4435
IP class IP 65
Accuracy Linearity and hysteresis< ± 0.5% FS
Repeatability < ± 0.1% FS
Stability < ± 0.2% FS
Zero offset (at 25 °C) < ± 0.5% FS
End value (at 25 °C) < ± 0.5% FS
Thermal effect on offset< ± 0,02% FS/K
Thermal effect on gain < ± 0,02% FS/K
Vibration/shock resistance complies with IEC 68
Cable2 meter shielded cable P99V models 3 x 0.15 mm2
P99A models 2 x 0.15 mm2
Shipping weight ind. pack 0.2 kg
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond
these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office or representative. Johnson Controls shall not be liable for damages
resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.
Johnson Controls International, Inc.

Headquarters: Milwaukee, WI, USA
European Headquarters: Westendhof 8, 45143 Essen, Germany
European Factories: Lomagna (Italy), Leeuwarden (The Netherlands) and Essen (Germany)
Branch Offices: Principal European Cities.
This document is subject to change Printed in Europe

Order No. PD-P99-E
Thermo ®-Expansion Valve Series T
Exchangeable Power Assemblies and Orifices
Features
• Modular design for economical logistics and
easy assembly and servicing
• Very good stability is attained because of the
large forces generated by the large diaphragm
diameter
• High quality materials and processes for high
reliability and long lifetime TCLE
• Superior partial load performance due to double
seat orifice design (TJRE, TERE, TIRE & THRE) Type Code TCL E 100 H W 100 WL 10x16
• Biflow capability for applications in heat pumps
• Capillary tube length 1.5 m (TCLE, TJRE) and 3 m Valve Series
(TERE, TIRE & THRE) External Equalizer
• PS: 31 bar, TS: -45 ... +65°C Capacity Code
• No CE marking according art. 3.3 PED 97/23 EC Refrigerant Code
Charge Code
MOP Code
Flange Style
WL = Angle Style
DL = Straight through
Connection
Selection Chart for Orifice
Series R 134a R 22 R 404A/R 507 R 407C Orifice
Type Nominal Type Nominal Type Nominal Type Nominal
Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity
kW kW kW kW
25 MW 1,5 50 HW 1,9 25 SW 1,3 50 NW 2,1 X 22440-B1B
75 MW 2,9 100 HW 3,7 75 SW 2,6 100 NW 4,0 X 22440-B2B
150 MW 6,1 200 HW 7,9 150 SW 5,6 200 NW 8,5 X 22440-B3B
200 MW 9,3 250 HW 11,9 200 SW 8,4 300 NW 12,9 X 22440-B3,5B
TCLE 250 MW 13,5 300 HW 17,3 250 SW 12,2 400 NW 18,7 X 22440-B4B
350 MW 17,3 500 HW 22,2 400 SW 15,7 550 NW 24,0 X 22440-B5B
550 MW 23,6 750 HW 30,4 600 SW 21,5 750 NW 32,9 X 22440-B6B
750 MW 32,0 1000 HW 41,1 850 SW 29,0 1000 NW 44,4 X 22440-B7B
900 MW 37,2 1200 HW 47,8 1000 SW 33,8 1150 NW 51,7 X 22440-B8B
11 MW 45 14 HW 58 12 SW 40 14 NW 62 X 11873-B4B
TJRE
13 MW 57 18 HW 74 14 SW 51 17 NW 80 X 11873-B5B
16 MW 71 22 HW 91 18 SW 63 21 NW 99 X 9117-B6B
19 MW 81 26 HW 104 20 SW 72 25 NW 112 X 9117-B7B
TERE
25 MW 112 35 HW 143 27 SW 99 33 NW 155 X 9117-B8B
31 MW 135 45 HW 174 34 SW 120 42 NW 188 X 9117-B9B
TIRE 45 MW 174 55 HW 223 47 SW 154 52 NW 241 X 9166-B10B
55 MW 197 75 HW 253 61 SW 174 71 NW 273 X 9144-B11B
THRE
68 MW 236 100 HW 302 77 SW 209 94 NW 327 X 9144-B13B
Nominal capacities at +38°C condensing temperature, +4°C Valve selection for other operating conditions see
evaporating temperature (saturated temperatures / dew page 22 - 24.
point) and 1 K liquid subcooling at the inlet of the expansion
valve.
MOP Evaporating Temperature Range °C
Code (bar) R 134a R 22 R 404A R 407C R 507
15 1,0 -45 to -16
35 2,4 -45 to 0 -45 to -15
40 2,8 -45 to -18 -45 to -18
55 3,8 -45 to 11 -45 to -10 -45 to -10
65 4,5 -45 to 0
75 5,2 -45 to -2 -45 to -2
80 5,5 -45 to 0 -45 to 0
100 6,9 -45 to 13 -45 to 14
A2.5.1/0501/E 53
Available upon special request:
• Power assembly with solder connection for
external pressure equalization
• Non-standard MOPs
• Non-standard charges
• Non-standard connection sizes (selection
see page 35)
Type Code XB 1019 H W 100 - 1 B
Power Assembly
Refrigerant Code
Charge Code
MOP Code
Capillary Tube Length
External Equalization
Selection Chart for Power Assemblies and Recommended Flanges

Orifice Connection Power
Standard-Flange, Angle Assembly
Solder/ODF
mm inch
X 22440-B1B
X 22440-B2B C 501 - 5 mm C 501 - 5
X 22440-B3B 10 x 16 3/8 x 5/8
X 22440-B3,5B
X 22440-B4B
X 22440-B5B C 501 - 7 mm C 501 - 7
X 22440-B6B 12 x 16 1/2 x 5/8 XB1019…1 B
X 22440-B7B A 576 mm A 576
X 22440-B8B 16 x 22 (22 x 28 ODM) 5/8 x 7/8 (7/8 x 1 1/8 ODM)
X 11873-B4B 10331 10331
X 11873-B5B 22 x 22 7/8 x 7/8 (1 1/8 x 1 1/8 ODM)
X 9117-B6B
X 9117-B7B 9153 9153
X 9117-B8B 22 x 22 7/8 x 7/8
X 9117-B9B (1 1/8 x 1 1/8 ODM) XC726…2B
X 9166-B10B
X 9144-B11B 9149 9149
X 9144-B13B 22 x 22 7/8 x 7/8 (1 1/8 x 1 1/8 ODM)
Accessories
Type Order-No.
Gasket Set for T Series Valves X 13455 -1 027 579
Ser vice Tool for T Series X 99999 800 005
Heat Transfer Paste Thermal Mastik PS 984 026 650
Joint Sealing ’Leak Lock’ PS 1255 - 7 053 517
Steel Screws for Following Flange Types:
C501 , 9761 , 6346 , A576 Screw ST 32 803 573
9148 , 9149, 9152, 9153, 10331 , 10332 Screw ST 48 803 574
54 A2.5.1/0501/E
Correction Tables for Thermo Expansion Valves,
Series TI, TX6, T and L
Valve selection for operating conditions other than

+38° C/+4° C and 1 K liquid subcooling at the inlet of
the expansion valve:
Q n = Q o x K t x K∆ p
Q n: Nominal valve capacity

Q o: Required cooling capacity
Kt : Correction factor for evaporating and liquid
temperature
K∆p: Correction factor for pressure drop at valve
Liquid Correction Factor Kt

Temperature Evaporating Temperature
entering
R 134a °C
Valve
°C +30 +25 +20 +15 +10 +5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30
+60 1,22 1,25 1,27 1,30 1,33 1,36 1,40 1,44 1,48 1,75 2,08 2,46 2,94
+55 1,14 1,16 1,18 1,21 1,23 1,26 1,29 1,33 1,36 1,60 1,90 2,25 2,68
+50 1,07 1,08 1,10 1,13 1,15 1,17 1,20 1,23 1,26 1,48 1,76 2,07 2,46
+45 1,00 1,02 1,04 1,06 1,08 1,10 1,12 1,15 1,17 1,38 1,63 1,92 2,28
+40 0,93 0,96 0,98 0,99 1,01 1,03 1,05 1,08 1,10 1,29 1,52 1,79 2,12
+35 0,90 0,91 0,92 0,94 0,96 0,97 0,99 1,01 1,03 1,21 1,43 1,68 1,99
+30 0,85 0,86 0,88 0,89 0,91 0,92 0,94 0,96 0,98 1,14 1,35 1,58 1,87
+25 0,82 0,83 0,85 0,86 0,87 0,89 0,91 0,92 1,08 1,27 1,49 1,76
+20 0,80 0,81 0,82 0,83 0,85 0,89 0,88 1,02 1,21 1,41 1,67
+15 0,77 0,78 0,79 0,81 0,82 0,84 0,97 1,15 1,34 1,58
+10 0,75 0,76 0,77 0,78 0,80 0,93 1,09 1,28 1,51
+5 0,73 0,74 0,75 0,76 0,89 1,04 1,22 1,44
0 0,71 0,72 0,73 0,85 1,00 1,17 1,37
-5 0,69 0,70 0,82 0,96 1,12 1,31
-10 0,68 0,79 0,92 1,07 1,26
Correction Factor K∆p

∆p (bar) 0,5 1,0 1,5 2,0 2,5 3,0 3,5 4,0 4,5 5,0 5,5 6,0 6,5 7,0 7,5 8,0
K∆ p 3,50 2,48 2,02 1,75 1,57 1,43 1,32 1,24 1,17 1,11 1,06 1,01 0,97 0,94 0,90 0,88
∆p (bar) 8,5 9,0 9,5 10,0 10,5 11,0 11,5 12,0 13,0 14,0 15,0 16,0 17,0 18,0 19,0 20,0
K∆ p 0,85 0,83 0,80 0,78 0,76 0,75 0,73 0,72 0,69 0,66 0,64 0,62 0,60 0,58 0,57 0,55
For the proper sizing of thermo expansion valves in cases of
subcooling of more than 15 K please use the correction
factors on page 6 of this brochure.
A2.5.1/0501/E 55
Liquid Correction Factor Kt
entering
R 22 °C
Valve
°C +30 +25 +20 +15 +10 +5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40 -45
+60 1,22 1,23 1,24 1,25 1,26 1,28 1,30 1,31 1,38 1,58 1,84 2,16 2,56 3,04 3,55 4,23
+55 1,14 1,15 1,16 1,17 1,19 1,20 1,22 1,23 1,29 1,42 1,72 2,02 2,39 2,83 3,30 3,94
+50 1,08 1,09 1,10 1,11 1,12 1,13 1,15 1,16 1,21 1,39 1,62 1,89 2,24 2,66 3,10 3,68
+45 1,02 1,03 1,04 1,05 1,06 1,07 1,08 1,10 1,15 1,31 1,52 1,79 2,11 2,50 2,91 3,46
+40 0,97 0,98 0,99 1,00 1,01 1,02 1,03 1,04 1,09 1,24 1,45 1,69 2,00 2,37 2,75 3,27
+35 0,92 0,93 0,94 0,95 0,96 0,97 0,98 0,99 1,03 1,18 1,37 1,61 1,89 2,24 2,60 3,09
+30 0,88 0,89 0,90 0,91 0,92 0,93 0,94 0,95 0,99 1,13 1,31 1,55 1,83 2,13 2,47 2,93
+25 0,85 0,86 0,87 0,88 0,89 0,89 0,90 0,94 1,08 1,25 1,46 1,72 2,03 2,36 2,80
+20 0,83 0,83 0,84 0,85 0,86 0,87 0,90 1,03 1,19 1,40 1,64 1,94 2,25 2,66
+15 0,80 0,81 0,81 0,82 0,83 0,87 0,99 1,14 1,34 1,57 1,86 2,15 2,55
+10 0,78 0,78 0,79 0,80 0,83 0,95 1,10 1,28 1,51 1,78 2,06 2,44
+5 0,75 0,76 0,77 0,80 0,91 1,06 1,23 1,45 1,71 1,98 2,34
0 0,73 0,74 0,77 0,88 1,02 1,19 1,39 1,65 1,90 2,25
-5 0,71 0,74 0,85 0,98 1,14 1,34 1,58 1,83 2,17
-10 0,72 0,82 0,95 1,10 1,30 1,53 1,77 2,09
Correction Factor K ∆ p
∆p (bar) 0,5 1,0 1,5 2,0 2,5 3,0 3,5 4,0 4,5 5,0 5,5 6,0 6,5 7,0 8,0 9,0
K∆ p 4,25 3,00 2,46 2,13 1,90 1,74 1,61 1,50 1,42 1,35 1,28 1,23 1,18 1,14 1,06 1,00
∆p (bar) 10,0 11,0 12,0 13,0 14,0 15,0 16,0 17,0 18,0 19,0 20,0 21,0 22,0 23,0 24,0 25,0
K∆ p 0,95 0,91 0,87 0,83 0,80 0,78 0,75 0,73 0,71 0,69 0,67 0,66 0,64 0,63 0,61 0,60
Liquid Correction Factor K t

entering
R 404A °C
Valve
°C +30 +25 +20 +15 +10 +5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40 -45
+60 1,56 1,59 1,64 1,69 1,74 1,81 1,88 1,96 2,06 2,43 2,95 3,56 4,37 5,38 6,71 8,47
+55 1,32 1,35 1,38 1,42 1,46 1,50 1,55 1,61 1,68 1,96 2,36 2,83 3,43 4,16 5,12 6,34
+50 1,16 1,18 1,20 1,23 1,26 1,30 1,34 1,38 1,43 1,67 1,99 2,37 2,85 3,43 4,18 5,14
+45 1,04 1,05 1,07 1,10 1,12 1,15 1,18 1,22 1,26 1,46 1,74 2,05 2,46 2,95 3,57 4,35
+40 0,94 0,96 0,97 0,99 1,02 1,04 1,07 1,09 1,13 1,30 1,55 1,82 2,17 2,59 3,13 3,80
+35 0,87 0,88 0,90 0,91 0,93 0,95 0,97 1,00 1,02 1,18 1,40 1,64 1,96 2,33 2,80 3,38
+30 0,81 0,82 0,83 0,84 0,86 0,88 0,90 0,92 0,94 1,08 1,28 1,50 1,78 2,11 2,53 3,05
+25 0,76 0,77 0,79 0,80 0,82 0,83 0,85 0,87 1,00 1,18 1,39 1,64 1,94 2,32 2,79
+20 0,73 0,74 0,75 0,77 0,78 0,80 0,81 0,94 1,10 1,29 1,52 1,80 2,15 2,58
+15 0,70 0,71 0,72 0,73 0,75 0,76 0,88 1,03 1,21 1,42 1,68 2,00 2,40
+10 0,67 0,68 0,69 0,71 0,72 0,83 0,97 1,13 1,34 1,58 1,88 2,25
+5 0,65 0,66 0,67 0,68 0,78 0,92 1,07 1,26 1,49 1,77 2,11
0 0,63 0,64 0,65 0,75 0,88 1,02 1,20 1,41 1,67 2,00
-5 0,61 0,62 0,71 0,83 0,97 1,14 1,34 1,59 1,90
-10 0,60 0,68 0,80 0,93 1,09 1,28 1,52 1,81
∆p (bar) 0,5 1,0 1,5 2,0 2,5 3,0 3,5 4,0 4,5 5,0 5,5 6,0 6,5 7,0 8,0 9,0
K∆p 4,55 3,21 2,62 2,27 2,03 1,86 1,72 1,61 1,52 1,44 1,37 1,31 1,26 1,21 1,14 1,07
∆p (bar) 10,0 11,0 12,0 13,0 14,0 15,0 16,0 17,0 18,0 19,0 20,0 21,0 22,0 23,0 24,0 25,0
K∆p 1,02 0,97 0,93 0,89 0,86 0,83 0,80 0,78 0,76 0,74 0,72 0,70 0,69 0,67 0,66 0,64
For the proper sizing of thermo expansion valves in cases of
subcooling of more than 15 K please use the correction
factors on page 6 of this brochure.
56 A2.5.1/0501/E
entering
R 407C °C
Valve
°C +30 +25 +20 +15 +10 +5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25
+55 1,20 1,21 1,23 1,26 1,28 1,31 1,34 1,37 1,40 1,63 1,98 2,42
+50 1,10 1,11 1,13 1,15 1,17 1,19 1,22 1,24 1,27 1,48 1,79 2,18
+45 1,02 1,03 1,05 1,06 1,08 1,10 1,12 1,14 1,17 1,35 1,64 2,00
+40 0,95 0,96 0,98 0,99 1,01 1,02 1,04 1,06 1,08 1,25 1,52 1,84
+35 0,89 0,90 0,92 0,93 0,94 0,96 0,98 0,99 1,01 1,17 1,41 1,71
+30 0,85 0,85 0,87 0,88 0,89 0,90 0,92 0,93 0,95 1,10 1,32 1,60
+25 0,81 0,82 0,83 0,84 0,85 0,87 0,88 0,90 1,03 1,25 1,51
+20 0,78 0,79 0,80 0,81 0,82 0,84 0,85 0,98 1,18 1,43
+15 0,75 0,76 0,77 0,78 0,80 0,81 0,93 1,12 1,35
+10 0,73 0,74 0,75 0,76 0,77 0,89 1,07 1,29
+5 0,71 0,72 0,73 0,74 0,85 1,02 1,23
0 0,69 0,70 0,71 0,81 0,98 1,18
-5 0,67 0,68 0,78 0,94 1,13
-10 0,65 0,75 0,90 1,08
∆p (bar) 0,5 1,0 1,5 2,0 2,5 3,0 3,5 4,0 4,5 5,0 5,5 6,0 6,5 7,0 8,0 9,0
K∆p 4,78 3,33 2,72 2,36 2,11 1,92 1,78 1,67 1,57 1,49 1,42 1,36 1,31 1,26 1,18 1,11
∆p (bar) 10,0 11,0 12,0 13,0 14,0 15,0 16,0 17,0 18,0 19,0 20,0 21,0 22,0 23,0 24,0 25,0
K∆p 1,05 1,01 0,96 0,92 0,89 0,86 0,83 0,81 0,79 0,76 0,75 0,73 0,71 0,70 0,68 0,67
Attention: See page 6 for determining of conditions for systems with R 407C.

entering
R 507 °C
Valve
°C +30 +25 +20 +15 +10 +5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40 -45
+60 1,54 1,57 1,61 1,65 1,71 1,76 1,83 1,90 1,98 2,36 2,84 3,44 4,23 5,25 6,61 8,45
+55 1,30 1,33 1,36 1,39 1,43 1,47 1,52 1,57 1,62 1,92 2,29 2,75 3,35 4,11 5,11 6,44
+50 1,15 1,17 1,19 1,22 1,24 1,28 1,31 1,35 1,40 1,64 1,95 2,33 2,81 3,43 4,23 5,29
+45 1,03 1,05 1,07 1,09 1,11 1,14 1,17 1,20 1,23 1,45 1,71 2,04 2,45 2,97 3,64 4,53
+40 0,94 0,96 0,97 0,99 1,01 1,03 1,06 1,08 1,11 1,30 1,53 1,82 2,18 2,63 3,22 3,98
+35 0,87 0,88 0,90 0,91 0,93 0,95 0,97 0,99 1,01 1,18 1,39 1,65 1,97 2,37 2,89 3,56
+30 0,81 0,82 0,83 0,85 0,86 0,88 0,89 0,91 0,93 1,09 1,28 1,51 1,80 2,17 2,63 3,23
+25 0,77 0,78 0,79 0,80 0,82 0,83 0,85 0,87 1,01 1,18 1,40 1,66 1,99 2,42 2,97
+20 0,73 0,74 0,75 0,77 0,78 0,79 0,81 0,94 1,10 1,30 1,54 1,85 2,24 2,74
+15 0,70 0,71 0,72 0,73 0,75 0,76 0,88 1,03 1,21 1,44 1,73 2,09 2,55
+10 0,67 0,68 0,69 0,70 0,72 0,83 0,97 1,14 1,35 1,62 1,95 2,38
+5 0,64 0,65 0,67 0,68 0,78 0,92 1,07 1,27 1,52 1,83 2,23
0 0,62 0,63 0,64 0,74 0,87 1,02 1,20 1,43 1,73 2,10
-5 0,60 0,61 0,70 0,82 0,96 1,14 1,35 1,63 1,98
-10 0,58 0,67 0,78 0,91 1,08 1,28 1,54 1,87
Correction Faktor K ∆ p
∆p (bar) 0,5 1,0 1,5 2,0 2,5 3,0 3,5 4,0 4,5 5,0 5,5 6,0 6,5 7,0 8,0 9,0
K∆p 4,63 3,27 2,67 2,31 2,07 1,89 1,75 1,64 1,54 1,46 1,40 1,34 1,28 1,24 1,16 1,09
∆p (bar) 10,0 11,0 12,0 13,0 14,0 15,0 16,0 17,0 18,0 19,0 20,0 21,0 22,0 23,0 24,0 25,0
K∆p 1,03 0,99 0,94 0,91 0,87 0,85 0,82 0,79 0,77 0,75 0,73 0,71 0,70 0,68 0,67 0,65
For the proper sizing of thermo expansion valves in
cases of subcooling of more than 15 K please use the
correction factors on page 6 of this brochure.
A2.5.1/0501/E 57
Flanges for Valves
Angle Style Flange Straight Through Flange
Angle Style Straight Through Connections for

Type Order Type Order mm inch Valve
No. No. Solder ODF Solder ODM Solder ODF Solder ODM Series
C 501 -4 803 230 — — 3/8 x 1/2 —
C 501 - 4 MM 803 231 10 x 12 — — — TCLE
C 501 -5 803 232 9761 -3 803 240 — — 3/8 x 5/8 — ZZCE
C 501 - 5 MM 803 233 9761 - 3 MM 803 241 10 x 16 — — — LCLE
C 501 -7 803 234 9761 -4 803 350 — — 1/2 x 5/8 — 935 A-G
C 501 - 7 MM 803 235 9761 - 4 MM 803 243 12 x 16 — — — CPHE 1
— — 6346 - 17 803 330 16 x 22 — 5/8 x 7/8 — CPHE 2
A 576 803 238 — — — — 5/8 x 7/8 7/8 x 1-1/8
A 576 - MM 803 239 — — 16 x 22 22 x 28 — —
TJRE
ZZJRE
10331 803 338 10332 803 324 22 x 22 — 7/8 x 7/8 1-1/8 x 1-1/8 LJRE
935 K
CPHE 3
TERE
TIRE
ZZERE
ZZIRE
9153 803 244 9152 803 286 — — 7/8 x 7/8 1-1/8 x 1-1/8 LERE
9153 MM 803 245 9152 MM 803 287 22 x 22 28 x 28 — LIRE
CPHE 3,5
CPHE 4
CPHE 5
THRE
9149 803 284 9148 803 283 22 x 22 — 7/8 x 7/8 1-1/8 x 1-1/8
CPHE 6
68 A2.5.1/0501/E
Dimensions TCLE
Angle Style Flanges TCLE

Connections Lay-in length Weight
Inlet Outlet A B C D E F G H kg
3/8 1/2 SAE 106 78 39 29
3/8 5/8 SAE 106 29
1/2 5/8 SAE 113 35
10 12 ODF 14 17 105 77 37 27 1,1
10 16 ODF 14 21 105 80 40 30 -
12 16 ODF 18 21 108 80 40 -
16 22 ODF 21 25 124 90 51 43 27 29
3/8 1/2 ODF 14 17 105 77 37 27
3/8 5/8 ODF 14 21 105 80 40 27 1,1
1/2 5/8 ODF 18 21 108 80 40 30
5/8 7/8 ODF 21 25 124 90 51 34 43 27 29 1,2
Straight Through Flanges TCLE
3/8 1/2 SAE 45 50
3/8 5/8 SAE 45 55 10 1,2
1/2 5/8 SAE 95 50 55
10 12 ODF 8 10 40 31
10 16 ODF 8 13 41
12 16 ODF 10 13 41
3/8 1/2 ODF 8 10 36 40 17 9
3/8 1/2 ODF 8 13 95 41 31 1,1
1/2 1/2 ODF 10 40
1/2 5/8 ODF 10 13 41
1/2 7/8 ODF 19 97 49
5/8 5/8 ODF 13 41
5/8 7/8 ODF 13 19 95 41 49 33 10
5/8 1-18 ODF 13 60
5/8 1-18 ODF 19 13 98 49 60 1,15
Dimensions TJRE
Angle Style Flanges TJRE

Inlet Outlet A B C D E F G kg
22 22 ODF 19 19 140 85 51 93 59 29 1,3
Straight Through Flanges TJRE
7/8 7/8 ODF 19 19 137 51 45 75 15 56 29 1,4
Dimensions TERE, TIRE, THRE
Angle Style Flanges Type 9153, 9153-MM for TERE, TIRE

Inlet Outlet A B C D E F G kg
22 22 ODF 19 19 140 92 59 23 1,4
7/8 7/8 ODF 19 19 140 92 59 25 1,4
Angle Style Flanges Type 9149 for THRE 87 51
22,2 22,2 ODF 19 19 154 106 73 25 1,45
7/8 7/8 ODF 19 19 154 106 73 25 1,45
Straight Through Flanges Type 9152 for TERE, TIRE
22,2 22,2 ODF 19 19 139 1,5
7/8 7/8 ODF 19 19 139 1,5
Straight Through Flanges Type 9148 for THRE51 45 74 16,5 58 25
22,2 22,2 ODF 19 19 139 1,45
7/8 7/8 ODF 19 19 139 1,45
25,4
PSC9717 European Refrigeration Controls Catalogue
Catalog Section 2
Product Bulletin P27
Issue 9705
System 27 NOVA
Modular Electronic Pressure Control System
Introduction
System 27 NOVA is a family of modern modular
electronic modules designed for a wide variety
of control configurations in refrigeration,
heating, ventilation, air-conditioning and other
related fields.
The pressure control modules can be used as a

stand alone device or together with other
modules, such as, stage modules, display
modules, signal converter modules, etc., to System 27 NOVA Modular
achieve a diverse number of single or Pressure Controls
multistage applications.
Typical applications are:

- high pressure alarm
- condenser fan cycling
- compressor control
Description
The modular concept was specially designed to
make control configuration easier and still offer
the flexibility necessary to answer the many
individual control requirements encountered
today.
Feature and Benefits
q Modular design Provides the flexibility to realise the required

control set up without redundancy and makes
future expansion easy.
q “Plug-in” quick connector Eliminates wiring between modules and
wiring system reduces installation cost.
q Adjustable differential and set Provides flexibility to match any combination
high/set low setting of heating or cooling applications.
q Various pressure sensors are Matches various applications.
available
q Attractive DIN-rail mount Easy and quick to install.
housing
q Setpoint shift output function Modules can be used for “multiple setpoint”
applications.

Order No. PD-P27-E
P27
2 Issue 9705
The System 27 NOVA family includes the

following modules:
P27 Pressure Control Modules P99 Pressure Sensor
These one- or two-stage

pressure control modules
can be used as a low cost
control for stand alone
applications, or as the
primary control module for Two pressure ranges and male or female
multiple stage applications. connection styles are available. For detailed
For this type of applications information please refer to the P99 Pressure
one or more stage modules Sensor bulletin.
can be connected to the
Note
pressure control module very easy by using the
quick connector system.
S27 Stage Modules These controls are designed for use only
as operating controls. Where an operating
If multi-stage control is control failure would result in personal
required one or more stage injury or loss of property it is the
modules can be hooked up responsibility of the installer to add
easily to a P27 pressure devices or systems that protect against, or
control module, simply by warn of, control failure.
using the included quick
Application examples
connector. A maximum of 4
four stage modules can be
connected to a pressure
control module. At page 5 to 7 you will find some applications
examples. For more detailed information about
wiring and adjustment reference should be
D27P Pressure Display Modules made to the installation sheet
Repair and replacement

A display module Repair of the System 27 NOVA modules is not
connected to a pressure advisable. In case of a defective or improperly
control module gives a functioning module, check with you nearest
digital indication of the supplier. When contacting the supplier for a
measured pressure or replacement just state the type/model number
setpoint. It is also possible which can be found on the data plate of the
to connect a sensor directly module.
to the D27P for pressure
read-out.
Y27M Signal Converter
This module converts a

voltage input signal to a
standardised output signal
of 0 to 10 Vdc or
4 to 20 mA. The input signal
can either be obtained from
a pressure sensor or a
pressure control module.
The signal converter can be
used for those applications
where an analogue output is required. Such as;
to a motor, motor actuated valve, recorder etc.

Order No. PD-P27-E
P27
Issue 9705 3
Accessories dim. in mm
30 25
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
WRE027N600 PLG020N003
Quick Connector for connecting System 27 Plastic plug for concealed setting
NOVA modules.
Dimensions (mm)
C
60 23
17
A
118
45
83
C
27
60 19
17
12 5
43 20
53 70
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
System 27 NOVA Modules P99 pressure sensors
A. Pressure connection male 7/16 - 20 UNF
B. Pressure connection female 7/16 - 20 UNF
C. Shielded cable

Order No. PD-P27-E
P27
4 Issue 9705
Type Number Selection Table

One Stage Pressure switch
Order Power Setpoint Diff. (bar) Additional

number supply range (bar)
P27A1N11 24 V ac/dc -1 to 8 0.1 to 3.5 * Mode: field adjustable
P27A1N12 24 V ac/dc 0 to 30 0.5 to 7 * SPDT contact 10(5)A 250 V ac
P27A2N11 230 V ac -1 to 8 0.1 to 3.5
P27A2N12 230 V ac 0 to 30 0.5 to 7
Two stage pressure switch
Order Power Setpoint ∆ setpoint Additional features

number supply range (bar) between
stage
P27A1N21 24 V ac/dc -1 to 8 0 to 2 * 2 x SPDT contact 10 (5) A 250 V ac
P27A1N22 24 V ac/dc 0 to 30 0 to 4 * Differential: 0.1 to 3.5 bar
P27A2N21 230 V ac -1 to 8 0 to 2 * Mode: field adjustable
P27A2N22 230 V ac 0 to 30 0 to 4
Stage module
Order Power supply Additional features

number
S27P1 24 V ac/dc * Mode: field adjustable
S27P2 230 V ac * 2x SPDT contact 10(5)A 250V ac
* ∆ Setpoint: 0 to 4 bar
* Differential: 0.1 to 3.5 bar
* Quick connector is included
Pressure display module
Order Power supply Quick connector Additional features

number incl.
D27P1N3 24 V ac no * Can be used as stand alone or in conjunction with
D27P2N3 230 V ac no a pressure switch
* Range -1 to 8/0 to 30 bar
* Setpoint read-out
Y27M Signal Converter
Order number Power supply Setpoint range (Vdc) Span range (Vdc)
Y27M1 24 V ac 0 to 10 0 to 10
Y27M2 230 V ac 0 to 10 0 to 10
Pressure sensors
Order number Range (bar) Output (V) Connection (style) Additional features
P99V-9300 -1 to 8 0 to 10 male * can be used with all media
P99V-9700 -1 to 8 0 to 10 female * no O- ring seals or ceramics
which are susceptible to leak
P99V-9350 0 to 30 0 to 10 male * IP 65
P99V-9750 0 to 30 0 to 10 female * stainless steel housing

Order No. PD-P27-E
P27
Issue 9705 5
Wiring & Adjustments

One-stage Pressure switch Two-stage Pressure switch
P27AxN1x P27AxN2x
A B C S R
A B C S R
Mode Mode
selector selector
on
Diff.
on
Mode
Diff.
selector
off Setp.
on off
A B C S R Setpoint Setpoint
off
Diff.
A B C S R Setp.
Diff.
off
1 2
Diff.
Setpoint off stage
off on
Diff.
on
1 2
on stage
3 4 5 1 2 6 7 8
3 4 5 1 2
Pressure Display module Stage Pressure switch

D27PxN3 P27AxN3x
Mode Mode
selector selector on
A B C S R
Diff.
on
Diff.
Setpoint from the Setpoint from off
thermostat the thermostat Setp.
When using the off Setp.
quick connector off Setp.
Diff.
To read out a Setp.

pressure switch off
Diff.
on 1 2
A B C S
stage
When using the on
terminal blockto 1 2
read out a pressure
switch or a sensor stage
3 4 5 1 2 6 7 8
Low pressure
range -1 to 8 bar
1 2 High pressure
range 0 to 30 bar

Order No. PD-P27-E
P27
6 Issue 9705
Dual Stage Module Signal Converter Module

S27A4
Y27M
Mode Mode
selector selector
on Common
Vo ltage o ut put
Diff.
on Current o ut put
Diff.
off Setp.
off A B C MN
A B C S Setpoint Setpoint
Setp. off
Diff.
off
1 2
Diff.
stage
on S pa n adj.
20 mA /10V
on DA RA
1 2
Outp ut
stage
A B C M N
4 mA/0 V
Input
3 4 5 1 2 6 7 8
Re verse actin g 1 2 20 mA /10V
20 mA/10V
put
Outpu
Out t
4 mA /0V
S etp oint Input
4 mA/0V a dj.
Direct act in g

Order No. PD-P27-E
P27
Issue 9705 7
Applications
Two stage pressure control with Three stage pressure control
read-out
A B C S R A B C S R
A B C S R A B C S
3 4 5 1 2 6 7 8 3 4 5 1 2
3 4 5 1 2 6 7 8 1 2
~
~ 0
0
Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3
Stage 1 Stage 2
Four stage pressure control with read-out
A B C S R A B C S
3 4 5 1 2 6 7 8 3 4 5 1 2 6 7 8 1 2
~
0
Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 4

Order No. PD-P27-E
P27
8 Issue 9705
Specifications
General System 27 NOVA
Outtput relay rating SPDT 10(5)A 250 V ac 10 A 30 V dc
Operating ambient -10 to +50 °C
temperature
Storage temperature -40 to +70 °C
Operating (storage) R.H. 10 to 90 % R.H. (non condensing)
Terminals screw type max. wire thickness 2,5 mm2
Power supply 230 V ac ; 50/60 Hz
24 V ac/dc ; 50/60 Hz
Additional specification for display modules

Power supply 230 V ac +10% / -15% ; 50/60 Hz
24 V ac +10% / -15% ; 50/60 Hz
Resolution 0.1 bar
Accuracy ± 0.3 bar
Signal converter
Power supply 230 V ac +10% / -15% ; 50/60 Hz
24 V ac +10% / -15% ; 50/60 Hz
Output load voltage output Rmin = 1 k Ω
current output Rmax = 500 Ω
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond
these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office or representative. Johnson Controls shall not be liable for damages
resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.
Johnson Controls International, Inc.

Headquarters: Milwaukee, WI, USA
European Headquarters: Westendhof 8, 45143 Essen, Germany
European Factories: Lomagna (Italy), Leeuwarden (The Netherlands) and Essen (Germany)
Branch Offices: Principal European Cities.
This document is subject to change Printed in Europe

Order No. PD-P27-E
Technical specification
Reference number : 120,10,045-046/ZG
System : S1 / S2
Fan:
Make : SALOR
Type : VM-1000-10-4/8
Air quantity : 54000/27931 m3/h
Static/total pressure : 400/107 615/164 Pa
Fan speed : 1760/880 rpm
Power consumption : 13/1,92 kW
Impeller blade angle : 12 grd
Electric motor:
Make : A.B.B.
Type :
Current supply : 3x440 60 Volt / Hz
Motor power : 15,6/2,8 kW
Motor speed : 1760/880 rpm
Nominal current : 28,5/9,5 Amp
Starting current : 199,5/36,1 Amp
Frame size : 160 IEC
Mounting arrangement : B3
Protection class : IP55
Isolation class : ISO F
Bearing type DE : 6309 2Z/C3
Bearing type NE : 6209 2Z/C3
Motor : According to LRS

System : S3
Fan:
Make : SALOR
Type : HU 400-10-2
Air quantity : 5000 m3/h
Static/total pressure : 550/622 Pa
Fan speed : 3420 rpm
Power consumption : 1,64 kW
Electric motor:
Make : A.B.B.
Type :
Motor power : 1,75 kW
Motor speed : 3420 rpm
Nominal current : 3,4 Amp
Starting current : 20,1 Amp
Frame size : 90 IEC

System : S4
Fan:
Make : SALOR
Type : HU 315-10-2
Electric motor:
Make : A.B.B.
Type :
Frame size : 63 IEC

System : S6
Fan:
Make : SALOR
Type : HU 315-10-2
Electric motor:
Make : A.B.B.
Type :
Frame size : 90 IEC

System : S6
Fan:
Make : SALOR
Type : HU 315-10-2
Electric motor:
Make : A.B.B.
Type :
Frame size : 90 IEC

System : E-9.1 & E-9.2
Fan:
Make : SALOR
Type : HU 400-10-2
Electric motor:
Make : A.B.B.
Type :
Frame size : 90 IEC

System : E10
Fan:
Make : SALOR
Type : VM 400-10-2
Electric motor:
Make : A.B.B.
Type :
Frame size : 90 IEC

System : E-19.1 & E-19.2
Fan:
Make : SALOR
Type : HUEX 400-10-2
Electric motor:
Make : A.B.B.
EX-Class : EEXDE IIB T4
Frame size : 90 IEC

AXIAL FLOW FANS MARINE DESIGN
The SALOR Axial Flow Fans have a wide performance

spectrum combined with high efficiencies. They also combine a Drive
high pressure with a low hub ration.
The blade angle of the SALOR Axial Flow Fans are adjustable in The drive is direct and is guaranteed by IEC standard motors
rest and the fans have a short delivery time. conform:
- Foot mounted, B3;
The following description is valid for all SALOR Axial Flow - Protective system, IP55;
Fans: - Insultation Class F, temperature rise class B;
- All shipping classifications, with makers test certificate.
Impeller
The steel wire armoured motor cable is led through the fan
The impeller is characterized by an optimum hub ratio, is driven casing and connected in an external terminal box.
directly, and has carefully profiled blades taking advantage of
the latest aerodynamic data. Connections
The blades are die-cast in an extremely corrosion and wear
resistant aluminium alloy, and can be adjusted in angle while The external terminal box means fast and reliable connections.
stationary (to prevent overloading consult one of our technical Circuits diagrams will be found in side the cover of the terminal
offices before making blade angle adjustments). box.
Casing On request
The modular system of construction allows rational and On request the following extra’s can
3 be delivered:
economic production. The flanges are rolled on the deepdrawed - Air capacities up to 200,000 m /hr;
sheet steel casing. The sturdy motor base is welded on. The - Non standard voltages or frequencies;
whole casing is delivered in hot dipped galvanised steel. - Explosion proof motor and execution;
- Accessories;
S A IL
’ T
DON UT US
O
WITH
SELECTION + TECHNICAL DATA
O
S d
D2 O
KO
D1 O
Volume* m³/hr 1,500 4,000 8,000 10,000 12,000 18,000 20,000 25,000 40,000 60,000
Pressure* Pa 250 300 300 400 350 260 300 350 350 350
FAN TYPE HU 30 HU 40 HU 40 HU 50 HU 60 HU 70 HU 80 HU 80 HU 90 HU 100
Motor power kW 0.55 1.1 2.2 3 4 3 4 5.5 11 18.5

Motor speed RPM 2,800 2,800 2,800 2,800 2,800 1,450 1,450 1,450 1,450 1,450
Electrical supply** V / Hz 3x400/50 “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “
Weight Kg 20 27 36 42 55 85 110 140 190 340
Dimensions D1 Ø (mm) 317 402 402 502 602 713 804 804 909 1,005
D2 Ø (mm) 403 488 488 600 700 811 928 928 1,033 1,129
K Ø (mm) 356 438 438 541 648 755 860 860 971 1,080
d Ø (mm) 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5
Number of Holes 12 12 12 12 16 16 16 16 16 16
L (mm) 300 350 350 400 500 500 650 650 800 800
S (mm) 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 5
* Other capacities and pressures are possible, ** Other voltages and frequencies on request.
owing to adjustable fanblades
HEINEN & HOPMAN ENGINEERING B.V.

ZUIDWENK 45 - 3751 CB BUNSCHOTEN - THE NETHERLANDS
P.O. BOX 9 - 3750 GA BUNSCHOTEN - THE NETHERLANDS
TEL. : +31- (0)33-299 25 00 - FAX: +31-(0)33-299 25 99
e-mail: info@heinenhopman.com - www.heinenhopman.com
MOUNTING – OPERATION – MAINTENANCE OF AXIAL FANS
GENERAL
HU axial fans are one unit, consisting of the fan section and the motor.
Every axial fan is assembled using components originating from series
production.
It is allowed to leave the factory only after a thorough trial run and is
accurately set to the indicated specifications.
Check the consignment immediately upon receipt and make sure that
the forwarder confirms any damage due to transport. If mounting is not
made at once, please store the fans in a clean and dry place, free from
the possibility of impact damage.
MOUNTING
It is of vital importance to check the following points prior to mounting:

Have there been any changes in the system, in which the fan has to do
its job, in the period between the date of ordering and the date of
delivery?
Is the motor of the right type for the temperature prevailing in the room
concerned?
Has it been verified that the fan, when it rests, is not affected too
strongly by radiation heat?
Has it been checked, whether the fan shows an axial suction on the
suction side?
Has it been checked that certain components in the air stream of a
corrosive or explosive nature or containing dust or sand are rendering it
necessary to take special precautions?
Changes in the position or angle of the blades should only be made in

consultation with the manufacturer.
When mounting or dismounting the fanwheel, make sure that impact or

blows do not damage the motor shaft. In any case a pull-on and pull-off
device should be used. To this effect, the hub of the fanwheel is
provided with two threaded holes.
Prior to connecting the motor, it has to be checked by hand, whether

the turning fanwheel does touches the motor housing (fan housing)
in any place.
1
When mounting the fan, the arrows, indicated on the outside of the
motor housing (fan housing), are to be observed. They indicate the
direction of the air stream and the direction of the rotation of guide plate
and fanwheel.
OPERATION
Connection to be made in accordance with the rating plate on the motor and
as per the connecting diagram (in the terminal box of the fan).
Each motor has to be connected to the source of current through a triple-pole

motor-switch. The overload protection is to be set to the nominal current.
After the fan has been put in operation, the current consumption should be
checked and compared with the values mentioned on the rating plate.
MAINTENANCE
The motors are provided with pre-lubricated roller bearings. Depending on the
speed, this lubrication will last for the under-mentioned numbers of service
hours:
Size n = 3000 rpm n = 1750 rpm n = 1000 rpm n = 750 rpm

Lubrication
After (hours)
56 20.000 20.000 20.000 20.000

63 20.000 20.000 20.000 20.000
71 20.000 20.000 20.000 20.000
80 17.000 20.000 20.000 20.000
90 16.000 20.000 20.000 20.000
100 12.000 20.000 20.000 20.000
112 12.000 20.000 20.000 20.000
132 7.000 17.000 20.000 20.000
160 6.000 15.000 20.000 20.000
180 4.000 11.000 18.000 20.000
200 3.000 9.000 15.000 20.000
225 3.000 9.000 15.000 20.000
250 2.500 8.000 14.000 20.000
In case of more intensive service, it is advisable to clean the bearings and to

refill them with new grease.
Depending on the working conditions, the fanwheels should be inspected from

time to time to check the progress of wear.
2
As a result of accumulations of dirt in the fan housing or on the motor housing,
the output of the fan and the evacuation of the motor heat can be seriously
affected, therefore these housings should be cleaned on regular intervals,
depending on service conditions.
As you can see for yourself, the HU axial fans require only negligible care and
maintenance for trouble-free-service. Nevertheless should you need any spare
parts, please refer to the data mentioned on the rating plates.
ADJUSTMENT OF BLADE ANGLE
On the hub every fanwheel there is a mark near each blade, from where this
blade has to be adjusted. Besides: the following blade angles are mentioned
on each blade:
5 – 10 – 15 – 20 – 25 degrees
For adjustment of the blade angle proceed as follows:
-Place the fanwheel on a flat and solid underlay

-Set the gauge on the hub at zero
-Loosen the nuts securing the blade
-Place the gauge at the end of the blade against the outer points of the blade
and place it in the right position by means of light hammer blows
(use a rubber hammer)
-Tighten the nuts and re-check the angle
A gauge is available at Harderwijk
3
MAINTENANCE AND INSTALLATION PROCUDURES FOR ROTOR
NL. SQUIRREL CAGE ELECTRIC INDUCTION MOTORS
STORAGE
GENERAL
When motors have been out of use for a long time it is advisable to check the
insulation resistance before starting up. When the insulation resistance is
lower than 30 M.ohm measured with a megger voltage of 1000 V, it is
advisable to dry the motor windings first.
GUARANTEE CONCERNING STORAGE

(In case of special guarantee conditions)
The special guarantee conditions of Rotor b.v. are only valid when:
-the storage procedure, specified by Rotor b.v.,
-the guarantee form is filled in and sent to rotor b.v.
INSTALLATION
MOTOR POSITION
Install the motor in a position, which is dry, cool and as clean as possible, and
keep the cooling inlet air unobstructed.
POWER TRANSMISSION
The power of the motor can be transferred to the driven installation by means
of elastic coupling, V-belt transmission or mounted directly on the shaft. A very
accurate alignment increases the lifetime of the bearings. When a large
diameter load is directly mounted on the shaft, “rotational forces” should be
expected on the bearing outer ring. Discussions with Rotor b.v. are advisable
in such cases. When the load or coupling is directly mounted on the shaft,
without using a taper-lock, they should be fitted using the tapped hole in the
end of the shaft and a suitable bolt.
DIRECTION OF ROTATION
The motors can be used in either direction of rotation. The direction of rotation
can be changed by exchanging two of the three wires of the power supply.
Reduced noise level motors can only be used for one direction of rotation,
which is indicated by an arrow on the motor.
4
MAINTENANCE
GENERAL
The motors do not need much maintenance. Just keep the surface and the air
inlet clean because it is necessary for good cooling.
GREASING
The bearings are greased with LITHIUM based grease. Motors running under
extremely high or low temperatures should have special bearings and/or
grease as advised by Rotor b.v.
PRE-GREASING PROCEDURES
A) Frame sizes I.E.C. 63-132: Not re-greasable, standard provided with 2Z
bearings.
For motors frame sizes 63 to 132 bearings 2Z in class C3 are standard. The
theoretical life time of the bearings is about double the specified re-greasing
periods of open bearings on the attached sheet.
Note:
If open bearings are used the necessary grease quantities can be taken from
the attached sheet and the motor needs to be dismantled.
B) Frame sizes I.E.C. 160-280: Re-greasable, automatic grease relief can be built
in as an option.
For motors frame sizes 160 to 280 open bearings in class C3 are standard.
The motors have grease nipples and waste grease chambers.
Note:
Eex-motors are only allowed to be re-greased when they are equipped with
automatic grease relief. In all other cases for Eex-motors the grease nipples
are removed and the motors must be re-greased according to the method
described in “D”.
C) Frame sizes I.E.C. 315-355: Re-greasable with standard automatic grease

relief.
For motors frame sizes 315-355 open bearings in class C3 are standard. The
motors have grease nipples and an automatic grease relief.
D) Removal of old and waste grease.

For motors frame I.E.C. 160-280 without automatic grease relief, the old and
waste grease must be removed by taking off the bearings and/or motor end-
shield, clean the bearings and the grease chamber and refill the bearing 1/3
with new grease. To prevent overfilling and consequently overheating of the
bearings, this should be done after 2 or 3 times re-greasing according to
attached specification.
For motors frame sizes I.E.C. 160-355 with automatic grease relief then the
outlet coverplate (if appliable) has to be removed when re-greasing and
replaced after one hour running.
5
A. STANDARD: NON-RE-GREASEBLE-2Z BEARINGS
Frame Bearing size period-hours Quantity of grease

IEC in bearing location
DE NDE n=rev./min. in grams
Driven non driven
End end n>3600 n>1800 n>1200
63 6201 6201 15.000 30.000 30.000 1.5

71 6202 6202 15.000 30.000 30.000 2.0
80 6204 6204 15.000 30.000 30.000 3.5
90 6205 6205 15.000 30.000 30.000 4.0
100 6206 6206 15.000 30.000 30.000 6.0
112 6306 6306 10.000 20.000 30.000 7.0
132 6308 6308 10.000 20.000 30.000 10.5
B. STANDARD: RE-GREASABLE, NOT AUTOMATIC RELIEF, OPEN BEARINGS
160 6309 6309 6.000 12.000 18.000 13

180 6310 6310 5.500 11.000 16.000 15
200 6312 6312 4.000 8.500 13.000 20
225 6315 6315 2.500 6.000 9.000 23
225* NU315 - 1.250 3.000 4.500 23
250 6315 6315 2.500 6.000 9.000 23
250* NU315 - 1.250 3.000 4.500 23
280 6316 6316 1.750 4.000 6.000 30
280* NU316 - 1.000 2.200 3.500 23
C. STANDARD: RE-GREASABLE, AUTOMATIC RELIEF, OPEN BEARINGS
315 6316M 6316M 1.500 - - 33

315* NU316 - 750 - - 33
315 6320 6320 - 3.500 6.000 50
315* NU320 - - 2.000 3.000 50
355 6322 6322 - 3.300 5.500 60
355* NU322 - - 1.800 2.700 60
* = alternative
According to specifications of bearing and grease producers (Nov. 1989).
6
STANDARD SHAFT THRUST (KG)
I.E.C. 3000rpm 1500rpm 1000rpm 750rpm

Motor type radiaal axiaal radiaal axiaal radiaal axiaal radiaal axiaal
3AP63-s 16 8 16 8 - - - -
3AP63 15 7 15 7 - - - -
3AP71-s 14 7 14 - 14 7 - -
3AP71 12 6 12 6 12 6 15 8
3AP80-s 27 13 27 13 26 13 27 13
3AP80 26 13 26 13 26 13 26 13
3AP90S 26 13 26 13 26 13 22 11
3AP90L 22 11 22 11 22 11 22 11
1AP100L-s - - 65 48 - - - -
1AP100L 55 32 65 48 80 61 83 65
AP100L-s - - 80 50 - - - -
AP100L 70 32 77 48 95 61 104 67
AP112M-s 75 40 - - 107 70 120 84

AP112M 72 38 83 54 100 68 114 82
AP132S 128 70 158 108 184 133 200 149

AP132M 120 65 150 103 174 125 191 144
1F160M.MK 100 60 150 60 150 60 150 60

1F160L 100 60 150 60 150 60 150 60
F180M 140 60 220 60 - - - -

F180L - - 220 60 220 60 220 60
F200L-LK 180 60 260 60 260 60 260 60
F225S - - 300 70 - - 300 70

F225M 220 70 300 70 300 70 300 70
F250M.MK 240 100 350 100 350 100 350 100

F250M.MK* 200 100 300 100 300 100 300 100
F280S.SK 300 125 400 125 400 125 400 125

F280S.SK* 240 125 350 125 350 125 350 125
F280M.MK 300 125 400 125 400 125 400 125

F280M.MK* 240 125 350 125 350 125 350 125
7
* ball bearings insead of standard roller bearing
I.E.C. Bearings Advice regreasing / service hours
Type DE NDE 3000l/min 1500l/min 1000l/min 750l/min
63 6201 6201 10.000 15.000 20.000 20.000

71 6202 6202 10.000 12.000 20.000 20.000
80 6204 6204 10.000 12.000 16.000 20.000
90 6205 6205 10.000 12.000 16.000 20.000
AP100 6306 6306 8.000 12.000 15.000 18.000
1AP100 6206 6206 8.000 12.000 15.000 18.000
112 6306 6306 8.000 12.000 15.000 18.000
132 6308 6308 5.000 10.000 12.000 14.000
160 6309 6309 4.000 8.000 12.000 14.000
180 6310 6310 3.000 7.000 10.000 12.000
200 6312 6312 2.500 6.000 10.000 10.000
225 NU315/6315 6313 2.500 6.000 10.000 12.000
250 NU315/6135 6313 2.500 5.000 9.000 12.000
8
, ( + J / 0 S K : ) (, (( (+ (J (/ (0 (S (K (: ()
G&3?&?7H7G$8%6?7D.I.
;'$>!=#3&2&97(+
JK0(75A D!?"=N$#&?
;N$?& J(*L,MJJ*+))+0,,
O6P J(*L,MJJ*+))+0))
!"#$%&' -
;'$<&=# - (+,.(,.,/0
;'$<&=#7>&"='38#3$? -
F'623?97A!%B&' - (,,:,,JK
;46=&7$C73?"#6446#3$? - QD+ 6B3?&#7+
;$2&'7"!884E - JP//,IQ 7S,GT7U7;@

O!"& - (SQ
RN$'#7=3'=!3#7=!''&?#7'6#3?9 - (,VQ
'&6#&>7$?7- - 56"#7869& - :
@>3#7>6#&7- - ()*((*+,(, DE - 12344&%" A!%B&'7$C7869&" - +0
U QD(W+S +
F6#& ()*((*+,(, G&3?&?7H7G$8%6?7D.I. Y
(,,:,,JK
@>.7BE 12344&%" ;'$>!=#3&2&97(+
JK0(75A D!?"=N$#&?
U QD+ ;69& (
Q88' J(*L,MJJ*+))+0,, (+,.(,.,/0
X$>3C3=6#3$? F6#& A6%& J(*L,MJJ*+))+0)) Z$#.7;9 +0
, ( + J / 0 S K : ) (, (( (+ (J (/ (0 (S (K (: ()
@4&=#'3=647"8&=3C3=6#3$?"
[3'3?97=$4$'" RE%B$4746B&4" Z&'%3?647"#'387=$>&" X63?7"!884E7]$4#69&
X63?7=3'=!3# +J,W/,,*S),7IQ ;N6"& D46=V Q Y $?#'$44&'d7;5 `( Y X63?7=!''&?# +/7IF

A&!#'64 539N#7B4!& D Y Q?64$97"&?"$' `+ Y $?#'$47=!''&?#
Y 686=3#$' `J Y 6B3?&#7C6? +J,7IQ
$?#'$47=3'=!3# ((0W+J,7IQ ;N6"& D'$2? @ Y G&6#&' J7P7/,,7IQ
A&!#'64 539N#7B4!& O Y 3'=!3#7B'&6V&'d7C!"&
_ Y _&?&'6#$'d7]$4#69&7"$!'=& ` J7P7//,7IQ
$?#'$47=3'=!3# \70,7IQ ;N6"& 1&> G Y 539N#d7"39?64746%8d76=$!"#3=7"39?64 A&!#'6478'&"&?#
A&!#'64 1&> e Y 1&46Ed7=$?#6=#$'d7=$34
5 Y c?>!=#3]3#E ...
$?#'$47=3'=!3# +/*0,7IF U F6'V7B4!& X Y X$#$'
* F6'V7B4!& f Y X$#$'7$]&'4$6>7"23#=Nd7%63?7"23#=N
1 Y 1&"3"#$'
R Y R23#=Nd78!"NB!##$?d7>393#647"&?"$' O'&a!&?=E
$?#'$47=3'=!3# \7+/7IF U ;!'84& Z Y Z'6?"C$'%&'
* ;!'84& b Y D46=V7B$P 0,7GT
I Y $?]&'#&'d74$93=73#&%d7'&=#3C3&' ` S,7GT
@P#&'?647]$4#69&"7H ^'6?9& [ Y 6B4&
8$#&?#3647C'&&7=$?#6=#" ` Y Z&'%3?64d7'&=&8#6=4&d7=46%B ...
g Y D'6V&d7]64]&
X&6"!'&%&?#" _'&E
@6'#N _'&&?WE&44$2
6B3?&#7"8&=3C3=6#3$?"
X6#&'364 $4$' Q==&""$'3&" 6B4&7&?#'E _46?>7#E8& Z&'%3?647#E8&
` RN&&#7"#&&4 1Q57K,++ 539N#3?9 ` D$##$% ` ;46"#3= ` R8'3?9*=69&7#&'%3?64

R#63?4&""7"#&&4 1Q57K,J+ I&?#346#3$? Z$8 D'6"" R8'3?9*=69&7#&'%3?64784!996B4&
;46"#3= ` 1Q57K,J0 G&6#3?9 1&6' R#63?4&""7"#&&4 R='&27=69&7#&'%3?64
Q4!%3?3!% 1Q57),,J ZN&'%$"#6# ... ... ...
... 1Q57),,0 F$$'7"#6E
6B4&7&?#'E7#E8& R8'3?9*=69&7#&'%3?6473?"#'!=#3$?"
1Q57),(, F'623?97N$4>&'
b?=$6#&> F$$'7#6B4& ` _46?>7846#&
... $%C$'#7N6?>4& X!4#3*83&=&7946?>7846#&
[3'&7?!%B&'3?9 R&643?97C'6%&
... ...
R3T&7[PGPF7L%%M- /,,P0,,P+(,
c;7'6#3?9- c;SS
_&?&'647=$%%&?#"
;'&=6!#3$?" A$#&"
ZN3"7=6B3?&#73"7=$%84&#&4E7=N&=V&>7B&C$'&7#'6?"8$'#76?>73?"#6446#3$?.
c#73"78$""3B4&7#N6#7C634!'&"76'&79&?&'6#&>7>!'3?97#'6?"8$'#7$'
3?"#6446#3$?.7D&C$'&7"#6'#3?97!87#N&73?"#6446#3$?d7#N&73?"#644&'7%!"#7=N&=V
#N&7=$%84&#&73?"#6446#3$?7C$'7C634!'&".7 N&=V76447=$??&=#3$?"76?>78'$#&=#
#N&7=$?#6=#$'"7C'$%7>!"#.
( J
F6#& ++*K*+,,) G&3?&?7H7G$8%6?7D.I. R8&=3C3=6#3$? Y
(,,:,,JK
@>.7BE ?#'$$"# ;'$>!=#3&2&97(+
JK0(75A D!?"=N$#&?
U QD+ ;69& +
Q88' J(*L,MJJ*+))+0,, (+,.(,.,/0
X$>3C3=6#3$? F6#& A6%& J(*L,MJJ*+))+0)) Z$#.7;9 +0
, ( + J / 0 S K : ) (, (( (+ (J (/ (0 (S (K (: ()
( J
*JO(S
*JQK *(Q + /
5( 5+ 5J
Oc5Z@1
5( 5+ 5J
( +
*JZ(S
*JQS /,,I
5( 5+ 5J (,,IQ J /
+J,I
O
^X1Â O1
OR
R R( b I [
(
*JO(S.(
*(Q +
;@
;@
`( ( + J `+ ( + `+ J / 0 *`J ( +
*J[, ( + J _AWg@ *J[0 ( + *J[K ( + J *J[) ( + J ;@
(J PJ P(
*JR0 *J1(,
(/ P+
b( I( [( ;@ 5 A
5( 5+ 5J ;@
*JX:
X *JX(S
X
Jh (h
;@
JP//,7U7;@7S,GT
X6P.7C!"&7(SQ RZQ1Z OQA R;@@F
ÂZQ Z (d0V[ ÂZ1^5
+ /
F6#& ()*((*+,(, G&3?&?7H7G$8%6?7D.I. X63?7 3'=!3# Y
(,,:,,JK
@>.7BE 12344&%" ;'$>!=#3&2&97(+
JK0(75A D!?"=N$#&?
U QD+ ;69& J
Q88' J(*L,MJJ*+))+0,, (+,.(,.,/0
X$>3C3=6#3$? F6#& A6%& J(*L,MJJ*+))+0)) Z$#.7;9 +0
, ( + J / 0 S K : ) (, (( (+ (J (/ (0 (S (K (: ()
(/,7%% /,7%% ++,7%%
*JZ(S
J0
(/,7%%
/,7%% ((,7%% /,7%%
*JO(S.(
*JQK *JQS
*JO(S
0,,7%%
(K,7%%
`J `( `+
J0
/,,7%%
Q@(,/0
DPGPF7Y7/,,P0,,P+(,
1Q5K,J0
J 0
F6#& ()*((*+,(, G&3?&?7H7G$8%6?7D.I. 6B3?&#756E$!# Y
(,,:,,JK
@>.7BE 12344&%" ;'$>!=#3&2&97(+
JK0(75A D!?"=N$#&?
U QD+ ;69& /
Q88' J(*L,MJJ*+))+0,, (+,.(,.,/0
X$>3C3=6#3$? F6#& A6%& J(*L,MJJ*+))+0)) Z$#.7;9 +0
, ( + J / 0 S K : ) (, (( (+ (J (/ (0 (S (K (: ()
;6'#"743"# O,(i,,(
>&]3=&7#69 f!6?#3#E >&"39?6#3$? ZE8&7?!%B&' "!8843&' 86'#7?!%B&'
*JQS ( O'&a.F'3]&7/,,I7(.0V[ cX1*jKQki/(;0 ^%'$? cX1*jKQki/(;07O'&a.F'3]&7/,,I7(.0V[

*JQK ( 1Oc*O34#&' 1RJ,(,*jK 16"%37@4&=#'$?3=" 1RJ,(,*jK71Oc*O34#&'
*JO(S ( X3?36#!'&7=3'=!3#*B'&6V&'7 (W+ 0Rg/7+,(*K R3&%&?" 0Rg/7+,(*K7 (W+
*JO(S.( ( X3?36#!'&7=3'=!3#*B'&6V&'7 (W( 0Rg/7(,(*K R3&%&?" 0Rg/7(,(*K7 (W(
*JX(S ( 6B3?&#7C6? Re7JJ+(.(,K 13##64 Re7JJ+(.(,K
*JX(S ( ^!#4&#7C34#&' JJ+(+,K 13##64 Re7JJ+(.+,K7^!#4&#7O34#&'
*JZ(S ( Z'6C$7+;7;A7(,,IQ [@R*Z1QO^7/,,IW+J,IW(,,IQ [&"&%6? [@R*Z1QO^7/,,IW+J,IW(,,IQ
/ S
F6#& ()*((*+,(, G&3?&?7H7G$8%6?7D.I. ;6'#"743"#7-7 cX1*jKQki/(;07 Y
(,,:,,JK
@>.7BE 12344&%" ;'$>!=#3&2&97(+
JK0(75A D!?"=N$#&? O'&a.F'3]&7/,,I7(.0V[7*7 U QD+ ;69& 0
Q88' J(*L,MJJ*+))+0,, [@R*Z1QO^77/,,IW+J,IW(,,IQ (+,.(,.,/0
X$>3C3=6#3$? F6#& A6%& J(*L,MJJ*+))+0)) Z$#.7;9 +0
, ( + J / 0 S K : ) (, (( (+ (J (/ (0 (S (K (: ()
Z&'%3?647>369'6% O(Ji,,)
6B4&7#E8&
R#'38
/P+d0%%+
U QD+*`(
6B4&7?6%&
$??&=#3$?7
#&'%3?64
j!%8&'
8$3?#
#&'%3?64
*J[,
O!?=#3$?7#&P# Z6'9&#7>&"39?6#3$? ;69&7W7=$4!%?
JP//,7U7;@7S,GT7X6P.7C!"&7(SQ ( ( 5( ( WJ.,
Y + + 5+ + WJ.(
Y J J 5J J WJ.(
Y WJ.(
0 K
F6#& (+*((*+,(, G&3?&?7H7G$8%6?7D.I. Z&'%3?647>369'6%7U QD+*`( Y
(,,:,,JK
@>.7BE 12344&%" ;'$>!=#3&2&97(+
JK0(75A D!?"=N$#&?
U QD+ ;69& S
Q88' J(*L,MJJ*+))+0,, (+,.(,.,/0
X$>3C3=6#3$? F6#& A6%& J(*L,MJJ*+))+0)) Z$#.7;9 +0
, ( + J / 0 S K : ) (, (( (+ (J (/ (0 (S (K (: ()
Z&'%3?647>369'6% O(Ji,,)
6B4&7#E8&
R#'38
/P,dK0%%+
JP(d0%%+
U QD+*`+
6B4&7?6%&
$??&=#3$?7
#&'%3?64
j!%8&'
8$3?#
#&'%3?64
*J[0
*J[)
O!?=#3$?7#&P# Z6'9&#7>&"39?6#3$? ;69&7W7=$4!%?
RZQ1Z7 ÂZQ Z ( ( *JR0 (J ( WJ.0

Y + + *JR0 (/ + WJ.0
R;@@F7 ÂZ1^5 J ( *J1(, P+ J WJ.)
Y / + *J1(, PJ / WJ.(,
Y 0 J *J1(, P( 0 WJ.(,
S :
F6#& ()*((*+,(, G&3?&?7H7G$8%6?7D.I. Z&'%3?647>369'6%7U QD+*`+ Y
(,,:,,JK
@>.7BE 12344&%" ;'$>!=#3&2&97(+
JK0(75A D!?"=N$#&?
U QD+ ;69& K
Q88' J(*L,MJJ*+))+0,, (+,.(,.,/0
X$>3C3=6#3$? F6#& A6%& J(*L,MJJ*+))+0)) Z$#.7;9 +0
, ( + J / 0 S K : ) (, (( (+ (J (/ (0 (S (K (: ()
Z&'%3?647>369'6% O(Ji,,)
6B4&7#E8&
R#'38
U QD+*`J
6B4&7?6%&
$??&=#3$?7
#&'%3?64
j!%8&'
8$3?#
#&'%3?64
O!?=#3$?7#&P# Z6'9&#7>&"39?6#3$? ;69&7W7=$4!%?
R;@@F7 ÂZ1^5 ( *JX(S 5 ( WJ.(/

Y + *JX(S A + WJ.(0
K
F6#& (+*((*+,(, G&3?&?7H7G$8%6?7D.I. Z&'%3?647>369'6%7U QD+*`J Y
(,,:,,JK
@>.7BE 12344&%" ;'$>!=#3&2&97(+
JK0(75A D!?"=N$#&?
U QD+ ;69& :
Q88' J(*L,MJJ*+))+0,, (+,.(,.,/0
X$>3C3=6#3$? F6#& A6%& J(*L,MJJ*+))+0)) Z$#.7;9 +0
Technical
Documentation 1
High Performance
Centrifugal Fans
TZA / TEA
TEM / REM
ATZA
silentovent
Direct drive with

j
integral or external motor

single and double inlet,
impeller multivane, centrifugal impeller,
steel galvanized, steel painted
You can find this document at:

www.gebhardt.de /Documentation
Contents
The wide program
range – the right fan
for every application
Program
TZA, double inlet, with integral motor
TZA E1- TZA 01- TZA 61-
silentovent Standard silentovent standard silentovent compact
for use with horizontal for use with horizontal for use with horizontal
shaft, casing without shaft, casing with throat shaft, packed casing
throat plate and casing plate, interchangeable without throat plate,
feet, impeller multivane – casing feet, impeller interchangeable casing
TZA 01
forward curved blades multivane – forward feet, impeller multivane –

curved blades forward curved blades
TEA, single inlet, with integral motor

TEA E1- TEA 01- TEA F1-
silentovent Standard silentovent standard silentovent ultra-flat
for use with horizontal/ for use with horizontal/ for use with horizontal/
vertical shaft, casing vertical shaft, casing with vertical shaft, ultra-flat
without throat plate and throat plate, casing without throat
casing feet, impeller interchangeable casing plate, interchangeable
multivane – forward feet, impeller multivane – casing feet, impeller
TEA 01
curved blades forward curved blades multivane forward curved

blades
TEM 01- silentovent TEM 08- silentovent REM 11-/13- rotavent REM 18-/19- rotavent
impeller multivane impeller multivane centrifugal impeller centrifugal impeller
forward curved blades, forward curved blades backward curved profile backward curved profile
galvanized casing galvanized casing with blades galvanized or blades galvanized or
without feet, vertical/ base-frame, horizontal painted casing, without painted casing, base-
horizontal motor shaft motor shaft feet, vertical/horizontal frame, horizontal motor
TEM 08
motor shaft shaft
Technical Description
- specification
- general technical
description
- explosion protection
Accessories
- mechanical accessories
- electrical accessories
Connection wiring diagrams

- for fans
- for isolator ESH
3
silentovent
Advantages
Gebhardt centrifugal fans with direct-

drive offer the ideal solution for the most
diverse fields of application in ventilation
technology.
The different series with narrow casings
enable an optimal adaptation to require-
ments. The connection dimensions and
the system-accessories are compatible
with the rest of the range of Gebhardt
centrifugal fans.
Compact and maintenance free Externally mounted rotor-motors Quiet

due to direct drive with a built-in specially developed by Gebhardt, due to aerodynamic design at inlet and
Gebhardt externally mounted motor designed aerodynamically, optimized discharge and the optimized motor
(TZA, TEA). for speed control by voltage variation, characteristic
Variable positioning via interchangeable built-in thermal contacts for motor
feet. protection. Your advantages:
- low noise generation
Your advantages: Your advantages: - minimal sound attenuation
- no bulky base frame and beltdrive - optimal adaptation
- no belt wear - high safety
- no belt drive maintenance
Stepless variable speed Simple and safe connection Anti-vibration motor suspension
the fans with integral motors are via mounted terminal boxes on the provides for quiet running
variable speed via voltage variation sidewall
Your advantage:
Your advantages: Your advantages: Reduction of the casing generated sound
- great flexibility - fast connection transmission to plant equipment and
- smooth adaptation to different - safe operation building
operating conditions
4
silentovent
Range-specific applications
TZA
TZA E1 TZA 01 TZA 61
Centrifugal fans of the Centrifugal fans of the Centrifugal fans of the
TZA E1 range find TZA 01 range find use TZA 61 range find
application e.g. in: e.g. in: application e.g. in:
fume extractor hoods, HVAC installations, comfort, ventilation and
air-conditioning units, warm-air installations, air-conditioning systems,
clean room systems, air air curtain equipment, fume extractor hoods,
purification equipment, cooling of equipment filter systems, residential
welding-bench extractor ventilation
systems, forced
ventilation
TEA
TEA E1 TEA 01 TEA F1
Centrifugal fans of the Centrifugal fans of the Centrifugal fans of the
TEA E1 range find TEA 01 range find TEA F1 range find
application e.g. in: application e.g. in: application e.g. in:
control cabinet cooling, ventilating systems, compact air-conditioning
projector cooling, dust HVAC installations, devices, between-decks
extraction systems, cooling of equipment, air-conditioning devices,
forced ventilation, warm-air installations comfort ventilation
data processing systems, clean room
machines technology
TEM/REM
TEM REM
Centrifugal fans of the Centrifugal fans of the
TEM range find REM range find
application e.g. in: application e.g. in:
extractor systems, filtration technology,
catering, clean room drying and extraction
technology systems
10000
Pa Area of Applications
1000
TEM TEA TZA REM

D pt
100 1000 10000 100000

.
V m³/h
5
TZA silentovent standard – double inlet
TZA 01- 0200 / -0355
fast selection
δ
Reference density of the flow medium 1 = 1.15 kg/m3
single-phase alternating current 230 V, 50 Hz

1000 Here’s how you select:
Pa TZA 01 ... E
Pressure rise
∆pt = 350 Pa
800 volume
.
V = 4000 m³/h
Possible fans:
600 TZA 01-0250-4E, TZA 01-0280-4E
With the selection diagram and a given duty

point, a fast selection of the fan in question
400 can be made. The represented performance
curves are the respective performance curves
350
of the fans at maximal speed.
0280-4E On the following pages you will find, ordered
in increasing size, the complete technical data
200 0250-4E of the fans with individual performance curves.
0225-4E
∆ pt
0200-4E
0 3000 6000 9000 12000

. TZA E1 (range see pages 8/9)
V 4000 m³/h
Three-phase current 400 V, 50 Hz

1000
Pa TZA 01 ... D
800
0355-4D
600
0280-4D
400
0355-6D
0315-4D
0250-4D
200
0315-6D
0225-4D
0280-6D
D pt
0200-4D
0 3000 6000 9000 12000

.
V m³/h
.
V = volume / ∆p t = total pressure increase
6
TZA silentovent compact – double inlet
TZA 61-0225 / -0280
fast selection
δ
Reference density of the flow medium = 1.15 kg/m3
1
Single-phase alternating current 230 V, 50 Hz

Pa TZA 61/94 ... E
Pressure rise
∆pt = 500 Pa
800 Volume
.
V = 4000 m³/h
Possible fan:
600 TZA 61-0280-4E
TZA
500 With the selection diagram and a given duty
61-0280-4E point, a fast selection of the fan in question
61-0250-4E of the fans at maximal speed.
61-0225-4E On the following pages you will find, ordered
200 of the fans with individual performance curves.
94-0215-4E
D pt
0 3000 6000 9000 12000

.
V 4000 m³/h

1000
Pa TZA 61 ... D
800
600
0280-4D
400
0250-4D
0225-4D
200
D pt
0 3000 6000 9000 12000

.
V m³/h
.
7
TZA E1-0080 / -0130
Technical data
Speed Nominal Max. Nominal Operating L WA. Max. volume Heat Protection Wiring Rota. Weight
voltage power current capacitor at V max current class type diagram direction
.
consumption Vmax
1/min V kW A µF dB m3/h IP No. ca. kg
TZA E1-0080-2E 1950 230, 1~ 0,087 0.39 2 1 66 435 B 20 411 RD 1.5
TZA E1-0112-2E 1150 230, 1~ 0,190 0.84 3 64 810 B 44 411 LG 4.4
TZA E1-0112-4E 1150 230, 1~ 0,070 0.31 2 62 665 F 44 411 LG 3.6
TZA E1-0130-4E 1300 230, 1~ 0,180 0.79 5 71 1240 B 44 411 RD 4.5
1 = Capacitor according to protection class P2
δ
Source density of the flow medium 1 = 1.15 kg/m3
500 250
TZA E1 ... TZA E1 ...
Pa Pa
LWA
400 200 LWA
300 150
71 dB
0130-4E
200 100
pd2
100 66 50 62
0080-2E 64 dB 0112-4E
∆ pt
D pt
pd2 0112-2E
0 200 400 600 800 1000 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
. .
V m³/h V m³/h
.
V = Volume / ∆p t = Total pressure increase / pd2 = Dynamic pressure at discharge / LWA= Sound power level.
Accessories
Switch Transformer Speed controller
Isolator Wiring Energy-saving transformer electronic electronic
switch diagram transformer 7-step 5-step infinitely variable infinitely variable
ESH 21 No.
TZA E1-0080-2E ESH 21-0030-22 307 ETO 10-0018-5E ETH 31-0020-5E EPH 03-0010-5E EPA 83-0060-5E
For detailed descriptions and further controllers and regulators see section Accessories
The fans are delivered with a fitted connecting For protection against thermal overload, all
cable and a loosely enclosed operational motors are equipped with thermal contacts.
capacitor.
The direction of rotation of the impeller is determined
Length of the connecting cable see Dimensions. with the unit being seen from the connection side.
The given data are valid for a supply frequency of

50 Hz. All fans are variable speed through voltage
variation. Symbol LG for counter-clockwise left-rotation for counter-clockwise right-rotation Symbol RD
8
TZA E1-0080 / -0130
Dimensions in mm, subject to change (without notice)

Cable length
TZA E1 a a1 a2 b b1 b2 b4 d1 h0 h5 h6 p q L
TZA E1-0080-2E 100 67 88 180 145 168 146 5,5 181 162 68 86 63 200
TZA E1-0112-2E 142 102 126 270 230 254 232 5,5 237 204 98 97 68 300
TZA E1-0112-4E 142 102 126 270 230 254 232 5,5 237 204 98 97 68 300
Measurement diagram
TZA E1-0080-2E, TZA E1-0112-2E, TZA E1-0112-4E
b h5
b2 p
Ø d1
b1
a1
a2
a
h0
h6
L
b4

TZA E1-0130-4E
270 226
254 107
Ø 5,5
230
103
145
129
87
261
100
400
232
Contact protection screen for the inlet side by request

9
TZA 01-0200
Technical data
Speed Nominal Max. Nominal Operating L WA. Minimal Max. volume Wiring Weight Anti-
voltage power current capacitor at V max pressure current diagram vibration
.
consumption increase ∆pfa Vmax mounts (4x)
1/min V kW A µF dB Pa m3/h Nr. ca. kg ZBD
TZA 01-0200-4E 920 230, 1~ 0.43 2,0 10 75 - 2260 412 13.5 21-6035
TZA 01-0200-4D 1030 400 ∆, 3~ 0.54 1,0 - 79 - 2750 410 13.5 21-6035
δ
300 300
Pa TEA 01-0200-4E Pa TEA 01-0200-4D
250 250
LWA 67 69 dB
LWA 66
200 67 dB 200
71 73
150 150
72
100 100
74
50 50
pd2 pd2
D pt
D pt
0 300 600 900 1200 1500 0 300 600 900 1200 1500
. .
V m³/h V m³/h
.
Accessories
Motor protection Isolator Wiring Energy-saving transformer electronic electronic
Unit diagram transformer 7-step 5-step infinitely variable infinitely variable
ESH No.
TZA 01-0200-4E ESM 01-0020-5E ESH 21-0030-25 509 ETO 10-0040-5E ETH 35-0040-5E EPA 03-0060-5E EPA 83-0060-5E
TZA 01-0200-4D ESM 01-0040-8D ESH 21-0030-65 515 ETO 10-0010-8D ETH 35-0010-8D EPA 63-0080-8D EPA 83-0080-8D
The given data are valid for 50 Hz. Specifications mined with the unit being seen from the Double inlet fans are built in series in rotation
for 60 Hz or special voltages available on request. connection side. direction LG.
For protection against thermal overload, all motors
are equipped with thermal contacts. LG 0 LG 90 LG 180 LG 270
These guarantee optimal protection in connection

with our motor protection unit.
The direction of rotation of the impeller is deter- For counter-clockwise left-rotation, Symbol LG
10
TZA 94- 0215
Technical data
.
TZA 94-0215-4E 1340 230, 1~ 0.71 3.5 20 72 - 2720 412 18 21-5935
δ
350
Pa TZA 94-0215-4E
LWA
300
71
72 dB
250
73
200
72
150
100
pd2
50
D pt
0 1000 2000 3000

.
V m³/h
.
Accessories
Unit diagram transformer 7-step 5-step nfinitely variable nfinitely variable
ESH No.

11
TZA 01- 0225
Technical data
.
TZA 01-0225-4E 1160 230, 1~ 1,15 5.0 25 84 - 4100 412 19 21-5935
TZA 01-0225-4D 1260 400 ∆, 3~ 1,30 2.5 - 86 - 4550 410 19 21-5935
δ
400 400
Pa TEA 01-0225-4E Pa TEA 01-0225-4D
350 350
73 dB
70 LWA 72
300 300
LWA
74 dB
250 250
77
200 200
78
150 150
79
100 100
79
50 50
D pt
D pt
pd2 pd2
0 500 1000 1500 2000 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500

. .
V m³/h m³/h
V
.
399
191 212
26 176 205 10
180
274
255
2x100
288
286
322
348
26
100
447
176
194
30 130
26 322
220 348 10,5
ZKF 15 ZKE 15 270 ZSG
Accessories
ESH No.

12
TZA 61- 0225
Technical data
.
TZA 61-0225-4E 1250 230, 1~ 0.91 4.2 20 83 - 3450 412 16 21-6035
TZA 61-0225-4D 1320 400 ∆, 3~ 1.00 2.3 - 84 - 3615 410 16 21-6035
δ
500 500
Pa TZA 61-0225-4E Pa TZA 61-0225-4D
LWA 74 dB LWA 74 dB 78
400 73 78 400 73 84
83
300 300
200 200
pd2 pd2
100 100
D pt
D pt
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000

. .
V m³/h V m³/h
.
Accessories
ESH No.

13
TZA 01- 0250
Technical data
.
TZA 01-0250-4E 1180 230, 1~ 1,75 7.8 30 87 115 5000 412 31 03-0806
TZA 01-0250-4D 1140 400 ∆, 3~ 1,68 2.9 - 87 115 5350 410 26 03-0806
δ
450 450
Pa TEA 01-0250-4E Pa TEA 01-0250-4D
400 400
73 73
350 L 350 LWA
WA 78 dB 76 dB
300 300
250 250 78
82
200 200
150 150
83 80
100 100
50 50
D pt
D pt
pd2 pd2
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 0 1000 2000 3000

. .
V m³/h V m³/h
.
V = Volume / ∆p t = Total pressure increase / pd2 = Dynamic pressure at discharge / LWA= Sound power level. = not employable
in this range
438
206 234
28 222 10
198
301
282
3x100
320
356
382
322
28
110
490
194
210
30 130
28 356
220 381 10,5
Accessories
ESH No.

14
TZA 61- 0250
Technical data
.
TZA 61-0250-4E 1230 230, 1~ 1,62 7,4 30 86 - 4660 412 25 03-0806
TZA 61-0250-4D 1230 400 ∆, 3~ 1,51 2,8 - 86 - 4860 410 25 03-0806
δ
600 600
Pa TZA 61-0250-4E Pa TZA 61-0250-4D
LWA LWA
500 500 77 dB
77 77 dB 81 77 81
86
400 86 400
300 300
pd2 pd2
200 200
100 100
D pt
D pt
0 2000 4000 6000 0 2000 4000 6000

. .
V m³/h V m³/h
.
Accessories
ESH No.

15
TZA 01- 0280
Technical data
.
TZA 01-0280-4E 1260 230, 1~ 2.61 11.3 50 91 190 6670 412 48 03-0806
TZA 01-0280-4D 1260 400 ∆, 3~ 2.15 3.8 - 88 350 5860 410 39 03-0806
TZA 01-0280-6D 740 400 ∆, 3~ 1.20 2.7 - 84 - 6250 410 39 21-5935
δ
Source density of the flow medium 1= 1.15 kg/m3
600 600 300

Pa TEA 01-0280-4E Pa TEA 01-0280-4D Pa TZA 01-0280-6D
LWA
500 500 78 250 75 78 dB
LWA 77 78 dB 80 dB
LWA
400 400 200

81 84
83
300 300 150

83 85
84
200 200 100
100 100 50
pd2 pd2
D pt
D pt
D pt
pd2
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 0 2000 4000 6000 8000
. . .
V m³/h V m³/h V m³/h
.
in this range
484
226 263
30 224 241 10
221
334
315
3x100
358
395
421
361
30
123
548
216
236
30 130
30 395
220 421 10,5
Accessories
ESH No.
TZA 01-0280-4E - ESH 21-0030-25 509 ETO 10-0130-5E ETH 36-0200-5E - -

16
TZA 61- 0280
Technical data
.
TZA 61-0280-4E 1320 230, 1~ 2,38 10,7 50 89 90 6115 412 34 03-0806
TZA 61-0280-4D 1290 400 ∆, 3~ 2,00 3,8 - 86 222 5570 410 34 03-0806
δ
800 800
Pa TZA 61-0280-4E Pa TZA 61-0280-4D
700 700 LWA
600 LWA 81 85 dB 600 83 81 83 dB

81 86
89
500 500
400 400
pd2 pd2
300 300
200 200
100 100
∆ pt
D pt
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 0 2000 4000 6000 8000

. .
V m³/h V m³/h
.
V = Volume / ∆p t = Total pressure increase / pd2 = Dynamic pressure at discharge / LWA= Sound power level. = not
employable
in this range
Accessories
ESH No.
TZA 61-0280-4E - ESH 21-0030-25 509 ETO 10-0130-5E ETH 36-0200-5E - -

17
TZA 01- 0315
Technical data
.
TZA 01-0315-4D 1250 400 ∆, 3~ 4.95 9.0 - 95 95 10500 410 59 03-1007
TZA 01-0315-6D 750 400 ∆, 3~ 1.66 3.4 - 85 110 7000 410 43 03-0806
δ
Source density of the flow medium 1= 1.15 kg/m3
700 400
Pa TEA 01-0315-4D Pa TZA 01-0315-6D
600 350 LWA

79
LWA 81 dB 300 78 78 dB
500
82
250
400 84
200 85
300
86 150
200
100
100 50
D pt
D pt
pd2 pd2
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000
. .
V m³/h Vm³/h
.
in this range
536
247 294
33 262 10
248
371
355
3x100
404
401
438
464
33
139
603
242
253
30 130
33 438
220 463 10,5
Accessories
ESH No.
TZA 01-0315-4D - ESH 21-0055-65 516 ETO 10-0150-8D ETH 36-0140-8D EPA 63-0160-8D EPA 83-0160-8D

18
TZA 01- 0355
Technical data
.
TZA 01-0355-4D 1270 400 ∆, 3~ 4.50 8.1 - 92 675 8760 410 66 03-1007
TZA 01-0355-6D* 810 400 ∆, 3~ 2.62 4.8 - 89 225 9330 410 62 03-0806
* = not controllable
δ
Pa 1000 LWA TZA 01-0355-4D Pa

500
LWA TZA 01-0355-6D
90
90 83 82
800 92 dB 400 86 dB
89
nicht regelbar
600 300
400 200
200 100
pd2
D pt
pd2
D pt
0 4000 8000 12000 16000 0 3000 6000 9000 12000 15000

. .
V m³/h V m³/h
.
employable
in this range
598
273 329
36 287 10
279
414
397
4x100
450
487
513
453
36
157
668
271
275
30 130
36 487
220 513 10,5
Accessories
ESH No.
TZA 01-0355-4D - ESH 21-0055-65 516 ETO 10-0150-8D ETH 36-0140-8D EPA 63-0160-8D EPA 83-0160-8D
TZA 01-0355-6D ESM 01-0040-8D ESH 21-0030-65 515 - - - -

19
TEA silentovent standard – single inlet
TEA 01- 0200 / -0315
fast selection
δ
Reference density of the flow medium 1 = 1.15 kg/m3

Pa TEA 01 ... 4E
Pressure rise
600
∆pt = 370 Pa
Volume
.
V = 2500 m³/h
500
Possible fan:
TEA 01-0280-4E
400
370
With the selection diagram and a given duty
point, a fast selection of the fan in question
0280-4E of the fans at maximal speed.
200 On the following pages you will find, ordered
of the fans with individual performance curves.
100
0200-4E 0225-4E 0250-4E
∆ pt
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000

. TEA E1 (range see pages 22/23)
V 2500 m³/h

700
Pa TEA 01 ... 4D
600
500
400
300
200 0280-4D
0315-4D
100 0225-4D 0250-4D

0200-4D
D pt
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000

.
V m³/h
.
20
TEA silentovent compact – single inlet
TEA F1-0225 / -0355
fast selection
δ
Reference density of the flow medium = 1.15 kg/m3
1

Pa TEA F1 ... 4E
900
Pressure rise
∆pt = 750 Pa
800 Volume
750 .
V = 2400 m³/h
700
0355-4E Possible fan:
600 TEA F1-0355-4E
500 With the selection diagram and a given duty

0315-4E point, a fast selection of the fan in question
of the fans at maximal speed.
300
On the following pages you will find, ordered
0250-4E
200 of the fans with individual performance curves.
0225-4E 0280-4E
100
D pt
TEA
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
.
V 2400 m³/h
.
21
TEA E1-0060 / -0150
Technical data
Speed Nominal max. Nominal Operating L WA. Max. volume Heat Protection Wiring Rota. Weight
voltage power current capacitor at V max current class type diagram direction
.
consumption Vmax
1/min V kW A µF dB m3/h IP No. ca. kg
TEA E1-0060-2E 1850 230, 1~ 0.024 0.13 - 58 62 F 44 414 LG 0.8
TEA E1-0090-2E 1650 230, 1~ 0.041 0.19 1.5 1 62 155 B 44 411 LG 1.3
TEA E1-0100-2E 2350 230, 1~ 0.080 0.35 2 69 255 B 44 411 LG 1.8
TEA E1-0125-2E 1650 230, 1~ 0.135 0.60 2 71 385 B 44 411 LG 3.0
TEA E1-0130-2E 2100 230, 1~ 0.240 1.05 6 80 600 B 44 411 LG 3.9
TEA E1-0150-4E 1250 230, 1~ 0.110 0.49 3 73 575 B 44 411 LG 3.7
1 = Capacitor according to protection class P2
δ 3
Source density of the flow medium 1= 1.15 kg/m
600 300
LWA TEA E1 ... TEA E1 ...
Pa 0130-2E Pa
500 250
0150-4E
LWA
400 0125-2E 200
73 dB
300 150
0100-2E
69
80 dB
200 100
0090-2E
pd2 pd2
0060-2E 62
100 71 50
∆ pt
∆ pt
58
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
. .
V m³/h V m³/h
.
Accessories
Isolator Wiring Energy-saving transformer electronic electronic
switch diagram transformer 7-step 5-step infinitely variable infinitely variable
ESH 21 No.
TEA E1-0060-2E ESH 21-0030-22 307 ETO 10-0018-5E ETH 31-0020-5E EPH 03-0010-5E EPA 83-0060-5E
The fans are supplied with a fitted connecting For protection against thermal overload, all The direction of rotation of the impeller is
cable and a loosely enclosed operational motors are equipped with thermal contacts. determined with the unit being seen from the
capacitor. (exception TEA E1-0060-2E). connection side.
For length of the connecting cable see Dimensions.
The given data are valid for a supply frequency of

50 Hz. All fans are variable speed through voltage
variation. For counter-clockwise left-rotation, Symbol LG
22
TEA E1- 0060 / -0150
Dimensions in mm, subject to change (without notice).

Cable
length
a a1 a2 b b1 b2 b4 d1 d3 h0 h5 h6 p q zxM -L
TEA E1-0090-2E 83 50 66 115 76 97 82 8,0 118 183 159 71 79 71 4xM4 300
TEA E1-0100-2E 83 50 68 115 76 100 98 7,0 132 190 174 82 82 67 4xM4 450
TEA E1-0125-2E 120 92 105 130 94 115 100 6,3 158 261 226 107 103 94 4xM4 450
TEA E1-0130-2E 120 92 105 130 94 115 100 6,3 175 261 226 107 103 94 4xM4 450
TEA E1-0150-4E 140 110 120 125 86 110 105 7,0 194 294 261 123 120 101 4xM4 450
Contact protection screen for the inlet side by request
Measurement diagram
TEA E1-0090-2E, TEA E1-0100-2E, TEA E1-0125-2E, TEA E1-0130-2E, TEA E1-0150-4E
b h5
b2 p
d1
b1
a2
a1
a
z×M
q
h0
L
h6
b4 d3

TEA E1-0060-2E
76 118
71,5 60
5,5
3×M4
66
56
34,5
4,5
68
58
42
39
128
300
55
80 84
23
RZA rotavent
The complement with the best efficiency
- for higher flow rates
- for higher pressures
Please order catalogue RZA or learn

more by visiting our website.
24
TEA 01- 0200
Technical data
.
TEA 01-0200-4E 1060 230, 1~ 0,21 0.98 4 72 50 1065 413/412 10 21-6035
TEA 01-0200-4D 1190 230/400, 3~ 0,30 0.92/0.53 - 74 - 1370 410 10 21-6035
δ
300 300
Pa TEA 01-0200-4E Pa TEA 01-0200-4D
250 250
LWA 67 69 dB
LWA 66
200 67 dB 200
71 73
150 150
72
100 100
74
50 50
pd2 pd2
D pt
D pt
0 300 600 900 1200 1500 0 300 600 900 1200 1500
. .
V m³/h m³/hV
.
employable
in this range
126
358
168 190 181
161 7
22
6x 7
162
129
256x131
242
228
2x90
254
286
306
22
89
393
205
255
235
5
23
157
167
8
25 130 90 25
22 160 130
160 184
ZKF 16 ZKE 16 200 ZSG ZKE 11 ZKF 11
Accessories
ESH No.
TEA 01-0200-4E ESM 01-0020-5E ESH 21-0030-25 509 ETO 10-0018-5E ETH 35-0040-5E EPA 03-0060-5E EPA 83-0060-5E
TEA 01-0200-4D ESM 01-0040-8D ESH 21-0030-35 503 ETO 10-0010-8D ETH 35-0010-8D EPA 63-0080-8D EPA 83-0080-8D
The given data are valid for 50 Hz. Specifications mined with the unit being seen from the
for 60 Hz or special voltages available on request. connection side.
are equipped with thermal contacts. LG 0 LG 90 LG 180 LG 270 RD 0 RD 90 RD 180 RD 270

The direction of rotation of the impeller is deter- For counter-clockwise left-rotation, Symbol LG for counter-clockwise right-rotation Symbol RD
25
TEA 01- 0225
Technical data
.
TEA 01-0225-4E 1230 230, 1~ 0.48 2.50 8 79 - 1760 413/412 14 21-6035
TEA 01-0225-4D 1270 230/400, 3~ 0.55 1.74/1.00 - 79 - 1950 410 14 21-6035
δ
400 400
Pa TEA 01-0225-4E Pa TEA 01-0225-4D
350 350
73 dB
70 LWA 72
300 300
LWA
74 dB
250 250
77
200 200
78
150 150
79
100 100
79
50 50
D pt
D pt
pd2 pd2
0 500 1000 1500 2000 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500

. .
V m³/h m³/h V
.
134
399
191 212 206
180 10
26
6x 7
180
144
288x146
274
255
2x100
286
322
348
26
100
447
279
229
259
9
25
176
194
8
30 130 100 25
26 182 130
220 206
Accessories
ESH No.
The given data are valid for 50 Hz. The direction of rotation of the impeller is
Specifications for 60 Hz or special voltages deter-mined with the unit being seen from the
available on request. connection side.
For protection against thermal overload, all motors LG 0 LG 90 LG 180 LG 270 RD 0 RD 90 RD 180 RD 270
are equipped with thermal contacts.

with our motor protection unit. For counter-clockwise left-rotation, Symbol for counter-clockwise right-rotation Symbol
LG RD
26
TEA silentovent superflat – single inlet
TEA F1- 0225
Technical data
Speed Nominal max. Nominal Operating LWA. Minimal Volume Wiring Weight Anti-
voltage power current Capacitor at Vmax pressure current diagram vibration
.
TEA F1-0225-4E 1100 230, 1~ 0.35 1.65 8 73 - 1470 413/412 11 21-6035
δ
450
Pa TEA F1-0225-4E
400
350 71 dB
LWA 72
300
72
250
200 73
150
100
pd2
50
D pt
0 500 1000 1500 2000

.
V m³/h
.
399 206
191 212 180
134 144 10
26
164x146
6x 7
224
198
162
100
274
255
26
162
279
229
259
447
9
100
25
30 130
176
194
10,5
25
26 182
130
220 206
Accessories
ESH No.
TEA F1-0225-4E ESM 01-0020-5E ESH 21-0030-25 503 ETO 10-0018-5E ETH 35-0040-5E EPA 03-0060-5E EPA 83-0060-5E

27
TEA 01- 0250
Technical data
.
TEA 01-0250-4E 1290 230, 1~ 0,77 3.90 16 83 - 2305 413/412 19 21-5935
TEA 01-0250-4D 1100 230/400, 3~ 0,69 2.47/1.42 - 80 - 2500 410 19 21-5935
δ
Source density of the flow medium = 1.15 kg/m3
1
450 450
Pa TEA 01-0250-4E Pa TEA 01-0250-4D
400 400
73 73
350 L 350 LWA
WA 78 dB 76 dB
300 300
250 250 78
82
200 200
150 150
83 80
100 100
50 50
D pt
D pt
pd2 pd2
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 0 1000 2000 3000

. .
V m³/h V m³/h
.
143
438
206 234 224
198 10
28
6x 7
198
162
322x164
301
282
3x100
320
356
382
28
110
490
306
256
286
6
28
194
210
10,5
30 130 100 25
28 198 130
220 223
Accessories
ESH No.

LG RD
28
TEA F1- 0250
Technical data
.
TEA F1-0250-4E 1220 230, 1~ 0.51 2.45 8 77 40 1730 413/412 18 21-5935
δ
500
Pa TEA F1-0250-4E
450
400 72 dB
LWA 71
74
350
300
77
250
200
150
100
pd2
50
D pt
0 500 1000 1500 2000

.
V m³/h
.
V = Volume / ∆p t = Total pressure increase / pd2 = Dynamic pressure at discharge / LWA= Sound power level. = not achievable
in this range
438 206
206 234 180
134 144 10
28
183x146
6x 7
243
217
181
100
301
282
28
180
306
256
286
490
6
100
28
30 130
194
210
10,5
25
28 182
130
220 206
Accessories
ESH No.

29
TEA 01- 0280
Technical data
Speed Nominal max. Nominal Operating L WA. Minimal max Volume Wiring Weight Anti-
voltage power current Capacitor at Vmax pressure current diagram vibration
.
TEA 01-0280-4E 1250 230, 1~ 1.20 5.50 25 83 145 3050 413/412 27 03-0806
TEA 01-0280-4D 1280 230/400, 3~ 1,40 4.50/2.60 - 85 100 3540 410 27 03-0806
δ
600 600
Pa TEA 01-0280-4E Pa TEA 01-0280-4D
500 77 500 78
LWA 78 dB LWA 80 dB
400 400
81 84
300 300
83 85
200 200
100 100
pd2
D pt
D pt
pd2
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000

. .
V m³/h m³/h
V
.
152
484
226 263 243
217 10
30
8x 9,5
221
181
361x183
334
315
3x100
358
395
421
30
123
548
348
288
322
2
32
216
236
10,5
30 130 100 30
30 219 130
220 243
Accessories
ESH No.

LG RD
30
TEA F1- 0280
Technical data
.
TEA F1-0280-4E 1000 230, 1~ 0.58 2.80 12 78 - 2000 413/412 21 21-5935
δ
600
Pa TEA F1-0280-4E
500
LWA 74 74 dB
400
76
300
78
200
100
∆ pt
pd2
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500

.
V m³/h
.
in this range
484 206
226 263 180
134 144 10
30
205x146
8x 9,5
265
239
203
100
334
315
30
202
348
322
288
548
2
100
32
30 130
216
236
10,5
30
30 182
130
220 206
Accessories
ESH No.

31
TEA 01- 0315
Technical data
.
TEA 01-0315-4D 1300 230/400, 3~ 2.00 6.30/3.65 - 86 145 4290 410 34 03-0806
δ
700
Pa TEA 01-0315-4D
600
79
LWA 81 dB
500
400 84
300
86
200
100
D pt
pd2
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000

.
V m³/h
.
in this range
163
536
247 294 265
239 10
33
8x 9,5
248
203
404x205
371
355
3x100
401
438
464
33
139
603
382
322
356
6
35
242
253
10,5
30 130 100 30
33 241 130
220 264
Accessories
ESH No.

LG RD
32
TEA F1- 0315
Technical data
.
TEA F1-0315-4E 1180 230, 1~ 1.35 6.30 25 85 145 2760 413/412 29 03-0806
δ
800
Pa TEA F1-0315-4E
700 80
LWA
79 84 dB
600
500 85
400
300
200
pd2
100
D pt
0 1000 2000 3000 4000

.
V m³/h
.
536 206
247 294 180
134 144 10
33
229x146
8x 9,5
2x100
289
263
227
371
355
33
227
382
322
356
603
6
100
35
30 130
242
253
10,5
30
33 182
130
220 206
Accessories
ESH No.

33
TEA silentovent Standard – single inlet
TEA F1- 0355
Technical data
.
TEA F1-0355-4E 1140 230, 1~ 1.80 8.30 30 83 330 3130 413/412 33 03-0806
δ
1200
Pa TEA F1-0355-4E
1000
LWA 80 80 dB 81
800
83
600
400
200
pd2
D pt
0 1000 2000 3000 4000

.
V m³/h
.
in this range
Der
el
598 206 Die p ektro
273 329 180 ra
36
134 144 10
bei d ktisc
er
Ven8xt 9,5 Ausw
256x146
2x100
ila
Wind toren.
316
290
254
414
397
36
ows
256
3.11
421
361
395
668
5
100
39
30 130 Syst
emv
271
275
10,5
Pent or
ium30 auss
36 182
130 16 ab 1
MB 33
Wind ZKF 11RAM
220 206
ZKF 21 ZKE 21 270 ZSG ZKE 11
ows
3.11
ode
Accessories
ESH No.

LG RD
34
Installation Examples
TZA E1 High performance centrifugal fans silentovent standard

TZA E1-0080/-0130 Double inlet with Direct drive.
Casing made of galvanized sheet steel. Impeller multivane with forward curved profiled
blades, fitted to the shaft of a variable speed integral motor, protection class IP 44
(TZA E1-0080-2E in protection class IP 20), completely maintenance free, statically
and dynamically balanced, built-in thermalcontacts for motor protection, fitted
connecting cable, capacitor loosely enclosed.
Single-phase alternating current 230 V, 50 Hz.
Fan model TZA E1-

.
Volume V = ..................................................................... m3/h
∆p t = ........................................................................ Pa
δ
Total pressure rise (at 1
= 1.15 kg/m3)
Speed n = ................................................................... 1/min
Shaft power (drive side) P1, max = ....................................................................... kW
A-weighted sound power level LWA = ........................................................................ dB
Operating temperature t = ........................................................................ °C
Weight G = ........................................................................ kg
Accessories (for an extra charge) Transformer stepped/stepless

Contact protection screen for inlet side Speed controller stepless, electronic
by request temperature sensor EIT 10
Isolator
TZA 01 High performance centrifugal fans silentovent standard

TZA 01-0200/-0355 Double inlet with Direct drive.
Lock formed scroll casing made of galvanized sheet steel with bolted on, interchange-
able feet. Galvanized impeller multivane with forward curved profiled blades, fitted to
the shaft of a variable speed integral motor, protection class IP 54, completely
maintenance free, statically and dynamically balanced to G 2.5 conforming to DIN ISO
1940, anti-vibration suspension, built-in thermal contacts for motor protection, VDE-
approved terminal box ready for connection.
Three-phase current 400 V, 50 Hz or single-phase alternating current 230 V, 50 Hz,
respectively.
Fan model TZA 01-

.
Volume V = ..................................................................... m3/h
δ
= 1.15 kg/m3) ∆p t = ........................................................................ Pa
Speed n = ................................................................... 1/min
Weight G = ........................................................................ kg
IWI
Accessories and special equipment Anti-vibration mounts ZBD
(for an extra charge) Motor protection unit ESM
Discharge flange ZKF 15 Isolator ESH
Discharge flexible connections ZKE 15 Transformer stepped/stepless
Inlet protection guards ZSG Speed controller stepless, electronic
Condensation water drain plugs IBW, R1/2" Temperature sensor EIT 10
Inspection door IWI - Position..............
Underlining indicates alternative choices
44
High performance centrifugal fans silentovent standard TZA 61/94

TZA 61-0225/-0280 Double inlet with direct drive.
Lock formed scroll casing made of galvanized Sheet steel with bolted on,
interchangeable Feet. (TZA 94 with interchangeable rectangular special casing).
Galvanized Impeller multivane with forward curved profiled blades, fitted to the shaft of
a variable speed integral motor, protection class IP 54, completely maintenance free,
statically and dynamically balanced to G2.5 according to DIN ISO 1940, anti-vibration
suspension, built-in thermal contacts for motor protection, VDE-approved terminal box
ready for connection. Three-phase current 400 V, 50 Hz or Single-phase alternating
current 230 V, 50 Hz, respectively.
TZA 61
Fan model TZA ..-

.
Volume V = ..................................................................... m3/h
∆p t = ........................................................................ Pa
δ
= 1.15 kg/m3)
Speed n = ................................................................... 1/min
TZA 94

Weight G = ........................................................................ kg
IWI
Accessories and special equipment Anti-vibration mounts ZBD
(for an extra charge) Motor protection unit ESM
Discharge flange ZKF 16 Isolator ESH
Discharge flexible connections ZKE 16 Transformer stepped/stepless
Inlet protection guards ZSG Speed controller stepless, electronic
Condensation water drain plugs IBW, R1/2" Temperature sensor EIT 10
Inspection door IWI - Position..............
Description
45
TEA E1 High performance centrifugal fans silentovent standard

TEA E1-0060/-0150 Single inlet with direct drive.
Casing made of die-cast aluminium. Galvanized impeller multivane with forward curved
profiled blades, fitted to the shaft of a variable speed integral motor, protection class
IP 44, completely maintenance free, statically and dynamically balanced, built-in thermal
contacts for motor protection (exception TEA E1-0060-2E), fitted connection cable,
capacitor loosely enclosed.
Fan model TEA E1-

.
Volume V = ..................................................................... m3/h
∆p t = ........................................................................ Pa
δ
= 1.15 kg/m3)
Speed n = ................................................................... 1/min
Weight G = ........................................................................ kg
Accessories (for an extra charge) Isolator

Contact protection screen for inlet side Transformer stepped/stepless
by request Speed controller stepless, electronic
TEA 01 High performance centrifugal fans silentovent standard

TEA 01-0200/-0315 Single inlet with Direct drive.
Lock formed scroll casing made of galvanized sheetsteel with bolted on, interchange-
able feet. Galvanized impeller multivane with forward curved profile blades, fitted to the
shaft of a variable speed integral motor. Protection class IP 44, completely maintenance
free, statically and dynamically balanced to G2.5 according to DIN ISO 1940, built-in
thermal contacts for motor protection, VDE-approved terminal box ready for connection.
Three-phase current 400 V, 50 Hz or Single-phase alternating current 230 V, 50 Hz,
respectively.
Fan model TEA 01-

.
Volume V = ..................................................................... m3/h
δ
= 1.15 kg/m3) ∆p t = ........................................................................ Pa
Speed n = ................................................................... 1/min
Weight G = ........................................................................ kg
IWI
Accessories and special equipment Inspection door IWI - Position..............
(for an extra charge) Anti-vibration mounts ZBD
Inlet flange ZKF 11 Motor protection unit ESM
Inlet flexible connections ZKE 11 Isolator ESH
Discharge flange ZKF 16 Transformer stepped/stepless
Discharge flexible connections ZKE 16 Speed controller stepless, electronic
Inlet protection guards ZSG Temperature sensor EIT 10
Condensation water drain plugs IBW, R1/2"
46
High performance centrifugal fans silentovent superflat TEA F1

TEA F1-0225/-0355 Single inlet with direct drive.
Lock formed scroll casing made of galvanized sheet steel with bolted on, interchange-
able feet. Galvanized impeller multivane with forward curved profileblades, fitted to the
shaft of a variable speed integral motor. Protection class IP 44, completely maintenance
free, statically and dynamically balanced to G2.5 conforming to DIN ISO 1940, built-in
thermalcontacts for motor protection, VDE-approved terminal box ready for
connection.
Fan model TEA F1-

.
Volume V = ..................................................................... m3/h
∆p t = ........................................................................ Pa
δ
= 1.15 kg/m3)
Speed n = ................................................................... 1/min
Weight G = ........................................................................ kg
Accessories and special equipment Condensation water drain plugs IBW, R1/2"
(for an extra charge) Anti-vibration mounts ZBD
Inlet flange ZKF 11 Motor protection unit ESM
Inlet flexible connections ZKE 11 Isolator ESH
Discharge flange ZKF 21 Transformer stepped/stepless
Discharge flexible connections ZKE 21 Speed controller stepless, electronic
Inlet protection guards ZSG Temperature sensor EIT 10
47
General Information Accessories Sound

All fans in this catalogue are designed for All accessory parts for the fans must The noise measuring and evaluation is
the application areas of general ventilation be ordered separately. conducted according to DIN 45635-38
and air-conditioning technology. Technical data and dimensions can be ”Noise measurement in machines: fans”.
They are suitable for conveyance of air found in the respective sec-tions of the In the diagrams the A-weighted sound
and other non-aggressive gasses. catalogue. power level of the fan is given on the
The following flow medium performance curves as the emission
temperatures are permissible: size.
Range Flow medium temperature Performance Measurement
TZA 01/TZA 61 -25 °C bis +40 °C The performance curves of the fans are The A-weighted sound pressure level
TEA 01/TEA F1 -25 °C bis +40 °C determined on a suction side test LpA for a separation of a meter can be
TZA E1/TEA E1 -15 °C bis +40 °C chamber corresponding to DIN 24 163- approximately determined by the
REM/TEM -25 °C bis +60 °C 2 “Fans, Performance measurement, following formula:
standard-test stands”. LpA P LWA – 7 dB
In the diagrams of all series, the total
Protective installations pressure increase ∆pt and the dynamic The sound power levels in the individual
The fans are designed to be installed pressure in relation to the flange cross- octavos can be taken from the
into units and possess no personal section at the discharge pd2 are electronic catalogue ”ProSELECTA++”.
protection guards of their own in the represented in dependency on the
standard design. volume. For closer determination of
They may only be brought into operation duty same unit performance curves
for the first time when all of the necessary (parabolas) are contained in the
safety-devices are attached and con- diagrams.
nected (pay attention to the operational
instructions)! The static pressure increase ∆pfa with a
The Safety devices must be designed connected discharge flange can be
according to the stipulations in DIN EN determined according to the following
292-1, Section 3.22 ”Disconnecting relation:
Safety Device” and DIN EN 292-2, ∆pfa = ∆pt – pd2
Section 4 ”Technical Safety Measures”.
If, due to the method of employment of If no channel is connected pressure side,
the fan, the inlet and discharge the cut off present in some series remains
openings are freely ac-cessible, then ineffect-ive. The static pressure rise ∆pfa
safety devices conforming to DIN EN of the fan can then be calculated
294 must be attached to the fan! according to the following formula.
Series
TZA 01/TEA 01/TEM
∆pfa = ∆pt – 2× pd2
All data are valid for the source density

given for the respective range.
50
Motors
Series TZA 01/TZA 61 Series TZA E1/TEA E1
The integral motors of these series are The integral motors of this range are
designed to heat class F with protection designed predominantly to heat class B
class IP 54 and equipped with and protection class IP 44 (exceptions
maintenance-free deep groove ball are marked) and are equipped with
bearings. maintenance-free ball bearings. The
The connecting cables are led out of connecting cables are supplied loosely.
the motor shaft tube and connected to The necessary operating capacitors are
a plastic terminal box of protection enclosed loosely for these types.
class IP 44 affixed to the scroll casing To protect the motors from overheat-ing
sidewall. they are equipped with thermal contacts
In order to protect the motors from (exception: TEA E1-0060-2E). The
overload, they are equipped with thermal contacts are arranged in series
thermal contacts. with the motor winding. They
The thermal contacts cut off the motor automatically cut off the motor upon
in connection with a motor protection reaching a temperature limit and switch
unit or a fuse when the permitted it on again after cooling down.
winding temperature is exceeded. A switching device is thus not necessary.
The speed of the motors can be
reduced by reduction of the terminal When using a phase-angle control, it is
voltage (exception : TZA 01-0355-6D). important to take care that the maximal
permissible winding temperature rise of
Series TEA 01/TEA F1 the fan is not exceeded.
The integral motors of these series are
designed to heat class B with protection Series REM/TEM
class IP 44 and are equipped with The fans of series REM and TEM are
maintenance-free deep groove ball equipped with standard motors in flange
bearings. design B5 with protection class IP 55
The connection cables are connected to and heat class F.
a plastic terminal box of protection If desired, the motors can be equipped
class IP 44 affixed to the scrollcasing with thermistor (NTC) temperature
sidewall. sensors for an additional charge.
In order to protect the motors from The motors of these series are suitable
overload, they are equipped with thermal for operation with Gebhardt frequency
contacts. inverters EFE.
The thermal contacts cut off the motor
in connection with a motor protection
unit or a fuse when the permitted
winding temperature is exceeded.
The speed of the motors can be
reduced by reduction of the terminal
voltage.
51
Explosion Protection Zone Danger of explosion ignition sources that could arise are to be avoided
Series TEM/REM 0 continuous or long-term even for seldom to be expected operational malfunctions
Fans for operation in explosion 1 occasional also for often to be expected operational malfunctions
endangered areas must comply with the 2 seldom or short-term for normal operation
guidelines (Ex-RL) of the ”Professional
Association of the Chemicals Industry”
or the VDMA-standard sheet 24 169,
section 1, “Fan Design Measures for
Explosion Protection” respectively.
Explosion endangered areas are divided
into zones 0, 1 and 2 according to the
probability of occurence of explosive For the standard designs of our fans,
atmospheres. the following ignition sources are
essentially to be considered.
In the determination of the zones, the - Hot surfaces, e. g. due to heat of
explosive atmospheres to be conveyed friction or seizure of a bearing or due to
and the installation area of the fan are to blockage of an impeller
be considered separately. - Rubbing-, grinding- or beating sparks,
e. g. as a result of contact of the
Fans that are to be operated in explosion impeller with stationary components
endangered areas zone 1 and zone 2, - Sparks resulting from discharge of
are not liable to approval and therefore electrostatically loaded, non-conducting
also not liable to an examination by the components, e. g. of plastic-panels,
Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt surfaces with strong layer thickness.
(German Physical-Technical Federal All of the fans listed in this catalogue are
Institution). The observance of the Ex- employable for the conveyance of
RL or the VDMA-Guidelines respectively explosive atmosphere of zone 1 and
are therefore left up to the individual installation in zone 1, as well as for the
responsibility of the manufacturers, conveyance of explosive atmosphere of
suppliers and operators. This regulation zone 2 and installation in zone 2 or in
is justifyable, since according to Ex-RL non- explosionendangered areas for the
the effectiveness of a technical ventilation temperature classes T1- T3 under the
with fans must be tested by competent following preconditions.
persons.
- On the inlet side and in the proximity of
the fan, the temperature limits -20 °C
and +60 °C may not be exceeded.
- The fans may only be employed with a

horizontal shaft.
- The fans are to be protected against the

falling-in or sucking-in of foreign objects.
Protective screens for the inlet side can
be obtained from us.
These fans are standardly supplied with

inlet shrouds made of brass and
impellers made of galvanized or paint-
ed sheet steel.
The motors are designed in protection

class ”increased safety EExe II”,
temperature class T1 to T3 according
to DIN EN 50014 and DIN EN 50019.
52
Accessories
Anti-vibration mounts Dimensions in mm, subject to change (without notice)

Anti-vibration mounts should prevent ZBD A E F G H K
the trans-mission of casing noise to the 01-0405 20 25 16 M 6 M 6 6.5
mounting-frame. 03-0503 25 15 11 M 6 M 6 6.5
They are fixed to the feet of the fans. 01-0504 25 20 11 M 6 M 6 6.5
For assignment see the ”Technical 03-0806 40 30 21 M 8 M 8 9.5
Data” tables of the respective range. 03-1007 50 34 26.5 M10 M10 10.5

ZBD 21 a b c d e f 9 h
ZBD 21-6035 60 45 35 30 20 5 6 M6
ZBD 21-5935 90 70 50 45 32 8 9 M10
Inspection Door IWI

For purposes of cleaning- and
inspection, an unscrewable inspection
door can be supplied. This door
complies with the health and safety
regulations, since it can only be opened
with hand tools.
The order and arrangement is
dependent on the casing position.
When ordering, please give the position
required for the door in accordance with
the adjacent diagram,
Accessories
e. g. Inspection door, Pos. 2.
Increased corrosion protection ”S” Temperature range: o 100 °C

In order to increase the life expectancy Design: degrease and treat with iron phosphate
of the fan Powder layering (epoxy-polyester mixed powder)
at light and intermediate corrosion Overall layer thickness 40-70 em
attack, we offer an ”Increased Color tone RAL 7039 (Stone gray)
Corrosion Protection K” for the series
TEM/REM as special equipment.
53
Switches, Regulators and Controllers
ESM 01
Motor protection unit for motors with Technical Data Dimensions in mm,
fitted thermal contacts max. Nominal Weight subject to change (without notice)
Design permissible voltage ESM 01
Beautifully shaped, two-tone plastic Motors-
casing made of shock resistant polystyrol, rated power
protection class IP 54. ESM kW Volt kg
All units are suitable for wall mounting 01-0020-5E 2.0 230 1.2
and include: hand switches for frontal 01-0040-8D 4.0 400 1.2
operation, operational signal lamp and
control safety accessible from outside.
Permissible ambient temperature:
40 °C
Function
Should the motor winding temperature
rise excessively, the imbedded motor
winding thermalcontact will open the
control circuit, causing the mains relay
to drop out and thus disconnect the
motor from the mains supply.
The motor will also be turned off in the
case of a mains-side dropout of the
Connection diagram
control phase, as well as if the contacts
fail or if the mains supply is interrupted. alternating current, 1 Speed
The motor protection units are not ESM 01-0020-5E
equipped with an automatic re-power-
on after a mains voltage failure and are Attention: for thermojunctions use always series connection
thus fail-safe.
After the motor windings have cooled N L1 TK TK TK TK U1 U1 U1 V1 V1 V1
down, a lock-out device in the relay
circuit prevents the motor from switching
itself on. The hand switch must first be
TK TK TK TK
momentarily turned to the 0-positon
and then back to the ‘on’ position. TK TK TK TK
TK U1 Z2
The operational signal lamp indicates Connection type for 2 motors TK Z1 U2

the operation of the motor. It goes out Anti-clockwise
rotation
in the case of a malfunction. TK TK TK TK
The motor protection units are suitable
for group switching, i. e. several motors TK TK TK TK TK U1 Z2
with the same switching can be connected TK Z1 U2

to a common switchingdevice. TK TK Clockwise
rotation
PE N L1
The sum of the motors’ rated power Mains Connection type for 3 motors Motor 1-phase
may not exceed the maximal device
rated power. The thermal contacts of all
motors are to be switched in series. Connection diagram
Three-phase current, 1 Speed
ESM 01-0040-8D
Attention: for thermojunctions use always series connection
N L1 L2 L3 TK TK TK TK U1 U1 U1 V1 V1 V1 W1 W1 W1
TK TK TK TK
TK TK TK TK
Connection type for 2 motors
TK TK TK TK
TK TK TK TK
TK 1U 1V 1W
TK 2U 2V 2W
TK TK
Y or
PE N L1 L2 L3
Mains Connection type for 3 motors Motor 3-phase
54
Terminal board wiring diagrams
403 Eintouriger Drehstrommotor

Three-phase A.C. motor
Moteur triphasé à 1 vitesse
Stern - Schaltung (Y) Dreieck - Schaltung (D)

Star - connection Delta - connection
Branchement ètoile Branchement triangle
Drehrichtungsänderung durch = grün/gelb, green/yellow, vert/jaune

Vertauschen von 2 Netzphasen U1 = braun, brown, marron
V1 = blau, blue, bleu
Reversible rotation by W1= schwarz, black, noir
interchanging phases U2 = rot, red, rouge
Changement du sens de rotation V2 = grau, grey, gris
par inversion de 2 phases W2= weiß, white, blanc
410
411
Einphasen-Wechselstrommotor mit Betriebskondensator und
Thermokontakt in Reihe mit der Motorwicklung
single-phase A.C. motor with capacitor and thermal cut out in
sequence with winding
Moteur monophasé à condensateur permanent et thermocontact
en série avec le bobinage
U1 U2 Z
L N PE
Drehrichtungsänderung nicht möglich U1, L = blau, blue, bleu

Reversible rotation not posible U2, N = schwarz, black, noir
= braun, brown, marron
L'inversion du sens de rotation n'est Z , PE = grün/gelb, green/yellow, vert/jaune
pas possible
68
Terminal board wiring diagrams
412
Einphasen-Wechselstrom mit Betriebskondensator und
Thermokontakt (T)
Single-phase A.C. motor with capacitor and thermal cut out (T)
de bobinage (T)
U1 U2 Z1 Z2 T T
PE 2 3 4 5 6 7
L N T T
Netz Steuerstromkreis U1 = braun, brown, marron
Mains Control circuit U2 = blau, blue, bleu
Secteur Circuit de commande Z1 = schwarz, black, noir
Z2 = orange
T = weiß, white, blanc
= grün/gelb, green/yellow, vert/jaune
413
Einphasen-Wechselstrom mit Betriebskondensator und
Thermokontakt (T)
Single-phase A.C. motor with capacitor and thermal cut out (T)
de bobinage (T)
U1 U2 Z1 Z2 T T
PE 2 3 4 5 6 7
L N T T
Netz Steuerstromkreis U1 = braun, brown, marron

Mains Control circuit U2 = blau, blue, bleu
Secteur Circuit de commande Z1 = schwarz, black, noir
Z2 = orange
T = weiß, white, blanc
= grün/gelb, green/yellow, vert/jaune
Einphasen-Wechselstrommotor
414
single-phase A.C. motor
Moteur monophasé
U1 U2
L N PE
Drehrichtungsänderung U1, L = blau, blue, bleu

nicht möglich U2, N = schwarz, black, noir
Reversible rotation not posible , PE = grün/gelb, green/yellow, vert/jaune
L'inversion du sens de rotation
n'est pas possible
69
VS mini J7 Series
Instruction Manual
COMPACT GENERAL-PURPOSE INVERTER
(VOLTAGE VECTOR CONTROL)
PREFACE
YASKAWA’s VS mini J7 is a compact and simple
inverter that is as easy to use as a contactor. This
instruction manual describes installation, maintenance,
inspection, troubleshooting, and specifications of the
VS mini J7. Read this instruction manual thoroughly
before operation.
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
General Precautions
• Some drawings in this manual are shown with the protective covers and shields
removed, in order to illustrate detail with more clarity. Make sure all covers and
shields are replaced before operating this product.
• This manual may be modified when necessary to reflect improvements to the
product, or changes in specifications.
Such modifications are denoted by a revised manual No.
• To order a copy of this manual, contact your YASKAWA representative.
• YASKAWA is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the
user. Any modifications will void the warranty.
2
CONTENTS
NOTES FOR SAFE OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. RECEIVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
• Checking the Name Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2. IDENTIFYING THE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
• Standard Specifications (200V Class) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
• Standard Specifications (400V Class) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
• Standard Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
• Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
• Parameters List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4. MOUNTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
• Choosing a Location to Mount the Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
• Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
• Mounting/Removing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5. WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
• Wiring Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
• Wire and Terminal Screw Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
• Wiring the Main Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
• Recommended Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
• Wiring the Control Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
• Wiring Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
6. OPERATING THE INVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
• Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
• Operating the Digital Operator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
• LED Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
• Simple Data Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3
7. PROGRAMMING FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
• Parameter Set-up and Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
• Setting V/f pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
• Switching LOCAL/REMOTE Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
• Selecting Run/Stop Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
• Selecting Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
• Setting Operation Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
• Selecting Stopping Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
• Building Interface Circuits with External Devices. . . . . . . . . . 84
• Setting Frequency by Current Reference Input . . . . . . . . . . . 89
• Decreasing Motor Speed Fluctuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
• Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
• Selecting Cooling Fan Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
• Using MEMOBUS (MODBUS) Communications
(when option card is installed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
8. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
• Periodical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
• Part Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
9. FAULT DIAGNOSIS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS. . 103
APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
• CE Conformance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4
NOTES FOR SAFE OPERATION
Read this instruction manual thoroughly before installation, operation, maintenance or
inspection of the VS mini. In this manual, NOTES FOR SAFE OPERATION are
classified as “WARNING” or “CAUTION”.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury to personnel.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, may result in minor or moderate
injury to personnel, and possible damage to equipment if not avoided. It may also be
used to alert against unsafe practices.
Items described in CAUTION may also result in a vital accident in some situations. In
either case, follow these important notes.
These are steps to be taken to ensure proper operation.
RECEIVING
CAUTION
(Ref. page)
• Do not install or operate any inverter which is damaged or
has missing parts.
Failure to observe this caution may result in personal injury or
equipment damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5
MOUNTING
CAUTION
(Ref. page)
• Lift the inverter by the cooling fin. When moving the unit, never
lift by the plastic case or the terminal covers.
Failure to observe this caution may cause the unit to be dropped resulting in
damage to the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
• Mount the inverter on nonflammable material (i.e., metal).
Failure to observe this caution can result in a fire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
• When mounting open chassis in an enclosure, install a fan
or other cooling device to keep the intake air temperature
below 122°F (50°C).
Overheating may cause a fire or damage to the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
• The VS mini J7 generates heat. For effective cooling, mount it
vertically.
Refer to the figure in “Mounting Dimensions” on page 16.
WIRING
WARNING
(Ref. page)
• Start wiring only after verifying that the power supply
is turned OFF for at least one minute, and all LED’s and
change LED’s are extinguished.
Failure to observe this warning can result in electric shock
or fire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
• Wiring should be performed only by qualified personnel.
or fire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
• When wiring the emergency stop circuit, check the wiring
thoroughly before operation.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6
WARNING
(Ref. page)
• For 400V class, make sure to ground the supply neutral.
• Make sure to ground the ground terminal according to the
local ground code.
or fire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
CAUTION
(Ref. page)
• Verify that the inverter rated voltage coincides with the
AC power supply voltage.
Failure to observe this caution can result in personal injury
or fire.
• Do not perform a withstand voltage test of the inverter.
It may cause semi-conductor elements to be damaged.
• Make sure to tighten terminal screws of the main circuit
and the control circuit.
Failure to observe this caution can result in a malfunction,
damage or a fire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
• Never connect the AC main circuit power supply to output
terminals U, V and W.
The inverter will be damaged and void the warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
• Do not connect or disconnect wires or connectors while
power is applied to the circuit.
Failure to observe this caution can result in personal injury.
• Do not change signal/control wiring during operation.
The machine or the inverter may be damaged.
7
OPERATION
WARNING
(Ref. page)
• Only turn ON the input power supply after replacing the
digital operator or optional blank cover.
Do not remove the digital operator or the covers while
current is flowing.
Failure to observe this warning can result in electric shock.
• Never operate the digital operator or dip switches when
your hand is wet.
• Never touch the terminals while current is flowing, even
when the inverter is stopped.
• When the fault retry function is selected, stand clear of
the inverter or the load. It may restart unexpectedly
after being stopped.
(Construct machine system, so as to assure safety for personnel,
even if the inverter should restart.) Failure to observe this
warning can result in personal injury.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
• When continuous operation after power recovery is selected,
stand clear of the inverter or the load. It may restart
unexpectedly after being stopped.
(Construct machine system, so as to assure safety for personnel,
even if the inverter should restart.) Failure to observe this
warning can result in personal injury.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
• Since the digital operator stop button can be disabled by a
parameter setting, install a separate external emergency stop switch.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury.
• If an alarm is reset with the operation signal ON, the inverter
restarts automatically. Only reset the alarm after verifying that
the operation signal is OFF.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
8
CAUTION
(Ref. page)
• Never touch the heatsink or braking resistor, the
temperature is very high.
Failure to observe this caution can result in harmful burns
to the body.
• Since it is easy to change operation speed from low to
high speed, verify the safe working range of the motor
and machine before operation.
Failure to observe this caution can result in personal injury
and machine damage.
• Install a holding brake separately if necessary.
Failure to observe this caution can result in personal injury.
• Do not change signals during operation.
The machine or the inverter may be damaged.
• All the parameters of the inverter have been preset at
the factory. Do not change the settings unnecessarily.
The inverter may be damaged. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
WARNING
(Ref. page)
• Never touch high-voltage terminals in the inverter.
Failure to observe this warning can result in an electrical shock. . . . . . . . . . . 99
• Disconnect all power before performing maintenance or
inspection. Then wait at least one minute after the power
supply is disconnected and all LEDs and CHARGE LED
are extinguished.
The capacitors discharge slowly, and may be dangerous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
9
WARNING
(Ref. page)
• Do not perform a voltage withstand test on any part of
the VS mini J7.
This electronic equipment uses semiconductors and it is vulnerable
to high voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
• Only authorized personnel should perform
maintenance, inspections or parts replacement.
[Remove all metal objects (watches, bracelets, etc.) before operation.]
(Use tools which are insulated against electrical shock.)
Failure to observe this warning can result in an electrical shock. . . . . . . . . . . 99
CAUTION
(Ref. page)
• The control PC board employs CMOS ICs.
Do not touch the CMOS elements.
They are easily damaged by static electricity.
• Do not connect or disconnect wires, digital operator,
connectors, or cooling fan while power is applied to the circuit.
Failure to observe this caution can result in personal injury. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Others
WARNING
(Ref. page)
• Never modify the product.
Failure to observe this warning can result in an electrical shock or
personal injury and will void the warranty.
10
WARNING LABEL
A warning label is displayed on the front cover of the inverter, as shown below. Follow
these instructions when handling the inverter.
PLASTIC ENCLOSURE
NAME-
PLATE
STATUS
INDICATOR
LAMP
WARNING
LABEL
Warning Label
• Read manual before installing.

• Wait 1 minute for capacitor. discharge after
disconnecting power supply.
• To conform to CE requirements make sure to
ground the supply neutral for 400V class.
11
1. RECEIVING
After unpacking the VS mini J7, check the following:
• Verify that the part numbers match your purchase order or packing slip.
• Check the unit for physical damage that may have occurred during shipping.
If any part of VS mini J7 is missing or damaged, call for service immediately.
• Checking the Nameplate

U.S. and Canadian Safety Standards for Types of 3-phase, 200VAC,
0.13HP (0.1kW)
Example of 3-phase, 220VAC, 0.13 (0.1kW)
12
2. IDENTIFYING THE PARTS
13
Notes
14
3. Specifications
• Standard Specifications (200V Class)
Voltage Class 200V single- / 3-phase
Model 3-phase
20P1 20P2 20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7
CIMR-J7AU!!!! Single-phase
B0P1 B0P2 B0P4 B0P7 B1P5 - -
0.13 0.25 0.5 1 2 3 5
Max. Applicable Motor Output HP (kW)†
(0.1) (0.2) (0.4) (0.75) (1.5) (2.2) (3.7)
Inverter Capacity (kVA) 0.3 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.0 4.2 6.7
Characteristics
Rated Output Current (A) 0.8 1.6 3 5 8 11 17.5

Output
3-phase models, 200 to 230V (proportional to input voltage)

Max. Output Voltage (V)
Single-phase models, 200 to 240V (proportional to input
(3-phase output only)
voltage)
Max. Output Frequency (Hz) 400 Hz (Programmable)
Rated Input Voltage and 3-phase, 200 to 230V, 50/60Hz
Supply
Power
Frequency Single-phase, 200 to 240V, 50/60Hz

Allowable Voltage Fluctuation -15 to +10%
Allowable Frequency Fluctuation ±5%
Control Method Sine wave PWM (V/f control)
Frequency Control Range 0.1 to 400Hz
Frequency Accuracy Digital reference: ±0.01% (-10 to +50°C)
(Temperature Change) Analog reference: ±0.5% (25±10°C)
Digital reference: 0.1Hz (less than 100Hz) / 1Hz (100Hz or
Frequency Setting Resolution more)
Control Characteristics
Analog reference: 1 / 1000 of max. output frequency

Output Frequency Resolution 0.01Hz
Overload Capacity 150% rated output current for one minute
0 to 10VDC (20kΩ), 4 to 20mA (250Ω), 0 to 20mA (250Ω)
Frequency Reference Signal
Frequency setting volume (Selectable)
0.1 to 999sec.
Accel/Decel Time
(accel/decel time are independently programmed)
Short-term average deceleration torque‡
0.13HP, 0.25HP (0.1, 0.25kW): 150%
0.5HP, 1HP (0.55, 1.1kW): 100%
Braking Torque
2HP (1.5kW): 50%
3HP (2.2kW) or more: 20%
Continuous regenerative torque: Approx. 20%
V/f Characteristics Possible to program any V/f pattern
† Based on a standard 4-pole motor for max. applicable motor output.
‡ Shows deceleration torque for uncoupled motor decelerating from 60Hz with the shortest possible
deceleration time.
15
Model 3-phase 20P1 20P2 20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7
CIMR-J7AU!!!! Single-phase B0P1 B0P2 B0P4 B0P7 B1P5 - -
Motor Overload Protection Electronic thermal overload relay
Motor coasts to a stop at approx. 200% of inverter rated
Instantaneous Overcurrent
current
Motor coasts to a stop after 1 minute at 150% of inverter rated
Overload
output current
Protective Functions
Overvoltage Motor coasts to a stop if DC bus voltage exceed 410V

Stops when DC bus voltage is approx. 200V or less (approx.
Undervoltage
160V or less for single-phase series)
Following items are selectable: Not provided (stops if power
Momentary Power Loss loss is 15ms or longer), continuous operation if power loss is
approx. 0.5s or shorter, continuous operation
Cooling Fin Overheat Protected by electronic circuit
Individual levels during accel/running, enable/disable provided
Stall Prevention Level
during deceleration
Cooling Fan Fault Protected by electronic circuit (fan stalling detection)
Ground Fault Protected by electronic circuit (rated output current level)
RUN lamp stays ON or digital operator LED stays ON.
Power Charge Indication (Charge LED is provided for 400V)
ON until the DC bus voltage becomes 50V or less.
Four of the following input signals are selectable: Reverse run
Input Signals
(3-wire sequence), fault reset, external fault (NO/NC contact

input), multi-step speed operation, Jog command, accel/decel
Multi-function Input time select, external baseblock (NO/NC contact input), speed
search command, accel/decel hold command, LOCAL/
REMOTE selection, communication/control circuit terminal
Other Functions
selection, emergency stop fault emergency stop alarm

Following output signals are selectable (1 NO/NC contact
output):
Output Signals
Fault, running, zero speed, at frequency, frequency detection

(output frequency ≤ or ≥ set value), during over torque
Multi-function Output
detection, minor error, during baseblock, operation mode,
inverter run ready, during fault retry, during UV, during speed
search, during speed search, data output through
communication
Full-range automatic torque boost, slip compensation, DC
injection braking current/time at start/stop frequency reference
Standard Functions
bias/gain, [MEMOBUS communications (RS-485/422, max.
19.2K bps).]
16
Model 3-phase 20P1 20P2 20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7
CIMR-J7AU!!!! Single-phase B0P1 B0P2 B0P4 B0P7 B1P5 - -
Status Indicator LED RUN and ALARM provided as standard LED’s
Display
Other Functions
Digital Operator Available to monitor frequency reference, output frequency,
(JVOP-140) output current. 3 character, 7 segment LED Display.
Main circuit: screw terminals
Terminals
Control circuit: plug-in screw terminal
Wiring Distance between
328ft (100m) or less‡
Inverter and Motor
Enclosure Open chassis
Cooling fan is provided for 200V, 0.75kW (3-phase), 400V,
Cooling Method
1.5kW (single-phase), others are self-cooling
Open chassis: -10 to +50°C (14 to 122°F)
Ambient Temperature
(not frozen)
Environmental
Humidity 95% RH or less (non-condensing)

Conditions
Storage Temperature† -4 to 140°F (-20 to +60°C)

Location Indoor (free from corrosive gases or dust)
Elevation 3280ft (1000m) or less
Vibration Up to 9.8m / S2 (1G) at less than 20Hz, up to 2m / S 2 (0.2G) at

less than 20 to 50Hz
†Temperature during shipping (for short period)
‡ If the wiring distance between inverter and motor is long, reduce the inverter carrier frequency.
For details, refer to “Reducing motor noise or leakage current (n46)”on page 79.
17
• Standard Specifications (400V Class)
Voltage Class 400V 3-phase
Model
3-phase 40P2 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P7
CIMR-J7A!!!!
0.25 0.5 1 2 3 5
Max. Applicable Motor Output HP (kW)*
(0.2) (0.4) (0.75) (1.5) (2.2) (3.7)
Characteristics
Inverter Capacity (kVA) 0.9 1.4 2.6 3.7 4.2 6.5

Rated Output Current (A) 1.2 1.8 3.4 4.8 5.5 8.6
Output
Max. Output Voltage (V) 3-phase, 380 to 460V (proportional to input voltage)
Max. Output
400 Hz (Programmable)
Frequency (Hz)
Rated Input Voltage
3-phase, 380 to 460V, 50/60Hz
and Frequency
Supply
Power
Allowable Voltage
-15 to +10%
Fluctuation
Allowable Frequency
±5%
Fluctuation
Control Method Sine wave PWM (V/f control)
Frequency Control Range 0.1 to 400Hz
Digital reference: ±0.01%, 14 to 122°F (-10 to
Frequency Accuracy
+50°C)
(Temperature Change)
Analog reference: ±0.5%, 59 to 95°F (25 ±10°C)
Digital reference: 0.1Hz (less than 100Hz) / 1Hz
Frequency Setting Resolution (100Hz or more)
Control Characteristics
Analog reference: 1 / 1000 of max. output frequency

Output Frequency
0.01Hz
Resolution
Overload Capacity 150% rated output current for one minute
Frequency Reference 0 to 10VDC (20kΩ), 4 to 20mA (250Ω), 0 to 20mA
Signal (250Ω) Frequency setting volume (Selectable)
0.1 to 999 sec. (accel/decel time are independently
Accel/Decel Time
programmed)
Short-term average deceleration torque†
0.2kW: 150%
0.75kW: 100%
Braking Torque
2HP (1.5kW): 50%
3HP (2.2kW) or more: 20%
Continuous regenerative torque: Approx. 20%
V/f Characteristics Possible to program any V / f pattern
* Based on a standard 4-pole motor for max. applicable motor output.
† Shows deceleration torque for uncoupled motor decelerating from 60Hz with the shortest
possible deceleration time.
18
Model
3-phase 40P2 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P7
CIMR-J7A!!!!
Motor Overload Protection Electronic thermal overload relay
Motor coasts to a stop at approx. 200% of inverter
Instantaneous Over Current
rated current
Motor coasts to a stop after 1 minute at 150% of
Overload
inverter rated output current
Motor coasts to a stop if DC bus voltage exceed
Protective Functions
Over Voltage
820V
Under Voltage Stops when DC bus voltage is approx. 400V or less
Following items are selectable: Not provided (stops if
power loss is 15ms or longer), continuous operation
Momentary Power Loss
if power loss is approx. 0.5s or shorter, continuous
operation
Cooling Fin Overheat Protected by electronic circuit
Individual levels during accel/running, enable/disable
Stall Prevention Level
provided during deceleration.
Cooling Fan Fault Protected by electronic circuit (fan stalling detection)
Protected by electronic circuit (rated output current
Ground Fault
level)
Charge LED is provided
Power Charge Indication
On until the DC bus voltage becomes 50V or less.
Four of the following input signals are selectable:
Reverse run (3-wire sequence), fault reset, external
Input Signals
fault (NO/NC contact input), multi-step speed

operation, Jog command, accel/decel time select,
Multi-function Input external baseblock (NO/NC contact input), speed
search command, accel/decel hold command,
LOCAL/REMOTE selection, communication/control
circuit terminal selection, emergency stop fault,
Other Functions
emergency stop alarm

Following output signals are selectable (1 NO/NC
contact output,):
Output Signals
Fault, running, zero speed, at frequency, frequency

detection (output frequency ≤ or ≥ set value), during
Multi-function Output over torque detection, during under voltage
detection, minor error, during baseblock, operation
mode, inverter run ready, during fault retry, during
UV, during speed search, data output through
communication
Full-range automatic torque boost, slip
compensation, DC injection braking current/time at
Standard Functions start/stop frequency reference bias/gain, frequency
reference with built-in volume, [MEMOBUS
communications (RS-485/422, max. 19.2K).]
19
Model
3-phase 40P2 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P7
CIMR-J7A!!!!
Status Indicator LED RUN and ALARM provided as standard LEDs
Display
Available to monitor frequency reference, output
Other Functions
Digital Operator
frequency, output current. 3 character, 7 segment
LED display.
Main circuit: screw terminals
Terminals
Control circuit: plug-in screw terminal
328ft (100m) or less†
Inverter and Motor
Enclosure Open chassis or enclosed wall-mounted
Cooling fan is provided for 200V, 0.75kW (3-/single
Cooling Method phase), 200V, 0.75kW (1.5HP), others are self-
cooling
Open chassis: -10 to +50°C (14 to 122°F)
Ambient Temperature
(not frozen)
Environmental
Humidity 95% RH or less (non-condensing)

Conditions
Storage Temperature* -20 to 60°F (-4 to +140°C)

Location Indoor (free from corrosive gases or dust)
Elevation 3280ft (1000m) or less
Vibration Up to 9.8m / S 2 (1G) at less than 20Hz, up to 2m / S 2

(0.2G) at less than 20 to 50Hz
* Temperature during shipping (for short period)

† If the wiring distance between inverter and motor is long, reduce the inverter carrier
frequency.
For details, refer to “Reducing motor noise or leakage current (n46)” on page 79.
20
• Standard Wiring
21
Terminal Description
Type Terminal Name Function (Signal Level)
Use main circuit power input (for single-phase inverter,
R/L1,
R/L1, S/L2).
S/L2, AC power supply input
Even thought T/L3 is available, do not use the terminal
T/L3
for other purposes such as relay terminal.
U/T1,
Main Circuit
V/T2, Inverter output Inverter output

W/T3
When connecting optional DC reactor, remove the main
+2, +1 DC reactor connection
circuit short-circuit bar between +2 and +1.
+1, (–) DC power supply input DC power supply input (+1: positive, –: negative) *
Grounding 200V: grounding to 100Ω or less
Grounding
400V: grounding to 10Ω or less
S1 Forward run input Closed: FWD run
S2 Multi-function input selection 2 Factory setting closed: REV run
Photo-
S3 Multi-function input selection 3 Factory setting: Fault reset
Sequence
coupler
Factory setting: External fault (N.O. insulation
S4 Multi-function input selection 4
contact)
24VDC,
Input
Factory setting: Multi-step speed 8mA.

S5 Multi-function input selection 5
reference 1
Control Circuit
SC Multi-function input selection common Control signal common

Multi-function Frequency
FS Power for frequency setting +12V (permissible current 20mA max.)

contact output reference
FR Master speed frequency reference 0 to +10DC (20kΩ) or 4 to 20mA (250Ω) or 20mA (250Ω) (1/1000 resolution)
FC Frequency reference common 0V
MA NO contact output
Contact capability
MB NC contact output Form C contact
250VAC 1A or less,
Factory setting: running
Output
MC Contact output common 30VDC 1A or less

Factory setting: 0 to+10VDC, 2mA or
AM Analog monitor output
Output frequency 0 to +10VDC less,
AC Analog monitor common 0V 8-bit resolution
* DC power supply input terminal is not available on CE/UL standards.
22
• Dimensions
23
Dimensions in inches (mm)/mass in lb (kg)
Voltage Capacity
W H D W1 H1 H2 d Mass Fig.
class HP (kW)
0.13 (0.1) 2.68 (68) 5.04 (128) 2.76 (70) 2.20 (56) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 1.32 (0.6) 1
0.25 (0.2) 2.68 (68) 5.04 (128) 2.76 (70) 2.20 (56) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 1.32 (0.6) 1
0.5 (0.4) 2.68 (68) 5.04 (128) 4.02(102) 2.20 (56) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 1.98 (0.9) 1
200V
1 (0.75) 2.68 (68) 5.04 (128) 4.80(122) 2.20 (56) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 2.43 (1.1) 1
3-phase
2 (1.5) 4.25 (108) 5.04 (128) 5.08 (129) 3.78 (96) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 3.09 (1.4) 2
3 (2.2) 4.25 (108) 5.04 (128) 6.06 (154) 3.78 (96) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 3.31 (1.5) 2
5 (3.7) 5.51 (140) 5.04 (128) 6.34 (161) 5.04(128) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 4.63 (2.1) 2
0.13 (0.1) 2.68 (68) 5.04 (128) 2.76 (70) 2.20 (56) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 1.32 (0.6) 1
200V 0.25 (0.2) 2.68 (68) 5.04 (128) 2.76 (70) 2.20 (56) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 1.54 (0.7) 1
single- 0.5 (0.4) 2.68 (68) 5.04 (128) 4.41 (112) 2.20 (56) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 2.20 (1.0) 1
phase 1 (0.75) 4.25 (108) 5.04 (128) 5.08 (129) 3.78 (96) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 3.31 (1.5) 2
2 (1.5) 4.25 (108) 5.04 (128) 6.06 (154) 3.78 (96) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 3.31 (1.5) 2
0.25 (0.2) 4.25 (108) 5.04 (128) 3.19 (81) 3.78 (96) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 2.20 (1.0) 2
0.5 (0.4) 4.25 (108) 5.04 (128) 3.90 (99) 3.78 (96) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 2.43 (1.1) 2
400V
1 (0.75) 4.25 (108) 5.04 (128) 5.08 (129) 3.78 (96) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 3.31 (1.5) 2
3-phase
2 (1.5) 4.25 (108) 5.04 (128) 6.06 (154) 3.78 (96) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 3.31 (1.5) 2
3 (2.2) 4.25 (108) 5.04 (128) 6.06 (154) 3.78 (96) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 3.31 (1.5) 2
5 (3.7) 5.51 (140) 5.04 (128) 6.34 (161) 5.04(128) 4.65 (118) 0.20 (5) M4 4.63 (2.1) 2
24
• Parameters List
First Functions (Parameters n001 to n049)
Register
No. for Initial *User Ref.
No. Name Description
Trans- Setting Setting Page
mission
0: Parameter n001 set / read and
parameter n02 ~ n79 can be read.
(FREF of the operator can be set.)
1: Functions (parameters n01 ~ n79)
can be set / read.
6: Clear fault history
Parameter write-in 8: 2 wire initialize
01 0101H 1 57
prohibit / initialize (Japanese Specification)
9: 3 wire initialize
(Japanese Specification)
(American Specification)
(American Specification)
0: Operator
Operation reference
02 0102H 1: Control circuit terminal 1 62
selection
2: Communication
0: Volume
1: Frequency reference 1 (n21)
2: Control circuit terminal
(voltage 0 ~ 10V)
Frequency reference
03 0103H (current 4 - 20 mA) 2 63
selection
(current 0 - 20 mA)
5: Not used (setting error)
6: Communication
(register number 0002H)
Stopping method 0: Decel to stop
04 0104H 0 82
selection 1: Coast to stop
0: Reverse run enabled
05 0105H REV run prohibit 0 65
1: Reverser run disabled
0: Stop key enabled
Operation stop key
06 0106H 1: Stop key is enabled only when run 0 81
selection
command is selected to the operator.
Frequency reference
0: Volume
07 0107H selection 0 (Note4) 63
1: Frequency reference selection (n21)
in local mode
0: Frequency reference setting by the
operator is enabled with the ENTER
Setting method selection key input
08 0108H 0 63
for frequency reference 1: Frequency reference setting by the
operator is not required the ENTER
key input.
25
Register
mission
Setting unit: 0.1Hz (less than 100Hz) /
Maximum output 1Hz (100Hz or greater)
09 0109H 60.0Hz 58
frequency Setting range: 50.0 ~ 400Hz
Setting unit: 1V
10 010AH Maximum voltage Setting range: 1 ~ 255V 230V (Note 1) 58

Maximum voltage output
11 010BH 1Hz (100Hz or greater) 60.0Hz 58
frequency
Setting range: 0.2 ~ 400Hz
12 010CH Mid. output frequency 1Hz (100Hz or greater) 1.5Hz 58
Setting unit: 1V
13 010DH Mid. output frequency 12V (Note1) 58
Setting range: 1 - 255V
Minimum output Setting unit: 0.1Hz
14 010EH 1.5Hz 58
frequency Setting range: 0.1 ~ 10.0Hz
Mid. output frequency Setting unit: 1V
15 010FH 12V (Note1) 58
voltage Setting range: 1 ~ 50V
Setting unit: 0.1s (less than 100s) / 1s
16 0110H Acceleration time 1 (100s or greater) 10.0s 69
Setting range: 0.0 ~ 999s
17 0111H Deceleration time 1 (100s or greater) 10.0s 69
18 0112H Acceleration time 2 (100s or greater) 10.0s 69
19 0113H Deceleration time 2 (100s or greater) 10.0s 69
0: No S-curves
S-curve accel / decel 1: 0.2s
20 0114H 0 72
selection 2: 0.5s
3: 1.0s
Frequency reference 1 Setting unit: 0.1Hz (less than 100Hz) /
21 0115H (Master speed frequency 1Hz (100Hz or greater) 0.0Hz 65
reference) Setting range: 0.0 ~ 400Hz
22 0116H Frequency reference 2 1Hz (100Hz or greater) 0.0Hz 65
26
Register
mission
26 011AH Frequency reference 6 1Hz (100Hz or greater) 0.0Hz 65
27 011BH Frequency reference 7 1Hz (100Hz or greater) 0.0Hz 65
28 011CH Frequency reference 8 1Hz (100Hz or greater) 0.0Hz 65
29 011DH Jog frequency reference 1Hz (100Hz or greater) 6.00Hz 66
Frequency reference Setting unit: 1%
30 011EH 100% 69
upper limit Setting range: 0 ~ 110%
Frequency reference Setting unit: 1%
31 011FH 0% 69
lower limit Setting range: 0 ~ 110%
Setting unit: 0.1A
Setting range: 0 ~ 120% of inverter
32 0120H Motor rated current rated output current (Note 2) 94
Note: if set to 0%, then electronic ther-
mal motor overload is disabled.
0: Standard motor application
Electronic thermal motor 1: Specialized motor application
33 0121H 0 94
protection 2: No electronic motor overload protec-
tion
27
Register
mission
Parameter selection at
Setting unit: 1min
34 0122H electronic thermal motor 8 min 94
Setting range: 1 ~ 60min
protection
Cooling fan operation 0: Controls the cooling fan OFF / ON
35 0123H 0 96
selection 1: Operates when power is ON.
1: Not used
2: Reverse run reference (2 wire
sequence)
3: External fault (N. O. contact input)
4: External fault (N. C. contact input)
5: Fault reset
6: Multi speed reference 1
9: Not used
10: Jog reference
11: Accel / decel time switching refer-
ence
12: External baseblock reference
(N. O. contact input)
13: External baseblock reference
Multi-function input (N. C. contact input)
36 0124H 2 82
selection 2 14: Speed search command from Max.
output frequency
15: Speed search command set fre-
quency
16: Accel / decel hold
17: Local / remote switching
18: Communication / control circuit ter-
minal switching
19: Emergency stop fault
20: Emergency stop alarm
21: Emergency stop fault
(N. C. contact input)
22: Emergency stop alarm
(N. C. contact input)
23~ 33: Unused
0: Forward / reverse command
Multi-function input
37 0125H (3 wire sequence) 5 84
selection 3
Others are the same as parameter 36
Multi-function input
38 0126H Same as parameter 36 3 84
selection 4
Same as parameter 36
Multi-function input 34: Up/down reference
39 0127H 6 84
selection 5 35: Self-test
(Note: valid power ON / OFF)
28
Register
mission
0: Fault
1: During run
2: Frequency agree
3: During zero speed
4: Frequency detection
(detection level or greater)
5: Frequency detection
(detection level or less)
6: During over torque detection
(N. O. contact output)
7: During over torque detection
Multi-function output
40 0128H (N. C. contact output) 1 87
selection
8: Not used
9: Not used
10: Minor fault (during warning display)
11: During baseblock
12: Run mode
13: Inverter ready
14: During fault retry
15: During UV
16: During reverse run
17: During speed search
18: Data output through communication
Analog frequency Setting unit: 1%
41 0129H 100% 67
reference gain Setting range: 0 - 255%
Analog frequency Setting unit: 1%
42 012AH 0% 67
reference bias Setting range: –99 ~ 99%
Setting unit: 0.01s
Analog frequency
Setting range: 0.00 ~ 2.00s
43 012BH reference filter time 0.10s -
(Note)
parameter
When 0.00s is set, there is no filter
29
Register
No. for Initial User Ref.
No. Name
mission
0: Output frequency
44 012CH Monitor item selection 0 78
1: Output current
Setting unit: 0.01
45 012DH Monitor gain 1.00 78
Setting range: 0.01 ~ 2.00
Set value: 1 ~ 4 carrier frequency = set
value ¥ 2.5kHz
46 012EH Carrier frequency 4(Note 3) 79
Set value: Synchronous type of 7 ~ 9
lower limit 1kHz and upper limit 2.5 kHz
0: Operation does not continue.
1: Operation continues within momen-
Operation selection after
47 012FH tary power ride through time 0 70
momentary power loss
2: Operation always continues. (No
UV1 fault detection)
Setting unit: time
48 0130H Fault reset 0 time 75
Setting range: 0 ~ 10 times
1Hz (100Hz or greater)
49 0131H Jump frequency 1 Setting range: 0.00 ~ 400Hz 0.0Hz 75
(Note) If 0.0Hz is set, jump frequency 1
is enabled.
1Hz (100Hz or greater)
50 0132H Jump frequency 2 Setting range: 0.00 ~ 400Hz 0.0Hz 75
(Note) If 0.0Hz is set, jump frequency 2
is disabled.
Setting unit: 0.1Hz
Setting range: 0.0 ~ 25.5Hz
51 0133H Jump frequency width 0.0Hz 75
(Note) If 0.0Hz is set, jump frequencies
1 ~ 2 are disabled.
Setting unit: 1%
DC injection braking Setting range: 0 ~ 100%
52 0134H 50% 76
current (note) If 0% is set, it becomes base-
block status.
Setting unit: 0.1s
DC injection braking time Setting range: 0.0 ~ 25.5s
53 0135H 0.0s 83
at stop (Note) If 0.0s is set, this function will no
operate.
Setting unit: 0.1s
DC injection braking time Setting range: 0.0 ~ 25.5s
54 0136H 0.0s 76
at start (Note) If 0.0s is set, this function will not
operate.
0: Stall prevention function is enabled
Stall prevention (current during deceleration.
55 0137H 0 92
limit) during decel 1: Stall prevention function is disabled
during deceleration.
Setting unit: 1%
Setting range: 30 ~ 200%
Stall prevention (current (Note): If set at 200%, this function will
56 0138H 170% 91
limit) during accel not operate.
(Note): For rated output range, the
operator level is automatically reduced.
30
Register
No. Name
mission
Setting unit: 1%
Stall prevention (current Setting range: 30 ~ 200%
57 0139H 160% 92
limit) during running (Note): If set at 200%, this function will
not operate.
Frequency detection
58 013AH 1Hz (100Hz or greater) 0.0Hz 74
level
0: Overtorque detection disabled.
1: Detects only at speed agree, opera-
tion continues after detection.
2: Detects only at speed agree, output
59 013BH Overtorque detection is shut down after detection. 0 73
3: Detects during run, operation contin-
ued after detection.
4: Detects during run, output is shut
down after detection.
Overtorque detection Setting unit: 1%
60 013CH 160% 73
level Setting range: 30 ~ 200%
Overtorque detection Setting unit: 0.1s
61 013DH 0.1s 73
time Setting range: 0.1 ~ 10.0s
Memory selection of hold 0: Hold output frequency is not stored.
62 013EH 0 86
output frequency 1: Hold output frequency is stored.
Torque compensation Setting unit: 0.1
63 013FH 1.0 60
gain Setting range: 0.0 ~ 2.5
Setting unit: 0.1Hz
64 0140H Motor rated slip (Note 2) -
Setting range: 0.0 ~ 20.0Hz
Setting unit: 1%
65 0141H Motor no-load current (Note 2) -
Setting range: 0 ~ 99%
Setting unit: 0.1
66 0142H Slip compensation gain 1.0 93
Setting range: 0.0 ~ 2.5
Slip compensation Setting unit: 0.1s
67 0143H 2.0s 93
primary delay time Setting range: 0.0 ~ 25.5s
0: Timeover detection enabled. (Coast
to stop)
1: Timeover detection enabled.
(Deceleration stop by deceleration
time 1)
Timeover detection
68 0144H 2: Timeover detection enabled. 0 -
selection
(Deceleration stop by deceleration
time 2)
3: Timeover detection enabled.
(Operation continues, alarm displays)
4: Timeover detection disabled.
Setting unit selection of 0: 0.1Hz / 1
communications 1: 0.01Hz / 1
69 0145H 0 -
frequency reference/ 2: 100% / 30000
frequency monitor 3: 0.1% / 1
31
Register
No. Name
mission
Setting unit: 1
70 0146H Slave address 0 -
Setting range: 0 ~ 32
0: 2400 bps
1: 4800 bps
71 0147H Baud rate selection 2 -
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
0: Even parity
72 0148H Parity selection 1: Odd parity 0 -
2: No parity
Setting unit: 1 = 1ms
73 0149H Send waiting time 10ms -
Setting range: 10 ~ 65 ms
0: RTS control enabled.
74 014AH RTS control 0 -
1: RTS control disabled.
75 –
0: Execution completed / execution
command receive condition
1: READ execute
76 2: COPY execute
3: VRFY execute
4: kVA display
5: Software No. display
0: READ prohibited.
77
1: READ allowed.
The 1 newest event is displayed
78 014EH Fault history - 54
(Note) Setting is disabled.
Lower 3 digits of software numbers are
79 014FH Software No. displayed. - -
(Note): Setting is disabled.
1. Upper limit of setting range and initial setting are doubled at 400 class.
2. Changes depending on inverter capacity. Refer to the next page.
3. Initial setting of the model with digital operator (without volume) is 1.
Setting can be set to 0 by parameter initialization.
32
• KVA Dependant Parameter Default Settings
200V class 3-phase
No. Name Unit Factory setting
– Inverter capacity kW 0.1kW 0.2kW 0.4kW 0.75kW 1.5kW 2.2kW – 3.7kW
n32 Motor rated current A 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.3 6.2 8.5 – 14.1
n64 Motor rated slip Hz 2.5 2.6 2.9 2.5 2.6 2.9 – 3.3
Motor no-load
n65 % 72 73 62 55 45 35 – 32
current
200V class single-phase

– Inverter capacity kW 0.1kW 0.2kW 0.4kW 0.75kW 1.5kW 2.2kW – 3.7kW
n32 Motor rated current A 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.3 6.2 8.5 – 14.1
n64 Motor rated slip Hz 2.5 2.6 2.9 2.5 2.6 2.9 – 3.3
Motor no-load
n65 % 72 73 62 55 45 35 – 32
current
400V class 3-phase

– Inverter capacity kW – 0.2kW 0.4kW 0.75kW 1.5kW 2.2kW – 3.7kW
n32 Motor rated current A – 0.6 1.0 1.6 3.1 4.2 7.0 7.0
n64 Motor rated slip Hz – 2.5 2.7 2.6 2.5 3.0 3.2 3.2
Motor no-load
n65 % – 73 63 52 45 35 33 33
current
33
Notes
34
4. MOUNTING
• Choosing a Location to Mount the Inverter
Be sure the inverter is protected from the following conditions:
• Extreme cold and heat. Use only within the ambient temperature range (for open
chassis type): 14 to 122°F (-10 to +50°C)
• Rain, moisture.
• Oil sprays, splashes.
• Salt spray.
• Direct sunlight. (Avoid using outdoors).
• Corrosive gases (e.g. sulfurized gas) or liquids.
• Dust or metallic particles in the air.
• Physical shock, vibration.
• Magnetic noise. (Example: welding machines, power devices, etc.)
• High humidity.
• Radioactive substances.
• Combustibles: thinner, solvents, etc.
35
• Mounting Dimensions
Clearances as shown below are required when mounting the VS mini.
36
• Mounting/Removing Components
Removing and Mounting Digital Operator and Covers
• Removing front cover
Use a screwdriver to loosen the screw on
the front cover surface to direction 1 to
remove it. Then press the right and left
sides to direction 2 and lift the front cover
to direction 3.
• Mounting front cover
Insert the tab of the upper part of the front
cover into the groove of the inverter. Press
the lower part of front cover onto the
plastic case until the cover snaps shut.
Tighten the screws.
• Removing option cover

After removing front cover, remove the
option cover to direction 2 with section A
as a supporting point.
• Mounting option cover
Mount the terminal cover in the reverse
order of the above removal procedure.
• Removing upper/bottom covers
After removing front cover, lift the top and
bottom covers to direction 1.
• Mounting upper/bottom covers
Mount the front cover in the reverse order
of the above removal procedure.
37
Notes
38
5. WIRING
• Wiring Instructions
(1) Always connect the power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) to the
power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 (R/L1, S/L2 for single-phase). Never
connect the power supply to U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,-,+1 or +2.
The single-phase (200V class) inverter can be connected to a 200V 3-phase input.
However, when a single-phase supply is used, never use the terminal T/L3 for other
purposes.
Inverter Power Supply Connection Terminals
200V 3-phase Input Power Supply 200V Single Input Power Supply 400V 3-phase Input Power Supply
Specification Product Specification Product. Specification Product.
CIMR-J7!!2!!! CIMR-J7!!B!!! CIMR-J7!!4!!!
Connect to R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 Connect to R/L1, S/L2 Connect to R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
(2) Connect the motor wiring to terminals U, V, and W on the main circuit output side
(bottom of the inverter).
(3) If the wiring distance between inverter and motor is long, reduce the inverter
carrier frequency. For details, refer to “Reducing motor noise or leakage current
(n46)” on page 79.
(4) Control wiring must be less than 164ft(50m) in length and separate from the power
wiring. Use twisted-pair shielded wire when inputting the frequency signal
externally.
(5) Tighten the screws on the main circuit and control circuit terminals.
(6) Do not connect or disconnect wiring, or perform signal checks while the power
supply is turned ON.
• Wire and Terminal Screw Sizes

1. Control Circuit
Wire
Tightening Recommend
Model Terminal Symbol Screw Torque Applicable size
size
lb • in (N • m) Type
mm2 AWG mm2 AWG
4.44 to 5.33 twisted wire 0.5 to 1.25 20 to 16
Common MA, MB, MC M3 0.75 18 Shielded
(0.5 to 0.6) single 0.5 to 1.25 20 to 16
to wire or
S1 to 1.94 to 2.21 twisted wire 0.5 to 0.75 20 to 18
all models S5,SC,FS,FR,FC,AM,AC
M2 (0.22 to 0.25) single 0.5 to 1.25 20 to 16
0.75 18 equivalent
39
2. Main Circuit
200V Class 3-phase Input Series
Tightening Wire
Torque Applicable Recommended
Model Terminal Symbol Screw size size
lb • in Type
(N • m) mm2 AWG mm2 AWG
R/L1,S/L2,T/L3,-,+1,+2,U/T1,V/T2,W/T3 7.1 to 8.88 18 to
CIMR-J7*U20P1 M3.5 0.75 to 2 2 14
(0.8 to 1.0) 14
CIMR-J7*U20P2 M3.5 0.75 to 2 2 14
(0.8 to 1.0) 14
CIMR-J7*U20P4 M3.5 0.75 to 2 2 14
(0.8 to 1.0) 14 600V vinyl-
R/L1,S/L2,T/L3,-,+1,+2,U/T1,V/T2,W/T3 7.1 to 8.88 18 to sheathed
CIMR-J7*U20P7 M3.5 0.75 to 2 2 14
(0.8 to 1.0) 14 wire or
R/L1,S/L2,-,+1,+2,U/T1,V/T2,W/T3 7.1 to 8.88 14 to equivalent
CIMR-J7*U21P5 M3.5 2 to 5.5 2 14
(0.8 to 1.0) 10
R/L1,S/L2,-,+1,+2,U/T1,V/T2,W/T3 7.1 to 8.88 14 to
CIMR-J7*U22P2 M3.5 2 to 5.5 3.5 14
(0.8 to 1.0) 10
R/L1,S/L2,-,+1,+2,U/T1,V/T2,W/T3 10.7 to 13.3 14 to
CIMR-J7*U23P7 M4 2 to 5.5 5.5 10
(1.2 to 1.5) 10
Note: The wire size indicated is for copper wires at 160°F (75°C)
200V Class Single-phase Input Series
Tightening Wire
lb • in Type
CIMR-J7*UB0P1 M3.5 0.75 to 2 2 14
(0.8 to 1.0) 14
CIMR-J7*UB0P2 M3.5 0.75 to 2 2 14
(0.8 to 1.0) 14 600V vinyl-
R/L1,S/L2,T/L3,-,+1,+2,U/T1,V/T2,W/T3 7.1 to 8.88 18 to sheathed
CIMR-J7*UB0P4 M3.5 0.75 to 2 2 14
(0.8 to 1.0) 14 wire or
R/L1,S/L2,T/L3,-,+1,+2,U/T1,V/T2,W/T3 7.1 to 8.88 14 3.5 12 equivalent
CIMR-J7*UB0P7 M4 2 to 5.5
(0.8 to 1.0) to10 2 14
R/L1,S/L2,T/L3,-,+1,+2,U/T1,V/T2,W/T3 7.1 to 8.88 14 to 5.5 10
CIMR-J7*UB1P5 M4 2 to 5.5
(0.8 to 1.0) 10 2 14
Note: Three-phase input is also acceptable for single-phase input series.
40
400V Class 3-phase Input Series
Tightening Wire
lb • in Type
CIMR-J7*U40P2 M3.5 2 to 5.5 2 14
(0.8 to 1.0) 10
CIMR-J7*U40P4 M3.5 2 to 5.5 2 14
(0.8 to 1.0) 10
CIMR-J7*U40P7 M3.5 2 to 5.5 2 14 600V vinyl-
(0.8 to 1.0) 10
R/L1,S/L2,T/L3,-,+1,+2,U/T1,V/T2,W/T3
sheathed
7.1 to 8.88 14 to
CIMR-J7*U41P5 M3.5 2 to 5.5 2 14 wire or
(0.8 to 1.0) 10
equivalent
CIMR-J7*U42P2 M4 2 to 5.5 2 14
(1.2 to 1.5) 10
R/L1,S/L2,T/L3,-,+1,+2,U/T1,V/T2,W/T3 10.65 to 13.31 14 to 2 14
CIMR-J7*U43P0 M4 2 to 5.5
(1.2 to 1.5) 10 3.5 12
R/L1,S/L2,T/L3,-,+1,+2,U/T1,V/T2,W/T3 10.65 to 13.31 14 to 2 14
CIMR-J7*U43P7 M4 2 to 5.5
(1.2 to 1.5) 10 3.5 12
41
• Wiring the Main Circuit
(Example of 3-phase,
200V class, 1.5kW
inverters)
• Main Circuit Input Power Supply

Connect the power supply wiring to input When several VS mini J7 units are used
terminals L1 (R), L2(S) and L3(T) [L1(R), side by side, ground each unit as shown in
L2(S) for single-phase inverters]. Never examples. Do not loop the ground wires.
connect them to U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -, +1,
or +2. Otherwise the inverter may be
damaged. Single-phase voltage may be
connected to inverter but do not use
terminal T/L3 for any other purposes.
On Single-phase models, terminal
T/L3 is connected internally within
the inverter. Never use the terminal • Wiring the Main Circuit Terminals
for other purposes. Pass the cables through wiring hole and
connect. Be sure to mount the cover in its
• Grounding (Use ground terminal .) original position.
Make sure to ground the ground terminal
according to the local grounding code.
Never ground the VS mini J7 to welding
machines, motors, or other electrical
equipment.
Connect with a Phillips (plus)

screwdriver.
42
• Recommended Peripheral Devices
It is recommended that the following periheral devices be mounted between the AC
main circuit power supply and VS mini J7 input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3.
• MCCB (Molded-case circuit breaker):
A circuit breaker should be connected for wiring protection.
• Magnetic contactor:
Mount a surge suppressor on the coil (refer to the table shown below).
To assure optimum inverter life when using a magnetic contactor to start and stop
the inverter, do not exceed one stop per hour.
Recommended MCCB and magnetic contactor
• 200V 3-Phase
VS mini J7 model J7 * * J7 * * J7 * * J7 * * J7 * * J7 * * J7 * *
20P1 20P2 20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7
Capacity (kVA) 0.3 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.0 4.2 6.7
Rated Output Current (A) 0.8 1.6 3 5 8 11 17.5
MCCB type NF30
5A 5A 5A 10A 20A 20A 30A
(MITSUBISHI)
Magnetic contactor type HI
HI-7E HI-7E HI-7E HI-7E HI-10-2E HI-10-2E HI-20E
(YASKAWA CONTROL)
• 200V single-Phase
J7 * * J7 * * J7 * * J7 * * J7 * *
VS mini J7 model
B0P1 B0P2 B0P4 B0P7 B1P5
Capacity (kVA) 0.3 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.0
Rated Output Current (A) 0.8 1.6 3 5 8
MCCB type NF30, NF50
5A 5A 10A 20A 20A
(MITSUBISHI)
HI-7E HI-7E HI-7E HI-10-2E HI-15E
(YASKAWA CONTROL)
• 400V 3-Phase
J7 * * J7 * * J7** J7 * * J7 * * J7 * *
VS mini J7 model
40P1 40P2 40P4 41P5 42P2 43P7
Capacity (kVA) 0.9 1.4 2.6 3.7 4.2 7.0
Rated Output Current (A) 1.2 1.8 3.4 4.8 5.5 9.2
MCCB type NF30, NF50
5A 5A 5A 10A 10A 20A
(MITSUBISHI)
HI-7E HI-7E HI-7E HI-10-2E HI-10-2E HI-10-2E
(YASKAWA CONTROL)
43
Surge suppressors
Surge Suppressors Model
Specifications Code No.
Coils and relays DCR2-
250VAC
Large size magnetic contactors 50A22E C002417
0.5µF 200Ω
200V
to Control relays
230V MY-2, -3 (OMRON) 250VAC
10A25C C002482
HH-22, -23 (FUJI) 0.1µF 100Ω
MM-2. -4 (OMRON)
• Ground fault interrupter:

Select a ground fault interrupter not affected by high frequencies. To prevent
malfunctions, the leakage current sensitivity should be 200mA or more and the
operating time 0.1 sec. or more.
Example: " NV series by Mitsubishi Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in 1988 and
after).
" EGSG series by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.(manufactured in 1984 and after).
• AC and DC reactor:
Install an AC reactor to connect to a power supply transformer of large capacity
(600kVA or more) or to improve power factor on the power supply side.
• Noise filter:
Use a noise filter exclusively for inverter if radio noise generated from the inverter
causes other control devices to malfunction.
NOTE: (1) Never connect a general LC/RC noise filter to the inverter output circuit.
(2) Do not connect a phase advancing capacitor to the I/O sides and/or a surge
suppressor to the output side.
(3) When a magnetic contactor is installed between the inverter and the motor,
do not turn it ON/Off during operation.
For the details of the peripheral devices, refer to the catalog.
44
• Wiring the Control Circuit
Only basic insulation is provided for the control circuit terminals.
Additional insulation may be necessary in the end product.
• Control Circuit terminals
Pass the cable through wiring hole and connect. Be sure to mount all the covers in the
original position.
* SW7 can be changed according to sequence input

signal (S1 to S5) polarity.
0V common: NPN side (factory setting)
24 common: PNP side
Refer to pages 89 for SW8
Wiring the control circuit terminals
Screwdriver blade width
Insert the wire into the lower part of the terminal block and connect it tightly with a
screwdriver.
Wire sheath strip length must be 0.22 in. (5.5mm).
45
Open the front cover and verify that the strip length is 0.22 in. (5.5mm)
• Wiring Inspection
After completing wiring, check the following:
• Wiring is properly connected.
• Wire clippings or screws are not left inside the unit.
• Screws are securely tightened.
• Bare wires in the terminal do not come in contact with other terminals.
If the FWD (REV) run command is given during the operation reference selec-
tion (n02=1) from the control circuit terminal, the motor will start automatically
after the main circuit input power supply is turned ON.
46
6. OPERATING THE INVERTER
• Test Run
The inverter operates by setting the frequency (speed).
There are three types of operation modes for the VS mini J7:
1. Run command from the digital operator (local potentiometer/digital setting).
2. Run command from the control circuit terminal.
3. Run command from communications (MEMOBUS).
(Communication option card is required)
Prior to shipping, the drive is set up to receive run command and frequency reference
from the control circuit terminal. Following are instructions for running the VS mini J7
using the digital operator (with volume). For instructions on operation, refer to page
47.
Operation reference or frequency reference parameters can be selected separately as
shown below.
Name Parameter
n02 = 0 --- Enables operator RUN, STOP/RESET
Operation Reference
= 1 --- Enables control circuit terminal run/stop
Selection
= 2 --- Enables communications (MEMOBUS)
n03 = 0 --- Enables operator volume
= 1 --- Enables frequency reference 1 (parameter 24)
Frequency Reference = 2 --- Enables voltage reference (0 to 10V) of control circuit terminal
Selection = 3 --- Enables current reference (4 to 20mA) of control circuit terminal
= 4 --- Enables current reference (0 to 20mA) of control circuit terminal
= 6 --- Enables communications (MEMOBUS)
47
Operator 12-LED Status
Operation Steps
Display Display Indicator LED
1. Turn the local pot (volume control) fully counter clockwise 0.00 RUN
after turning the power ON.
ALARM
2. Press DSPL 5 times to illuminate Lo/RE Lo Lo/RE RUN

Select Lo (local mode) using or key
ALARM
3. F/R blinks. For RUN

Select FWD/REV run using keys or
Never select REV when reverse run REV
is prohibited. ALARM
4. Press DSPL to illuminate FREF. Then press RUN. 0.00 RUN
ALARM
5. Operate the motor by turning the volume clockwise. 0.00 to 60.00 RUN
(Frequency reference corresponding to the volume position Minimum
is displayed.) output
If the volume is switched rapidly, the motor also frequency is ALARM
accelerates or decelerates rapidly corresponding to 1.5Hz
the volume movement. Pay attention to load status
and adjust the volume to the desired speed.
Status indicator lamp : ON : Blinking : OFF
Operation Check Points

• Motor rotates smoothly.
• Motor rotates in the correct direction.
• Motor does not have abnormal vibration or noise.
• Acceleration or deceleration is smooth.
• Current is appropriate for the load (No overload).
• Status indicator LED’s and digital operator display are correct.
48
• Operating the Digital Operator
All functions of the VS mini J7 are set by the digital operator. Below are descriptions
of the display and keypad sections.
Digital Operator
49
Description of Status Indicator LED’s
There are two LED’s on the middle right section of the face of the VS mini. The
inverter status is indicated by various combinations of the LED’s (ON, BLINKING
and OFF). RUN indicator and status indicator of the RUN button have the same
functions.
For details on how the status indicator LED’s function at inverter faults, refer to
Section 8 “FAULT DIAGNOSIS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS” on page 103. If a
fault occurs, the ALARM LED lights.
STOP
The fault can be reset by turning ON the fault reset signal (or pressing RESET key
on the digital operator) when the operation signal is removed or by turning OFF
the power supply. If the operation signal is ON, the fault cannot be reset by the
fault reset signal.
50
• LED Description
By pressing on the digital operator, each of the function LED’s can be
selected.
The following flowchart describes each function LED.
51 and 52
51
Parameter
Parameter No. (Refer to page 57)
Return to
Multi-Function monitor
• Selecting monitor
Press key. When is ON, data can be displayed by
selecting monitor No.
[Example] Monitoring Output Voltage Reference
52
• Monitoring
Following items can be monitored by U-parameters
Parameter
Name Description
No.
Frequency reference Frequency reference can be monitored.
U-01 Hz
(FREF) (Same as FREF)
Output frequency Output frequency can be monitored.
U-02 Hz
(FOUT) (Same as FOUT)
Output current Output current can be monitored.
U-03 AMP
(IOUT) (Same as IOUT)
U-04 Output voltage V Output voltage can be monitored.
U-05 DC voltage V Main circuit DC bus voltage can be monitored.
Input terminal status of control circuit terminals can be
U-06 Input terminal status —
monitored.
Output terminal status of control circuit terminals can
U-07 Output terminal status —
be monitored.
U-09 Fault history — Last four fault history is displayed.
U-10 Software No. — Software No. can be checked.
Contents of MEMOBUS communications data
U-15 Data reception error — reception error can be checked. (contents of
transmission register No. 003DH are the same)
53
Fault history display method
Fault description is displayed when U09 is selected.
(Example)
!!!: Fault description (“---” is displayed if there is no fault.)
(Refer to page 103 for details.)
• Clearing fault history

Set parameter n001 to 6 to clear fault history. Set data returns to its initial value
after completion of 6 setting.
Note: Parameter initialize (n01 = 10, 11) also clears the fault history.
Setting and referring parameters

The following figure shows how to select and change parameters.
54
• Simple Data Setting
Volume setting (Refer to 5, OPERATING THE INVERTER) and digital setting are
both available for simple accel/decel operation of the VS mini.
Frequency reference by analog voltage is set with initial setting (n03 = 2).
Following is an example in which the function LEDs are used to set frequency
reference, acceleration time, deceleration time, and motor direction.
55
Notes
56
7. PROGRAMMING FEATURES
Factory settings of the parameters are shown as in the tables.
• Parameter Set-up and Initialization

Parameter selection/initialization (n01)
The following table describes the data which can be set or read when n01 is set.
Unused parameters among n01 to n79 are not displayed.
n001 Setting Parameter that can be set Parameter that can be viewed
0 n01 n01 to n79
1 n01 to n79* n01 to n79
6 Fault history cleared
7 Not used
10 Initialize (2-wire sequence)
11 Initialize (3-wire sequence)=
* Excluding setting disabled parameters.
= Refer to page 85.
“ ” appears on the LED display for one second and the set data returns to
its initial values in the following cases:
(1) The set values of input terminal function selection 2 to 5 (n36 to n39) are the same.
(2) The following conditions are not satisfied in the V/f pattern setting:
Max. output frequency (n09) > Max. voltage output frequency (n11)
> Mid. output frequency (n12)
> Min. output frequency (n14)
For details, refer to “Adjusting torque according to application” (V/f pattern set-
ting) on page 56.
(3) If the following conditions are not satisfied in the Jump frequency setting:
Jump frequency 2 (n50) < Jump frequency 1 (n49)
(4) If Frequency reference lower limit (n31) > Frequency reference upper limit (n30)
(5) If motor rated current (n32) > 150% of inverter rated current
57
• Selecting V/f pattern
Adjusting torque according to application
Adjust motor torque by using “V/f pattern” and “full-range automatic torque boost”.
• V/f pattern setting
Set V/f pattern by parameters n09 to n15 as described below. Set each pattern when
using a special motor (high-speed motor, etc.) or when requiring special torque
adjustment of machine.
Be sure to satisfy the following conditions for
the setting of n09 to n15.
n14 < n12 < n11 < n09
If n14 = n12, the set value of n13 is disabled.
Parameters
Name Unit Setting range Initial Setting
No.
n09 Max. output frequency 0.1Hz 50.0 to 400Hz 60.0Hz
1 to 255V 230V
n10 Max. voltage 1V
(0.1 to 510V) (460V)
Max. voltage output frequency
n11 0.1Hz 0.2 to 400Hz 60.0Hz
(base frequency)
n12 Mid. output frequency 0.1Hz 0.1 to 399Hz 1.5Hz
0.1 to 255V 12V
n13 Mid. output frequency voltage 1V
(0.1 to 510V) (24V)
n14 Min. output frequency 0.1Hz 0.1 to 10.0Hz 1.5Hz
1 to 50V 12V
n15 Min. output frequency voltage 1V
(0.1 to 100V) (24V)
58
• Typical setting of V/f pattern
Set the V/f pattern according to the application as described below. For 400V class,
the voltage values (n10, n13, and n15) should be doubled. When running at a
frequency exceeding 50Hz/60Hz, change the maximum output frequency (n09).
Note: Be sure to set the maximum output frequency according to the motor
characteristics.
Increasing voltage of V/f pattern increases motor torque, but excessive increase may
cause motor over excitation, motor overheat, or vibration.
59
When operating with frequency larger than 60Hz/50Hz, change only maximum output
frequency (n09).
• Full-range automatic torque boost

Motor torque requirement changes according to load conditions. Full range
automatic torque boost adjusts voltage of V/f pattern according to the requirement.
The VS mini J7 automatically adjusts the voltage during constant-speed operation
as well as during acceleration.
The required torque is calculated by the inverter. This ensures tripless operation and
energy-saving effects.
Output voltage ∝ Torque compensation gain (n63) × Required torque
Operation
Normally, no adjustment is necessary for torque compensation gain (n63 factory

setting: 1.0). When wiring distance between the inverter and motor is long or when
motor generates vibration, change the automatic torque compensation gain. In these
cases, it may also be beneficial to adjust the V/f pattern (n09 to n15).
60
• Switching LOCAL/REMOTE Modes
The following functions can be selected by switching the LOCAL or REMOTE
mode. To select RUN/STOP commands or frequency reference, change the mode
in advance depending on the following applications.
• LOCAL Mode:
Enables the digital operator for RUN/STOP commands and
FWD/REV run commands. Frequency reference can be set by
volume or .
• REMOTE Mode:
Run by the n02 setting (operation reference selection).
Frequency reference can be set by n03 (frequency reference selection) setting.
• How to select LOCAL/REMOTE modes
(When 17 is not set to (When 17 is set to any

any parameters n36 to parameters n36 to n39)
n39)
61
• Selecting Run/Stop Commands
Refer to page 63 to select either the LOCAL mode or REMOTE mode.
Operation method (RUN / STOP commands, FWD / REV run commands) can be
selected by the following method.
• LOCAL Mode
When Lo (local mode) is displayed on the digital operator (when is
illuminated), or when the LOCAL / REMOTE changeover function is set as a
multi-function input and the input terminal is turned ON, run operation is enabled
by the or of the digital operator. FWD/REV is selected by
illuminating and using or key to select FWD or REV.
• REMOTE mode
• Select remote mode
The following two methods are used to select remote mode:
1. Select rE (remote mode) for selection.
2. When the local / remote switching function is selected as multi-function
input selection, turn OFF the input terminal to select remote mode.
• Select operation method by setting the parameter n02.
n02=0: Enables the digital operator (same with local mode)
=1: Enables the multi-function input terminal (see fig. below)
=2: Enables communications (refer to page 96)
• Example for using the multi-function input terminal as operation reference

(two-wire sequence) follows. For 3-wire sequencing, refer to page 85.
• Operating (RUN /STOP commands) by communications

(When option card is installed)
Setting parameter n02 to 2 in REMOTE mode can give RUN / STOP commands by
communication (MEMOBUS). For details, refer to page 96.
62
• Selecting Frequency Reference
Frequency reference can be selected by the following methods.
• Setting by operator
Select REMOTE or LOCAL mode in advance. For the method of selecting the
mode, refer to page 62.
LOCAL mode
Parameter n07 determines where the frequency reference is input from when in the
local mode.
n07 =0: Enables the setting by volume on digital operator (initial setting)
Factory setting of the model with operator
(without volume) is n07=1.
=1: Enables the digital setting by digital operator, setting value is stored
in parameter n21 (frequency reference 1).
• Digital setting by digital operator
Input frequency while FREF is illuminated (press ENTER after setting the desired
frequency value).
Frequency reference setting is immediately effective when n08 = 1 The ENTER
key does not have to be pressed to enter the reference.
n08 =0: Enables frequency reference acceptance by ENTER key.
=1: Disable frequency reference setting by ENTER key. It is not necessary
to press the ENTER key to accept the reference.
REMOTE mode
Parameter n03 determines where the frequency reference is accepted from when in
the REMOTE mode.
n03 =0: Enables frequency reference setting by volume on digital operator.
=1: Frequency reference 1 (parameter n21) is effective
=2: Voltage reference terminal “FR” is effective (0 to 10V)
(See the figure below)
=3: Current reference terminal “FR” is effective(4 to 20mA)
(Refer to page 90)*
=4: Current reference terminal “FR” is effective (0 to 20mA)
(Refer to page 90)*
=6: Communication (Refer to page 97)
63
*NOTE: SWB must be set to the “I” position when using terminal “FR” as a
current reference input.
Example of frequency reference by voltage signal
n03: 2 (factory setting)
SW8 is set to “V” position when

using terminal “FR” as a voltage
reference (default setting)
64
• Setting Operation Conditions
Reverse run prohibit (n06)
The “Reverse run disabled” setting will not accept a reverse run command from the
control circuit terminal or digital operator. This setting is used for applications where a
reverse run command is undesirable.
Setting Description
0 Reverse run enabled
1 Reverse run disabled
Multi-step speed selection

Up to 8 preset references can be selected by using Multi-Function inputs.
Example: 8-step speed reference
n02=1 (operation mode selection) n36=2 (Multi-function contact input terminal S2)
n03=1 (Frequency reference selection) n37=6 (Multi-function contact input terminal S3)
n21=25.0Hz (Frequency reference 1) n38=7 (Multi-function contact input terminal S4)
n22=30.0Hz (Frequency reference 2) n39=8 (Multi-function contact input terminal S5)
n23=35.0Hz (Frequency reference 3)
When all multi-function reference
inputs are OFF, frequency reference
selected by parameter n03
(frequency reference selection)
becomes effective.
65
Operating at Jog frequency reference
By inputting a jog command and then a forward or (reverse) run command, operation is
enabled at the jog frequency set in n29. When multi-step speed references 1, 2, 3 or 4
are input simultaneously with the jog command, the jog command has priority.
Name parameter No. Setting
Jog frequency reference n29 Factory setting: 6.00Hz
Jog command n36 to n39 Set to “10” for any parameter.
66
• Adjusting speed setting signal
The relationship between the analog input signal and internal (terminal “FR”)
frequency reference can be set by parameters n41 and n42.
FREQUENCY REFERENCE
(a) Frequency reference gain (n41)

The analog input voltage level for the maximum output frequency (n09) can be set
in units of 1%. (maximum output frequency n09=100%)
∗ Factory setting : 100%
(b) Frequency reference bias (n42)

The frequency reference provided when the analog input is 0V (4mA or 0mA) can
be set in units of 1%. (Maximum output frequency n09=100%)
∗ Factory setting : 0%
Example settings:
• To operate the inverter with frequency reference of 0% to 100% at 0 to 5V input
Gain n41 = 200%

Bias n42 = 0%
67
• To operate the inverter with frequency reference of 50% to 100% at 0 to
10V input
Gain n41 = 100%

Bias n42 = 50%
68
Adjusting frequency upper and lower limits
Frequency reference upper (n30) and lower
(n31) limits determines the range over which the
inverter will operate.
• Frequency reference upper limit (n30)
Sets the upper limit of the frequency
reference in units of 1%.
(n09: Maximum output frequency = 100%)
Factory setting: 100%
• Frequency reference lower limit (n31)
Sets the lower limit of the frequency
reference in units of 1%.
(n09: Maximum output frequency = 100%)
When operating at frequency reference 0,
operation is continued at the frequency
reference lower limit.
However, when frequency reference lower
limit is set to less than the minimum output
frequency (n14), operation is not performed.
Factory setting: 0%
Using two accel/decel times
* When “deceleration to a stop” is selected (n04 = 0)

Two acceleration times and two deceleration times can be selected via a multi-function
input. Programming any of terminals S2 through S5 (parameter n36 to n39) to “11”
“Accel/Decel time select”, provides the ability to switch between the 2 acceleration
times (n16 and n18) and deceleration (n17 and n19) through a contact closure applied
to the appropriate terminal (See timing diagram above).
69
At OFF: n16 (accel time 1) are used.
n17 (decel time 1)
At ON: n18 (accel time 2) are used.
n19 (decel time 2)
• Accel time
Set the time needed for output frequency to reach 100% from 0%.
• Decel time
Set the time needed for output frequency to reach 0% from 100%.
(Maximum output frequency n09 = 100%)
Automatic restart after momentary power

loss (n47)
The inverter has the ability to ride thru momentary power outages provided the control
logic power supplies are maintained.
When momentary power loss occurs, operation restarts automatically.
Setting. Description
0 Continuous operation after momentary power loss not provided.
Continuous operation after power recovery within momentary
1*
power loss ride thru time is provided.
Continuous operation after power recovery (Fault output not
2*†
provided)
* Maintain the run command to continue operation after recovery from a momentary power loss.
† When 2 is selected, operation restarts if power supply voltage reaches its normal level while control
power supply is held. No fault signal is output.
70
Soft-start characteristics (n020)
To prevent shock at machine start/stop, accel/decel can be performed in a S-curve
pattern.
Setting S-curve characteristic time
0 S-curve characteristic not provided
1 0.2 second
2 0.5 second
3 1.0 second
Note: The S-curve characteristics time from accel/decel rate 0 to a regular accel/decel rate
determined by the set accel/decel time.
71
The following time chart shows FWD/REV run switching at deceleration to a stop.
Overtorque detection
If an excessive load is applied to the machine, output current increase can be detected
to output alarm signals to multi-function output terminals MA and MB.
To output an overtorque detection signal, set output terminal function selection n40 to
“overtorque detection” [Setting:6 (NO contact) or 7 (NC contact)].
∗ Overtorque detection release width (hysterisis) is set at approx. 5% of inverter rated current.
72
• Overtorque detection function selection (n59)
Setting Description
0 Overtorque detection not provided
Detected during speed agree, (alarm).
1
Operation continues after detection.
Detected during speed agree (fault). Operation stops during
2
detection.
Detected during running,
3
operation continues after detection. (alarm).
Detected during running,
4
operation stops during detection. (fault).
(1) To detect overtorque at accel/decel, set to 3 or 4.
(2) To continue the operation after overtorque detection, set to 1 or 3.
During detection, the operator displays “ ” alarm (blinking).
(3) To halt inverter by a fault at overtorque detection, set to 2 or 4. At detection, the
operator displays “ ” fault (ON).
• Overtorque detection level (n60)
Sets the overtorque detection current level in units of 1%. (Inverter rated current =
100%)
• Overtorque detection time (n61)
If the time when the motor current exceeds the overtorque detection level (n61),
the overtorque detection function operates.
Factory setting: 0.1sec.
73
Frequency detection (n58)
Effective when the multi-function output terminal MA-MB-MC (parameter n40) is set
to “frequency detection” (setting: 4 or 5). “Frequency detection” turns ON when output
frequency is higher or lower than the frequency detection level (n58).
• Frequency detection 1 (Output frequency > Frequency detection level n58)
(Set n40 to “4”.)
• Frequency detection2 (Output frequency < Frequency detection level n58)

(Set n40 to “5”.)
74
Jump frequencies (n49 to n51)
This function allows the prohibit or “jumping” of critical frequencies so that the motor
can operate without resonance caused by machine characteristics. This function is also
used for dead band control. Setting the value to 0.00Hz disables this function.
Set prohibited frequency 1, 2 or as follows:
n49 > n50

If this condition is not satisfied the
inverter displays for one second
and restores the data to original
settings.
Continuous operation is prohibited within the jump frequency range.

However, during accel/decel the output frequency ramps through the jump frequency
range (without jumping).
Continuing operation by automatic

fault reset (n48)
Sets the inverter to restart and reset fault detection after a fault occurs.
The number of self-diagnosis and retry attempts can be set with n48 (0 thru 10 restarts).
The inverter will automatically restart after the following faults occur:
• OC (overcurrent)
• GF (ground fault)
• OV (over voltage)
The number of retry attempts are cleared to 0 during the following cases:
(1) If no other fault occurs within 10 minutes after retry
(2) When the fault reset signal is ON after the fault is detected
(3) Input power is turned OFF
75
Starting into a rotating motor - Tripless Operation
To start into a coasting motor without trip, use the speed search command or DC
injection braking at start.
• Speed search command
Speed matches into a coasting motor upon starting without stopping the motor.
This function enables smooth switching between motor commercial power supply
operation and inverter operation.
Set input terminal function selection (n36 to n39) to “14” (search command from
maximum output frequency) or “15” (search command from set frequency).
Build a sequence so that FWD (REV) run command is input at the same time as the
search command or after the search command. If the run command is input before
the search command, the search command becomes disabled.
• Time chart at search command input
• DC injection braking at start (n52, n54)

When starting into a coasting motor, use DC injection to gradually brake the motor
before beginning the acceleration ramp. Set the DC injection braking time at start
in n54 in units of 0.1 second. Set DC injection braking current in n52 in units of 1%
(inverter rated current = 100%). When the setting of n54 is “0”, DC injection
braking is not performed and acceleration starts from the minimum output
frequency.
When n52 is set to 0, acceleration starts from the minimum output frequency after
base blocking for n54 setting time.
76
Accel/Decel Hold
To hold acceleration or deceleration, use a multi-function input that is set to a value of
“16: Accel/Decel Hold. The output frequency is kept constant when the accel/decel
hold command is input during acceleration or deceleration.
When the run command is removed during an accel/decel hold condition, accel/decel
hold is internally released and operation ramps to stop.
Set multi-function input terminal selection (n36 to n39) to 16 (accel/decel hold
command).
Note: When the FWD (REV) run command is input along with the accel/decel hold com-
mand, the motor does not operate. However, when frequency reference lower limit
(n31) is set greater than or equal to minimum output frequency (n14), the motor
operates at frequency reference lower limit (n31).
77
Using a frequency meter or ammeter (n44)
Determines whether output frequency or output current is indicated on the analog
output terminals, AM-AC, for monitoring.
Setting Description
0 Output frequency
1 Output current
Initial setting-analog voltage of approx. 10V is output when output frequency (output
current) is 100%.
Calibrating frequency meter or ammeter (n045)

Used to adjust analog output gain.
Scales the analog output voltage signal level at 100% of output frequency (output
current).
Example: Frequency meter displays 0 to 60Hz with 0 to 3V.
10V x n45 setting (0.30V) = 3V (3V is output at 100% output frequency)
78
Reducing motor noise leakage current (n46)
Set inverter output transistor switching frequency (carrier frequency).
Audible Noise RFI Noise and
Setting Carrier Frequency (kHz)
from Motor Current Leakage
7 12 fout (Hz)
Higher Smaller
8 24 fout (Hz)
9 36 fout (Hz)
1 2.5 (kHz)
2 5.0 (kHz)
3 7.5 (kHz)
Not Larger
audible
4 10.0 (kHz)
Setting values 7, 8, or 9 provides a synchronous carrier frequency that changes with
output frequency as follows.
79
Carrier Frequency Varies According to Inverter Capacity (kVA).
Initial Setting Maximum
Reduced
Capacity Continuous
Voltage Class Carrier Current (A)
hp(kW) Setting Output Current
Frequency *1
(A)
0.13 (0.1) 4 10kHz 0.8
0.25 (0.2) 4 10kHz 1.6
–
200V 0.5 (0.4) 4 10kHz 3.0
Single-phase 1 (0.75) 4 10kHz 5.0
3-phase 2 (1.5) 3 7.5kHz 8.0 7.0
3 (2.2) 3 7.5kHz 11.0 10.0
5 (3.7) 3 7.5kHz 17.5 16.5
0.25 (0.2) 3 7.5kHz 1.2 1.0
0.5 (0.4) 3 7.5kHz 1.8 1.6
1 (0.75) 3 7.5kHz 3.4 3.0
400V
2 (1.5) 3 7.5kHz 4.8 4.0
3-phase
3 (2.2) 3 7.5kHz 5.5 4.8
4 (3.0) 3 7.5kHz 7.2 6.3
5 (3.7) 3 7.5kHz 9.2 7.6
(1) Reduce continuous output current by changing carrier frequency to a

setting of 4 (10 kHz) for 200V class inverters (size > 1.5kW) and all 400V
class inverters. Refer to the table above for the reduced current.
[Operation Condition]
• Input power supply voltage: 3-phase 200 to 230V (200V class)
Single-phase 200 to 240V (200V class)
3-phase 380 to 460V (400V class)
• Ambient temperature: 14 to 122 oF (-10 to +50oC)
(2) If the wiring distance is long (approx. 50 meters), reduce the inverter car-
rier frequency as described below.
Up to 50m Up to 100m More than 100m
Inverter and Motor
10kHz or less 5kHz or less
Carrier frequency 2.5kHz or less
(n46=1, 2, 3, 4, (n46=1, 2,
(n46 setting) (n46=1, 7, 8, 9)
7, 8, 9) 7, 8, 9)
(3) Carrier frequency can be automatically reduced to 2.5 kHz when (n75) is set
to 1 and the following conditions are satisfied.
Output frequency < 5Hz
Output frequency > 100%
Factory Setting (n75) is 0 (disabled)
80
Operator stop key selection (n06)
Selects whether the “STOP” key on the digital operator is effective when operating the
inverter by an external source (input terminals or serial communications).
Setting Description
STOP key effective when running either from multi-function input terminals or communications.
When STOP key is pressed, the inverter stops according to the setting of parameter n04. At this
0 time, the digital operator displays “ ” alarm (blinking). This stop command is held in the
inverter until both forward and reverse run commands are open, or until run command from
communications becomes zero.
STOP key is ineffective when running either from multi-function input terminals or
1
communications.
81
• Selecting Stopping Method
Selecting stopping method (n04)
Selects the stopping method when the run command is removed.
Setting Description
0 Deceleration to stop
1 Coast to stop
• Deceleration to stop (n04 =0)
* When frequency reference is changed during running.
Upon removal of the FWD (REV) run command, the motor decelerates at the decel rate
determined by the time set to decel time 1 (n17) and DC injection braking is applied
immediately before stop. DC injection braking is also applied when the motor
decelerates by setting the frequency reference lower than minimum output frequency
while the(n14) with FWD (REV) run command remains ON.
If the decel time is short or the load inertia is large, an over voltage (OV) fault may
occur during deceleration. In this case, increase the decel time.
82
• Coast to stop (n04=1)
* When frequency reference is changed during running.
Upon removal of the FWD (REV) run command, the motor starts coasting.
Applying DC injection braking

• DC injection braking current (n52)
Sets DC injection braking current level in units of 1%. (Inverter rated
current=100%)
• DC injection braking time at stop (n53)
Sets the DC injection braking time at stopping in units of 0.1 second. When the
setting of n53 is 0, DC injection braking is not performed but inverter output is shut
OFF at the timing of DC injection braking start.
When coast to a stop is selected as the stopping method selection (n04), DC injection
braking at stop does not operate.
83
• Building Interface Circuits with External Devices
Using input signals
Multi-function input terminal S2 to S5 functions can be changed when necessary by
setting parameters n36 thru n39 respectively. Parameters n36 thru n39 cannot be set to
the same value.
Setting Name Description Ref.
FWD/REV run command
0 (3 wire sequence selection) Setting enabled only for n37 85
Reverse run
2 (2 wire sequence selection) 65
3 External fault (NO contact input) Inverter stops by external fault signal input –
4 External fault (NC contact input) Digital operator display is EF!*. –
Resets the fault. Fault reset not
5 Fault Reset effective with the run signal ON. 75
6 Multi-step speed reference 1 65
10 JOG command 66
11 Accel/Decel time select 69
External baseblock Motor coast to a stop by this
12 (NO contact input) signal input. –
Digital operator display is
External baseblock
13 (NC contact input) –
Search command from

14 maximum frequency Speed search 76
15 Search command from reference signal 76
set frequency
16 Accel/decel hold command 77
17 LOCAL/REMOTE selection 61
Communication/control circuit
18 terminal selection 87
Emergency stop fault Inverter stops by emergency stop signal input
19 (NO contact input) –
according to stopping method selection (n04).
Emergency stop alarm When frequency coasting to a stop (n04 is set
20 (NO contact input) –
to 1) method is selected, inverter coasts to a
Emergency stop fault stop according to decel time setting 2 (n19).
21 –
Srp
(NC contact input)
Emergency stop alarm Digital operator display is
22 (NC contact input) (lit at fault, blinking at alarm).
–
Setting enabled only for
34 UP/DOWN command n39 (terminal S5) 86
Setting enabled only for
35 Self-test n39 (terminal S5) _
* Numbers 2 to 5 is displayed in !corresponding to the terminal numbers S2 to S5 respectively.
Fault Reset
Fault reset is not effective No. Terminal Initial Setting
with the run signal ON. n36 S2 2
n37 S3 5
n38 S4 3
n39 S5 6
84
Terminal function at 3-wire sequence selection
When 0 is set at the terminal S3 (n37), terminal S1 becomes run command, terminal S2
becomes stop command, and terminal S3 becomes FWD/REV run command.
• LOCAL/REMOTE select (setting: 17)

Select operation reference either by the digital operator or by the settings of
operation method selection (n02) and frequency reference selection (n03). LOCAL/
REMOTE select is available only during stop.
Open: Run according to the setting of run command selection (n02) or frequency
reference selection (n03)
Closed: Run by frequency reference and run command from the digital operator.
Example:Set n02 = 1, n03 = 2, n07 = 0.
Open: Run by frequency reference from multi-function input terminal FR and
run command from multi-function input terminals S1 to S7.
Closed: Run by volume frequency reference and run command from the digital
operator.
• UP/DOWN command (setting: 34)
With the FWD (REV) run command entered, accel/decel is initiated by inputting
the UP or DOWN commands to multi-function input terminals S4 and S5. Closing
the S4 input will cause the output frequency to increase. Closing the S5 input will
cause the output frequency to decrease (as indicated in the following table. When
UP/DOWN commands are specified by n39, any function set to n38 becomes
disabled; terminal S4 becomes an input terminal for the UP command and terminal
S5 for the DOWN command.
Multi-function Input Terminal
Closed Open Open Closed
S4 (UP command)
Multi-function Input Terminal
Open Closed Open Closed
S5 (DOWN command)
Operation Status Accel Decel Hold Hold
85
Time Chart at UP/DOWN Command Input
Notes:
(1) When UP/DOWN command is selected, the upper limit speed is set regardless of frequency
reference.
Upper limit speed = Maximum output frequency (n09)
x Frequency reference upper limit (n030)/100
(2) Lower limit value is either minimum output frequency (n14) or Maximum output frequency
(n09) x frequency reference lower limit (n31)/100% (whichever is greater).
(3) When the FWD (REV) run command is input, operation starts at the lower limit speed without an
UP/DOWN command.
(4) If the jog command is input while running by the UP/DOWN command, the jog command has
priority.
(5) Multi-step speed reference 1 to 3 is not effective when UP/DOWN command is selected. Multi-
step speed reference is effective during running in hold status.
(6) When “1” is set for HOLD output frequency memory selection (n62), output frequency can be
recorded during HOLD.
Setting Description
0 Output frequency is not recorded during HOLD.
When HOLD status is continued for 5 seconds or longer, the output frequency
1
during HOLD is recorded and the inverter restarts at the recorded frequency.
86
• Communication/multi-function input terminal selection input (setting: 18)
(This function is effective when option card is installed)
Operation can be changed from communication command, or from multi-function
input terminal or digital operator command.
Run command and frequency reference from communication options are effective
when multi-function input terminal for this setting is “closed.”
Run command and frequency reference in LOCAL/REMOTE mode are effective
when “Open.”
Using output signals (n40)
Multi-function output terminal MA and MB functions can be changed when necessary
by setting parameter n40.
• Terminal MA and MB functions: Set to n40
Setting Name Description Ref page
0 Fault Closed when inverter fault occurs. –
Closed when either FWD/REV command is input or
1 Inverter Run –
voltage is output from the inverter.
Closed when setting frequency agrees with inverter
2 Agreed frequency 88
output frequency.
Closed when inverter output frequency is less than
3 Zero speed –
minimum output frequency.
4 Frequency detection Output frequency ≥ frequency detection level (n58) 74
5 Frequency detection Output frequency ≤ frequency detection level (n58) 74
6 — 73
(NO contact output)
7 — 73
(NC contact output)
10 Minor Fault Closed when the alarm is indicated. –
11 Base blocked Closed when the inverter output is shut off. –
Closed when “LOCAL” is selected by LOCAL/REMOTE
12 Operation mode –
selection.
Closed when inverter fault is not detected, and
13 Inverter ready –
operation is ready.
14 Fault restart Closed during fault retry –
15 In UV Closed when undervoltage is detected. –
16 In reverse run Closed during reverse run. –
17 In speed search Closed when inverter conducts speed search. –
Operates multi-function output terminal independently
Data output from
18 from inverter operation (by MEMOBUS –
communication
communication).
87
Initial setting of multi-function output terminal
No. Terminals Initial Setting
n40 MA, MB 1 (Inverter Run)
+ 2HZ
OUTPUT FREQUENCY
88
• Setting Frequency by Current Reference Input
When setting frequency by inputting
current reference (4-20mA or 0-20mA)
from the control circuit terminal FR,
switch the DIP switch SW8 on the control
circuit board to “I” side.
SW8 is accessed by removing the
terminal cover.
SW8
Never input voltage reference to control circuit terminal FR

when DIP switch SW8 is switched to “I” side. Damage to the
inverter may result.
89
Current reference selection
After changing DIP switch (SW8) to the “I” side, PRESS PRGM on the digital
operator, then set the following parameters.
4-20mA…n03 = 3
0-20mA…n03 = 4
Press the digital operator keys to run or stop
the inverter. Switch run and stop direction by
setting F/R LED.
Set frequency by the analog current signal
[0-100% (max frequency)/4-20mA or 0-
20mA] connected to the control circuit
terminal.
Set run/stop and FWD/REV run with

switching device connected to the control
circuit terminal.
Multi-function input terminal S2 is set to
Reverse run/stop (n36 = 2).
Set frequency by the analog current signal
[0-100% (max. frequency)/4-20mA or 0-
20mA] connected to the control circuit
terminal.
Frequency reference gain (n41)/bias (n42) can be set even when current reference input
is selected. For details, refer to “Adjusting speed setting signal” on page 69.
90
• Preventing Motor from Stalling (Current Limit)
This function automatically limits the output current in response to load changes by
adjusting the output frequency to prevent motor stalling.
• Stall prevention (current limit) level during acceleration (n56)
Sets the stall prevention (current limit) level during acceleration in units of 1%
(Inverter rated current = 100%).
A setting of 200% disables the stall prevention (current limit) during acceleration.
During acceleration, if the output current exceeds the value set for n56, acceleration
stops and frequency is maintained. When the output current goes down to the value set
for n56, acceleration continues.
* Stops the acceleration to prevent the motor

from stalling.
† Release width (hysteresis) of stall prevention
during accel is approx. 5% of inverter rated
current.
*
In the constant horsepower area [output frequency > max. voltage output frequency
(n11)], following equation automatically decreases the stall prevention (current limit)
level during acceleration.
*Note: The lower limit of the stall prevention level is 40% of the level set in n56.
91
• Stall prevention (current limit) level during running (n57)
Sets the stall prevention (current limit) level during running in units of 1% (Inverter
current = 100%).
A setting of 200% disables the stall prevention (current limit) during running.
If the output current during speed agree exceeds the value set for n57 for longer than
100msec, deceleration starts.
As long as the output current exceeds the value set for n57 deceleration continues.
When the output current goes below the value set for n57, acceleration begins to the set
frequency.
The accel/decel rates during stall prevention are determined by the accel time (n16 or
n18) and decel time (n17 or n19) that is selected at the time of the stall prevention
condition.
* Decreases frequency to prevent the motor

from stalling.
† At acceleration start, output hysteresis is
approx. 5% of inverter rated current.
• Stall prevention (current limit) function during deceleration (n55)

To prevent overvoltage during deceleration, the inverter automatically lengthen the
deceleration time according to the value of main circuit DC voltage.
Stall prevention (current limit) during

Setting
deceleration
0 Provided
1 Not Provided
92
• Decreasing Motor Speed Fluctuation
Slip compensation
As the load becomes larger, rotor speed is reduced as motor slip increases. The slip
compensating function regulates the motor shaft speed as the load increases by
increasing the output frequency.
When inverter output current is equal to the motor rated current (n32), the
compensation frequency is added to the output frequency.
Compensation frequency = Motor rated slip (n64)
Output current – Motor no-load current n65

× --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Electronic thermal – Motor no-load current (n65)
reference current (n32)
× Slip compensation gain (n66)
Parameters
Parameters Initial
Name Unit Setting Range
No. Setting
n032 Motor rated current 0.1A 0 to 120% of inverter rated current *
n64 Motor rated slip 0.1Hz 0.0 to 20Hz *
n65 Motor no-load current 1% 0 to 99% (100% = Motor rated current n32) *
n66 Slip compensation gain 0.1 0.0 to 2.5 0.0
Slip compensation primary 0.0 to 25.5s

n67 0.1s 2.0s
delay time When 0.0s is set, delay time becomes 2.0s
* Differs depending on inverter capacity.
Notes:1. Slip compensation is not performed in the following condition:
Output frequency < minimum output frequency (n14).
2. Slip compensation is not performed during regeneration.
3. Slip compensation is not performed when motor rated current (n32) is set to 0.0A.
93
• Motor Protection
Motor overload detection
Built-in electronic thermal overload protection is provided to protect against motor
overheating.
• Motor rated current (electronic thermal reference current, n32)
Set to the rated current value shown on the motor nameplate.
• Motor overload protection selection (n33, n34).
n33 Setting Electronic Thermal Characteristics

0 Applied to general-purpose motor (limited speed range)
1 Applied to inverter duty motor (wide speed range)
2 Electronic thermal overload protection not provided
Parameters
Name Unit Setting Range Initial Setting
No.
Protection parameter
n34 1min 1 to 60min 8min
selection
The electronic thermal overload function calculates motor temperature, based on
inverter output current and time, to protect the motor from overheating. When the
electronic thermal overload relay is enabled and excessive current is flowing to the
motor, an “ ” error occurs, shutting OFF the inverter output and preventing
excessive overheating in the motor. When operating with one inverter connected to one
motor, an external thermal relay is not needed. When operating several motors with
one inverter, install a thermal relay on each motor and disable the electronic overload
protection (n33=2).
94
• General-purpose motor and inverter motor
Induction motors are classified as general-purpose motors (limited speed range) or
inverter motors (wide speed range), based on their cooling capabilities. Therefore,
the motor overload function operates differently between these two motor types.
Example of 200V class motor

Electronic Thermal
Cooling Effect Torque Characteristics
overload
Effective when operated error (motor
at 50/60Hz from
overload protection)
commercial power
occurs when
supply
continuously operated at
50/60Hz or less at 100%
load.
General-purpose Motor
Base Frequency 60Hz

(V/f for 60Hz, 220V Input Voltage)
For low-speed operation, torque must be

limited in order to stop motor temperature
rise.
Effective even when Electronic thermal
operated at low speed overload protection not
(approx. 6Hz) activated even when
continuously operated at
50/60Hz or less at 100%
load.
Inverter Duty Motor
Base Frequency 60Hz

(V/f for 60Hz, 220V Input Voltage)
Use an inverter duty motor for continuous

operation at low speed.
95
• Selecting Cooling Fan Operation
In order to increase fan life, the cooling fan can be set to operate when inverter is
running or when power is supplied.
n35 = 0 (factory setting) : Operates only when inverter is running.
(Continues operation for 1 minute after
inverter is stopped.)
=1 : Operates while power is ON.
• Using MEMOBUS (MODBUS) Communications

Serial transmission is available with VS mini J7 using programmable controller
(MEMOCON series) and MEMOBUS. In order to perform serial communications, RS-
485/422 interface card (optional) must be installed.
• MEMOBUS (MODBUS) communications
MEMOBUS system is composed of a single master (PLC) and slaves (1 to 31
VS-mini units).
Transmission between master and slave (serial communication) is controlled
according to the master program with the master initiating communication and the
slave responding.
The master sends a signal to one slave at a time. Each slave has a pre-registered
address No., and the master specifies the number and conducts signal
communication. The slave receives the transmission to carry out designated
functions and reply to the master.
VS mini J7 VS mini J7 VS mini J7
96
• Communications specifications
Interface RS-422, RS485
Synchronization Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Communication Baud rate: Selected from 2400/4800/9600/19200 bps
parameters Data length: 8 bits fixed
Parity: Selected from even/odd/none
Stop bits: 1 bit fixed
Communication
MEMOBUS (MODBUS) (RTU mode only)
protocol
Max. number of
inverters that
31 units (When using RS-485)
can be
connected
97
Notes
98
8. Maintenance and Inspection
• Periodical Inspection
Periodically inspect the inverter as described in the following table to prevent accidents
and to ensure high performance with high-reliability.
Location to Check Check For Solution
Terminal, unit mounting Connection hardware is properly
Properly seat and tighten hardware.
screws, etc. seated and securely tightened.
Blow with dry compressed air:
Cooling fins Built up dust, dirt, and debris 39.2 X 104 to 58.8 X 104 Pa, 57 to 85 psi (4
to 6kg / cm2) pressure.
Blow with dry compressed air:
39.2 X 104 to 58.8 X 104 Pa, 57 to 85 psi (4
Accumulation of conductive
Printed circuit board to 6kg / cm2) pressure.
material or oil mist
If dust or oil cannot be removed, replace the
inverter unit.
Power elements and
Abnormal odor or discoloration Replace the inverter unit.
smoothing capacitor
Abnormal noise or vibration.
Cooling fan Cumulative operation time Replace the cooling fan.
exceeding 20,000 hours.
• Part Replacement
Inverter’s maintenance periods are noted below. Keep them as reference.
Part Replacement Guidelines

Part Standard Replacement Period Replacement Method
Cooling fan 2 to 3 years Replace with new part.
Replace with new part.
Smoothing capacitor 5 years
(Determine need by inspection).
Breaker relays — Determine need by inspection.
Fuses 10 years Replace with new part.
Electrolytic capacitors on Replace with new board. (Determine need
5 years
PCBs by inspection).
Note: Usage conditions are as follows:
• Ambient temperature: Yearly average of 30°C.
• Load factor: 80% max.
• Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day.
99
Replacement of cooling fan
• Inverter having W-dimension (width) 2.68 inches (68mm)
1. Removal
(1) Press the right and left tabs of the fan
cover inward (direction 1), and then pull
them outward (direction 2) to remove the
fan assembly from the inverter unit.
(2) Carefully pull the wiring in (direction 3)
from the fan cover rear face, and remove
the protective tube and connector.
(3) Open the left and right sides of the fan
cover to remove the cooling fan from the
cover.
2. Mounting
(1) Mount the cooling fan to the fan cover.
The arrow indicating the air flow direction
of the cooling fan must be pointing away
from the cover.
(2) Connect the connector and mount the pro-
tective tube firmly. Mount the connector
joint section on the fan cover rear face.
(3) Mount the fan cover on the inverter. Be
sure to snap-in the right and left tabs of
the fan cover on the cooling fin.
AIR FLOW DIRECTION
100
• Inverter having W-dimension (width) 108mm (4.25 inches)
1. Removal
(1) Remove the front cover and terminal
cover, and then remove the cooling fan
connector (CN10).
(2) Press the right and left tabs of the fan
cover inward (direction 1), and pull the
fan cover downward (direction 2) to
remove it from the inverter unit. Pull out
the wiring from the cable lead-in hole at
the bottom of the plastic case.
(3) Open the right and left sides of the fan
cover to remove the cover from the cool-
ing fan.
2. Mounting
(1) Mount the cooling fan to the fan cover.
The arrow mark indicating the air flow
direction must point away from the cover.
(2) Mount the fan cover on the inverter. Be
sure to snap-in the right and left tabs of
the fan cover on the cooling fin. Lead in
the wiring from the cable lead-in hole at
the bottom of the plastic case to the inside
of the inverter.
(3) Connect the wiring to the cooling fan con-
nector (CN10) and mount the front cover
and the terminal cover.
101
NOTES
102
9. Fault Diagnosis and Corrective Actions
This section describes the alarm and fault displays, explanations for fault conditions
and corrective actions to be taken if the VS mini J7 malfunctions.
< Corrective Actions for models without digital operator >

1. Input fault reset or cycle the power supply OFF and ON.
2. When a fault cannot be corrected:
Turn the power supply OFF and check the wiring and control logic.
103
< Corrective Actions of Models with Digital Operator >
: ON : Blinking : OFF
Alarm Display and Contents

Alarm Display
Inverter Causes and
Digital RUN ALARM Explanation
Status Corrective Actions
Operator (Green) (Red)
UV (Main circuit low voltage) Check the following:
Main circuit DC voltage drops • Power supply
below the low-voltage voltage
detection level while the • Main circuit power
inverter output is OFF. supply wiring is
200V: Main circuit DC voltage connected.
become lowered below • Terminal screws are
approx. 200V (160V for securely tightened.
Blinking single phase)
400V:Main circuit DC voltage
become lowered below
approx. 400V.
OV (Main circuit over voltage) Check the power

Main circuit DC voltage supply voltage.
exceeds the over voltage
Warning
detection level while the
inverter output is OFF.
Fault contacts
Blinking Detection level: approx. 410V
do not change
or more (approx. 820V for
state.
400V class).
OH (Cooling fin overheat) Check the intake air
Intake air temperature rises temperature.
while the inverter output is
OFF.
Blinking
CAL (MEMOBUS Check communication

communications waiting) devices and
Correct data has not been transmission signals.
received from the PLC when
the parameters n02
(operation command
Blinking selection) is 2 or n03
(frequency reference
selection) is 6, and power is
turned ON.
104
Alarm Display
Inverter Causes and
OP! (parameters setting Check the setting
error when the parameters values.
setting is performed through
the MEMOBUS
communications)
OP1: Two or more values are
set for multi-function
input selection.
(parameters n36 to
n39)
OP2: Relationship among
V / f parameters is not
correct.
(parameters n09, n11,
n12, n14)
OP3: Setting value of motor
rated current exceeds
Blinking 120% of inverter rated
current. (parameter
n32)
Warning OP4: Upper/lower limit of
frequency reference is
Fault contacts reversed. (parameters
do not change n30, n31)
state. OP5: Setting values of jump
frequencies 1 and 2 are
not appropriate.
(parameters n49 to
n50)
OP9: Carrier frequency
setting is incorrect.
(parameter n46)
OL 3 (Over torque detection) Reduce the load and
Motor current exceeded the expand the accel/decel
preset value in parameter time.
n98.
Blinking
SER (Sequence error) Check the external

Inverter receives LOCAL/ circuit (sequence).
REMOTE select command or
communication/control circuit
terminal changing signals
Blinking from the multi-function
terminal while the inverter is
outputting.
105
Alarm Display
Inverter Causes and
BB (External base block) Check the external
Baseblock command at multi- circuit (sequence).
function terminal is active.
The inverter output is shut
OFF (motor coasting).
Blinking Temporary condition is
cleared when input command
is removed.
EF (Simultaneous FWD/REV Check the external
run commands) circuit (sequence).
When FWD and REV run
commands are
simultaneously input for over
Blinking
500ms, the inverter stops
according to parameter n04.
STP (Operator function stop) Open FWD/REV
STOP/RESET is pressed command of control
Warning during running by the control circuit terminals.
circuit terminals FWD/REV
or Fault contacts command, or by the run
do not change command from
state. communications. The inverter
stops according to parameter
Blinking n04. Check the external
STP (Emergency stop) circuit (sequence).
Inverter receives emergency
stop alarm signal. Inverter
stops according to parameter
n04.
FAN (Cooling fan fault) Check the following:
Cooling fan is locked. • Cooling fan
• Cooling fan wiring is
not connected.
Blinking
CE (MEMOBUS Check the

communications fault) communication devices
or communication
signals.
Blinking
106
Alarm Display
Inverter Causes and
OC (Over current) • Short circuit or
Inverter output current grounding at inverter
momentarily exceeds approx. output side.
200% of rated current. • Excessive load GD2
(Control power supply fault) • Extremely rapid
Voltage fault of control power accel/decel time
supply is detected. (parameters n19 to
n22)
• Special motor used
Starting motor during
coasting
• Motor of a capacity
greater than the
inverter rating has
been started.
• Magnetic contactor
open/closed at the
inverter output side.
GF (Ground fault) Ground • Check the motor
fault current at the inverter insulation.
output exceeded inverter • Check that the
rated current. connection between
inverter and motor is
not damaged.
Protective OV (Main circuit over voltage) • Insufficient decel

Operation Main circuit DC voltage time (parameters
exceeds the overfatigue n20 and n22)
Output is shut detection level because of • Lowering of
OFF and motor excessive regenerative overhauling load
coasts to a energy from the motor. (elevator, etc.)
stop. Detection level: ⇓
200V: Stops at main circuit • Increase decel time.
DC voltage below
approx. 410V
400V: Stops at main circuit
DC voltage approx.
820V or more
UV1 (Main circuit low voltage) • Reduction of input
Main circuit DC voltage drops power supply voltage
below the low voltage • Open phase of input
detection level while the supply
inverter output is ON. • Occurrence of
200V: Stops at main circuit momentary power
DC voltage below loss
approx. 200V (160V for ⇓
single phase) Check the following:
400V: Stops at main circuit • Power supply
DC voltage approx. voltage
400V or more • Main circuit power
supply wiring is
connected.
• Terminal screws are
securely tightened.
107
Alarm Display
Inverter Causes and
OH (Cooling fin overheat) • Excessive load

Temperature rise because of • Improper V/f pattern
inverter overload operation or setting
intake air temperature rise. • Insufficient axel time
if the fault occurs
during acceleration.
• Intake air
temperature
exceeding 122°F
(50°C)
• Calling fan stops
⇓
Check the following:
• Load size
• V/f pattern setting
(parameters n11 to
n17)
Protective • Intake air
Operation temperature
OL1 (Motor overload) • Check the load size
Output is shut
Motor overload protection or V/f pattern setting
OFF and motor
operates by built-in electronic (parameters n09 to
coasts to a
thermal overload relay. n15)
stop.
• Set the motor rated
current shown on the
nameplate by
parameter n36.
OL2 (Inverter overload) • Check the load size
Inverter overload protection or V/f pattern setting
operates by built-in electronic (parameters n09 to
thermal overload relay. n15)
• Check the inverter
capacity.
OL3 (Over torque detection) Check the driven
Inverter output current machine and correct
exceeded the preset value in the cause of the fault,
parameter n60. or increase the value of
When over torque is detected, parameter n60 up to
inverter performs operation the highest value
according to the preset setting allowed for the
of parameter n59. machine.
108
Alarm Display
Inverter Causes and
EF! Check the external
(External fault) circuit (sequence).
Inverter receives an external
fault input from control circuit
terminal.
EF0: External fault reference
through MEMOBUS
communications
EF2: External fault input
command from control
circuit terminal S2
circuit terminal S3
circuit terminal S4
circuit terminal S5
Protective
Operation
Output is shut
OFF and motor
coasts to a
stop.
CPF-00 Cycle power.

Initial memory fault is If the fault remains,
detected. replace the digital
operator or inverter.
CPF-01 Cycle power. If the fault

ROM error is detected. remains, replace the
digital operator or
inverter.
CPF-04 • Record all parameter

EEPROM fault of inverter data and initialize the
control circuit is detected. parameters. (Refer
to page 25 for
parameter
initialization)
• Cycle power.
If the fault remains,
replace the inverter.
109
Alarm Display
Inverter Causes and
CPF-05 Cycle power.
AD converter fault is detected If the fault remains,
replace the inverter.
CPF-06 Remove power to the

• Option card connecting inverter.
Protective fault Check the connection
Operation • A non-corresponding option of the digital operator.
card is connected. Verify inverter software
Output is shut number (n179).
OFF and motor CPF-07 Cycle power. If the fault
coasts to a Operator control circuit remains, replace the
stop. (EEPROM or AD converter) digital operator or
fault inverter.
CE (MEMOBUS Check the
communications fault) communication devices
Normal reception of or communication
communication data is not signals.
possible.
STP (Emergency stop) Check the external
The inverter stops according circuit (sequence).
to parameter n04 after
or receiving the emergency stop
fault signal.
Stops
according to • Insufficient power supply Check the following:
parameter. voltage • Power supply
• Control power supply fault voltage.
• Hardware fault • Main circuit power
— supply wiring is
(OFF) connected.
• Terminal screws are
securely tightened.
• Control sequence.
Replace the inverter.
For display/clear of fault history, refer to page 29.
110
Appendix - CE Conformance
CE Conformance - Low Voltage Directive (LVD) Compliance
• These circuits are hazardous and are separated from accessibility by protective
separation.
‚ These circuits are not separated from hazardous circuits by protective
separation, but only with basic insulation. These circuits cannot be accessed and
must not be interconnected with any circuits which are accessible, unless they
are isolated from accessible circuits by supplemental insulation. These circuits
can be connected only to the following circuits:
30VDC or less (overvoltage category 2)
250 VAC or less (overvoltage category 2)
ƒ These circuits are not separated from hazardous circuits by protective
separation, but only with basic insulation. These circuits cannot be accessed and
must not be interconnected with any circuits which are accessible, unless they
are isolated from accessible circuits by supplemental insulation.
111
CE Conformance - Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Compliance
In order to conform to EMC standards, exclusive-use methods are required for line
filter application, cable shielding and inverter installation. An outline of the methods
follows.
The line filter and the inverter must be mounted on the same metal plate. The filter
should be mounted as close to the inverter as practical. Keep cable as short as possible.
The metal plate should be securely grounded. The ground of the line filter and inverter
must be bonded to the metal plate with as much area as possible.
For line power input cable, screened cable is recommended at least within the panel.
The screen of the cable should be connected to a solid ground. For the motor cable,
screened cable (max. 20m) must be used and the screen of the motor cable is connected
to ground at both ends by a short connection, using as large an area as practical.
For a more detailed explanation, please refer to Making YASKAWA Inverter Products
Conform with EMC Directive (G-TI#99012-V7).
The following table and figures show the line filter list for EMC standards and the
installation/wiring of inverter and line filter.
Line Filter List for EMC Conformance
Recommended Line Filters for VS mini J7 made by Rasmi Electronics Ltd

(200V single phase)
Current Weight Dimension

VS mini J7 Model
(A) (kg) W×D×H
CIMR-J7AUB0P1
CIMR-J7AUB0P2 RS 1010-J7 10 0.6 71 x 45 x 169
CIMR-J7AUB0P4
CIMR-J7AUB0P7 RS 1020-J7 20 1.0 111 x 50 x 169
CIMR-J7AUB1P5
CIMR-J7AUB2P2 RS 1030-J7 30 1.1 144 x 50 x 174
CIMR-J7AUB3P7 RS 1040-J7 40 1.2 174 x 50 x 174
Rated Voltage: AC 250V single phase

Ambient Temperature: 40°C (max.)
112
Recommended Line Filters for VS mini J7 made by Rasmi Electronic Ltd
(200 V three phase)

VS mini J7 Model
(A) (kg) W×D×H
CIMR-J7AU20P1
CIMR-J7AU20P2 RS 2010-J7 10 0.8 82 x 50 x 194
CIMR-J7AU20P4
CIMR-J7AU20P7
CIMR-J7AU21P5 RS 2020-J7 16 1.0 111 x 50 x 169
CIMR-J7AU22P2
CIMR-J7AU23P7 RS 2030-J7 26 1.1 144 x 50 x 174
Rated Voltage: AC 250V three phase

Recommended Line Filters for VS mini J7 made by Rasmi Electronic Ltd

(400 V three phase)

VS Mini J7 Model
(A) (kg) W×D×H
CIMR-J7AU40P2 RS 3005-J7 5 1.0 111 x 45 x 169
CIMR-J7AU40P4
CIMR-J7AU40P7
CIMR-J7AU41P5 RS 3010-J7 10 1.0 111 x 45 x 169
CIMR-J7AU42P2
CIMR-J7AU43P7 RS 3020-J7 20 1.1 144 x 50 x 174
Rated Voltage: AC 480V three phase

113
Installation of Line Filter and Inverter VS mini J7 (CIMR-J7 ¨¨20P1 to 23 P7)
L1 L2 L3 P E
Shield
Cable
Control Panel
Rasmi
RFI
Filter
L1 L2 L3
E
R S T
VS mini Ground
J7 Bonds
(remove
any
paint)
U V W
Shield
Cable
Ground Bonds
(remove any paint)
Max.20m
Motor Cable
1M
3-Ph
114
Installation of Line Filter and Inverter VS mini J7 (CIMR-J7 ¨¨B0P1 to B1P5)
L N P E
Shield
Cable
Control Panel
Metal
Rasmi Mounting
RFI Plate
Filter
L N
E
R S
Ground
VS mini Bonds
J7 (remove
any
paint)
U V W
Shield
Cable
Ground Bonds
(remove any paint)
Max.20m
Motor Cable
1M
3-Ph
115
Safety Warnings and Operating Information for Inverters
Introduction
Depending on their protection rating configuration, parts of inverters can have live, uninsulated and
hot surfaces during operation. If housing components, the control unit or terminal covers are
removed, incorrect installation and operation can lead to serious injuries and damage to other
installations. It is thus absolutely essential to observe all the warnings and instructions in the
operating manual. Installation, setup and maintenance should only be performed by properly
qualified staff. IEC 364 / Cenelec HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IEC 664 or DIN VDE. The
applicable national safety and accident prevention regulations must also be observed.) For the
purpose of observance of the safety requirement qualified staff are defined as individuals who are
familiar with the installation, setup and operation of the converters and who have the proper
qualifications for this work.
Proper use for intended purpose

Inverters are designed for installation in electrical systems or machines. A converter installed in a
machine may only be activated if the machine conforms to the provisions of EU directive 89/392/
EEC (machine directives). EN 60204 must also be observed. The converter may also only be operated
if the requirements of the EMC directive (89/336/EEC) are also satisfied. This frequency converter
conforms to the requirements of the low voltage directive, 73/23/EEC. The harmonized standards of
the prEN 50178/DIN VDE 0160 series have been applied, in combination with EN 660439-1 / VDE
06600 Part 500 and EN 60146 / VDE 0558. The specifications on the ratings plate and the
specifications and connection requirements described in the documentation must be observed at all
times.
Transportation and storage

All instructions for transport, storage and proper handling must be observed. Climatic and
environmental conditions must conform to the requirements of prEN 50178.
Installation
The converters must be installed and cooled in compliance with the regulations outlines and referred
to in the documentation. The cooling air flow direction is an important requirement that must be
observed. This means that the unit may only be installed and operated in the specified orientation (e.g.
upright). All distances specified must also be observed. The converters must be protected against
excessive stresses. No components may be bent and no distances required for proper insulation may
be changed. To prevent the risk of static electricity damage never touch electronic components or
contacts.
Electrical connections
All national safety regulations (e.g. VBG 4) must be observed when working on live equipment. The
electrical installation of the units must conform to the applicable regulations. For further information
please refer to the documentation. In particular, please take care to observe all installation instructions
regarding proper EMC immunity, e.g. for shielding, earthing, location of filters and cable routing.
This also applies for equipment with CE approvals. Compliance with the EMC legislation limits is the
responsibility of the machine or system manufacturer.
RCCBs
For information on the use of RCCBs with inverters please contact your supplier or Yaskawa
representative.
Operation
In some systems it may be necessary to install additional monitoring and protective facilities to
comply with the applicable safety and accident prevention regulations. The only changes permitted
are to the operator software of the inverters. Please note that the capacitors can remain charged for up
to around 5 minutes after the frequency converter has been disconnected from the power supply. You
should thus always wait for a short period before opening the unit and touching the electrical
connections.
116
EU Manufacturer’s Declaration
Products
Static inverter, series VS mini J7
Scope
YASKAWA inverters are components (BDM*, defined by IEC 22g/21CDV) designed exclusively
for installation in machines or systems (end products) by qualified re-users (e.g. mechanical
engineering manufacturers).
Responsibility
As a component manufacturer we are responsible for the provision of installation instructions. These
can be found in the installation guidelines publication G-TI#99012-V7 (a Yaskawa publication free
upon request).
Our products have been tested by authorized bodies pursuant to the requirements of the standard
listed below. The products conform to these standards listed below. The products conform to these
standards listed below. The products conform to these standards, subject to due and proper
observation of the installation instructions provided in section 10 of this manual:
Immunity - EMC resistance pursuant to EN50082-2 (1995)
ENV50204 (1995)
EN61000-4-2 (1996)
EN61000-4-4 (1995)
EN61000-4-6 (1996)
EN61000-4-8 (1994)
Emission - EMC interference emissions pursuant to EN500081-2 (1993)
EN55011 (1991) Class B Group 1

Up to 10m motor cable
Class A Group 1
Up to 20m motor cable
YASKAWA Electric Europe GmbH

Am Kronberger Hang 2
65824 Schwalbach am Taunus
Germany
Always observe all the safety instructions provided in this product documentation!
*AdÜ: Abkürzung bitte kontrollieren.
117
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
Chicago-Corporate Headquarters2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone: (847) 887-7000 Fax: (847) 887-7310 Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com
MOTOMAN INC.
805 Liberty Lane, West Carrollton, OH 45449, U.S.A.
Phone: (937) 847-6200 Fax: (937) 847-6277
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
New Pier Takeshiba South Tower, 1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo, 105-0022, Japan
Phone: 81-3-5402-4511 Fax: 81-3-5402-4580 Internet: http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTDA.
Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Bairro Saude Sao Paolo-SP, Brasil CEP: 04304-000
Phone: 55-11-5071-2552 Fax: 55-11-5581-8795 E-mail: yaskawabrasil@originet.com.br
YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH
Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany
Phone: 49-6196-569-300 Fax: 49-6196-888-301 Internet: http://www.yaskawa.de
MOTOMAN ROBOTICS AB
Box 504 S38525, Torsas, Sweden
Phone: 46-486-48800 Fax: 46-486-41410
MOTOMAN ROBOTEC GmbH
Kammerfeldstraβe 1, 85391 Allershausen, Germany
Phone: 49-8166-900 Fax: 49-8166-9039
YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.
1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, Scotland, United Kingdom
Phone: 44-12-3673-5000 Fax: 44-12-3645-8182
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
Paik Nam Bldg. 901 188-3, 1-Ga Euljiro, Joong-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Phone: 82-2-776-7844 Fax: 82-2-753-2639
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
Head Office:151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park Singapore 556741, SINGAPORE
Phone: 65-282-3003 Fax: 65-289-3003
TAIPEI OFFICE (AND YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION)
10F 146 Sung Chiang Road, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone: 886-2-2563-0010 Fax: 886-2-2567-4677
YASKAWA JASON (HK) COMPANY LIMITED
Rm. 2909-10, Hong Kong Plaza, 186-191 Connaught Road West, Hong Kong
Phone: 852-2803-2385 Fax: 852-2547-5773
BEIJING OFFICE
Room No. 301 Office Building of Beijing International Club,
21 Jianguomanwai Avenue, Beijing 100020, China
Phone: 86-10-6532-1850 Fax: 86-10-6532-1851
SHANGHAI OFFICE
27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China
Phone: 86-21-6553-6600 Fax: 86-21-6531-4242
SHANGHAI YASKAWA-TONJI M & E CO., LTD.
27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China
Phone: 86-21-6533-2828 Fax: 86-21-6553-6677
BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO., LTD.
30 Xue Yuan Road, Haidian, Beijing 100083 China
Phone: 86-10-6232-9943 Fax: 86-10-6234-5002
SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO., LTD.
7, Yongchang-North Street, Beijing Economic & Technological Development Area,
Beijing 100076 China
Phone: 86-10-6788-0551 Fax: 86-10-6788-2878
Yaskawa Electric America, Inc., November 1999 YEA-TOA-S606-12 Printed In U.S.A.

Heinen & Hopman AC - MV - C& F Part 1 - 2 Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Heinen & Hopman AC - MV - C& F Part 1 - 2 Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Phone +31 (0)33 299 25 00

Project: YN552016/17 PSV4500

Heinen & Hopman ref.: 120.10.045-046zg

Revision Name Date Checked Date

All our quotations, all or-

dam, as stipulated in the

010 - AIRCONDITIONING ...............................................................3

020 - COOLEQUIPMENT ................................................................9

030 - MECHANICAL VENTILATION.............................................11

050 - VENTILATION OPENINGS ..................................................36

070 - COOL & FREEZE.................................................................37

071 - FREEZER AND COLD STORES. ........................................39

160 - EP NOTATION REQUIRED EQUIPMENT. ..........................40

System AC-1 serving accommodation area’s.

010-1 1 Airhandlingunit, consisting of a filtersection, coolingsection with watereliminator and drip-

Switchboard and cabling delivery yard.

Specified the maintypes with their corresponding diameters:

• PR-10 innertube 100 mm, outertube 132 mm

010-10 3 Recirculationgrid to be mounted in the accommodation’s wall and/or ceiling.

010-14 3 Overpressuregrid to be mounted in the accommodation’s wall and/or ceiling.

System AC-2.1 serving Engine Control Room SB.

010-16 2 Split-up marine airconditioning-unit consisting of a compressor, fresh watercooled con-

Units to be combined into one unit. One unit acting as stand-by.

010-19 1 Airsupply grid mounted into the duct.

System AC-2.2 serving Engine Control Room PS.

010-20 2 Split-up marine airconditioning-unit consisting of a compressor, fresh watercooled con-

Units to be combined into one unit. One unit acting as stand-by.

010-23 1 Airsupply grid mounted into the duct.

System AC-3 serving Wheelhouse.

010-24 1 Airhandlingunit, consisting of a filtersection, coolingsection (double inter-weaven circuit)

Switchboard and cabling delivery yard.

The louvres are placed in the wheelhouse.

Specified the maintypes with their corresponding diameters:

• PR-10 innertube 100 mm, outertube 132 mm

• Dimensions 300x200 mm (WxH)

010-29 1 Volume control damper to adjust the amount of fresh-air of AC-3

010-30 ±4 Recirculationgrid to be mounted in the accommodation’s wall and/or ceiling.

• Compressor-make Bitzer or equal

1. Necessary refrigerant piping on the unit.

The unit is excluded of any wiring, cabling and starters.

• Compressor-make Bitzer or equal

18.Necessary refrigerant piping on the unit.

The unit is excluded of any wiring, cabling and starters.

030 - Mechanical ventilation

System S-1/S-2 serving Engine Room

030-1 2 Axial flow fan, marine design.

Specified the maintypes with their corresponding diameters:

• R-40 innertube 400 mm

System S-3 serving Bowthruster Room.

030-5 1 Axial flow fan, marine design.

System S-4 serving Generator Room.

030-7 1 Axial flow fan, marine design.

030-8 1 Gauze-grid to be placed directly on SALOR HU-type axial fans.

System S-5 serving corridor Propulsion Room.

Specified the maintypes with their corresponding diameters:

• R-10 innertube 100 mm

System S-6 serving Propulsion Room.

030-11 1 Axial flow fan, marine design.

030-12 1 Gauze-grid to be placed directly on SALOR HU-type axial fans.

System S-7 serving Engine Room Office.

010-14 2 Sound attenuating damper to be placed in the overpressure-duct and supply-duct.

010-16 2 Grid to be mounted in the wall or ceiling.